* doc/ttk_Geometry.3, doc/ttk_Theme.3, doc/ttk_button.n:

	* doc/ttk_checkbutton.n, doc/ttk_combobox.n, doc/ttk_dialog.n:
	* doc/ttk_entry.n, doc/ttk_frame.n, doc/ttk_image.n:
	* doc/ttk_intro.n, doc/ttk_label.n, doc/ttk_labelframe.n:
	* doc/ttk_menubutton.n, doc/ttk_notebook.n, doc/ttk_panedwindow.n:
	* doc/ttk_progressbar.n, doc/ttk_radiobutton.n, doc/ttk_scrollbar.n:
	* doc/ttk_separator.n, doc/ttk_sizegrip.n, doc/ttk_style.n:
	* doc/ttk_treeview.n, doc/ttk_widget.n,:
	* generic/ttk/ttk.decls, generic/ttk/ttkBlink.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkButton.c, generic/ttk/ttkCache.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkClamTheme.c, generic/ttk/ttkClassicTheme.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkDecls.h, generic/ttk/ttkDefaultTheme.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkElements.c, generic/ttk/ttkEntry.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkFrame.c, generic/ttk/ttkImage.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkInit.c, generic/ttk/ttkLabel.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkLayout.c, generic/ttk/ttkManager.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkManager.h, generic/ttk/ttkNotebook.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkPanedwindow.c, generic/ttk/ttkProgress.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkScale.c, generic/ttk/ttkScroll.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkScrollbar.c, generic/ttk/ttkSeparator.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkSquare.c, generic/ttk/ttkState.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkStubInit.c, generic/ttk/ttkStubLib.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkTagSet.c, generic/ttk/ttkTheme.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkTheme.h, generic/ttk/ttkThemeInt.h:
	* generic/ttk/ttkTrace.c, generic/ttk/ttkTrack.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkTreeview.c, generic/ttk/ttkWidget.c:
	* generic/ttk/ttkWidget.h:
	* library/demos/ttk_demo.tcl, library/demos/ttk_iconlib.tcl:
	* library/demos/ttk_repeater.tcl:
	* library/ttk/altTheme.tcl, library/ttk/aquaTheme.tcl:
	* library/ttk/button.tcl, library/ttk/clamTheme.tcl:
	* library/ttk/classicTheme.tcl, library/ttk/combobox.tcl:
	* library/ttk/cursors.tcl, library/ttk/defaults.tcl:
	* library/ttk/dialog.tcl, library/ttk/entry.tcl:
	* library/ttk/fonts.tcl, library/ttk/icons.tcl:
	* library/ttk/keynav.tcl, library/ttk/menubutton.tcl:
	* library/ttk/notebook.tcl, library/ttk/panedwindow.tcl:
	* library/ttk/progress.tcl, library/ttk/scale.tcl:
	* library/ttk/scrollbar.tcl, library/ttk/sizegrip.tcl:
	* library/ttk/treeview.tcl, library/ttk/ttk.tcl:
	* library/ttk/utils.tcl, library/ttk/winTheme.tcl:
	* library/ttk/xpTheme.tcl:
	* macosx/ttkMacOSXTheme.c:
	* tests/ttk/all.tcl, tests/ttk/bwidget.test, tests/ttk/combobox.test:
	* tests/ttk/entry.test, tests/ttk/image.test:
	* tests/ttk/labelframe.test, tests/ttk/layout.test:
	* tests/ttk/misc.test, tests/ttk/notebook.test:
	* tests/ttk/panedwindow.test, tests/ttk/progressbar.test:
	* tests/ttk/scrollbar.test, tests/ttk/treetags.test:
	* tests/ttk/treeview.test, tests/ttk/ttk.test, tests/ttk/validate.test:
	* win/ttkWinMonitor.c, win/ttkWinTheme.c, win/ttkWinXPTheme.c:
	First import of Ttk themed Tk widgets as branched from tile 0.7.8

	* generic/tkInt.h, generic/tkWindow.c: add Ttk_Init call, copy
	tk classic widgets to ::tk namespace.
	* library/tk.tcl: add source of ttk/ttk.tcl, define $::ttk::library.
	* unix/Makefile.in, win/Makefile.in: add Ttk build bits
	* win/configure, win/configure.in: check for uxtheme.h (XP theme).

37 files changed, 22960 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttk.decls b/generic/ttk/ttk.decls
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64820cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttk.decls
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+#
+# $Id: ttk.decls,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+#
+
+library 	ttk
+interface 	ttk
+epoch  		0
+scspec		TTKAPI
+
+declare 0 current {
+    Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name);
+}
+declare 1 current {
+    Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+}
+declare 2 current {
+    Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+}
+declare 3 current {
+    Ttk_Theme Ttk_CreateTheme(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, Ttk_Theme parent);
+}
+declare 4 current {
+    void Ttk_RegisterCleanup(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp, void *deleteData, Ttk_CleanupProc *cleanupProc);
+}
+
+declare 5 current {
+    int Ttk_RegisterElementSpec(
+	Ttk_Theme theme, 
+	const char *elementName,
+	Ttk_ElementSpec *elementSpec,
+	void *clientData);
+}
+
+declare 6 current {
+    Ttk_Element Ttk_RegisterElement(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	Ttk_Theme theme, 
+	const char *elementName,
+	Ttk_ElementSpec *elementSpec,
+	void *clientData);
+}
+
+declare 7 current {
+    int Ttk_RegisterElementFactory(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp, 
+	const char *name,
+	Ttk_ElementFactory factoryProc,
+	void *clientData);
+}
+
+declare 8 current {
+    void Ttk_RegisterLayout(
+	Ttk_Theme theme, const char *className, Ttk_LayoutSpec layoutSpec);
+}
+
+#
+# State maps.
+#
+declare 10 current {
+    int Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(
+    	Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_StateSpec *spec_rtn);
+}
+declare 11 current {
+    Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(
+    	unsigned int onbits,unsigned int offbits);
+}
+declare 12 current {
+    Ttk_StateMap Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj(
+    	Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+}
+declare 13 current {
+    Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StateMapLookup(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_StateMap map, Ttk_State state);
+}
+declare 14 current {
+    int Ttk_StateTableLookup(
+    	Ttk_StateTable map[], Ttk_State state);
+}
+
+
+#
+# Low-level geometry utilities.
+#
+declare 20 current {
+    int Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(
+    	Tcl_Interp *interp, 
+	Tk_Window tkwin, 
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr, 
+	Ttk_Padding *pad_rtn);
+}
+declare 21 current {
+    int Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(
+    	Tcl_Interp *interp, 
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr, 
+	Ttk_Padding *pad_rtn);
+}
+declare 22 current {
+    int Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(
+    	Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Sticky *sticky_rtn);
+}
+declare 23 current {
+    Ttk_Padding Ttk_MakePadding(
+    	short l, short t, short r, short b);
+}
+declare 24 current {
+    Ttk_Padding Ttk_UniformPadding(
+    	short borderWidth);
+}
+declare 25 current {
+    Ttk_Padding Ttk_AddPadding(Ttk_Padding pad1, Ttk_Padding pad2);
+}
+declare 26 current {
+    Ttk_Padding Ttk_RelievePadding(
+    	Ttk_Padding padding, int relief, int n);
+}
+declare 27 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_MakeBox(int x, int y, int width, int height);
+}
+declare 28 current {
+    int Ttk_BoxContains(Ttk_Box box, int x, int y);
+}
+declare 29 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_PackBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side);
+}
+declare 30 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_StickBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Ttk_Sticky sticky);
+}
+declare 31 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_AnchorBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Tk_Anchor anchor);
+}
+declare 32 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_PadBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+}
+declare 33 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_ExpandBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+}
+declare 34 current {
+    Ttk_Box Ttk_PlaceBox(
+	Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side, Ttk_Sticky sticky);
+}
+declare 35 current {
+    Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewBoxObj(Ttk_Box box);
+}
+
+#
+# Utilities.
+#
+declare 40 current {
+    int Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *orient);
+}
+
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkBlink.c b/generic/ttk/ttkBlink.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc87397
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkBlink.c
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+/*
+ * $Id: ttkBlink.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright 2004, Joe English.
+ *
+ * Usage:
+ * 	BlinkCursor(corePtr), usually called in a widget's Init hook,
+ * 	arranges to periodically toggle the corePtr->flags CURSOR_ON bit
+ * 	on and off (and schedule a redisplay) whenever the widget has focus.
+ *
+ * 	Note: Widgets may have additional logic to decide whether
+ * 	to display the cursor or not (e.g., readonly or disabled states);
+ * 	BlinkCursor() does not account for this.
+ *
+ * TODO:
+ * 	Add script-level access to configure application-wide blink rate.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+#define DEF_CURSOR_ON_TIME	600		/* milliseconds */
+#define DEF_CURSOR_OFF_TIME	300		/* milliseconds */
+
+/* Interp-specific data for tracking cursors:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore		*owner; 	/* Widget that currently has cursor */
+    Tcl_TimerToken	timer;		/* Blink timer */
+    int 		onTime;		/* #milliseconds to blink cursor on */
+    int 		offTime;	/* #milliseconds to blink cursor off */
+} CursorManager;
+
+/* CursorManagerDeleteProc --
+ * 	InterpDeleteProc for cursor manager.
+ */
+static void CursorManagerDeleteProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    CursorManager *cm = (CursorManager*)clientData;
+    if (cm->timer) {
+	Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(cm->timer);
+    }
+    ckfree(clientData);
+}
+
+/* GetCursorManager --
+ * 	Look up and create if necessary the interp's cursor manager.
+ */
+static CursorManager *GetCursorManager(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    static const char *cm_key = "ttk::CursorManager";
+    CursorManager *cm = (CursorManager *) Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, cm_key,0);
+
+    if (!cm) {
+	cm = (CursorManager*)ckalloc(sizeof(*cm));
+	cm->timer = 0;
+	cm->owner = 0;
+	cm->onTime = DEF_CURSOR_ON_TIME;
+	cm->offTime = DEF_CURSOR_OFF_TIME;
+	Tcl_SetAssocData(interp,cm_key,CursorManagerDeleteProc,(ClientData)cm);
+    }
+    return cm;
+}
+
+/* CursorBlinkProc --
+ *	Timer handler to blink the insert cursor on and off.
+ */
+static void
+CursorBlinkProc(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    CursorManager *cm = (CursorManager*)clientData;
+    int blinkTime;
+
+    if (cm->owner->flags & CURSOR_ON) {
+	cm->owner->flags &= ~CURSOR_ON;
+	blinkTime = cm->offTime;
+    } else {
+	cm->owner->flags |= CURSOR_ON;
+	blinkTime = cm->onTime;
+    }
+    cm->timer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(blinkTime, CursorBlinkProc, clientData);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(cm->owner);
+}
+
+/* LoseCursor --
+ * 	Turn cursor off, disable blink timer.
+ */
+static void LoseCursor(CursorManager *cm, WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    if (corePtr->flags & CURSOR_ON) {
+	corePtr->flags &= ~CURSOR_ON;
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+    }
+    if (cm->owner == corePtr) {
+	cm->owner = NULL;
+    }
+    if (cm->timer) {
+	Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(cm->timer);
+	cm->timer = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/* ClaimCursor --
+ * 	Claim ownership of the insert cursor and blink on.
+ */
+static void ClaimCursor(CursorManager *cm, WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    if (cm->owner == corePtr)
+	return;
+    if (cm->owner)
+	LoseCursor(cm, cm->owner);
+
+    corePtr->flags |= CURSOR_ON;
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+
+    cm->owner = corePtr;
+    cm->timer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(cm->onTime, CursorBlinkProc, cm);
+}
+
+/*
+ * CursorEventProc --
+ * 	Event handler for FocusIn and FocusOut events;
+ * 	claim/lose ownership of the insert cursor when the widget
+ * 	acquires/loses keyboard focus.
+ */
+
+#define CursorEventMask (FocusChangeMask|StructureNotifyMask)
+#define RealFocusEvent(d) \
+    (d == NotifyInferior || d == NotifyAncestor || d == NotifyNonlinear)
+
+static void
+CursorEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = (WidgetCore *)clientData;
+    CursorManager *cm = GetCursorManager(corePtr->interp);
+
+    switch (eventPtr->type) {
+	case DestroyNotify:
+	    if (cm->owner == corePtr)
+		LoseCursor(cm, corePtr);
+	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(
+		corePtr->tkwin, CursorEventMask, CursorEventProc, clientData);
+	    break;
+	case FocusIn:
+	    if (RealFocusEvent(eventPtr->xfocus.detail))
+		ClaimCursor(cm, corePtr);
+	    break;
+	case FocusOut:
+	    if (RealFocusEvent(eventPtr->xfocus.detail))
+		LoseCursor(cm, corePtr);
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * BlinkCursor (main routine) --
+ * 	Arrange to blink the cursor on and off whenever the
+ * 	widget has focus.
+ */
+void BlinkCursor(WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(
+	corePtr->tkwin, CursorEventMask, CursorEventProc, corePtr);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkButton.c b/generic/ttk/ttkButton.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb6417a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkButton.c
@@ -0,0 +1,897 @@
+/* $Id: ttkButton.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: label, button, checkbutton, radiobutton, and 
+ * menubutton widgets.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/* Bit fields for OptionSpec mask field:
+ */
+#define STATE_CHANGED	 	(0x100)		/* -state option changed */
+#define DEFAULTSTATE_CHANGED	(0x200)		/* -default option changed */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Base resources for labels, buttons, checkbuttons, etc:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    /*
+     * Text element resources:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *textObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *textVariableObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *underlineObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;
+
+    Ttk_TraceHandle	*textVariableTrace;
+    Tk_Image	*images;
+
+    /*
+     * Image element resources:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *imageObj;
+
+    /*
+     * Compound label/image resources:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *compoundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *paddingObj;
+
+    /*
+     * Compatibility/legacy options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *stateObj;
+
+} BasePart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    BasePart	base;
+} Base;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec BaseOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Base,base.textObj), -1, 
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Base,base.textVariableObj), -1, 
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
+	"-1", Tk_Offset(Base,base.underlineObj), -1, 
+	0,0,0 },
+    /* SB: OPTION_INT, see <<NOTE-NULLOPTIONS>> */
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Base,base.widthObj), -1, 
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    /*
+     * Image options
+     */
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image", NULL/*default*/,
+	Tk_Offset(Base,base.imageObj), -1, 
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    /*
+     * Compound base/image options
+     */
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
+	 "none", Tk_Offset(Base,base.compoundObj), -1,
+	 0,(ClientData)TTKCompoundStrings,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Pad",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Base,base.paddingObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+
+    /*
+     * Compatibility/legacy options
+     */
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-state", "state", "State",
+	 "normal", Tk_Offset(Base,base.stateObj), -1,
+	 0,0,STATE_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(CoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * Variable trace procedure for -textvariable option:
+ */
+static void TextVariableChanged(void *clientData, const char *value)
+{
+    Base *basePtr = clientData;
+    Tcl_Obj *newText;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&basePtr->core)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    newText = value ? Tcl_NewStringObj(value, -1) : Tcl_NewStringObj("", 0);
+
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(newText);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(basePtr->base.textObj);
+    basePtr->base.textObj = newText;
+
+    TtkResizeWidget(&basePtr->core);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Tk_ImageChangedProc for -image option:
+ */
+static void CoreImageChangedProc(ClientData clientData,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = (WidgetCore *)clientData;
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+}
+
+/* GetImageList --
+ * 	ConfigureProc utility routine for handling -image option.
+ * 	Verifies that -image is a valid image specification,
+ * 	registers image-changed callbacks for each image (via Tk_GetImage).
+ *
+ * 	The -image option is a multi-element list; the first element
+ * 	is the name of the default image to use, the remainder of the 
+ * 	list is a sequence of statespec/imagename options as per 
+ * 	[style map].
+ *
+ * Returns: TCL_OK if image specification is valid and sets *imageListPtr
+ * 	to a NULL-terminated list of Tk_Images; otherwise TCL_ERROR
+ * 	and leaves an error message in the interpreter result.
+ */
+int GetImageList(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, 
+    WidgetCore *corePtr, 
+    Tcl_Obj *imageOption, 
+    Tk_Image **imageListPtr)
+{
+    int i, mapCount, imageCount;
+    Tcl_Obj **mapList;
+    Tk_Image *images;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, 
+		imageOption, &mapCount, &mapList) != TCL_OK) 
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (mapCount == 0) {
+	*imageListPtr = 0;
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    if ((mapCount % 2) != 1) {
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+	    "-image value must contain an odd number of elements", TCL_STATIC);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Verify state specifications:
+     */
+    for (i = 1; i < mapCount -1; i += 2) {
+	Ttk_StateSpec spec;
+	if (Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, mapList[i], &spec) != TCL_OK)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    
+    /* Get images:
+     */
+    imageCount = (mapCount + 1) / 2;
+    images = (Tk_Image*)ckalloc((imageCount+1) * sizeof(Tk_Image));
+
+    for (i = 0; i < imageCount; ++i) {
+	const char *imageName = Tcl_GetString(mapList[i * 2]);
+	images[i] = Tk_GetImage(interp, corePtr->tkwin, 
+		imageName, CoreImageChangedProc, corePtr);
+
+	if (!images[i]) {
+	    while (i--)
+		Tk_FreeImage(images[i]);
+	    ckfree((ClientData)images);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+    images[i] = NULL;	/* Add null terminator */
+
+    *imageListPtr = images;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ * FreeImageList --
+ * 	Release an image list obtained by GetImageList.
+ */
+void FreeImageList(Tk_Image *imageList)
+{
+    Tk_Image *p;
+    for (p = imageList; *p; ++p)
+	Tk_FreeImage(*p);
+    ckfree((ClientData)imageList);
+}
+
+static int
+BaseInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Base *basePtr = recordPtr;
+    basePtr->base.textVariableTrace = 0;
+    basePtr->base.images = NULL;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static void
+BaseCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Base *basePtr = recordPtr;
+    if (basePtr->base.textVariableTrace)
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(basePtr->base.textVariableTrace);
+    if (basePtr->base.images) 
+    	FreeImageList(basePtr->base.images);
+}
+
+static int BaseConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Base *basePtr = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *textVarName = basePtr->base.textVariableObj;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = 0;
+    Tk_Image *images = NULL;
+
+    if (textVarName != NULL && *Tcl_GetString(textVarName) != '\0') {
+	vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(interp,textVarName,TextVariableChanged,basePtr);
+	if (!vt) return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (basePtr->base.imageObj && GetImageList(interp, 
+		&basePtr->core, basePtr->base.imageObj, &images) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    if (CoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+error:
+	if (images) FreeImageList(images);
+	if (vt) Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (basePtr->base.textVariableTrace) {
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(basePtr->base.textVariableTrace);
+    }
+    basePtr->base.textVariableTrace = vt;
+
+    if (basePtr->base.images) {
+	FreeImageList(basePtr->base.images);
+    }
+    basePtr->base.images = images;
+
+    if (mask & STATE_CHANGED) {
+	CheckStateOption(&basePtr->core, basePtr->base.stateObj);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int
+BasePostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Base *basePtr = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (basePtr->base.textVariableTrace) {
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(basePtr->base.textVariableTrace);
+    }
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Label widget:
+ * Just a base widget that adds a few appearance-related options
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *fontObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *anchorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *justifyObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *wrapLengthObj;
+} LabelPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    BasePart	base;
+    LabelPart	label;
+} Label;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec LabelOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "frameColor", "FrameColor", 
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.backgroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "textColor", "TextColor", 
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.foregroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.fontObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", 
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.borderWidthObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.reliefObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label,label.anchorObj), -1, 
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label, label.justifyObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Label, label.wrapLengthObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED /*SB: SIZE_CHANGED*/ },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(BaseOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec LabelCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { NULL, NULL }
+};
+
+WidgetSpec LabelWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TLabel",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Label),		/* recordSize */
+    LabelOptionSpecs,		/* optionSpecs */
+    LabelCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    BaseInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    BaseCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    BaseConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    BasePostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    WidgetGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    WidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    WidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Button widget.
+ * Adds a new subcommand "invoke", and options "-command" and "-default"
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *commandObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *defaultStateObj;
+} ButtonPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    BasePart	base;
+    ButtonPart	button;
+} Button;
+
+/*
+ * Option specifications:
+ */
+static Tk_OptionSpec ButtonOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    WIDGET_TAKES_FOCUS,
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Button, button.commandObj), -1, 0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-default", "default", "Default",
+	"normal", Tk_Offset(Button, button.defaultStateObj), -1,
+	0, (ClientData) TTKDefaultStrings, DEFAULTSTATE_CHANGED},
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(BaseOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+static int ButtonConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Button *buttonPtr = recordPtr;
+
+    if (BaseConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Handle "-default" option:
+     */
+    if (mask & DEFAULTSTATE_CHANGED) {
+	int defaultState = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+	Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(
+	    NULL, buttonPtr->button.defaultStateObj, &defaultState);
+	if (defaultState == TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_ACTIVE) {
+	    WidgetChangeState(&buttonPtr->core, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE, 0);
+	} else {
+	    WidgetChangeState(&buttonPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE);
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $button invoke --
+ * 	Evaluate the button's -command.
+ */
+static int
+ButtonInvokeCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Button *buttonPtr = recordPtr;
+    if (objc > 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "invoke");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (buttonPtr->core.state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+    return Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, buttonPtr->button.commandObj, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+}
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec ButtonCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "invoke",		ButtonInvokeCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { NULL, NULL }
+};
+
+WidgetSpec ButtonWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TButton",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Button),		/* recordSize */
+    ButtonOptionSpecs,		/* optionSpecs */
+    ButtonCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    BaseInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    BaseCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    ButtonConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    BasePostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    WidgetGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    WidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    WidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Checkbutton widget.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *variableObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *onValueObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *offValueObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *commandObj;
+
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *variableTrace;
+
+} CheckbuttonPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    BasePart base;
+    CheckbuttonPart checkbutton;
+} Checkbutton;
+
+/*
+ * Option specifications:
+ */
+static Tk_OptionSpec CheckbuttonOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    WIDGET_TAKES_FOCUS,
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Checkbutton, checkbutton.variableObj), -1, 0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-onvalue", "onValue", "OnValue",
+	"1", Tk_Offset(Checkbutton, checkbutton.onValueObj), -1, 0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-offvalue", "offValue", "OffValue",
+	"0", Tk_Offset(Checkbutton, checkbutton.offValueObj), -1, 0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Checkbutton, checkbutton.commandObj), -1, 0,0,0},
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(BaseOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * Variable trace procedure for checkbutton -variable option
+ */
+static void CheckbuttonVariableChanged(void *clientData, const char *value)
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = clientData;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&checkPtr->core)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (!value) {
+	WidgetChangeState(&checkPtr->core, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE, 0);
+	return;
+    }
+    /* else */
+    WidgetChangeState(&checkPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE);
+    if (!strcmp(value, Tcl_GetString(checkPtr->checkbutton.onValueObj))) {
+	WidgetChangeState(&checkPtr->core, TTK_STATE_SELECTED, 0);
+    } else {
+	WidgetChangeState(&checkPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_SELECTED);
+    }
+}
+
+static int CheckbuttonInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+
+    /* default -variable is the widget name:
+     */
+    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(checkPtr->core.tkwin), -1);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(objPtr);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(checkPtr->checkbutton.variableObj);
+    checkPtr->checkbutton.variableObj = objPtr;
+
+    return BaseInitialize(interp, recordPtr);
+}
+
+static void
+CheckbuttonCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_UntraceVariable(checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace);
+    checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace = 0;
+    BaseCleanup(recordPtr);
+}
+
+static int
+CheckbuttonConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(
+	interp, checkPtr->checkbutton.variableObj,
+	CheckbuttonVariableChanged, checkPtr);
+
+    if (!vt) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (BaseConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK){
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_UntraceVariable(checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace);
+    checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace = vt;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int
+CheckbuttonPostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace)
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(checkPtr->checkbutton.variableTrace);
+    if (status == TCL_OK && !WidgetDestroyed(&checkPtr->core))
+	status = BasePostConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask);
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Checkbutton 'invoke' subcommand:
+ * 	Toggles the checkbutton state.
+ */
+static int
+CheckbuttonInvokeCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Checkbutton *checkPtr = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &checkPtr->core;
+    Tcl_Obj *newValue;
+
+    if (objc > 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "invoke");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (corePtr->state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED)
+	return TCL_OK;
+
+    /*
+     * Toggle the selected state.
+     */
+    if (corePtr->state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED)
+	newValue = checkPtr->checkbutton.offValueObj;
+    else
+	newValue = checkPtr->checkbutton.onValueObj;
+
+    if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp,
+	    checkPtr->checkbutton.variableObj, NULL, newValue,
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
+	== NULL)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(corePtr))
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    return Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp,
+	checkPtr->checkbutton.commandObj, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+}
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec CheckbuttonCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "invoke",		CheckbuttonInvokeCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    /* MISSING: select, deselect, toggle */
+    { NULL, NULL }
+};
+
+WidgetSpec CheckbuttonWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TCheckbutton",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Checkbutton),	/* recordSize */
+    CheckbuttonOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    CheckbuttonCommands,	/* subcommands */
+    CheckbuttonInitialize,	/* initializeProc */
+    CheckbuttonCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    CheckbuttonConfigure,	/* configureProc */
+    CheckbuttonPostConfigure,	/* postConfigureProc */
+    WidgetGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    WidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    WidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Radiobutton widget.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *variableObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *valueObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *commandObj;
+
+    Ttk_TraceHandle	*variableTrace;
+
+} RadiobuttonPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    BasePart base;
+    RadiobuttonPart radiobutton;
+} Radiobutton;
+
+/*
+ * Option specifications:
+ */
+static Tk_OptionSpec RadiobuttonOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    WIDGET_TAKES_FOCUS,
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable",
+	"::selectedButton", Tk_Offset(Radiobutton, radiobutton.variableObj),-1,
+	0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-value", "Value", "Value",
+	"1", Tk_Offset(Radiobutton, radiobutton.valueObj), -1,
+	0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Radiobutton, radiobutton.commandObj), -1,
+	0,0,0},
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(BaseOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * Variable trace procedure for radiobuttons.
+ */
+static void 
+RadiobuttonVariableChanged(void *clientData, const char *value)
+{
+    Radiobutton *radioPtr = clientData;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&radioPtr->core)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (!value) {
+	WidgetChangeState(&radioPtr->core, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE, 0);
+	return;
+    }
+    /* else */
+    WidgetChangeState(&radioPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE);
+    if (!strcmp(value, Tcl_GetString(radioPtr->radiobutton.valueObj))) {
+	WidgetChangeState(&radioPtr->core, TTK_STATE_SELECTED, 0);
+    } else {
+	WidgetChangeState(&radioPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_SELECTED);
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+RadiobuttonCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Radiobutton *radioPtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_UntraceVariable(radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace);
+    radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace = 0;
+    BaseCleanup(recordPtr);
+}
+
+static int
+RadiobuttonConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Radiobutton *radioPtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(
+	interp, radioPtr->radiobutton.variableObj,
+	RadiobuttonVariableChanged, radioPtr);
+
+    if (!vt) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (BaseConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_UntraceVariable(radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace);
+    radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace = vt;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static int
+RadiobuttonPostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Radiobutton *radioPtr = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace)
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(radioPtr->radiobutton.variableTrace);
+    if (status == TCL_OK && !WidgetDestroyed(&radioPtr->core))
+	status = BasePostConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask);
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Radiobutton 'invoke' subcommand:
+ * 	Sets the radiobutton -variable to the -value, evaluates the -command.
+ */
+static int
+RadiobuttonInvokeCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Radiobutton *radioPtr = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &radioPtr->core;
+
+    if (objc > 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "invoke");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (corePtr->state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED)
+	return TCL_OK;
+
+    if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp,
+	    radioPtr->radiobutton.variableObj, NULL,
+	    radioPtr->radiobutton.valueObj,
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
+	== NULL)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(corePtr))
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    return Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp,
+	radioPtr->radiobutton.commandObj, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+}
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec RadiobuttonCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "invoke",		RadiobuttonInvokeCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    /* MISSING: select, deselect */
+    { NULL, NULL }
+};
+
+WidgetSpec RadiobuttonWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TRadiobutton",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Radiobutton),	/* recordSize */
+    RadiobuttonOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    RadiobuttonCommands,	/* subcommands */
+    BaseInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    RadiobuttonCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    RadiobuttonConfigure,	/* configureProc */
+    RadiobuttonPostConfigure,	/* postConfigureProc */
+    WidgetGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    WidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    WidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Menubutton widget.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *menuObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *directionObj;
+} MenubuttonPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    BasePart base;
+    MenubuttonPart menubutton;
+} Menubutton;
+
+/*
+ * Option specifications:
+ */
+static const char *directionStrings[] = {
+    "above", "below", "left", "right", "flush", NULL
+};
+static Tk_OptionSpec MenubuttonOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    WIDGET_TAKES_FOCUS,
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", "menu", "Menu",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Menubutton, menubutton.menuObj), -1, 0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-direction", "direction", "Direction",
+	"below", Tk_Offset(Menubutton, menubutton.directionObj), -1,
+	0,(ClientData)directionStrings,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(BaseOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec MenubuttonCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { NULL, NULL }
+};
+
+WidgetSpec MenubuttonWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TMenubutton",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Menubutton), 	/* recordSize */
+    MenubuttonOptionSpecs, 	/* optionSpecs */
+    MenubuttonCommands,  	/* subcommands */
+    BaseInitialize,     	/* initializeProc */
+    BaseCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    BaseConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    BasePostConfigure,  	/* postConfigureProc */
+    WidgetGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    WidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    WidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkCache.c b/generic/ttk/ttkCache.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a12bf30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkCache.c
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+/*
+ * $Id: ttkCache.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *      Ttk theme engine, resource cache.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * The problem:
+ *
+ * Tk maintains reference counts for fonts, colors, and images,
+ * and deallocates them when the reference count goes to zero.
+ * With the theme engine, resources are allocated right before
+ * drawing an element and released immediately after.
+ * This causes a severe performance penalty, and on PseudoColor
+ * visuals it causes colormap cycling as colormap entries are
+ * released and reused.
+ *
+ * Solution: Acquire fonts, colors, and objects from a
+ * resource cache instead of directly from Tk; the cache
+ * holds a semipermanent reference to the resource to keep
+ * it from being deallocated.
+ *
+ * The plumbing and control flow here is quite contorted;
+ * it would be better to address this problem in the core instead.
+ *
+ * @@@ BUGS/TODO: Need distinct caches for each combination
+ * of display, visual, and colormap.
+ *
+ * @@@ Colormap flashing on PseudoColor visuals is still possible,
+ * but this will be a transient effect.
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>	/* for sprintf */
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+struct Ttk_ResourceCache_ {
+    Tcl_Interp	  *interp;	/* Interpreter for error reporting */
+    Tk_Window	  tkwin;	/* Cache window. */
+    Tcl_HashTable fontTable;	/* Entries: Tcl_Obj* holding FontObjs */
+    Tcl_HashTable colorTable;	/* Entries: Tcl_Obj* holding ColorObjs */
+    Tcl_HashTable borderTable;	/* Entries: Tcl_Obj* holding BorderObjs */
+    Tcl_HashTable imageTable;	/* Entries: Tk_Images */
+
+    Tcl_HashTable namedColors;	/* Entries: RGB values as Tcl_StringObjs */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_CreateResourceCache --
+ * 	Initialize a new resource cache.
+ */
+Ttk_ResourceCache Ttk_CreateResourceCache(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache = (Ttk_ResourceCache)ckalloc(sizeof(*cache));
+
+    cache->tkwin = NULL;	/* initialized later */
+    cache->interp = interp;
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->fontTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->colorTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->borderTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->imageTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->namedColors, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    return cache;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ClearCache --
+ * 	Release references to all cached resources.
+ */
+static void Ttk_ClearCache(Ttk_ResourceCache cache)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Free fonts:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&cache->fontTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *fontObj = (Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	if (fontObj) {
+	    Tk_FreeFontFromObj(cache->tkwin, fontObj);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(fontObj);
+	}
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->fontTable);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->fontTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    /*
+     * Free colors:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&cache->colorTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *colorObj = (Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	if (colorObj) {
+	    Tk_FreeColorFromObj(cache->tkwin, colorObj);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(colorObj);
+	}
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->colorTable);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->colorTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    /*
+     * Free borders:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&cache->borderTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *borderObj = (Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	if (borderObj) {
+	    Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj(cache->tkwin, borderObj);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(borderObj);
+	}
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->borderTable);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->borderTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    /*
+     * Free images:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&cache->imageTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tk_Image image = (Tk_Image)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	if (image) {
+	    Tk_FreeImage(image);
+	}
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->imageTable);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cache->imageTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_FreeResourceCache --
+ * 	Release references to all cached resources, delete the cache.
+ */
+
+void Ttk_FreeResourceCache(Ttk_ResourceCache cache)
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr; 
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+
+    Ttk_ClearCache(cache);
+
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->colorTable);
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->fontTable);
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->imageTable);
+
+    /*
+     * Free named colors:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&cache->namedColors, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *colorNameObj = (Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(colorNameObj);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cache->namedColors);
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)cache);
+}
+
+/*
+ * CacheWinEventHandler --
+ * 	Detect when the cache window is destroyed, clear cache.
+ */
+static void CacheWinEventHandler(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache = (Ttk_ResourceCache)clientData;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type != DestroyNotify) {
+	return;
+    }
+    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(cache->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+	    CacheWinEventHandler, clientData);
+    Ttk_ClearCache(cache);
+    cache->tkwin = NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ * InitCacheWindow --
+ * 	Specify the cache window if not already set.
+ * 	@@@ SHOULD: use separate caches for each combination
+ * 	@@@ of display, visual, and colormap.
+ */
+static void InitCacheWindow(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    if (cache->tkwin == NULL) {
+	cache->tkwin = tkwin;
+	Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+		CacheWinEventHandler, (ClientData)cache);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_RegisterNamedColor --
+ *	Specify an RGB triplet as a named color.
+ *	Overrides any previous named color specification.
+ *	
+ */
+void Ttk_RegisterNamedColor(
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache, 
+    const char *colorName,
+    XColor *colorPtr)
+{
+    int newEntry;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    char nameBuf[14];
+    Tcl_Obj *colorNameObj;
+
+    sprintf(nameBuf, "#%04X%04X%04X", 
+    	colorPtr->red, colorPtr->green, colorPtr->blue);
+    colorNameObj = Tcl_NewStringObj(nameBuf, -1);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(colorNameObj);
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&cache->namedColors, colorName, &newEntry);
+    if (!newEntry) {
+    	Tcl_Obj *oldColor = (Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(oldColor);
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData)colorNameObj);
+}
+
+/*
+ * CheckNamedColor(objPtr) --
+ *	If objPtr is a registered color name, return a Tcl_Obj *
+ *	containing the registered color value specification.
+ *	Otherwise, return the input argument.
+ */
+static Tcl_Obj *CheckNamedColor(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = 
+    	Tcl_FindHashEntry(&cache->namedColors, Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
+    if (entryPtr) {	/* Use named color instead */
+    	objPtr = (Tcl_Obj *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+    return objPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Template for allocation routines:
+ */
+typedef void *(*Allocator)(Tcl_Interp *, Tk_Window, Tcl_Obj *);
+
+static Tcl_Obj *Ttk_Use(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_HashTable *table, 
+    Allocator allocate,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    int newEntry;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =
+	Tcl_CreateHashEntry(table,Tcl_GetString(objPtr),&newEntry);
+    Tcl_Obj *cacheObj;
+
+    if (!newEntry) {
+	return (Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    cacheObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(objPtr);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(cacheObj);
+
+    if (allocate(interp, tkwin, cacheObj)) {
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, cacheObj);
+	return cacheObj;
+    } else {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(cacheObj);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, NULL);
+	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UseFont --
+ * 	Acquire a font from the cache.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseFont(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    InitCacheWindow(cache, tkwin);
+    return Ttk_Use(cache->interp,
+	&cache->fontTable,(Allocator)Tk_AllocFontFromObj, tkwin, objPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UseColor --
+ * 	Acquire a color from the cache.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseColor(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    objPtr = CheckNamedColor(cache, objPtr);
+    InitCacheWindow(cache, tkwin);
+    return Ttk_Use(cache->interp,
+	&cache->colorTable,(Allocator)Tk_AllocColorFromObj, tkwin, objPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UseBorder --
+ * 	Acquire a Tk_3DBorder from the cache.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseBorder(
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    objPtr = CheckNamedColor(cache, objPtr);
+    InitCacheWindow(cache, tkwin);
+    return Ttk_Use(cache->interp,
+	&cache->borderTable,(Allocator)Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj, tkwin, objPtr);
+}
+
+/* NullImageChanged --
+ * 	Tk_ImageChangedProc for Ttk_UseImage
+ */
+
+static void NullImageChanged(ClientData clientData,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight)
+{ /* No-op */ }
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UseImage --
+ * 	Acquire a Tk_Image from the cache.
+ */
+Tk_Image Ttk_UseImage(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    const char *imageName = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+    int newEntry;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =
+	Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&cache->imageTable,imageName,&newEntry);
+    Tk_Image image;
+
+    InitCacheWindow(cache, tkwin);
+
+    if (!newEntry) {
+	return (Tk_Image)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    image = Tk_GetImage(cache->interp, tkwin, imageName, NullImageChanged,0);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, image);
+
+    if (!image) {
+	Tcl_BackgroundError(cache->interp);
+    }
+
+    return image;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkClamTheme.c b/generic/ttk/ttkClamTheme.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0165a9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkClamTheme.c
@@ -0,0 +1,969 @@
+/*
+ * $Id: ttkClamTheme.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) 2004 Joe English
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: another theme engine.
+ * Inspired by the XFCE family of Gnome themes.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+/* 
+ * Under windows, the Tk-provided XDrawLine and XDrawArc have an 
+ * off-by-one error in the end point. This is especially apparent with this
+ * theme. Defining this macro as true handles this case.
+ */
+#if defined(WIN32) && !defined(WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK)
+#	define WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK 1
+#else
+#	define WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK 0
+#endif
+
+#define STR(x) StR(x)
+#define StR(x) #x
+
+#define SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS 14
+
+#define FRAME_COLOR	"#dcdad5"
+#define LIGHT_COLOR  	"#ffffff"
+#define DARK_COLOR  	"#cfcdc8"
+#define DARKER_COLOR 	"#bab5ab"
+#define DARKEST_COLOR	"#9e9a91"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utilities.
+ */
+
+static GC Ttk_GCForColor(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj* colorObj, Drawable d)
+{
+    GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, colorObj), d);
+
+#ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
+    /*
+     * Workaround for Tk bug under Aqua where the default line width is 0.
+     */
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    unsigned long mask = 0ul;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+
+    gcValues.line_width = 1;
+    mask = GCLineWidth;
+
+    XChangeGC(display, gc, mask, &gcValues);
+#endif
+
+    return gc;
+}
+
+static void DrawSmoothBorder(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b,
+    Tcl_Obj *outerColorObj, Tcl_Obj *upperColorObj, Tcl_Obj *lowerColorObj)
+{
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    int x1 = b.x, x2 = b.x + b.width - 1;
+    int y1 = b.y, y2 = b.y + b.height - 1;
+    const int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+    GC gc;
+
+    if (   outerColorObj
+	&& (gc=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,outerColorObj,d)))
+    {
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1, x2-1+w,y1); /* N */
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y2, x2-1+w,y2); /* S */
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1,y1+1, x1,y2-1+w); /* E */
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x2,y1+1, x2,y2-1+w); /* W */
+    }
+
+    if (   upperColorObj
+	&& (gc=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,upperColorObj,d)))
+    {
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1+1, x2-1+w,y1+1); /* N */
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1+1, x1+1,y2-1);   /* E */
+    }
+
+    if (   lowerColorObj
+	&& (gc=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,lowerColorObj,d)))
+    {
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x2-1,y2-1, x1+1-w,y2-1); /* S */
+	XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x2-1,y2-1, x2-1,y1+1-w); /* W */
+    }
+}
+
+static GC BackgroundGC(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj)
+{
+    Tk_3DBorder bd = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, backgroundObj);
+    return Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, bd, TK_3D_FLAT_GC);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Border element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj 	*borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*darkColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*borderWidthObj;	/* See <<NOTE-BORDERWIDTH>> */
+} BorderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec BorderElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR },
+    { "-darkcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,darkColorObj), DARK_COLOR },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,reliefObj), "flat" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderWidthObj), "2" },
+    {0,0,0}
+};
+
+/*
+ * <<NOTE-BORDERWIDTH>>: -borderwidth is only partially supported:
+ * in this theme, borders are always exactly 2 pixels thick.
+ * With -borderwidth 0, border is not drawn at all; 
+ * otherwise a 2-pixel border is used.  For -borderwidth > 2, 
+ * the excess is used as padding.
+ */
+
+static void BorderElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    BorderElement *border = (BorderElement*)elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, border->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    if (borderWidth == 1) ++borderWidth;
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void BorderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    BorderElement *border = elementRecord;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    Tcl_Obj *outer = 0, *upper = 0, *lower = 0;
+
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, border->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, border->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+    if (borderWidth == 0) return;
+
+    switch (relief) {
+	case TK_RELIEF_GROOVE :
+	case TK_RELIEF_RIDGE :
+	case TK_RELIEF_RAISED :
+	    outer = border->borderColorObj;
+	    upper = border->lightColorObj;
+	    lower = border->darkColorObj;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN :
+	    outer = border->borderColorObj;
+	    upper = border->darkColorObj;
+	    lower = border->lightColorObj;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_FLAT :
+	    outer = upper = lower = 0;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SOLID :
+	    outer = upper = lower = border->borderColorObj;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b, outer, upper, lower);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec BorderElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(BorderElement),
+    BorderElementOptions,
+    BorderElementGeometry,
+    BorderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Field element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj 	*borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*darkColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*backgroundObj;
+} FieldElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec FieldElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR },
+    { "-darkcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,darkColorObj), DARK_COLOR },
+    { "-fieldbackground", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,backgroundObj), "white" },
+    {0,0,0}
+};
+
+static void FieldElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding(2);
+}
+
+static void FieldElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    FieldElement *field = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder bg = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, field->backgroundObj);
+    Ttk_Box f = Ttk_PadBox(b, Ttk_UniformPadding(2));
+    Tcl_Obj *outer = field->borderColorObj,
+	    *inner = field->lightColorObj;
+
+    DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b, outer, inner, inner);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(
+	tkwin, d, bg, f.x, f.y, f.width, f.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec FieldElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(FieldElement),
+    FieldElementOptions,
+    FieldElementGeometry,
+    FieldElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ * Modified field element for comboboxes:
+ * 	Right edge is expanded to overlap the dropdown button.
+ */
+static void ComboboxFieldElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    FieldElement *field = elementRecord;
+    GC gc = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,field->borderColorObj,d);
+
+    ++b.width;
+    FieldElementDraw(clientData, elementRecord, tkwin, d, b, state);
+
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc,
+	    b.x + b.width - 1, b.y,
+	    b.x + b.width - 1, b.y + b.height - 1 + WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ComboboxFieldElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(FieldElement),
+    FieldElementOptions,
+    FieldElementGeometry,
+    ComboboxFieldElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Indicator elements for check and radio buttons.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *upperColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *lowerColorObj;
+} IndicatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec IndicatorElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-indicatorsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,sizeObj), "10" },
+    { "-indicatormargin", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,marginObj), "1" },
+    { "-indicatorbackground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,backgroundObj), "white" },
+    { "-indicatorforeground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,foregroundObj), "black" },
+    { "-upperbordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,upperColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-lowerbordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,lowerColorObj), DARK_COLOR },
+    {0,0,0}
+};
+
+static void
+IndicatorElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    int size = 10;
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, paddingPtr);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->sizeObj, &size);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = size;
+}
+
+static void
+RadioIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    GC gcb=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->backgroundObj,d);
+    GC gcf=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->foregroundObj,d);
+    GC gcu=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->upperColorObj,d);
+    GC gcl=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->lowerColorObj,d);
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, &padding);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    XFillArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcb, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 0,360*64);
+    XDrawArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcl, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 225*64,180*64);
+    XDrawArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcu, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 45*64,180*64);
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED) {
+	b = Ttk_PadBox(b,Ttk_UniformPadding(3));
+	XFillArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcf, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 0,360*64);
+	XDrawArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcf, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 0,360*64);
+#if WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK
+	XDrawArc(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gcf, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 300*64,360*64);
+#endif
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+CheckIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    GC gcb=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->backgroundObj,d);
+    GC gcf=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->foregroundObj,d);
+    GC gcu=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->upperColorObj,d);
+    GC gcl=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,indicator->lowerColorObj,d);
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+    const int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, &padding);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    XFillRectangle(display,d,gcb, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gcl,b.x,b.y+b.height,b.x+b.width+w,b.y+b.height);/*S*/
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gcl,b.x+b.width,b.y,b.x+b.width,b.y+b.height+w); /*E*/
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gcu,b.x,b.y, b.x,b.y+b.height+w); /*W*/
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gcu,b.x,b.y, b.x+b.width+w,b.y);  /*N*/
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED) {
+	int p,q,r,s;
+
+	b = Ttk_PadBox(b,Ttk_UniformPadding(2));
+	p = b.x, q = b.y, r = b.x+b.width, s = b.y+b.height;
+
+	r+=w, s+=w;
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p,   q,   r,   s);
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p+1, q,   r,   s-1);
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p,   q+1, r-1, s);
+
+	s-=w, q-=w;
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p,   s,   r,   q);
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p+1, s,   r,   q+1);
+	XDrawLine(display, d, gcf, p,   s-1, r-1, q);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec RadioIndicatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(IndicatorElement),
+    IndicatorElementOptions,
+    IndicatorElementGeometry,
+    RadioIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec CheckIndicatorElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(IndicatorElement),
+    IndicatorElementOptions,
+    IndicatorElementGeometry,
+    CheckIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+#define MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE 5
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *paddingObj;
+} MenuIndicatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec MenuIndicatorElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,sizeObj), 
+	STR(MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE)},
+    { "-arrowcolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,colorObj),
+	"black" },
+    { "-arrowpadding",TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,paddingObj),
+	"3" },
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static void MenuIndicatorElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    MenuIndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    int size = MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->sizeObj, &size);
+    ArrowSize(size, ARROW_DOWN, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->paddingObj, paddingPtr);
+}
+
+static void MenuIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    MenuIndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    XColor *arrowColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+    GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(arrowColor, d);
+    int size = MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE;
+    int width, height;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->sizeObj, &size);
+
+    ArrowSize(size, ARROW_DOWN, &width, &height);
+    b = Ttk_StickBox(b, width, height, 0);
+    FillArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b, ARROW_DOWN);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec MenuIndicatorElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(MenuIndicatorElement),
+    MenuIndicatorElementOptions,
+    MenuIndicatorElementSize,
+    MenuIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Grips.
+ *
+ * TODO: factor this with ThumbElementDraw
+ */
+
+static Ttk_Orient GripClientData[] = {
+    TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL, TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj 	*lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*gripCountObj;
+} GripElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec GripElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(GripElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(GripElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-gripcount", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(GripElement,gripCountObj), "5" },
+    {0,0,0}
+};
+
+static void GripElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    int horizontal = *((Ttk_Orient*)clientData) == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    GripElement *grip = elementRecord;
+    int gripCount;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, grip->gripCountObj, &gripCount);
+    if (horizontal) {
+	*widthPtr = 2*gripCount;
+    } else {
+	*heightPtr = 2*gripCount;
+    }
+}
+
+static void GripElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    const int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+    int horizontal = *((Ttk_Orient*)clientData) == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    GripElement *grip = elementRecord;
+    GC lightGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,grip->lightColorObj,d);
+    GC darkGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,grip->borderColorObj,d);
+    int gripPad = 1;
+    int i, gripCount;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, grip->gripCountObj, &gripCount);
+
+    if (horizontal) {
+	int x = b.x + b.width / 2 - gripCount;
+	int y1 = b.y + gripPad, y2 = b.y + b.height - gripPad - 1 + w;
+	for (i=0; i<gripCount; ++i) {
+	    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC,  x,y1, x,y2); ++x;
+	    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, x,y1, x,y2); ++x;
+	}
+    } else {
+	int y = b.y + b.height / 2 - gripCount;
+	int x1 = b.x + gripPad, x2 = b.x + b.width - gripPad - 1 + w;
+	for (i=0; i<gripCount; ++i) {
+	    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC,  x1,y, x2,y); ++y;
+	    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, x1,y, x2,y); ++y;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec GripElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(GripElement),
+    GripElementOptions,
+    GripElementSize,
+    GripElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Scrollbar elements: trough, arrows, thumb.
+ *
+ * Notice that the trough element has 0 internal padding;
+ * that way the thumb and arrow borders overlap the trough.
+ */
+
+typedef struct { /* Common element record for scrollbar elements */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*orientObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*troughColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*darkColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*arrowColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*arrowSizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*gripCountObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*sliderlengthObj;
+} ScrollbarElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ScrollbarElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement, orientObj), "horizontal" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,backgroundObj), FRAME_COLOR },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-troughcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,troughColorObj), DARKER_COLOR },
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR },
+    { "-darkcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,darkColorObj), DARK_COLOR },
+    { "-arrowcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,arrowColorObj), "#000000" },
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,arrowSizeObj), STR(SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS) },
+    { "-gripcount", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,gripCountObj), "5" },
+    { "-sliderlength", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(ScrollbarElement,sliderlengthObj), "30" },
+    {0,0,0}
+};
+
+static void TroughElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    GC gcb = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->borderColorObj,d);
+    GC gct = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->troughColorObj,d);
+    XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gct, b.x, b.y, b.width-1, b.height-1);
+    XDrawRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gcb, b.x, b.y, b.width-1, b.height-1);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TroughElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ScrollbarElement),
+    ScrollbarElementOptions,
+    NullElementGeometry,
+    TroughElementDraw
+};
+
+static void ThumbElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    int size = SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS;
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, sb->arrowSizeObj, &size);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = size;
+}
+
+static void ThumbElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    int gripCount = 3, orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    GC lightGC, darkGC;
+    int x1, y1, x2, y2, dx, dy, i;
+    const int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+
+    DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b,
+	sb->borderColorObj, sb->lightColorObj, sb->darkColorObj);
+    XFillRectangle(
+	Tk_Display(tkwin), d, BackgroundGC(tkwin, sb->backgroundObj),
+	b.x+2, b.y+2, b.width-4, b.height-4);
+
+    /*
+     * Draw grip:
+     */
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, sb->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, sb->gripCountObj, &gripCount);
+    lightGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->lightColorObj,d);
+    darkGC = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->borderColorObj,d);
+    
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	dx = 1; dy = 0;
+	x1 = x2 = b.x + b.width / 2 - gripCount;
+	y1 = b.y + 2;
+	y2 = b.y + b.height - 3 + w;
+    } else {
+	dx = 0; dy = 1;
+	y1 = y2 = b.y + b.height / 2 - gripCount;
+	x1 = b.x + 2;
+	x2 = b.x + b.width - 3 + w;
+    }
+
+    for (i=0; i<gripCount; ++i) {
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC, x1,y1, x2,y2);
+	x1 += dx; x2 += dx; y1 += dy; y2 += dy;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, x1,y1, x2,y2);
+	x1 += dx; x2 += dx; y1 += dy; y2 += dy;
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ThumbElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ScrollbarElement),
+    ScrollbarElementOptions,
+    ThumbElementGeometry,
+    ThumbElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slider element.
+ */
+static void SliderElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    int length, thickness, orient;
+
+    length = thickness = SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS;
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, sb->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, sb->arrowSizeObj, &thickness);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sb->sliderlengthObj, &length);
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	*heightPtr = length;
+	*widthPtr = thickness;
+    } else {
+	*heightPtr = thickness;
+	*widthPtr = length;
+    }
+
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SliderElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ScrollbarElement),
+    ScrollbarElementOptions,
+    SliderElementGeometry,
+    ThumbElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Progress bar element
+ */
+static void PbarElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SliderElementGeometry(clientData, elementRecord, tkwin,
+	    widthPtr, heightPtr, paddingPtr);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding(2);
+}
+
+static void PbarElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, Ttk_UniformPadding(2));
+    if (b.width > 4 && b.height > 4) {
+	DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b,
+	    sb->borderColorObj, sb->lightColorObj, sb->darkColorObj);
+	XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, 
+	    BackgroundGC(tkwin, sb->backgroundObj),
+	    b.x+2, b.y+2, b.width-4, b.height-4);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec PbarElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ScrollbarElement),
+    ScrollbarElementOptions,
+    PbarElementGeometry,
+    PbarElementDraw
+};
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Scrollbar arrows.
+ */
+static int ArrowElements[] = { ARROW_UP, ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT };
+
+static void ArrowElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    int size = SCROLLBAR_THICKNESS;
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, sb->arrowSizeObj, &size);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = size;
+}
+
+static void ArrowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned state)
+{
+    ArrowDirection dir = *(ArrowDirection*)clientData;
+    ScrollbarElement *sb = elementRecord;
+    GC gc = Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,sb->arrowColorObj, d);
+    int h, cx, cy;
+
+    DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b,
+	sb->borderColorObj, sb->lightColorObj, sb->darkColorObj);
+
+    XFillRectangle(
+	Tk_Display(tkwin), d, BackgroundGC(tkwin, sb->backgroundObj),
+	b.x+2, b.y+2, b.width-4, b.height-4);
+
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, Ttk_UniformPadding(3));
+    h = b.width < b.height ? b.width : b.height;
+    ArrowSize(h/2, dir, &cx, &cy);
+    b = Ttk_AnchorBox(b, cx, cy, TK_ANCHOR_CENTER);
+
+    FillArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b, dir);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ArrowElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ScrollbarElement),
+    ScrollbarElementOptions,
+    ArrowElementGeometry,
+    ArrowElementDraw
+};
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Notebook elements.
+ * 	
+ * Note: Tabs, except for the rightmost, overlap the neighbor to 
+ * their right by one pixel.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *darkColorObj;
+} NotebookElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec NotebookElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(NotebookElement,backgroundObj), FRAME_COLOR },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(NotebookElement,borderColorObj), DARKEST_COLOR },
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(NotebookElement,lightColorObj), LIGHT_COLOR },
+    { "-darkcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(NotebookElement,darkColorObj), DARK_COLOR },
+    {0,0,0}
+};
+
+static void TabElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    paddingPtr->top = paddingPtr->left = paddingPtr->right = borderWidth;
+    paddingPtr->bottom = 0;
+}
+
+static void TabElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    NotebookElement *tab = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, tab->backgroundObj);
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    int borderWidth = 2, dh = 0;
+    int x1,y1,x2,y2;
+    GC gc;
+    const int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED) {
+	dh = borderWidth;
+    }
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_USER2) {	/* Rightmost tab */
+	--b.width;
+    }
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x+2, b.y+2, b.width-1, b.height-2+dh, borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+
+    x1 = b.x, x2 = b.x + b.width;
+    y1 = b.y, y2 = b.y + b.height;
+
+
+    gc=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,tab->borderColorObj,d);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1,y1+1, x1,y2+w);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x2,y1+1, x2,y2+w);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1, x2-1+w,y1);
+
+    gc=Ttk_GCForColor(tkwin,tab->lightColorObj,d);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1+1, x1+1,y2-1+dh+w);
+    XDrawLine(display,d,gc, x1+1,y1+1, x2-1+w,y1+1);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TabElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(NotebookElement),
+    NotebookElementOptions,
+    TabElementGeometry,
+    TabElementDraw
+};
+
+static void ClientElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void ClientElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    NotebookElement *ce = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, ce->backgroundObj);
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth,TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    DrawSmoothBorder(tkwin, d, b,
+    	ce->borderColorObj, ce->lightColorObj, ce->darkColorObj);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ClientElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(NotebookElement),
+    NotebookElementOptions,
+    ClientElementGeometry,
+    ClientElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Modified widget layouts.
+ */
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(ComboboxLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Combobox.downarrow", TTK_PACK_RIGHT|TTK_FILL_Y)
+    TTK_GROUP("Combobox.field", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_EXPAND,
+	TTK_GROUP("Combobox.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Combobox.textarea", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(HorizontalSashLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Sash.hsash", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Sash.hgrip", TTK_FILL_BOTH))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(VerticalSashLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Sash.vsash", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Sash.vgrip", TTK_FILL_BOTH))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization.
+ */
+
+int DLLEXPORT
+ClamTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme = Ttk_CreateTheme(interp, "clam", 0);
+
+    if (!theme) {
+        return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "border", &BorderElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "field", &FieldElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "Combobox.field", &ComboboxFieldElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "trough", &TroughElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "thumb", &ThumbElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "uparrow", &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "downarrow", &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[1]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "leftarrow", &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[2]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "rightarrow", &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[3]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "Radiobutton.indicator", &RadioIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "Checkbutton.indicator", &CheckIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp,
+	theme, "Menubutton.indicator", &MenuIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "tab", &TabElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "client", &ClientElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "slider", &SliderElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "bar", &PbarElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "pbar", &PbarElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "hgrip",
+	    &GripElementSpec,  &GripClientData[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "vgrip",
+	    &GripElementSpec,  &GripClientData[1]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TCombobox", ComboboxLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "Horizontal.Sash", HorizontalSashLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "Vertical.Sash", VerticalSashLayout);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkClassicTheme.c b/generic/ttk/ttkClassicTheme.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9ddaee4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkClassicTheme.c
@@ -0,0 +1,530 @@
+/*
+ * $Id: ttkClassicTheme.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: classic theme.
+ *
+ * Implements the "classic" Motif-like Tk look.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+#include <X11/Xutil.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+#define DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH "2"
+#define DEFAULT_ARROW_SIZE "15"
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Highlight element implementation.
+ * 	Draw a solid highlight border to indicate focus.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*highlightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*highlightThicknessObj;
+} HighlightElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec HighlightElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-highlightcolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(HighlightElement,highlightColorObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-highlightthickness",TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(HighlightElement,highlightThicknessObj), "0" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void
+HighlightElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord,
+    Tk_Window tkwin, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    HighlightElement *hl = elementRecord;
+    int highlightThickness = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,hl->highlightThicknessObj,&highlightThickness);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)highlightThickness);
+}
+
+static void
+HighlightElementDraw(void *clientData, void *elementRecord,
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    HighlightElement *hl = elementRecord;
+    int highlightThickness = 0;
+    XColor *highlightColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, hl->highlightColorObj);
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,hl->highlightThicknessObj,&highlightThickness);
+    if (highlightColor && highlightThickness > 0) {
+	GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(highlightColor, d);
+	Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, highlightThickness, d);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec HighlightElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(HighlightElement),
+    HighlightElementOptions,
+    HighlightElementSize,
+    HighlightElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Button Border element:
+ * 
+ * The Motif-style button border on X11 consists of (from outside-in):
+ *
+ * + focus indicator (controlled by -highlightcolor and -highlightthickness),
+ * + default ring (if -default active; blank if -default normal)
+ * + shaded border (controlled by -background, -borderwidth, and -relief)
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*defaultStateObj;
+} ButtonBorderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ButtonBorderElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, 
+	Tk_Offset(ButtonBorderElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, 
+	Tk_Offset(ButtonBorderElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, 
+	Tk_Offset(ButtonBorderElement,reliefObj), "flat" },
+    { "-default", TK_OPTION_ANY, 
+	Tk_Offset(ButtonBorderElement,defaultStateObj), "disabled" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void
+ButtonBorderElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ButtonBorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    int defaultState = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+    int borderWidth = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(NULL, bd->defaultStateObj, &defaultState);
+
+    if (defaultState != TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED) {
+	borderWidth += 5;
+    }
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+/*
+ * (@@@ Note: ButtonBorderElement still still still buggy:
+ * padding for default ring is drawn in the wrong color 
+ * when the button is active.)
+ */
+static void
+ButtonBorderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    ButtonBorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = NULL;
+    int borderWidth = 1, relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+    int defaultState = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+    int inset = 0;
+
+    /*
+     * Get option values.
+     */
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, bd->borderObj);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, bd->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(NULL, bd->defaultStateObj, &defaultState);
+
+    /*
+     * Default ring:
+     */
+    switch (defaultState)
+    {
+	case TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED :
+	    break;
+	case TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_NORMAL :
+	    inset += 5;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_ACTIVE :
+            Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+		b.x+inset, b.y+inset, b.width - 2*inset, b.height - 2*inset,
+		2, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+            inset += 2;
+            Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+		b.x+inset, b.y+inset, b.width - 2*inset, b.height - 2*inset,
+		1, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+	    ++inset;
+            Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+		b.x+inset, b.y+inset, b.width - 2*inset, b.height - 2*inset,
+		2, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+	    inset += 2;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * 3-D border:
+     */
+    if (border && borderWidth > 0) {
+	Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	    b.x+inset, b.y+inset, b.width - 2*inset, b.height - 2*inset,
+	    borderWidth,relief);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ButtonBorderElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ButtonBorderElement),
+    ButtonBorderElementOptions,
+    ButtonBorderElementSize,
+    ButtonBorderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Arrow element(s).
+ *
+ * Draws a 3-D shaded triangle.
+ * clientData is an enum ArrowDirection pointer.
+ */
+
+static int ArrowElements[] = { ARROW_UP, ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT };
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+} ArrowElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ArrowElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,sizeObj),
+	DEFAULT_ARROW_SIZE },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderWidthObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,reliefObj),"raised" },
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static void ArrowElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    int size = 12;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->sizeObj, &size);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = size;
+}
+
+static void ArrowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    int direction = *(int *)clientData;
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border;
+    int borderWidth;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int size;
+    XPoint points[3];
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, arrow->borderObj);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, arrow->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    size = b.width < b.height ? b.width : b.height;
+
+    /*
+     * @@@ There are off-by-one pixel errors in the way these are drawn;
+     * @@@ need to take a look at Tk_Fill3DPolygon and X11 to find the
+     * @@@ exact rules.
+     */
+    switch (direction)
+    {
+	case ARROW_UP:
+	    points[2].x = b.x; 		points[2].y = b.y + size;
+	    points[1].x = b.x + size/2;	points[1].y = b.y;
+	    points[0].x = b.x + size;	points[0].y = b.y + size;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_DOWN:
+	    points[0].x = b.x; 		points[0].y = b.y;
+	    points[1].x = b.x + size/2;	points[1].y = b.y + size;
+	    points[2].x = b.x + size;	points[2].y = b.y;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_LEFT:
+	    points[0].x = b.x; 		points[0].y = b.y + size / 2;
+	    points[1].x = b.x + size;	points[1].y = b.y + size;
+	    points[2].x = b.x + size;	points[2].y = b.y;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_RIGHT:
+	    points[0].x = b.x + size;	points[0].y = b.y + size / 2;
+	    points[1].x = b.x;		points[1].y = b.y;
+	    points[2].x = b.x;		points[2].y = b.y + size;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    Tk_Fill3DPolygon(tkwin, d, border, points, 3, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ArrowElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ArrowElement),
+    ArrowElementOptions,
+    ArrowElementSize,
+    ArrowElementDraw
+};
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Sash element (for ttk::paned window)
+ *
+ * NOTES: 
+ *
+ * Paned windows with -orient horizontal use vertical sashes,
+ * and vice versa.
+ *
+ * Interpretation of -sashrelief 'groove' and 'ridge' are
+ * swapped wrt. the core panedwindow, which (I think) has them backwards.
+ *
+ * Default -sashrelief is sunken; the core panedwindow has default 
+ * -sashrelief raised, but that looks wrong to me.
+ */
+
+static Ttk_Orient SashClientData[] = {
+    TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL, TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL 
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj; 	/* background color */
+    Tcl_Obj *sashReliefObj;	/* sash relief */
+    Tcl_Obj *sashThicknessObj;	/* overall thickness of sash */
+    Tcl_Obj *sashPadObj;	/* padding on either side of handle */
+    Tcl_Obj *handleSizeObj;	/* handle width and height */
+    Tcl_Obj *handlePadObj;	/* handle's distance from edge */
+} SashElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SashOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, 
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-sashrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, 
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,sashReliefObj), "sunken" },
+    { "-sashthickness", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,sashThicknessObj), "6" },
+    { "-sashpad", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, 
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,sashPadObj), "2" },
+    { "-handlesize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,handleSizeObj), "8" },
+    { "-handlepad", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(SashElement,handlePadObj), "8" },
+    {0,0,0}
+};
+
+static void SashElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SashElement *sash = elementRecord;
+    int sashPad = 2, sashThickness = 6, handleSize = 8;
+    int horizontal = *((Ttk_Orient*)clientData) == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sash->sashThicknessObj, &sashThickness);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sash->handleSizeObj, &handleSize);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sash->sashPadObj, &sashPad);
+
+    if (sashThickness < handleSize + 2*sashPad)
+	sashThickness = handleSize + 2*sashPad;
+
+    if (horizontal)
+	*heightPtr = sashThickness;
+    else
+	*widthPtr = sashThickness;
+}
+
+static void SashElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    SashElement *sash = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, sash->borderObj);
+    GC gc1,gc2;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int handleSize = 8, handlePad = 8;
+    int horizontal = *((Ttk_Orient*)clientData) == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    Ttk_Box hb;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sash->handleSizeObj, &handleSize);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, sash->handlePadObj, &handlePad);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, sash->sashReliefObj, &relief);
+
+    switch (relief) {
+	case TK_RELIEF_RAISED: case TK_RELIEF_RIDGE:
+	    gc1 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC);
+	    gc2 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN: case TK_RELIEF_GROOVE:
+	    gc1 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+	    gc2 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC);
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SOLID: 
+	    gc1 = gc2 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_FLAT: 
+	default:
+	    gc1 = gc2 = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_FLAT_GC);
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    /* Draw sash line:
+     */
+    if (horizontal) {
+	int y = b.y + b.height/2 - 1;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc1, b.x, y, b.x+b.width, y); ++y;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc2, b.x, y, b.x+b.width, y);
+    } else {
+	int x = b.x + b.width/2 - 1;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc1, x, b.y, x, b.y+b.height); ++x;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc2, x, b.y, x, b.y+b.height);
+    }
+
+    /* Draw handle:
+     */
+    if (handleSize >= 0) {
+	if (horizontal) {
+	    hb = Ttk_StickBox(b, handleSize, handleSize, TTK_STICK_W);
+	    hb.x += handlePad;
+	} else {
+	    hb = Ttk_StickBox(b, handleSize, handleSize, TTK_STICK_N);
+	    hb.y += handlePad;
+	}
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, 
+	    hb.x, hb.y, hb.width, hb.height, 1, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SashElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SashElement),
+    SashOptions,
+    SashElementSize,
+    SashElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget layouts.
+ */
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(ButtonLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Button.highlight", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+        TTK_GROUP("Button.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Button.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	        TTK_NODE("Button.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH))))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(CheckbuttonLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Checkbutton.highlight", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+        TTK_GROUP("Checkbutton.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Checkbutton.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	        TTK_NODE("Checkbutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	        TTK_NODE("Checkbutton.label", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_FILL_BOTH))))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(RadiobuttonLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Radiobutton.highlight", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+        TTK_GROUP("Radiobutton.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Radiobutton.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	        TTK_NODE("Radiobutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	        TTK_NODE("Radiobutton.label", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_FILL_BOTH))))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(MenubuttonLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.highlight", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+        TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Menubutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_RIGHT)
+	    TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.padding", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_EXPAND|TTK_FILL_X,
+	        TTK_NODE("Menubutton.label", 0))))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/* "classic" entry, includes highlight border */
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(EntryLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Entry.highlight", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+        TTK_GROUP("Entry.field", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Entry.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	        TTK_NODE("Entry.textarea", TTK_FILL_BOTH))))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/* Notebook tabs -- omit focus ring */
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(TabLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Notebook.tab", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_GROUP("Notebook.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Notebook.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/* POSSIBLY: include Scale layouts w/focus border
+ */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * ClassicTheme_Init --
+ * 	Install classic theme.
+ */
+
+int ClassicTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme =  Ttk_CreateTheme(interp, "classic", NULL);
+
+    if (!theme) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Register elements:
+     */
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "highlight",
+	    &HighlightElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Button.border",
+	    &ButtonBorderElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "uparrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "downarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[1]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "leftarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[2]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "rightarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[3]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "arrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "hsash", 
+	    &SashElementSpec, &SashClientData[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "vsash",
+	    &SashElementSpec, &SashClientData[1]);
+
+    /*
+     * Register layouts:
+     */
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TButton", ButtonLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TCheckbutton", CheckbuttonLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TRadiobutton", RadiobuttonLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TMenubutton", MenubuttonLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TEntry", EntryLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TNotebook.Tab", TabLayout);
+
+    Tcl_PkgProvide(interp, "ttk::theme::classic", TTK_VERSION);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkDecls.h b/generic/ttk/ttkDecls.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20fcd85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkDecls.h
@@ -0,0 +1,336 @@
+/*
+ * $Id: ttkDecls.h,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * This file is (mostly) automatically generated from ttk.decls.
+ */
+
+
+#if defined(USE_TTK_STUBS)
+
+extern const char *TtkInitializeStubs(
+	Tcl_Interp *, const char *version, int epoch, int revision);
+#define Ttk_InitStubs(interp) TtkInitializeStubs( \
+	interp, TTK_VERSION, TTK_STUBS_EPOCH, TTK_STUBS_REVISION)
+#else
+
+#define Ttk_InitStubs(interp) Tcl_PkgRequire(interp,"ttk",TTK_VERSION)
+
+#endif
+
+
+/* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */
+
+#define TTK_STUBS_EPOCH 0
+#define TTK_STUBS_REVISION 31
+
+#if !defined(USE_TTK_STUBS)
+
+/*
+ * Exported function declarations:
+ */
+
+/* 0 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme	Ttk_GetTheme (Tcl_Interp * interp, const char * name);
+/* 1 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme	Ttk_GetDefaultTheme (Tcl_Interp * interp);
+/* 2 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme	Ttk_GetCurrentTheme (Tcl_Interp * interp);
+/* 3 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme	Ttk_CreateTheme (Tcl_Interp * interp, 
+				const char * name, Ttk_Theme parent);
+/* 4 */
+TTKAPI void		Ttk_RegisterCleanup (Tcl_Interp * interp, 
+				void * deleteData, 
+				Ttk_CleanupProc * cleanupProc);
+/* 5 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_RegisterElementSpec (Ttk_Theme theme, 
+				const char * elementName, 
+				Ttk_ElementSpec * elementSpec, 
+				void * clientData);
+/* 6 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Element	Ttk_RegisterElement (Tcl_Interp * interp, 
+				Ttk_Theme theme, const char * elementName, 
+				Ttk_ElementSpec * elementSpec, 
+				void * clientData);
+/* 7 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_RegisterElementFactory (Tcl_Interp * interp, 
+				const char * name, 
+				Ttk_ElementFactory factoryProc, 
+				void * clientData);
+/* 8 */
+TTKAPI void		Ttk_RegisterLayout (Ttk_Theme theme, 
+				const char * className, 
+				Ttk_LayoutSpec layoutSpec);
+/* Slot 9 is reserved */
+/* 10 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, 
+				Tcl_Obj * objPtr, Ttk_StateSpec * spec_rtn);
+/* 11 */
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *	Ttk_NewStateSpecObj (unsigned int onbits, 
+				unsigned int offbits);
+/* 12 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_StateMap	Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, 
+				Tcl_Obj * objPtr);
+/* 13 */
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *	Ttk_StateMapLookup (Tcl_Interp * interp, 
+				Ttk_StateMap map, Ttk_State state);
+/* 14 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_StateTableLookup (Ttk_StateTable map[], 
+				Ttk_State state);
+/* Slot 15 is reserved */
+/* Slot 16 is reserved */
+/* Slot 17 is reserved */
+/* Slot 18 is reserved */
+/* Slot 19 is reserved */
+/* 20 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, 
+				Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, 
+				Ttk_Padding * pad_rtn);
+/* 21 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_GetBorderFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, 
+				Tcl_Obj * objPtr, Ttk_Padding * pad_rtn);
+/* 22 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_GetStickyFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, 
+				Tcl_Obj * objPtr, Ttk_Sticky * sticky_rtn);
+/* 23 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding	Ttk_MakePadding (short l, short t, short r, short b);
+/* 24 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding	Ttk_UniformPadding (short borderWidth);
+/* 25 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding	Ttk_AddPadding (Ttk_Padding pad1, Ttk_Padding pad2);
+/* 26 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding	Ttk_RelievePadding (Ttk_Padding padding, int relief, 
+				int n);
+/* 27 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_MakeBox (int x, int y, int width, int height);
+/* 28 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_BoxContains (Ttk_Box box, int x, int y);
+/* 29 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_PackBox (Ttk_Box * cavity, int w, int h, 
+				Ttk_Side side);
+/* 30 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_StickBox (Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, 
+				Ttk_Sticky sticky);
+/* 31 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_AnchorBox (Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, 
+				Tk_Anchor anchor);
+/* 32 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_PadBox (Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+/* 33 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_ExpandBox (Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+/* 34 */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box		Ttk_PlaceBox (Ttk_Box * cavity, int w, int h, 
+				Ttk_Side side, Ttk_Sticky sticky);
+/* 35 */
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *	Ttk_NewBoxObj (Ttk_Box box);
+/* Slot 36 is reserved */
+/* Slot 37 is reserved */
+/* Slot 38 is reserved */
+/* Slot 39 is reserved */
+/* 40 */
+TTKAPI int		Ttk_GetOrientFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, 
+				Tcl_Obj * objPtr, int * orient);
+
+#endif /* !defined(USE_TTK_STUBS) */
+
+typedef struct TtkStubs {
+    int magic;
+    int epoch;
+    int revision;
+    struct TtkStubHooks *hooks;
+
+    Ttk_Theme (*ttk_GetTheme) (Tcl_Interp * interp, const char * name); /* 0 */
+    Ttk_Theme (*ttk_GetDefaultTheme) (Tcl_Interp * interp); /* 1 */
+    Ttk_Theme (*ttk_GetCurrentTheme) (Tcl_Interp * interp); /* 2 */
+    Ttk_Theme (*ttk_CreateTheme) (Tcl_Interp * interp, const char * name, Ttk_Theme parent); /* 3 */
+    void (*ttk_RegisterCleanup) (Tcl_Interp * interp, void * deleteData, Ttk_CleanupProc * cleanupProc); /* 4 */
+    int (*ttk_RegisterElementSpec) (Ttk_Theme theme, const char * elementName, Ttk_ElementSpec * elementSpec, void * clientData); /* 5 */
+    Ttk_Element (*ttk_RegisterElement) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Ttk_Theme theme, const char * elementName, Ttk_ElementSpec * elementSpec, void * clientData); /* 6 */
+    int (*ttk_RegisterElementFactory) (Tcl_Interp * interp, const char * name, Ttk_ElementFactory factoryProc, void * clientData); /* 7 */
+    void (*ttk_RegisterLayout) (Ttk_Theme theme, const char * className, Ttk_LayoutSpec layoutSpec); /* 8 */
+    void (*reserved9)(void);
+    int (*ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, Ttk_StateSpec * spec_rtn); /* 10 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*ttk_NewStateSpecObj) (unsigned int onbits, unsigned int offbits); /* 11 */
+    Ttk_StateMap (*ttk_GetStateMapFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 12 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*ttk_StateMapLookup) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Ttk_StateMap map, Ttk_State state); /* 13 */
+    int (*ttk_StateTableLookup) (Ttk_StateTable map[], Ttk_State state); /* 14 */
+    void (*reserved15)(void);
+    void (*reserved16)(void);
+    void (*reserved17)(void);
+    void (*reserved18)(void);
+    void (*reserved19)(void);
+    int (*ttk_GetPaddingFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, Ttk_Padding * pad_rtn); /* 20 */
+    int (*ttk_GetBorderFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, Ttk_Padding * pad_rtn); /* 21 */
+    int (*ttk_GetStickyFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, Ttk_Sticky * sticky_rtn); /* 22 */
+    Ttk_Padding (*ttk_MakePadding) (short l, short t, short r, short b); /* 23 */
+    Ttk_Padding (*ttk_UniformPadding) (short borderWidth); /* 24 */
+    Ttk_Padding (*ttk_AddPadding) (Ttk_Padding pad1, Ttk_Padding pad2); /* 25 */
+    Ttk_Padding (*ttk_RelievePadding) (Ttk_Padding padding, int relief, int n); /* 26 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_MakeBox) (int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 27 */
+    int (*ttk_BoxContains) (Ttk_Box box, int x, int y); /* 28 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_PackBox) (Ttk_Box * cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side); /* 29 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_StickBox) (Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Ttk_Sticky sticky); /* 30 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_AnchorBox) (Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Tk_Anchor anchor); /* 31 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_PadBox) (Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p); /* 32 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_ExpandBox) (Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p); /* 33 */
+    Ttk_Box (*ttk_PlaceBox) (Ttk_Box * cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side, Ttk_Sticky sticky); /* 34 */
+    Tcl_Obj * (*ttk_NewBoxObj) (Ttk_Box box); /* 35 */
+    void (*reserved36)(void);
+    void (*reserved37)(void);
+    void (*reserved38)(void);
+    void (*reserved39)(void);
+    int (*ttk_GetOrientFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, int * orient); /* 40 */
+} TtkStubs;
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+extern const TtkStubs *ttkStubsPtr;
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#if defined(USE_TTK_STUBS)
+
+/*
+ * Inline function declarations:
+ */
+
+#ifndef Ttk_GetTheme
+#define Ttk_GetTheme \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetTheme) /* 0 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_GetDefaultTheme
+#define Ttk_GetDefaultTheme \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetDefaultTheme) /* 1 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_GetCurrentTheme
+#define Ttk_GetCurrentTheme \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetCurrentTheme) /* 2 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_CreateTheme
+#define Ttk_CreateTheme \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_CreateTheme) /* 3 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_RegisterCleanup
+#define Ttk_RegisterCleanup \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RegisterCleanup) /* 4 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_RegisterElementSpec
+#define Ttk_RegisterElementSpec \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RegisterElementSpec) /* 5 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_RegisterElement
+#define Ttk_RegisterElement \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RegisterElement) /* 6 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_RegisterElementFactory
+#define Ttk_RegisterElementFactory \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RegisterElementFactory) /* 7 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_RegisterLayout
+#define Ttk_RegisterLayout \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RegisterLayout) /* 8 */
+#endif
+/* Slot 9 is reserved */
+#ifndef Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj
+#define Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj) /* 10 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_NewStateSpecObj
+#define Ttk_NewStateSpecObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_NewStateSpecObj) /* 11 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj
+#define Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetStateMapFromObj) /* 12 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_StateMapLookup
+#define Ttk_StateMapLookup \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_StateMapLookup) /* 13 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_StateTableLookup
+#define Ttk_StateTableLookup \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_StateTableLookup) /* 14 */
+#endif
+/* Slot 15 is reserved */
+/* Slot 16 is reserved */
+/* Slot 17 is reserved */
+/* Slot 18 is reserved */
+/* Slot 19 is reserved */
+#ifndef Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj
+#define Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetPaddingFromObj) /* 20 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_GetBorderFromObj
+#define Ttk_GetBorderFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetBorderFromObj) /* 21 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_GetStickyFromObj
+#define Ttk_GetStickyFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetStickyFromObj) /* 22 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_MakePadding
+#define Ttk_MakePadding \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_MakePadding) /* 23 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_UniformPadding
+#define Ttk_UniformPadding \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_UniformPadding) /* 24 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_AddPadding
+#define Ttk_AddPadding \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_AddPadding) /* 25 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_RelievePadding
+#define Ttk_RelievePadding \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_RelievePadding) /* 26 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_MakeBox
+#define Ttk_MakeBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_MakeBox) /* 27 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_BoxContains
+#define Ttk_BoxContains \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_BoxContains) /* 28 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_PackBox
+#define Ttk_PackBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_PackBox) /* 29 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_StickBox
+#define Ttk_StickBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_StickBox) /* 30 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_AnchorBox
+#define Ttk_AnchorBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_AnchorBox) /* 31 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_PadBox
+#define Ttk_PadBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_PadBox) /* 32 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_ExpandBox
+#define Ttk_ExpandBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_ExpandBox) /* 33 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_PlaceBox
+#define Ttk_PlaceBox \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_PlaceBox) /* 34 */
+#endif
+#ifndef Ttk_NewBoxObj
+#define Ttk_NewBoxObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_NewBoxObj) /* 35 */
+#endif
+/* Slot 36 is reserved */
+/* Slot 37 is reserved */
+/* Slot 38 is reserved */
+/* Slot 39 is reserved */
+#ifndef Ttk_GetOrientFromObj
+#define Ttk_GetOrientFromObj \
+	(ttkStubsPtr->ttk_GetOrientFromObj) /* 40 */
+#endif
+
+#endif /* defined(USE_TTK_STUBS) */
+
+/* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkDefaultTheme.c b/generic/ttk/ttkDefaultTheme.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..86f169a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkDefaultTheme.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1162 @@
+/* $Id: ttkDefaultTheme.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Tk alternate theme, intended to match the MSUE and Gtk's (old) default theme
+ */
+
+#include <math.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <tkInt.h>
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+#include <X11/Xutil.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+#if defined(WIN32)
+static const int WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK = 1;
+#else
+static const int WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK = 0;
+#endif
+
+#define MIN(a,b) (a < b ? a : b)
+
+#define BORDERWIDTH     2
+#define SCROLLBAR_WIDTH 14
+#define MIN_THUMB_SIZE  8
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Helper routines for border drawing:
+ *
+ * NOTE: MSUE specifies a slightly different arrangement
+ * for button borders than for other elements; "shadowColors"
+ * is for button borders.
+ *
+ * Please excuse the gross misspelling "LITE" for "LIGHT",
+ * but it makes things line up nicer.
+ */
+
+enum BorderColor { FLAT = 1, LITE = 2, DARK = 3, BRDR = 4 };
+
+/* top-left outer, top-left inner, bottom-right inner, bottom-right outer */
+static int shadowColors[6][4] =
+{
+    { FLAT, FLAT, FLAT, FLAT },	/* TK_RELIEF_FLAT   = 0*/
+    { DARK, LITE, DARK, LITE },	/* TK_RELIEF_GROOVE = 1*/
+    { LITE, FLAT, DARK, BRDR },	/* TK_RELIEF_RAISED = 2*/
+    { LITE, DARK, LITE, DARK },	/* TK_RELIEF_RIDGE  = 3*/
+    { BRDR, BRDR, BRDR, BRDR },	/* TK_RELIEF_SOLID  = 4*/
+    { BRDR, DARK, FLAT, LITE }	/* TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN = 5*/
+};
+
+/* top-left, bottom-right */
+int thinShadowColors[6][4] =
+{
+    { FLAT, FLAT },	/* TK_RELIEF_FLAT   = 0*/
+    { DARK, LITE },	/* TK_RELIEF_GROOVE = 1*/
+    { LITE, DARK },	/* TK_RELIEF_RAISED = 2*/
+    { LITE, DARK },	/* TK_RELIEF_RIDGE  = 3*/
+    { BRDR, BRDR },	/* TK_RELIEF_SOLID  = 4*/
+    { DARK, LITE }	/* TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN = 5*/
+};
+
+static void DrawCorner(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d,
+    Tk_3DBorder border,			/* get most GCs from here... */
+    GC borderGC,			/* "window border" color GC */
+    int x,int y, int width,int height,	/* where to draw */
+    int corner,				/* 0 => top left; 1 => bottom right */
+    enum BorderColor color)
+{
+    XPoint points[3];
+    GC gc;
+
+    --width; --height;
+    points[0].x = x;			points[0].y = y+height;
+    points[1].x = x+width*corner;	points[1].y = y+height*corner;
+    points[2].x = x+width;		points[2].y = y;
+
+    if (color == BRDR)
+	gc = borderGC;
+    else
+	gc = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, (int)color);
+
+    XDrawLines(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, points, 3, CoordModeOrigin);
+}
+
+static void DrawBorder(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tk_3DBorder border, XColor *borderColor,
+    Ttk_Box b, int borderWidth, int relief)
+{
+    GC borderGC = Tk_GCForColor(borderColor, d);
+
+    switch (borderWidth) {
+	case 2: /* "thick" border */
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 0,shadowColors[relief][0]);
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x+1, b.y+1, b.width-2, b.height-2, 0,shadowColors[relief][1]);
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x+1, b.y+1, b.width-2, b.height-2, 1,shadowColors[relief][2]);
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 1,shadowColors[relief][3]);
+	    break;
+	case 1: /* "thin" border */
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 0, thinShadowColors[relief][0]);
+	    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+		b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 1, thinShadowColors[relief][1]);
+	    break;
+	case 0:	/* no border -- do nothing */
+	    break;
+	default: /* Fall back to Motif-style borders: */
+	    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+		b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth,relief);
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+/* Alternate shadow colors for entry fields:
+ * NOTE: FLAT color is normally white, and the LITE color is a darker shade.
+ */
+static int fieldShadowColors[4] = { DARK, BRDR, LITE, FLAT };
+
+static void DrawFieldBorder(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tk_3DBorder border, XColor *borderColor,
+    Ttk_Box b)
+{
+    GC borderGC = Tk_GCForColor(borderColor, d);
+    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 0,fieldShadowColors[0]);
+    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+	b.x+1, b.y+1, b.width-2, b.height-2, 0,fieldShadowColors[1]);
+    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+	b.x+1, b.y+1, b.width-2, b.height-2, 1,fieldShadowColors[2]);
+    DrawCorner(tkwin, d, border, borderGC,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 1,fieldShadowColors[3]);
+    return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * ArrowPoints --
+ * 	Compute points of arrow polygon.
+ */
+static void ArrowPoints(Ttk_Box b, ArrowDirection dir, XPoint points[4])
+{
+    int cx, cy, h;
+
+    switch (dir) {
+	case ARROW_UP:
+	    h = (b.width - 1)/2;
+	    cx = b.x + h;
+	    cy = b.y;
+	    if (b.height <= h) h = b.height - 1;
+	    points[0].x = cx;		points[0].y = cy;
+	    points[1].x = cx - h;  	points[1].y = cy + h;
+	    points[2].x = cx + h; 	points[2].y = cy + h;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_DOWN:
+	    h = (b.width - 1)/2;
+	    cx = b.x + h;
+	    cy = b.y + b.height - 1;
+	    if (b.height <= h) h = b.height - 1;
+	    points[0].x = cx; 		points[0].y = cy;
+	    points[1].x = cx - h;	points[1].y = cy - h;
+	    points[2].x = cx + h; 	points[2].y = cy - h;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_LEFT:
+	    h = (b.height - 1)/2;
+	    cx = b.x;
+	    cy = b.y + h;
+	    if (b.width <= h) h = b.width - 1;
+	    points[0].x = cx; 		points[0].y = cy;
+	    points[1].x = cx + h;	points[1].y = cy - h;
+	    points[2].x = cx + h; 	points[2].y = cy + h;
+	    break;
+	case ARROW_RIGHT:
+	    h = (b.height - 1)/2;
+	    cx = b.x + b.width - 1;
+	    cy = b.y + h;
+	    if (b.width <= h) h = b.width - 1;
+	    points[0].x = cx; 		points[0].y = cy;
+	    points[1].x = cx - h;	points[1].y = cy - h;
+	    points[2].x = cx - h; 	points[2].y = cy + h;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    points[3].x = points[0].x;
+    points[3].y = points[0].y;
+}
+
+/*public*/
+void ArrowSize(int h, ArrowDirection dir, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    switch (dir) {
+	case ARROW_UP:
+	case ARROW_DOWN:	*widthPtr = 2*h+1; *heightPtr = h+1; break;
+	case ARROW_LEFT:
+	case ARROW_RIGHT:	*widthPtr = h+1; *heightPtr = 2*h+1;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * DrawArrow, FillArrow --
+ * 	Draw an arrow in the indicated direction inside the specified box.
+ */
+/*public*/ 
+void FillArrow(
+    Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, Ttk_Box b, ArrowDirection dir)
+{
+    XPoint points[4];
+    ArrowPoints(b, dir, points);
+    XFillPolygon(display, d, gc, points, 3, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
+    XDrawLines(display, d, gc, points, 4, CoordModeOrigin);
+}
+
+/*public*/ 
+void DrawArrow(
+    Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, Ttk_Box b, ArrowDirection dir)
+{
+    XPoint points[4];
+    ArrowPoints(b, dir, points);
+    XDrawLines(display, d, gc, points, 4, CoordModeOrigin);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Border element implementation.
+ *
+ * This border consists of (from outside-in):
+ *
+ * + a 1-pixel thick default indicator (defaultable widgets only)
+ * + 1- or 2- pixel shaded border (controlled by -background and -relief)
+ * + 1 pixel padding (???)
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderColorObj;	/* Extra border color */
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*defaultStateObj;	/* for buttons */
+} BorderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec BorderElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-bordercolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderColorObj), "black" },
+    { "-default", TK_OPTION_ANY, Tk_Offset(BorderElement,defaultStateObj),
+    	"disabled" },
+    { "-borderwidth",TK_OPTION_PIXELS,Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderWidthObj),
+    	STRINGIFY(BORDERWIDTH) },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(BorderElement,reliefObj),
+    	"flat" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void BorderElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    BorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 0;
+    int defaultState = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(NULL, bd->defaultStateObj, &defaultState);
+
+    if (defaultState != TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED) {
+	++borderWidth;
+    }
+
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void
+BorderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord,
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    BorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, bd->borderObj);
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, bd->borderColorObj);
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+    int defaultState = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+
+    /*
+     * Get option values.
+     */
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, bd->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(NULL, bd->defaultStateObj, &defaultState);
+
+    if (defaultState == TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_ACTIVE) {
+	GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(borderColor, d);
+	XDrawRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, 
+		b.x, b.y, b.width-1, b.height-1);
+    }
+    if (defaultState != TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED) {
+	/* Space for default ring: */
+	b = Ttk_PadBox(b, Ttk_UniformPadding(1));
+    }
+
+    DrawBorder(tkwin, d, border, borderColor, b, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec BorderElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(BorderElement),
+    BorderElementOptions,
+    BorderElementSize,
+    BorderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Field element:
+ * 	Used for editable fields.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderColorObj;	/* Extra border color */
+} FieldElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec FieldElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-fieldbackground", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(FieldElement,borderObj),
+    	"white" },
+    { "-bordercolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR, Tk_Offset(FieldElement,borderColorObj),
+	"black" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void FieldElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding(2);
+}
+
+static void FieldElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    FieldElement *field = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, field->borderObj);
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, field->borderColorObj);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(
+	tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+    DrawFieldBorder(tkwin, d, border, borderColor, b);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec FieldElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(FieldElement),
+    FieldElementOptions,
+    FieldElementSize,
+    FieldElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * Indicators --
+ *
+ * 	Code derived (probably incorrectly) from TIP 109 implementation,
+ * 	unix/tkUnixButton.c r 1.15.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Indicator bitmap descriptor:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    int width;		/* Width of each image */
+    int height;		/* Height of each image */
+    int nimages;	/* #images / row */
+    char **pixels;	/* array[height] of char[width*nimage] */
+    Ttk_StateTable *map;/* used to look up image index by state */
+} IndicatorSpec;
+
+#if 0
+/*XPM*/
+static char *button_images[] = {
+    /* width height ncolors chars_per_pixel */
+    "52 26 7 1",
+    /* colors */
+    "A c #808000000000 s background",
+    "B c #000080800000 s background",
+    "C c #808080800000 s highlight",
+    "D c #000000008080 s select",
+    "E c #808000008080 s shadow",
+    "F c #000080808080 s background",
+    "G c #000000000000 s indicator",
+    "H c #000080800000 s disabled",
+};
+#endif
+
+Ttk_StateTable checkbutton_states[] =
+{
+    { 0, 0, TTK_STATE_SELECTED|TTK_STATE_DISABLED },
+    { 1, TTK_STATE_SELECTED, TTK_STATE_DISABLED },
+    { 2, TTK_STATE_DISABLED, TTK_STATE_SELECTED },
+    { 3, TTK_STATE_SELECTED|TTK_STATE_DISABLED, 0 },
+    { 0, 0, 0 }
+};
+static char *checkbutton_pixels[] = {
+    "AAAAAAAAAAAABAAAAAAAAAAAABAAAAAAAAAAAABAAAAAAAAAAAAB",
+    "AEEEEEEEEEECBAEEEEEEEEEECBAEEEEEEEEEECBAEEEEEEEEEECB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDDDDDDDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFFFFFFFFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDDDDDDGDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFFFFFFHFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDDDDDGGDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFFFFFHHFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDGDDDGGGDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFHFFFHHHFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDGGDGGGDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFHHFHHHFFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDGGGGGDDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFHHHHHFFFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDGGGDDDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFHHHFFFFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDDGDDDDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFFHFFFFFCB",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDDCBAEDDDDDDDDDCBAEFFFFFFFFFCBAEFFFFFFFFFCB",
+    "ACCCCCCCCCCCBACCCCCCCCCCCBACCCCCCCCCCCBACCCCCCCCCCCB",
+    "BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB",
+};
+
+IndicatorSpec checkbutton_spec =
+{
+    13, 13, 4,		/* width, height, nimages */
+    checkbutton_pixels,
+    checkbutton_states
+};
+
+Ttk_StateTable radiobutton_states[] =
+{
+    { 0, 0, TTK_STATE_SELECTED|TTK_STATE_DISABLED },
+    { 1, TTK_STATE_SELECTED, TTK_STATE_DISABLED },
+    { 2, TTK_STATE_DISABLED, TTK_STATE_SELECTED },
+    { 3, TTK_STATE_SELECTED|TTK_STATE_DISABLED, 0 },
+    { 0, 0, 0 }
+};
+
+static char *radiobutton_pixels[] = {
+    "FFFFAAAAFFFFFFFFFAAAAFFFFFFFFFAAAAFFFFFFFFFAAAAFFFFF",
+    "FFAAEEEEAAFFFFFAAEEEEAAFFFFFAAEEEEAAFFFFFAAEEEEAAFFF",
+    "FAEEDDDDECBFFFAEEDDDDECBFFFAEEFFFFECBFFFAEEFFFFECBFF",
+    "FAEDDDDDDCBFFFAEDDDDDDCBFFFAEFFFFFFCBFFFAEFFFFFFCBFF",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDCBFAEDDDGGDDDCBFAEFFFFFFFFCBFAEFFFHHFFFCBF",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDCBFAEDDGGGGDDCBFAEFFFFFFFFCBFAEFFHHHHFFCBF",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDCBFAEDDGGGGDDCBFAEFFFFFFFFCBFAEFFHHHHFFCBF",
+    "AEDDDDDDDDCBFAEDDDGGDDDCBFAEFFFFFFFFCBFAEFFFHHFFFCBF",
+    "FAEDDDDDDCBFFFAEDDDDDDCBFFFAEFFFFFFCBFFFAEFFFFFFCBFF",
+    "FACCDDDDCCBFFFACCDDDDCCBFFFACCFFFFCCBFFFACCFFFFCCBFF",
+    "FFBBCCCCBBFFFFFBBCCCCBBFFFFFBBCCCCBBFFFFFBBCCCCBBFFF",
+    "FFFFBBBBFFFFFFFFFBBBBFFFFFFFFFBBBBFFFFFFFFFBBBBFFFFF",
+    "FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF",
+};
+
+IndicatorSpec radiobutton_spec =
+{
+    13, 13, 4,		/* width, height, nimages */
+    radiobutton_pixels,
+    radiobutton_states
+};
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *lightColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *shadeColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginObj;
+} IndicatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec IndicatorElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,foregroundObj), DEFAULT_FOREGROUND },
+    { "-indicatorcolor", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,colorObj), "#FFFFFF" },
+    { "-lightcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,lightColorObj), "#DDDDDD" },
+    { "-shadecolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,shadeColorObj), "#888888" },
+    { "-indicatormargin", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	    Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,marginObj), "0 2 4 2" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void IndicatorElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    IndicatorSpec *spec = clientData;
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, paddingPtr);
+    *widthPtr = spec->width;
+    *heightPtr = spec->height;
+}
+
+static void IndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    IndicatorSpec *spec = clientData;
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    Tk_3DBorder bgBorder;
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+    XColor *fgColor, *bgColor, *lightColor, *shadeColor, *selectColor;
+
+    int index, ix, iy;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    GC copyGC;
+    unsigned long imgColors[8];
+    XImage *img;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, &padding);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    if (   b.x < 0
+	|| b.y < 0
+	|| Tk_Width(tkwin) < b.x + spec->width
+	|| Tk_Height(tkwin) < b.y + spec->height)
+    {
+	/* Oops!  not enough room to display the image.
+	 * Don't draw anything.
+	 */
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Fill in imgColors palette:
+     *
+     * (SHOULD: take light and shade colors from the border object,
+     * but Tk doesn't provide easy access to these in the public API.)
+     */
+    fgColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->foregroundObj);
+    bgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, indicator->backgroundObj);
+    bgColor = Tk_3DBorderColor(bgBorder);
+    lightColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->lightColorObj);
+    shadeColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->shadeColorObj);
+    selectColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+
+    imgColors[0 /*A*/] = bgColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[1 /*B*/] = bgColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[2 /*C*/] = lightColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[3 /*D*/] = selectColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[4 /*E*/] = shadeColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[5 /*F*/] = bgColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[6 /*G*/] = fgColor->pixel;
+    imgColors[7 /*H*/] = selectColor->pixel;
+
+    /*
+     * Create a scratch buffer to store the image:
+     */
+    img = XGetImage(display,d, 0, 0,
+	    (unsigned int)spec->width, (unsigned int)spec->height,
+	    AllPlanes, ZPixmap);
+    if (img == NULL)
+	return;
+
+    /*
+     * Create the image, painting it into an XImage one pixel at a time.
+     */
+    index = Ttk_StateTableLookup(spec->map, state);
+    for (iy=0 ; iy<spec->height ; iy++) {
+	for (ix=0 ; ix<spec->width ; ix++) {
+	    XPutPixel(img, ix, iy,
+		imgColors[spec->pixels[iy][index*spec->width+ix] - 'A'] );
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Copy onto our target drawable surface.
+     */
+    memset(&gcValues, 0, sizeof(gcValues));
+    copyGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, 0, &gcValues);
+
+    TkPutImage(NULL, 0, display, d, copyGC, img, 0, 0, b.x, b.y,
+               spec->width, spec->height);
+
+    /*
+     * Tidy up.
+     */
+    Tk_FreeGC(display, copyGC);
+    XDestroyImage(img);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec IndicatorElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(IndicatorElement),
+    IndicatorElementOptions,
+    IndicatorElementSize,
+    IndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Arrow element(s).
+ *
+ * 	Draws a solid triangle, inside a box.
+ * 	clientData is an enum ArrowDirection pointer.
+ */
+
+static int ArrowElements[] = { ARROW_UP, ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT };
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj;	/* Extra color for borders */
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;		/* Arrow color */
+} ArrowElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ArrowElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,sizeObj), STRINGIFY(SCROLLBAR_WIDTH) },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, 
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, 
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderColorObj), "black" },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,reliefObj),"raised"},
+    { "-arrowcolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,colorObj),"black"},
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * Note asymmetric padding:
+ * top/left padding is 1 less than bottom/right,
+ * since in this theme 2-pixel borders are asymmetric.
+ */
+static Ttk_Padding ArrowPadding = { 3,3,4,4 };
+
+static void ArrowElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    int direction = *(int *)clientData;
+    int width = SCROLLBAR_WIDTH;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->sizeObj, &width);
+    width -= Ttk_PaddingWidth(ArrowPadding);
+    ArrowSize(width/2, direction, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    *paddingPtr = ArrowPadding;
+}
+
+static void ArrowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    int direction = *(int *)clientData;
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, arrow->borderObj);
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, arrow->borderColorObj);
+    XColor *arrowColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, arrow->colorObj);
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, arrow->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(
+	tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    DrawBorder(tkwin,d,border,borderColor,b,borderWidth,relief);
+
+    FillArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, Tk_GCForColor(arrowColor, d),
+	Ttk_PadBox(b, ArrowPadding), direction);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ArrowElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ArrowElement),
+    ArrowElementOptions,
+    ArrowElementSize,
+    ArrowElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Menubutton indicator:
+ * 	Draw an arrow in the direction where the menu will be posted.
+ */
+
+#define MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE 5
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *directionObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+} MenubuttonArrowElement;
+
+static const char *directionStrings[] = {	/* See also: button.c */
+    "above", "below", "left", "right", "flush", NULL
+};
+enum { POST_ABOVE, POST_BELOW, POST_LEFT, POST_RIGHT, POST_FLUSH };
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec MenubuttonArrowElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-direction", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(MenubuttonArrowElement,directionObj), "below" },
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(MenubuttonArrowElement,sizeObj), STRINGIFY(MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE)},
+    { "-arrowcolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(MenubuttonArrowElement,colorObj), "black"},
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static Ttk_Padding MenubuttonArrowPadding = { 3, 0, 3, 0 };
+
+static void MenubuttonArrowElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    MenubuttonArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    int size = MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->sizeObj, &size);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = 2 * size + 1;
+    *paddingPtr = MenubuttonArrowPadding;
+}
+
+static void MenubuttonArrowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    MenubuttonArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    XColor *arrowColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, arrow->colorObj);
+    GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(arrowColor, d);
+    int size = MENUBUTTON_ARROW_SIZE;
+    int postDirection = POST_BELOW;
+    ArrowDirection arrowDirection = ARROW_DOWN;
+    int width, height;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->sizeObj, &size);
+    Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(NULL, arrow->directionObj, directionStrings,
+	   ""/*message*/, 0/*flags*/, &postDirection);
+
+    /* ... this might not be such a great idea ... */
+    switch (postDirection) {
+	case POST_ABOVE:	arrowDirection = ARROW_UP; break;
+	case POST_BELOW:	arrowDirection = ARROW_DOWN; break;
+	case POST_LEFT:		arrowDirection = ARROW_LEFT; break;
+	case POST_RIGHT:	arrowDirection = ARROW_RIGHT; break;
+	case POST_FLUSH:	arrowDirection = ARROW_DOWN; break;
+    }
+
+    ArrowSize(size, arrowDirection, &width, &height);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, MenubuttonArrowPadding);
+    b = Ttk_AnchorBox(b, width, height, TK_ANCHOR_CENTER);
+    FillArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b, arrowDirection);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec MenubuttonArrowElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(MenubuttonArrowElement),
+    MenubuttonArrowElementOptions,
+    MenubuttonArrowElementSize,
+    MenubuttonArrowElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Trough element
+ *
+ * Used in scrollbars and the scale.
+ *
+ * The -groovewidth option can be used to set the size of the short axis
+ * for the drawn area. This will not affect the geometry, but can be used
+ * to draw a thin centered trough inside the packet alloted. This is used
+ * to show a win32-style scale widget. Use -1 or a large number to use the
+ * full area (default).
+ *
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *grooveWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;
+} TroughElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TroughElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement, orientObj), "horizontal" },
+    { "-troughborderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,borderWidthObj), "1" },
+    { "-troughcolor", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,colorObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-troughrelief",TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,reliefObj), "sunken" },
+    { "-groovewidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,grooveWidthObj), "-1" },
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static void TroughElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TroughElement *troughPtr = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 2, grooveWidth = 0;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->grooveWidthObj, &grooveWidth);
+
+    if (grooveWidth <= 0) {
+	*paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+    }
+}
+
+static void TroughElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    TroughElement *troughPtr = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = NULL;
+    int borderWidth = 2, relief, groove, orient;
+
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, troughPtr->colorObj);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, troughPtr->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, troughPtr->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->grooveWidthObj, &groove);
+
+    if (groove != -1 && groove < b.height && groove < b.width) {
+	if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    b.y = b.y + b.height/2 - groove/2;
+	    b.height = groove;
+	} else {
+	    b.x = b.x + b.width/2 - groove/2;
+	    b.width = groove;
+	}
+    }
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	    borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TroughElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TroughElement),
+    TroughElementOptions,
+    TroughElementSize,
+    TroughElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Thumb element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *firstObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *lastObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;
+} ThumbElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ThumbElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-width", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,sizeObj),
+        STRINGIFY(SCROLLBAR_WIDTH) },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,borderObj),
+	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,borderColorObj),
+	"black" },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,reliefObj),"raised" },
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY,Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,orientObj),"horizontal"},
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static void ThumbElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ThumbElement *thumb = elementRecord;
+    int orient, size;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, thumb->sizeObj, &size);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, thumb->orientObj, &orient);
+
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	*widthPtr = size;
+	*heightPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE;
+    } else {
+	*widthPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE;
+	*heightPtr = size;
+    }
+}
+
+static void ThumbElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    ThumbElement *thumb = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, thumb->borderObj);
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, thumb->borderColorObj);
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    /*
+     * Don't draw the thumb if we are disabled.
+     * This makes it behave like Windows ... if that's what we want.
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED)
+	return;
+     */
+
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, thumb->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(
+	tkwin, d, border, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    DrawBorder(tkwin, d, border, borderColor, b, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ThumbElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ThumbElement),
+    ThumbElementOptions,
+    ThumbElementSize,
+    ThumbElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slider element.
+ *
+ * This is the moving part of the scale widget.
+ *
+ * The slider element is the thumb in the scale widget. This is drawn
+ * as an arrow-type element that can point up, down, left or right.
+ *
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *lengthObj;		/* Long axis dimension */
+    Tcl_Obj *thicknessObj;	/* Short axis dimension */
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;		/* Relief for this object */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;		/* Border / background color */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderColorObj;	/* Additional border color */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;		/* Orientation of overall slider */
+} SliderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SliderElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-sliderlength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,lengthObj),
+	"15" },
+    { "-sliderthickness",TK_OPTION_PIXELS,Tk_Offset(SliderElement,thicknessObj),
+	"15" },
+    { "-sliderrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,reliefObj),
+	"raised" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,borderWidthObj),
+	STRINGIFY(BORDERWIDTH) },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,borderObj),
+	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-bordercolor", TK_OPTION_COLOR, Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,borderColorObj),
+	"black" },
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,orientObj),
+	"horizontal" },
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static void SliderElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SliderElement *slider = elementRecord;
+    int orient, length, thickness, borderWidth;
+
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, slider->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->lengthObj, &length);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->thicknessObj, &thickness);
+
+    switch (orient) {
+	case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL:
+	    *widthPtr = thickness + (borderWidth *2);
+	    *heightPtr = *widthPtr/2;
+	    break;
+
+	case TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL:
+	    *heightPtr = thickness + (borderWidth *2);
+	    *widthPtr = *heightPtr/2;
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+static void SliderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SliderElement *slider = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, slider->borderObj);
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, slider->borderColorObj);
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED, borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, slider->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    DrawBorder(tkwin, d, border, borderColor, b, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SliderElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SliderElement),
+    SliderElementOptions,
+    SliderElementSize,
+    SliderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tree indicator element.
+ */
+
+#define TTK_STATE_OPEN TTK_STATE_USER1		/* XREF: treeview.c */
+#define TTK_STATE_LEAF TTK_STATE_USER2
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *diameterObj;
+} TreeitemIndicator;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TreeitemIndicatorOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,colorObj), DEFAULT_FOREGROUND },
+    { "-diameter", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,diameterObj), "6" },
+    { "-indicatormargins", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,marginObj), "0 2 4 2" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void TreeitemIndicatorSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TreeitemIndicator *indicator = elementRecord;
+    int diameter = 0;
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, paddingPtr);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->diameterObj, &diameter);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = diameter;
+}
+
+static void TreeitemIndicatorDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    TreeitemIndicator *indicator = elementRecord;
+    XColor *color = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+    GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(color, d);
+    Ttk_Padding padding = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+    int w = WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK;
+    int cx, cy;
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_LEAF) {
+	/* don't draw anything ... */
+	return;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,indicator->marginObj,&padding);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    XDrawRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc,
+	    b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height);
+
+    cx = b.x + b.width / 2;
+    cy = b.y + b.height / 2;
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b.x+2, cy, b.x+b.width-2+w, cy);
+
+    if (!(state & TTK_STATE_OPEN)) {
+	/* turn '-' into a '+' */
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, cx, b.y+2, cx, b.y+b.height-2+w);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TreeitemIndicatorElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TreeitemIndicator),
+    TreeitemIndicatorOptions,
+    TreeitemIndicatorSize,
+    TreeitemIndicatorDraw
+};
+
+
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * AltTheme_Init --
+ * 	Install alternate theme.
+ */
+int AltTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme =  Ttk_CreateTheme(interp, "alt", NULL);
+
+    if (!theme) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "border", &BorderElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Checkbutton.indicator",
+	    &IndicatorElementSpec, &checkbutton_spec);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Radiobutton.indicator",
+	    &IndicatorElementSpec, &radiobutton_spec);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Menubutton.indicator",
+	    &MenubuttonArrowElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "field", &FieldElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "trough", &TroughElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "thumb", &ThumbElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "slider", &SliderElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "uparrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "downarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[1]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "leftarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[2]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "rightarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[3]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "arrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "arrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Treeitem.indicator",
+	    &TreeitemIndicatorElementSpec, 0);
+
+    Tcl_PkgProvide(interp, "ttk::theme::alt", TTK_VERSION);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkElements.c b/generic/ttk/ttkElements.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8cd5c6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkElements.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1447 @@
+/* $Id: ttkElements.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Default implementation for themed elements.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <tcl.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+#define DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH "2"
+#define DEFAULT_ARROW_SIZE "15"
+#define MIN_THUMB_SIZE 10
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Null element.  Does nothing; used as a stub.
+ * Null element methods, option table and element spec are public,
+ * and may be used in other engines.
+ */
+
+/* public */ Ttk_ElementOptionSpec NullElementOptions[] = { {NULL} };
+
+/* public */ void
+NullElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+}
+
+/* public */ void
+NullElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+}
+
+/* public */ Ttk_ElementSpec NullElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(NullElement),
+    NullElementOptions,
+    NullElementGeometry,
+    NullElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Background element.
+ *
+ * This element simply clears the entire widget area
+ * with the background color.  (NB: ignores parcel).
+ *
+ * Ttk_GetLayout() automatically includes a background element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*backgroundObj;
+} BackgroundElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec BackgroundElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	    Tk_Offset(BackgroundElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void
+BackgroundElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+}
+
+static void
+BackgroundElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    BackgroundElement *bg = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder backgroundPtr = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin,bg->backgroundObj);
+
+    XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+	Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, backgroundPtr, TK_3D_FLAT_GC),
+	0,0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin));
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec BackgroundElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(BackgroundElement),
+    BackgroundElementOptions,
+    BackgroundElementGeometry,
+    BackgroundElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Border element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*reliefObj;
+} BorderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec BorderElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, 
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, 
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, 
+	Tk_Offset(BorderElement,reliefObj), "flat" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void
+BorderElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    BorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 0;
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void
+BorderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    BorderElement *bd = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = NULL;
+    int borderWidth = 1, relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, bd->borderObj);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, bd->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, bd->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    if (border && borderWidth > 0 && relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
+	Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	    b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth,relief);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec BorderElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(BorderElement),
+    BorderElementOptions,
+    BorderElementGeometry,
+    BorderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Field element.
+ * 	Used for editable fields.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderWidthObj;
+} FieldElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec FieldElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-fieldbackground", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,borderObj), "white" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(FieldElement,borderWidthObj), "2" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void
+FieldElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    FieldElement *field = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, field->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void
+FieldElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    FieldElement *field = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, field->borderObj);
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, field->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	    b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec FieldElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(FieldElement),
+    FieldElementOptions,
+    FieldElementGeometry,
+    FieldElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Padding element.
+ *
+ * This element has no visual representation, only geometry.
+ * It adds a (possibly non-uniform) internal border.
+ * In addition, if "-shiftrelief" is specified, 
+ * adds additional pixels to shift child elements "in" or "out"
+ * depending on the -relief.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*paddingObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*shiftreliefObj;
+} PaddingElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec PaddingElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-padding", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(PaddingElement,paddingObj), "0" },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(PaddingElement,reliefObj), "flat" },
+    { "-shiftrelief", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(PaddingElement,shiftreliefObj), "0" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void
+PaddingElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    PaddingElement *padding = elementRecord;
+    int shiftRelief = 0;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+    Ttk_Padding pad;
+
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, padding->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, padding->shiftreliefObj, &shiftRelief);
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,padding->paddingObj,&pad);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_RelievePadding(pad, relief, shiftRelief);
+}
+
+static void
+PaddingElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    /* No-op */
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec PaddingElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(PaddingElement),
+    PaddingElementOptions,
+    PaddingElementGeometry,
+    PaddingElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Focus ring element.
+ * 	Draws a dashed focus ring, if the widget has keyboard focus.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*focusColorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*focusThicknessObj;
+} FocusElement;
+
+/*
+ * DrawFocusRing --
+ * 	Draw a dotted rectangle to indicate focus.
+ */
+static void DrawFocusRing(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tcl_Obj *colorObj, Ttk_Box b)
+{
+    XColor *color = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, colorObj);
+    unsigned long mask = 0UL;
+    XGCValues gcvalues;
+    GC gc;
+
+    gcvalues.foreground = color->pixel;
+    gcvalues.line_style = LineOnOffDash;
+    gcvalues.line_width = 1;
+    gcvalues.dashes = 1;
+    gcvalues.dash_offset = 1;
+    mask = GCForeground | GCLineStyle | GCDashList | GCDashOffset | GCLineWidth;
+
+    gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, mask, &gcvalues);
+    XDrawRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b.x, b.y, b.width-1, b.height-1);
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec FocusElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-focuscolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(FocusElement,focusColorObj), "black" },
+    { "-focusthickness",TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(FocusElement,focusThicknessObj), "1" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void
+FocusElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    FocusElement *focus = elementRecord;
+    int focusThickness = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, focus->focusThicknessObj, &focusThickness);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)focusThickness);
+}
+
+static void
+FocusElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    FocusElement *focus = elementRecord;
+    int focusThickness = 0;
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_FOCUS) {
+	Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,focus->focusThicknessObj,&focusThickness);
+	DrawFocusRing(tkwin, d, focus->focusColorObj, b);
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec FocusElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(FocusElement),
+    FocusElementOptions,
+    FocusElementGeometry,
+    FocusElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Separator element.
+ * 	Just draws a horizontal or vertical bar.
+ * 	Three elements are defined: horizontal, vertical, and general;
+ *	the general separator checks the "-orient" option.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj	*orientObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderObj;
+} SeparatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SeparatorElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY,
+	Tk_Offset(SeparatorElement, orientObj), "horizontal" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(SeparatorElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void
+SeparatorElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = 2;
+}
+
+static void
+HorizontalSeparatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SeparatorElement *separator = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, separator->borderObj);
+    GC lightGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC);
+    GC darkGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC, b.x, b.y, b.x + b.width, b.y);
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, b.x, b.y+1, b.x + b.width, b.y+1);
+}
+
+static void
+VerticalSeparatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SeparatorElement *separator = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, separator->borderObj);
+    GC lightGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC);
+    GC darkGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC, b.x, b.y, b.x, b.y + b.height);
+    XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, b.x+1, b.y, b.x+1, b.y+b.height);
+}
+
+static void
+GeneralSeparatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SeparatorElement *separator = elementRecord;
+    int orient;
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, separator->orientObj, &orient);
+    switch (orient) {
+	case TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL:
+	    HorizontalSeparatorElementDraw(
+		clientData, elementRecord, tkwin, d, b, state);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL:
+	    VerticalSeparatorElementDraw(
+		clientData, elementRecord, tkwin, d, b, state);
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec HorizontalSeparatorElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SeparatorElement),
+    SeparatorElementOptions,
+    SeparatorElementGeometry,
+    HorizontalSeparatorElementDraw
+};
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec VerticalSeparatorElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SeparatorElement),
+    SeparatorElementOptions,
+    SeparatorElementGeometry,
+    HorizontalSeparatorElementDraw
+};
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SeparatorElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SeparatorElement),
+    SeparatorElementOptions,
+    SeparatorElementGeometry,
+    GeneralSeparatorElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Sizegrip: lower-right corner grip handle for resizing window.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj	*backgroundObj;
+} SizegripElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SizegripOptions[] = {
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(SizegripElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    {0,0,0,0}
+};
+
+static void SizegripSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    int gripCount = 3, gripSpace = 2, gripThickness = 3;
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = gripCount * (gripSpace + gripThickness);
+}
+
+static void SizegripDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    SizegripElement *grip = elementRecord;
+    int gripCount = 3, gripSpace = 2;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, grip->backgroundObj);
+    GC lightGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC);
+    GC darkGC = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC);
+    int x1 = b.x + b.width-1, y1 = b.y + b.height-1, x2 = x1, y2 = y1;
+
+    while (gripCount--) {
+	x1 -= gripSpace; y2 -= gripSpace;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC,  x1,y1, x2,y2); --x1; --y2;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, darkGC,  x1,y1, x2,y2); --x1; --y2;
+	XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, lightGC, x1,y1, x2,y2); --x1; --y2;
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SizegripElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SizegripElement),
+    SizegripOptions,
+    SizegripSize,
+    SizegripDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Indicator element.
+ *
+ * Draws the on/off indicator for checkbuttons and radiobuttons.
+ *
+ * Draws a 3-D square (or diamond), raised if off, sunken if on.
+ *
+ * This is actually a regression from Tk 8.5 back to the ugly old Motif
+ * style; use "altTheme" for the newer, nicer version.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *diameterObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+} IndicatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec IndicatorElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-indicatorcolor", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,colorObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-indicatorrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,reliefObj), "raised" },
+    { "-indicatordiameter", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,diameterObj), "12" },
+    { "-indicatormargin", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,marginObj), "0 2 4 2" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(IndicatorElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+/*
+ * Checkbutton indicators (default): 3-D square.
+ */
+static void
+SquareIndicatorElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    int diameter = 0;
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, paddingPtr);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->diameterObj, &diameter);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = diameter;
+}
+
+static void
+SquareIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = 0, interior = 0;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    int diameter;
+
+    interior = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, indicator->backgroundObj);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,indicator->borderWidthObj,&borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL,indicator->reliefObj,&relief);
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,indicator->marginObj,&padding);
+
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    diameter = b.width < b.height ? b.width : b.height;
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, interior, b.x, b.y,
+	    diameter, diameter,borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y,
+	    diameter, diameter, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Radiobutton indicators:  3-D diamond.
+ */
+static void
+DiamondIndicatorElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    int diameter = 0;
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginObj, paddingPtr);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->diameterObj, &diameter);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = diameter + 3;
+}
+
+static void
+DiamondIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    IndicatorElement *indicator = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = 0, interior = 0;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int diameter, radius;
+    XPoint points[4];
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+
+    interior = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, indicator->backgroundObj);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,indicator->borderWidthObj,&borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL,indicator->reliefObj,&relief);
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,indicator->marginObj,&padding);
+
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, padding);
+
+    diameter = b.width < b.height ? b.width : b.height;
+    radius = diameter / 2;
+
+    points[0].x = b.x;
+    points[0].y = b.y + radius;
+    points[1].x = b.x + radius;
+    points[1].y = b.y + 2*radius;
+    points[2].x = b.x + 2*radius;
+    points[2].y = b.y + radius;
+    points[3].x = b.x + radius;
+    points[3].y = b.y;
+
+    Tk_Fill3DPolygon(tkwin,d,interior,points,4,borderWidth,TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    Tk_Draw3DPolygon(tkwin,d,border,points,4,borderWidth,relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec CheckbuttonIndicatorElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(IndicatorElement),
+    IndicatorElementOptions,
+    SquareIndicatorElementGeometry,
+    SquareIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec RadiobuttonIndicatorElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(IndicatorElement),
+    IndicatorElementOptions,
+    DiamondIndicatorElementGeometry,
+    DiamondIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Menubutton indicators.
+ *
+ * These aren't functional like radio/check indicators,
+ * they're just affordability indicators.
+ *
+ * Standard Tk sets the indicator size to 4.0 mm by 1.7 mm.
+ * I have no idea where these numbers came from.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *heightObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginObj;
+} MenuIndicatorElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec MenuIndicatorElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-indicatorwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,widthObj), "4.0m" },
+    { "-indicatorheight", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,heightObj), "1.7m" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-indicatorrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,reliefObj),"raised" },
+    { "-indicatormargin", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	    Tk_Offset(MenuIndicatorElement,marginObj), "5 0" },
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static void
+MenuIndicatorElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    MenuIndicatorElement *mi = elementRecord;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, mi->widthObj, widthPtr);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, mi->heightObj, heightPtr);
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,mi->marginObj,paddingPtr);
+}
+
+static void
+MenuIndicatorElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    MenuIndicatorElement *mi = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, mi->backgroundObj);
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,mi->marginObj,&margins);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, margins);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, mi->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	    borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec MenuIndicatorElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(MenuIndicatorElement),
+    MenuIndicatorElementOptions,
+    MenuIndicatorElementGeometry,
+    MenuIndicatorElementDraw
+};
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Arrow elements.
+ *
+ * 	Draws a solid triangle inside a box.
+ * 	clientData is an enum ArrowDirection pointer.
+ */
+
+static int ArrowElements[] = { ARROW_UP, ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT };
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+} ArrowElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ArrowElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, 
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-relief",TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,reliefObj),"raised"},
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,borderWidthObj), "1" },
+    { "-arrowcolor",TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,colorObj),"black"},
+    { "-arrowsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, 
+	Tk_Offset(ArrowElement,sizeObj), "14" },
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static Ttk_Padding ArrowPadding = { 3,3,3,3 };
+
+static void
+ArrowElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    int direction = *(int *)clientData;
+    int width = 14;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, arrow->sizeObj, &width);
+    width -= Ttk_PaddingWidth(ArrowPadding);
+    ArrowSize(width/2, direction, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    *paddingPtr = ArrowPadding;
+}
+
+static void
+ArrowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    int direction = *(int *)clientData;
+    ArrowElement *arrow = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, arrow->borderObj);
+    XColor *arrowColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, arrow->colorObj);
+    int relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    int borderWidth = 1;
+
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, arrow->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(
+	tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth, relief);
+
+    FillArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, Tk_GCForColor(arrowColor, d),
+	Ttk_PadBox(b, ArrowPadding), direction);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ArrowElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ArrowElement),
+    ArrowElementOptions,
+    ArrowElementGeometry,
+    ArrowElementDraw
+};
+
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Trough element.
+ *
+ * Used in scrollbars and scales in place of "border".
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+} TroughElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TroughElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-troughcolor", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,colorObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-troughrelief",TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(TroughElement,reliefObj), "sunken" },
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static void
+TroughElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TroughElement *troughPtr = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 2;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void
+TroughElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    TroughElement *troughPtr = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = NULL;
+    int borderWidth = 2, relief = TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN;
+
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, troughPtr->colorObj);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, troughPtr->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, troughPtr->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	    borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TroughElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TroughElement),
+    TroughElementOptions,
+    TroughElementGeometry,
+    TroughElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Thumb element.
+ *
+ * Used in scrollbars.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *thicknessObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+} ThumbElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ThumbElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY,
+	Tk_Offset(ThumbElement, orientObj), "horizontal" },
+    { "-width", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,thicknessObj), DEFAULT_ARROW_SIZE },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF,
+	Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,reliefObj), "raised" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,borderObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(ThumbElement,borderWidthObj), DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static void
+ThumbElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ThumbElement *thumb = elementRecord;
+    int orient, thickness;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, thumb->thicknessObj, &thickness);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, thumb->orientObj, &orient);
+
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	*widthPtr = thickness;
+	*heightPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE;
+    } else {
+	*widthPtr = MIN_THUMB_SIZE;
+	*heightPtr = thickness;
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+ThumbElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    ThumbElement *thumb = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder  border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, thumb->borderObj);
+    int borderWidth = 2, relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, thumb->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, thumb->reliefObj, &relief);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border, b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	    borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ThumbElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ThumbElement),
+    ThumbElementOptions,
+    ThumbElementGeometry,
+    ThumbElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slider element.
+ *
+ * This is the moving part of the scale widget.  Drawn as a raised box.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;	     /* orientation of overall slider */
+    Tcl_Obj *lengthObj;      /* slider length */
+    Tcl_Obj *thicknessObj;   /* slider thickness */
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;      /* the relief for this object */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;      /* the background color */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj; /* the size of the border */
+} SliderElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SliderElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-sliderlength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,lengthObj),
+	"30" },
+    { "-sliderthickness",TK_OPTION_PIXELS,Tk_Offset(SliderElement,thicknessObj),
+	"15" },
+    { "-sliderrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,reliefObj),
+	"raised" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,borderWidthObj),
+	DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,borderObj),
+	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY, Tk_Offset(SliderElement,orientObj),
+	"horizontal" },
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static void
+SliderElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SliderElement *slider = elementRecord;
+    int orient, length, thickness;
+
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, slider->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->lengthObj, &length);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->thicknessObj, &thickness);
+
+    switch (orient) {
+	case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL:
+	    *widthPtr = thickness;
+	    *heightPtr = length;
+	    break;
+
+	case TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL:
+	    *widthPtr = length;
+	    *heightPtr = thickness;
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+SliderElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SliderElement *slider = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = NULL;
+    int relief, borderWidth, orient;
+
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, slider->borderObj);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, slider->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, slider->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, slider->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	borderWidth, relief);
+
+    if (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
+	if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    if (b.width > 4) {
+		b.x += b.width/2;
+		XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		    Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC),
+		    b.x-1, b.y+borderWidth, b.x-1, b.y+b.height-borderWidth);
+		XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		    Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC),
+		    b.x, b.y+borderWidth, b.x, b.y+b.height-borderWidth);
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    if (b.height > 4) {
+		b.y += b.height/2;
+		XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		    Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC),
+		    b.x+borderWidth, b.y-1, b.x+b.width-borderWidth, b.y-1);
+		XDrawLine(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		    Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC),
+		    b.x+borderWidth, b.y, b.x+b.width-borderWidth, b.y);
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SliderElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SliderElement),
+    SliderElementOptions,
+    SliderElementGeometry,
+    SliderElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Progress bar element:
+ *	Draws the moving part of the progress bar.
+ *
+ *	-thickness specifies the size along the short axis of the bar.
+ *	-length specifies the default size along the long axis;
+ *	the bar will be this long in indeterminate mode. 
+ */
+
+#define DEFAULT_PBAR_THICKNESS "15"
+#define DEFAULT_PBAR_LENGTH "30"
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj; 	/* widget orientation */
+    Tcl_Obj *thicknessObj;	/* the height/width of the bar */
+    Tcl_Obj *lengthObj;		/* default width/height of the bar */
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj; 	/* border relief for this object */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj; 	/* background color */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj; 	/* thickness of the border */
+} PbarElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec PbarElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-orient", TK_OPTION_ANY, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,orientObj),
+	"horizontal" },
+    { "-thickness", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,thicknessObj),
+	DEFAULT_PBAR_THICKNESS },
+    { "-barsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,lengthObj),
+	DEFAULT_PBAR_LENGTH },
+    { "-pbarrelief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,reliefObj),
+	"raised" },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,borderWidthObj),
+	DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(PbarElement,borderObj),
+	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+static void PbarElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    PbarElement *pbar = elementRecord;
+    int orient, thickness, length, borderWidth;
+
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, pbar->orientObj, &orient);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, pbar->thicknessObj, &thickness);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, pbar->lengthObj, &length);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, pbar->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+    switch (orient) {
+	case TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL:
+	    *widthPtr	= length;
+	    *heightPtr	= thickness;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL:
+	    *widthPtr	= thickness;
+	    *heightPtr	= length;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static void PbarElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    PbarElement *pbar = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, pbar->borderObj);
+    int relief, borderWidth;
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, pbar->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, pbar->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height,
+	borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec PbarElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(PbarElement),
+    PbarElementOptions,
+    PbarElementGeometry,
+    PbarElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Notebook tabs and client area.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+} TabElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TabElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TabElement,borderWidthObj),"1" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(TabElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    {0,0,0,0}
+};
+
+static void
+TabElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TabElement *tab = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 1;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(0, tkwin, tab->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    paddingPtr->top = paddingPtr->left = paddingPtr->right = borderWidth;
+    paddingPtr->bottom = 0;
+}
+
+static void
+TabElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    TabElement *tab = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, tab->backgroundObj);
+    int borderWidth = 1;
+    int cut = 2;
+    XPoint pts[6];
+    int n = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, tab->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED) {
+	/*
+	 * Draw slightly outside of the allocated parcel,
+	 * to overwrite the client area border.
+	 */
+	b.height += borderWidth;
+    }
+
+    pts[n].x = b.x; 			pts[n].y = b.y + b.height - 1; ++n;
+    pts[n].x = b.x;			pts[n].y = b.y + cut; ++n;
+    pts[n].x = b.x + cut;  		pts[n].y = b.y; ++n;
+    pts[n].x = b.x + b.width-1-cut;	pts[n].y = b.y; ++n;
+    pts[n].x = b.x + b.width-1; 	pts[n].y = b.y + cut; ++n;
+    pts[n].x = b.x + b.width-1; 	pts[n].y = b.y + b.height; ++n;
+
+    XFillPolygon(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+	Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_FLAT_GC),
+	pts, 6, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
+
+#ifndef WIN32
+    /*
+     * Account for whether XDrawLines draws endpoints by platform
+     */
+    --pts[5].y;
+#endif
+
+    while (borderWidth--) {
+	XDrawLines(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC),
+		pts, 4, CoordModeOrigin);
+	XDrawLines(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+		Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, border, TK_3D_DARK_GC),
+		pts+3, 3, CoordModeOrigin);
+	++pts[0].x; ++pts[1].x; ++pts[2].x;             --pts[4].x; --pts[5].x;
+	                        ++pts[2].y; ++pts[3].y;
+    }
+
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TabElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TabElement),
+    TabElementOptions,
+    TabElementGeometry,
+    TabElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ * Client area element:
+ * Uses same resources as tab element.
+ */
+typedef TabElement ClientElement;
+#define ClientElementOptions TabElementOptions
+
+static void
+ClientElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    ClientElement *ce = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, ce->backgroundObj);
+    int borderWidth = 1;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, ce->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, border,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth,TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+}
+
+static void
+ClientElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ClientElement *ce = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 1;
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(0, tkwin, ce->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ClientElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ClientElement),
+    ClientElementOptions,
+    ClientElementGeometry,
+    ClientElementDraw
+};
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget layouts.
+ */
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(FrameLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Frame.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(LabelframeLayout)
+    /* Note: labelframe widget does its own layout */
+    TTK_NODE("Labelframe.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+    TTK_NODE("Labelframe.text", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(LabelLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Label.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	TTK_GROUP("Label.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	    TTK_NODE("Label.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(ButtonLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Button.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	TTK_GROUP("Button.focus", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Button.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	        TTK_NODE("Button.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH))))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(CheckbuttonLayout)
+     TTK_GROUP("Checkbutton.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	 TTK_NODE("Checkbutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	 TTK_GROUP("Checkbutton.focus", TTK_PACK_LEFT | TTK_STICK_W,
+	     TTK_NODE("Checkbutton.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(RadiobuttonLayout)
+     TTK_GROUP("Radiobutton.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	 TTK_NODE("Radiobutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	 TTK_GROUP("Radiobutton.focus", TTK_PACK_LEFT,
+	     TTK_NODE("Radiobutton.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(MenubuttonLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.focus", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Menubutton.indicator", TTK_PACK_RIGHT)
+	    TTK_GROUP("Menubutton.padding", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_EXPAND|TTK_FILL_X,
+	        TTK_NODE("Menubutton.label", TTK_PACK_LEFT))))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(VerticalScrollbarLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Vertical.Scrollbar.trough", TTK_FILL_Y,
+	TTK_NODE("Vertical.Scrollbar.uparrow", TTK_PACK_TOP)
+	TTK_NODE("Vertical.Scrollbar.downarrow", TTK_PACK_BOTTOM)
+	TTK_NODE(
+	    "Vertical.Scrollbar.thumb", TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_EXPAND|TTK_FILL_BOTH))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(HorizontalScrollbarLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Horizontal.Scrollbar.trough", TTK_FILL_X,
+	TTK_NODE("Horizontal.Scrollbar.leftarrow", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	TTK_NODE("Horizontal.Scrollbar.rightarrow", TTK_PACK_RIGHT)
+	TTK_NODE(
+	"Horizontal.Scrollbar.thumb", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_EXPAND|TTK_FILL_BOTH))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(VerticalScaleLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Vertical.Scale.trough", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Vertical.Scale.slider", TTK_PACK_TOP) )
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(HorizontalScaleLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Horizontal.Scale.trough", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Horizontal.Scale.slider", TTK_PACK_LEFT) )
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(SeparatorLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Separator.separator", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(SizegripLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Sizegrip.sizegrip", TTK_PACK_BOTTOM|TTK_STICK_S|TTK_STICK_E)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * RegisterElements --
+ *
+ *	Register all elements and layouts defined in this package.
+ */
+
+extern Ttk_ElementSpec TextElementSpec;
+extern Ttk_ElementSpec ImageElementSpec;
+extern Ttk_ElementSpec ImageTextElementSpec;
+extern Ttk_ElementSpec LabelElementSpec;
+
+void RegisterElements(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme =  Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    /*
+     * Elements:
+     */
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "background",
+	    &BackgroundElementSpec,NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "border", &BorderElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "field", &FieldElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "focus", &FocusElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "padding", &PaddingElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "text", &TextElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme,
+	    "Labelframe.text",&ImageTextElementSpec,NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "image", &ImageElementSpec, interp);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "label", &LabelElementSpec, interp);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Checkbutton.indicator",
+	    &CheckbuttonIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Radiobutton.indicator",
+	    &RadiobuttonIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Menubutton.indicator",
+	    &MenuIndicatorElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "indicator", &NullElementSpec,NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "uparrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "downarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[1]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "leftarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[2]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "rightarrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[3]);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "arrow",
+	    &ArrowElementSpec, &ArrowElements[0]);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "trough", &TroughElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "thumb", &ThumbElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "slider", &SliderElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "pbar", &PbarElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "separator",
+	    &SeparatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "hseparator", 
+	    &HorizontalSeparatorElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "vseparator", 
+	    &VerticalSeparatorElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "sizegrip", &SizegripElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "tab", &TabElementSpec, NULL);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "client", &ClientElementSpec, NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * Layouts:
+     */
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TFrame", FrameLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TLabelframe", LabelframeLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TLabel", LabelLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TButton", ButtonLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TCheckbutton", CheckbuttonLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TRadiobutton", RadiobuttonLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TMenubutton", MenubuttonLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme,
+	    "Vertical.TScrollbar", VerticalScrollbarLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme,
+	    "Horizontal.TScrollbar", HorizontalScrollbarLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "Vertical.TScale", VerticalScaleLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "Horizontal.TScale", HorizontalScaleLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TSeparator", SeparatorLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TSizegrip", SizegripLayout);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkEntry.c b/generic/ttk/ttkEntry.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d6e3616
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkEntry.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1909 @@
+/*
+ * $Id: ttkEntry.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * DERIVED FROM: tk/generic/tkEntry.c r1.35.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ * Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
+ * Copyright (c) 2002 ActiveState Corporation.
+ * Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <X11/Xatom.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*
+ * Extra bits for core.flags:
+ */
+#define GOT_SELECTION		(WIDGET_USER_FLAG<<1)
+#define SYNCING_VARIABLE	(WIDGET_USER_FLAG<<2)
+#define VALIDATING		(WIDGET_USER_FLAG<<3)
+#define VALIDATION_SET_VALUE	(WIDGET_USER_FLAG<<4)
+
+/*
+ * Definitions for -validate option values:
+ */
+typedef enum validateMode {
+    VMODE_ALL, VMODE_KEY, VMODE_FOCUS, VMODE_FOCUSIN, VMODE_FOCUSOUT, VMODE_NONE
+} VMODE;
+
+static const char *validateStrings[] = {
+    "all", "key", "focus", "focusin", "focusout", "none", NULL
+};
+
+/*
+ * Validation reasons:
+ */
+typedef enum validateReason {
+    VALIDATE_INSERT, VALIDATE_DELETE,
+    VALIDATE_FOCUSIN, VALIDATE_FOCUSOUT,
+    VALIDATE_FORCED
+} VREASON;
+
+static const char *validateReasonStrings[] = {
+    "key", "key", "focusin", "focusout", "forced", NULL
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Entry widget record.
+ *
+ * Dependencies:
+ *
+ * textVariableTrace	: textVariableObj
+ *
+ * numBytes,numChars	: string
+ * displayString	: numChars, showChar
+ * layoutHeight,
+ * layoutWidth,
+ * textLayout		: fontObj, displayString
+ * layoutX, layoutY	: textLayout, justify, xscroll.first
+ *
+ * Invariants:
+ *
+ * 0 <= insertPos <= numChars
+ * 0 <= selectFirst < selectLast <= numChars || selectFirst == selectLast == -1
+ * displayString points to string if showChar == NULL,
+ * or to malloc'ed storage if showChar != NULL.
+ */
+
+/* Style parameters:
+ */
+typedef struct 
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;	/* Foreground color for normal text */
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;	/* Entry widget background color */
+    Tcl_Obj *selBorderObj;	/* Border and background for selection */
+    Tcl_Obj *selBorderWidthObj;	/* Width of selection border */
+    Tcl_Obj *selForegroundObj;	/* Foreground color for selected text */
+    Tcl_Obj *insertColorObj;	/* Color of insertion cursor */
+    Tcl_Obj *insertWidthObj;	/* Insert cursor width */
+} EntryStyleData;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    /*
+     * Internal state:
+     */
+    char *string;		/* Storage for string (malloced) */
+    int numBytes;		/* Length of string in bytes. */
+    int numChars;		/* Length of string in characters. */
+
+    int insertPos;		/* Insert index */
+    int selectFirst;		/* Index of start of selection, or -1 */
+    int selectLast;		/* Index of end of selection, or -1 */
+
+    Scrollable xscroll;		/* Current scroll position */
+    ScrollHandle xscrollHandle;
+
+    /*
+     * Options managed by Tk_SetOptions:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *textVariableObj;	/* Name of linked variable */
+    int exportSelection;	/* Tie internal selection to X selection? */
+
+    VMODE validate;		/* Validation mode */
+    char *validateCmd;		/* Validation script template */
+    char *invalidCmd;		/* Invalid callback script template */
+
+    char *showChar;		/* Used to derive displayString */
+
+    Tcl_Obj *fontObj;		/* Text font to use */
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;		/* Desired width of window (in avgchars) */
+    Tk_Justify justify;		/* Text justification */
+
+    EntryStyleData styleData;	/* Display style data (widget options) */
+    EntryStyleData styleDefaults;/* Style defaults (fallback values) */
+
+    Tcl_Obj *stateObj;		/* Compatibility option -- see CheckStateObj */
+
+    /*
+     * Derived resources:
+     */
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *textVariableTrace;
+
+    char *displayString;	/* String to use when displaying */
+    Tk_TextLayout textLayout;	/* Cached text layout information. */
+    int layoutWidth;		/* textLayout width */
+    int layoutHeight;		/* textLayout height */
+
+    int layoutX, layoutY;	/* Origin for text layout. */
+
+} EntryPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    EntryPart	entry;
+} Entry;
+
+/*
+ * Extra mask bits for Tk_SetOptions()
+ */
+#define STATE_CHANGED	 	(0x100)	/* -state option changed */
+#define TEXTVAR_CHANGED	 	(0x200)	/* -textvariable option changed */
+#define SCROLLCMD_CHANGED	(0x400)	/* -xscrollcommand option changed */
+
+/*
+ * Default option values:
+ */
+#define DEF_SELECT_BG	"#000000"
+#define DEF_SELECT_FG	"#ffffff"
+#define DEF_INSERT_BG	"black"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_WIDTH	"20"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_FONT	"TkTextFont"
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec EntryOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    WIDGET_TAKES_FOCUS,
+
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
+        "ExportSelection", "1", -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.exportSelection),
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
+	DEF_ENTRY_FONT, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.fontObj),-1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand",
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.invalidCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
+	"left", -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.justify),
+	0, 0, GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-show", "show", "Show",
+        NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.showChar),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-state", "state", "State",
+	"normal", Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.stateObj), -1,
+        0,0,STATE_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.textVariableObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,TEXTVAR_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-validate", "validate", "Validate",
+	"none", -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.validate),
+	0, (ClientData) validateStrings, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-validatecommand", "validateCommand", "ValidateCommand",
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.validateCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
+	DEF_ENTRY_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.widthObj), -1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.xscroll.scrollCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, SCROLLCMD_CHANGED},
+
+    /* EntryStyleData options:
+     */
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "textColor", "TextColor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.styleData.foregroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-background", "windowColor", "WindowColor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Entry, entry.styleData.backgroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(CoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ EntryStyleData management.
+ * 	This is still more awkward than it should be;
+ * 	it should be able to use the Element API instead.
+ */
+
+/* EntryInitStyleDefaults --
+ * 	Initialize EntryStyleData record to fallback values.
+ */
+static void EntryInitStyleDefaults(EntryStyleData *es)
+{
+#define INIT(member, value) \
+	es->member = Tcl_NewStringObj(value, -1); \
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(es->member);
+    INIT(foregroundObj, DEFAULT_FOREGROUND)
+    INIT(selBorderObj, DEF_SELECT_BG)
+    INIT(selForegroundObj, DEF_SELECT_FG)
+    INIT(insertColorObj, DEFAULT_FOREGROUND)
+    INIT(selBorderWidthObj, "0")
+    INIT(insertWidthObj, "1")
+#undef INIT
+}
+
+static void EntryFreeStyleDefaults(EntryStyleData *es)
+{
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->foregroundObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->selBorderObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->selForegroundObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->insertColorObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->selBorderWidthObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(es->insertWidthObj);
+}
+
+/*
+ * EntryInitStyleData --
+ * 	Look up style-specific data for an entry widget.
+ */
+static void EntryInitStyleData(Entry *entryPtr, EntryStyleData *es)
+{
+    Ttk_State state = entryPtr->core.state;
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache = Ttk_GetResourceCache(entryPtr->core.interp);
+    Tk_Window tkwin = entryPtr->core.tkwin;
+    Tcl_Obj *tmp;
+
+    /* Initialize to fallback values:
+     */
+    *es = entryPtr->entry.styleDefaults;
+
+#   define INIT(member, name) \
+    if ((tmp=Ttk_QueryOption(entryPtr->core.layout,name,state))) \
+    	es->member=tmp;
+    INIT(foregroundObj, "-foreground");
+    INIT(selBorderObj, "-selectbackground")
+    INIT(selBorderWidthObj, "-selectborderwidth")
+    INIT(selForegroundObj, "-selectforeground")
+    INIT(insertColorObj, "-insertcolor")
+    INIT(insertWidthObj, "-insertwidth")
+#undef INIT
+
+    /* Reacquire color & border resources from resource cache.
+     */
+    es->foregroundObj = Ttk_UseColor(cache, tkwin, es->foregroundObj);
+    es->selForegroundObj = Ttk_UseColor(cache, tkwin, es->selForegroundObj);
+    es->insertColorObj = Ttk_UseColor(cache, tkwin, es->insertColorObj);
+    es->selBorderObj = Ttk_UseBorder(cache, tkwin, es->selBorderObj);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Resource management.
+ */
+
+/* EntryDisplayString --
+ * 	Return a malloc'ed string consisting of 'numChars' copies
+ * 	of (the first character in the string) 'showChar'.
+ * 	Used to compute the displayString if -show is non-NULL.
+ */
+static char *EntryDisplayString(const char *showChar, int numChars)
+{
+    char *displayString, *p;
+    int size;
+    Tcl_UniChar ch;
+    char buf[TCL_UTF_MAX];
+
+    Tcl_UtfToUniChar(showChar, &ch);
+    size = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, buf);
+    p = displayString = ckalloc(numChars * size + 1);
+
+    while (numChars--) {
+	p += Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, p);
+    }
+    *p = '\0';
+
+    return displayString;
+}
+
+/* EntryUpdateTextLayout --
+ * 	Recompute textLayout, layoutWidth, and layoutHeight
+ * 	from displayString and fontObj.
+ */
+static void EntryUpdateTextLayout(Entry *entryPtr)
+{
+    Tk_FreeTextLayout(entryPtr->entry.textLayout);
+    entryPtr->entry.textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(
+	    Tk_GetFontFromObj(entryPtr->core.tkwin, entryPtr->entry.fontObj),
+	    entryPtr->entry.displayString, entryPtr->entry.numChars,
+	    0/*wraplength*/, entryPtr->entry.justify, TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES,
+	    &entryPtr->entry.layoutWidth, &entryPtr->entry.layoutHeight);
+}
+
+/* EntryEditable --
+ * 	Returns 1 if the entry widget accepts user changes, 0 otherwise
+ */
+static int
+EntryEditable(Entry *entryPtr)
+{
+    return !(entryPtr->core.state & (TTK_STATE_DISABLED|TTK_STATE_READONLY));
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Selection management.
+ */
+
+/* EntryFetchSelection --
+ *	Selection handler for entry widgets.
+ */
+static int
+EntryFetchSelection(
+    ClientData clientData, int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
+    size_t byteCount;
+    const char *string;
+    const char *selStart, *selEnd;
+
+    if (entryPtr->entry.selectFirst < 0 || !entryPtr->entry.exportSelection) {
+	return -1;
+    }
+    string = entryPtr->entry.displayString;
+
+    selStart = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, entryPtr->entry.selectFirst);
+    selEnd = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(selStart,
+	    entryPtr->entry.selectLast - entryPtr->entry.selectFirst);
+    byteCount = selEnd - selStart - offset;
+    if (byteCount > (size_t)maxBytes) {
+    /* @@@POSSIBLE BUG: Can transfer partial UTF-8 sequences.  Is this OK? */
+	byteCount = maxBytes;
+    }
+    if (byteCount <= 0) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+    memcpy(buffer, selStart + offset, byteCount);
+    buffer[byteCount] = '\0';
+    return byteCount;
+}
+
+/* EntryLostSelection --
+ *	Tk_LostSelProc for Entry widgets; called when an entry
+ *	loses ownership of the selection.
+ */
+static void EntryLostSelection(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
+    entryPtr->core.flags &= ~GOT_SELECTION;
+    entryPtr->entry.selectFirst = entryPtr->entry.selectLast = -1;
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&entryPtr->core);
+}
+
+/* EntryOwnSelection --
+ * 	Assert ownership of the PRIMARY selection,
+ * 	if -exportselection set and selection is present.
+ */
+static void EntryOwnSelection(Entry *entryPtr)
+{
+    if (entryPtr->entry.exportSelection
+	&& !(entryPtr->core.flags & GOT_SELECTION)) {
+	Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->core.tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, EntryLostSelection,
+		(ClientData) entryPtr);
+	entryPtr->core.flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Validation.
+ */
+
+/* ExpandPercents --
+ *	Expand an entry validation script template (-validatecommand
+ *	or -invalidcommand).
+ */
+static void
+ExpandPercents(
+     Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry that needs validation. */
+     const char *template, 	/* Script template */
+     const char *new,		/* Potential new value of entry string */
+     int index,			/* index of insert/delete */
+     int count,			/* #changed characters */
+     VREASON reason,		/* Reason for change */
+     Tcl_DString *dsPtr)	/* Result of %-substitutions */
+{
+    int spaceNeeded, cvtFlags;
+    int number, length;
+    const char *string;
+    int stringLength;
+    Tcl_UniChar ch;
+    char numStorage[2*TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
+    while (*template) {
+	/* Find everything up to the next % character and append it
+	 * to the result string.
+	 */
+	string = Tcl_UtfFindFirst(template, '%');
+	if (string == NULL) {
+	    /* No more %-sequences to expand.
+	     * Copy the rest of the template.
+	     */
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, template, -1);
+	    return;
+	}
+	if (string != template) {
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, template, string - template);
+	    template = string;
+	}
+
+	/* There's a percent sequence here.  Process it.
+	 */
+	++template; /* skip over % */
+	if (*template != '\0') {
+	    template += Tcl_UtfToUniChar(template, &ch);
+	} else {
+	    ch = '%';
+	}
+
+	stringLength = -1;
+	switch (ch) {
+	    case 'd': /* Type of call that caused validation */
+		if (reason == VALIDATE_INSERT) {
+		    number = 1;
+		} else if (reason == VALIDATE_DELETE) {
+		    number = 0;
+		} else {
+		    number = -1;
+		}
+		sprintf(numStorage, "%d", number);
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
+	    case 'i': /* index of insert/delete */
+		sprintf(numStorage, "%d", index);
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
+	    case 'P': /* 'Peeked' new value of the string */
+		string = new;
+		break;
+	    case 's': /* Current string value */
+		string = entryPtr->entry.string;
+		break;
+	    case 'S': /* string to be inserted/deleted, if any */
+		if (reason == VALIDATE_INSERT) {
+		    string = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(new, index);
+		    stringLength = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, count) - string;
+		} else if (reason == VALIDATE_DELETE) {
+		    string = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(entryPtr->entry.string, index);
+		    stringLength = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, count) - string;
+		} else {
+		    string = "";
+		    stringLength = 0;
+		}
+		break;
+	    case 'v': /* type of validation currently set */
+		string = validateStrings[entryPtr->entry.validate];
+		break;
+	    case 'V': /* type of validation in effect */
+		string = validateReasonStrings[reason];
+		break;
+	    case 'W': /* widget name */
+		string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->core.tkwin);
+		break;
+	    default:
+		length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage);
+		numStorage[length] = '\0';
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
+	}
+
+	spaceNeeded = Tcl_ScanCountedElement(string, stringLength, &cvtFlags);
+	length = Tcl_DStringLength(dsPtr);
+	Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, length + spaceNeeded);
+	spaceNeeded = Tcl_ConvertCountedElement(string, stringLength,
+		Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + length,
+		cvtFlags | TCL_DONT_USE_BRACES);
+	Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, length + spaceNeeded);
+    }
+}
+
+/* RunValidationScript --
+ * 	Build and evaluate an entry validation script.
+ * 	If the script raises an error, disable validation
+ * 	by setting '-validate none'
+ */
+static int RunValidationScript(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, 	/* Interpreter to use */
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry being validated */
+    const char *template,	/* Script template */
+    const char *optionName,	/* "-validatecommand", "-invalidcommand" */
+    const char *new,		/* Potential new value of entry string */
+    int index,			/* index of insert/delete */
+    int count,			/* #changed characters */
+    VREASON reason)		/* Reason for change */
+{
+    Tcl_DString script;
+    int code;
+
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&script);
+    ExpandPercents(entryPtr, template, new, index, count, reason, &script);
+    code = Tcl_EvalEx(interp,
+		Tcl_DStringValue(&script), Tcl_DStringLength(&script),
+		TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL | TCL_EVAL_DIRECT);
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&script);
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&entryPtr->core))
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_RETURN) {
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n\t(in ");
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, optionName);
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, " validation command executed by ");
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, Tk_PathName(entryPtr->core.tkwin));
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, ")");
+	entryPtr->entry.validate = VMODE_NONE;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* EntryNeedsValidation --
+ * 	Determine whether the specified VREASON should trigger validation
+ * 	in the current VMODE.
+ */
+static int EntryNeedsValidation(VMODE vmode, VREASON reason)
+{
+    return (reason == VALIDATE_FORCED)
+	|| (vmode == VMODE_ALL)
+	|| (reason == VALIDATE_FOCUSIN
+	    && (vmode == VMODE_FOCUSIN || vmode == VMODE_FOCUS))
+	|| (reason == VALIDATE_FOCUSOUT
+	    && (vmode == VMODE_FOCUSOUT || vmode == VMODE_FOCUS))
+	|| (reason == VALIDATE_INSERT && vmode == VMODE_KEY)
+	|| (reason == VALIDATE_DELETE && vmode == VMODE_KEY)
+	;
+}
+
+/* EntryValidateChange --
+ *	Validate a proposed change to the entry widget's value if required.
+ *	Call the -invalidcommand if validation fails.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ *	TCL_OK if the change is accepted
+ *	TCL_BREAK if the change is rejected
+ *      TCL_ERROR if any errors occured
+ *
+ * The change will be rejected if -validatecommand returns 0, 
+ * or if -validatecommand or -invalidcommand modifies the value.
+ */
+static int
+EntryValidateChange(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry that needs validation. */
+    const char *newValue,	/* Potential new value of entry string */
+    int index,			/* index of insert/delete, -1 otherwise */
+    int count,			/* #changed characters */
+    VREASON reason)		/* Reason for change */
+{
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = entryPtr->core.interp;
+    VMODE vmode = entryPtr->entry.validate;
+    int code, change_ok;
+
+    if (   (entryPtr->entry.validateCmd == NULL)
+	|| (entryPtr->core.flags & VALIDATING)
+	|| !EntryNeedsValidation(vmode, reason) )
+    {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    entryPtr->core.flags |= VALIDATING;
+
+    /* Run -validatecommand and check return value:
+     */
+    code = RunValidationScript(interp, entryPtr,
+	    entryPtr->entry.validateCmd, "-validatecommand",
+	    newValue, index, count, reason);
+    if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	goto done;
+    }
+
+    code = Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp,Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), &change_ok);
+    if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	entryPtr->entry.validate = VMODE_NONE;	/* Disable validation */
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
+		"\n(validation command did not return valid boolean)");
+	goto done;
+    }
+
+    /* Run the -invalidcommand if validation failed:
+     */
+    if (!change_ok && entryPtr->entry.invalidCmd != NULL) {
+	code = RunValidationScript(interp, entryPtr,
+		entryPtr->entry.invalidCmd, "-invalidcommand",
+		newValue, index, count, reason);
+	if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Reject the pending change if validation failed
+     * or if a validation script changed the value.
+     */
+    if (!change_ok || (entryPtr->core.flags & VALIDATION_SET_VALUE)) {
+	code = TCL_BREAK;
+    }
+
+done:
+    entryPtr->core.flags &= ~(VALIDATING|VALIDATION_SET_VALUE);
+    return code;
+}
+
+/* EntryRevalidate --
+ * 	Revalidate the current value of an entry widget,
+ * 	update the TTK_STATE_INVALID bit.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	TCL_OK if valid, TCL_BREAK if invalid, TCL_ERROR on error.
+ */
+static int EntryRevalidate(Tcl_Interp *interp, Entry *entryPtr, VREASON reason)
+{
+    int code = EntryValidateChange(
+		    entryPtr, entryPtr->entry.string, -1,0, reason);
+
+    if (code == TCL_BREAK) {
+	WidgetChangeState(&entryPtr->core, TTK_STATE_INVALID, 0);
+    } else if (code == TCL_OK) {
+	WidgetChangeState(&entryPtr->core, 0, TTK_STATE_INVALID);
+    }
+
+    return code;
+}
+
+/* EntryRevalidateBG --
+ * 	Revalidate in the background (called from event handler).
+ */
+static void EntryRevalidateBG(Entry *entryPtr, VREASON reason)
+{
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = entryPtr->core.interp;
+    if (EntryRevalidate(interp, entryPtr, reason) == TCL_ERROR) {
+	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Entry widget modification.
+ */
+
+/* AdjustIndex --
+ * 	Adjust index to account for insertion (nChars > 0)
+ * 	or deletion (nChars < 0) at specified index.
+ */
+static int AdjustIndex(int i0, int index, int nChars)
+{
+    if (i0 >= index) {
+	i0 += nChars;
+	if (i0 < index) { /* index was inside deleted range */
+	    i0 = index;
+	}
+    }
+    return i0;
+}
+
+/* AdjustIndices --
+ * 	Adjust all internal entry indexes to account for change.
+ * 	Note that insertPos, and selectFirst have "right gravity",
+ * 	while leftIndex (=xscroll.first) and selectLast have "left gravity".
+ */
+static void AdjustIndices(Entry *entryPtr, int index, int nChars)
+{
+    EntryPart *e = &entryPtr->entry;
+    int g = nChars > 0;		/* left gravity adjustment */
+
+    e->insertPos    = AdjustIndex(e->insertPos, index, nChars);
+    e->selectFirst  = AdjustIndex(e->selectFirst, index, nChars);
+    e->selectLast   = AdjustIndex(e->selectLast, index+g, nChars);
+    e->xscroll.first= AdjustIndex(e->xscroll.first, index+g, nChars);
+
+    if (e->selectLast <= e->selectFirst)
+	e->selectFirst = e->selectLast = -1;
+}
+
+/* EntryStoreValue --
+ *	Replace the contents of a text entry with a given value,
+ *	recompute dependent resources, and schedule a redisplay.
+ *
+ *	See also: EntrySetValue().
+ */
+static void
+EntryStoreValue(Entry *entryPtr, const char *value)
+{
+    size_t numBytes = strlen(value);
+    int numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(value, numBytes);
+
+    if (entryPtr->core.flags & VALIDATING)
+	entryPtr->core.flags |= VALIDATION_SET_VALUE;
+
+    /* Make sure all indices remain in bounds:
+     */
+    if (numChars < entryPtr->entry.numChars)
+	AdjustIndices(entryPtr, numChars, numChars - entryPtr->entry.numChars);
+
+    /* Free old value:
+     */
+    if (entryPtr->entry.displayString != entryPtr->entry.string)
+	ckfree(entryPtr->entry.displayString);
+    ckfree(entryPtr->entry.string);
+
+    /* Store new value:
+     */
+    entryPtr->entry.string = ckalloc(numBytes + 1);
+    strcpy(entryPtr->entry.string, value);
+    entryPtr->entry.numBytes = numBytes;
+    entryPtr->entry.numChars = numChars;
+
+    entryPtr->entry.displayString
+	= entryPtr->entry.showChar
+	? EntryDisplayString(entryPtr->entry.showChar, numChars)
+	: entryPtr->entry.string
+	;
+
+    /* Update layout, schedule redisplay:
+     */
+    EntryUpdateTextLayout(entryPtr);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&entryPtr->core);
+}
+
+/* EntrySetValue --
+ * 	Stores a new value in the entry widget and updates the
+ * 	linked -textvariable, if any.  The write trace on the
+ * 	text variable is temporarily disabled; however, other
+ * 	write traces may change the value of the variable.
+ * 	If so, the new value is used instead (bypassing validation).
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	TCL_OK if successful, TCL_ERROR otherwise.
+ */
+static int EntrySetValue(Entry *entryPtr, const char *value)
+{
+    if (entryPtr->entry.textVariableObj) {
+	const char *textVarName =
+	    Tcl_GetString(entryPtr->entry.textVariableObj);
+	if (textVarName && *textVarName) {
+	    entryPtr->core.flags |= SYNCING_VARIABLE;
+	    value = Tcl_SetVar(entryPtr->core.interp, textVarName,
+		    value, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG);
+	    entryPtr->core.flags &= ~SYNCING_VARIABLE;
+	    if (!value || WidgetDestroyed(&entryPtr->core))
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    EntryStoreValue(entryPtr, value);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* EntryTextVariableTrace --
+ *	Variable trace procedure for entry -textvariable
+ */
+static void EntryTextVariableTrace(void *recordPtr, const char *value)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&entryPtr->core)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (entryPtr->core.flags & SYNCING_VARIABLE) {
+	/* Trace was fired due to Tcl_SetVar call in EntrySetValue.
+	 * Don't do anything.
+	 */
+	return;
+    }
+
+    EntryStoreValue(entryPtr, value ? value : "");
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Insertion and deletion.
+ */
+
+/* InsertChars --
+ *	Add new characters to an entry widget.
+ */
+static int
+InsertChars(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry that is to get the new elements. */
+    int index,			/* Insert before this index */
+    const char *value)		/* New characters to add */
+{
+    char *string = entryPtr->entry.string;
+    size_t byteIndex = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, index) - string;
+    size_t byteCount = strlen(value);
+    int charsAdded = Tcl_NumUtfChars(value, byteCount);
+    size_t newByteCount = entryPtr->entry.numBytes + byteCount + 1;
+    char *new;
+    int code;
+
+    if (byteCount == 0) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    new =  ckalloc(newByteCount);
+    memcpy(new, string, byteIndex);
+    strcpy(new + byteIndex, value);
+    strcpy(new + byteIndex + byteCount, string + byteIndex);
+
+    code = EntryValidateChange(
+	    entryPtr, new, index, charsAdded, VALIDATE_INSERT);
+
+    if (code == TCL_OK) {
+	AdjustIndices(entryPtr, index, charsAdded);
+	code = EntrySetValue(entryPtr, new);
+    } else if (code == TCL_BREAK) {
+	code = TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    ckfree(new);
+    return code;
+}
+
+/* DeleteChars --
+ *	Remove one or more characters from an entry widget.
+ */
+static int
+DeleteChars(
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry widget to modify. */
+    int index,			/* Index of first character to delete. */
+    int count)			/* How many characters to delete. */
+{
+    char *string = entryPtr->entry.string;
+    size_t byteIndex, byteCount, newByteCount;
+    char *new;
+    int code;
+
+    if (index < 0) {
+	index = 0;
+    }
+    if (count > entryPtr->entry.numChars - index) {
+	count = entryPtr->entry.numChars - index;
+    }
+    if (count <= 0) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    byteIndex = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, index) - string;
+    byteCount = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string+byteIndex, count) - (string+byteIndex);
+
+    newByteCount = entryPtr->entry.numBytes + 1 - byteCount;
+    new =  ckalloc(newByteCount);
+    memcpy(new, string, byteIndex);
+    strcpy(new + byteIndex, string + byteIndex + byteCount);
+
+    code = EntryValidateChange(
+	    entryPtr, new, index, count, VALIDATE_DELETE);
+
+    if (code == TCL_OK) {
+	AdjustIndices(entryPtr, index, -count);
+	code = EntrySetValue(entryPtr, new);
+    } else if (code == TCL_BREAK) {
+	code = TCL_OK;
+    }
+    ckfree(new);
+
+    return code;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Event handler.
+ */
+
+/* EntryEventProc --
+ *	Extra event handling for entry widgets:
+ *	Triggers validation on FocusIn and FocusOut events.
+ */
+#define EntryEventMask (FocusChangeMask)
+static void
+EntryEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
+
+    Tcl_Preserve(clientData);
+    switch (eventPtr->type) {
+	case DestroyNotify:
+	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(entryPtr->core.tkwin,
+		    EntryEventMask, EntryEventProc, clientData);
+	    break;
+	case FocusIn:
+	    EntryRevalidateBG(entryPtr, VALIDATE_FOCUSIN);
+	    break;
+	case FocusOut:
+	    EntryRevalidateBG(entryPtr, VALIDATE_FOCUSOUT);
+	    break;
+    }
+    Tcl_Release(clientData);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization and cleanup.
+ */
+
+static int
+EntryInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(
+	entryPtr->core.tkwin, EntryEventMask, EntryEventProc, entryPtr);
+    Tk_CreateSelHandler(entryPtr->core.tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING,
+	EntryFetchSelection, (ClientData) entryPtr, XA_STRING);
+    BlinkCursor(&entryPtr->core);
+
+    entryPtr->entry.string		= ckalloc(1);
+    *entryPtr->entry.string 		= '\0';
+    entryPtr->entry.displayString	= entryPtr->entry.string;
+    entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace 	= 0;
+    entryPtr->entry.numBytes = entryPtr->entry.numChars = 0;
+
+    EntryInitStyleDefaults(&entryPtr->entry.styleDefaults);
+
+    entryPtr->entry.xscrollHandle =
+	CreateScrollHandle(&entryPtr->core, &entryPtr->entry.xscroll);
+
+    entryPtr->entry.insertPos		= 0;
+    entryPtr->entry.selectFirst 	= -1;
+    entryPtr->entry.selectLast		= -1;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static void
+EntryCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+
+    if (entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace)
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace);
+
+    FreeScrollHandle(entryPtr->entry.xscrollHandle);
+
+    EntryFreeStyleDefaults(&entryPtr->entry.styleDefaults);
+
+    Tk_DeleteSelHandler(entryPtr->core.tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING);
+
+    Tk_FreeTextLayout(entryPtr->entry.textLayout);
+    if (entryPtr->entry.displayString != entryPtr->entry.string)
+	ckfree(entryPtr->entry.displayString);
+    ckfree(entryPtr->entry.string);
+}
+
+/* EntryConfigure --
+ * 	Configure hook for Entry widgets.
+ */
+static int EntryConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *textVarName = entryPtr->entry.textVariableObj;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = 0;
+
+    if (mask & TEXTVAR_CHANGED) {
+	if (textVarName && *Tcl_GetString(textVarName)) {
+	    vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(interp,
+		    textVarName,EntryTextVariableTrace,entryPtr);
+	    if (!vt) return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (CoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (vt) Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Update derived resources:
+     */
+    if (mask & TEXTVAR_CHANGED) {
+	if (entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace)
+	    Ttk_UntraceVariable(entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace);
+	entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace = vt;
+    }
+
+    /* Claim the selection, in case we've suddenly started exporting it.
+     */
+    if (entryPtr->entry.exportSelection && entryPtr->entry.selectFirst != -1) {
+	EntryOwnSelection(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    /* Handle -state compatibility option:
+     */
+    if (mask & STATE_CHANGED) {
+	CheckStateOption(&entryPtr->core, entryPtr->entry.stateObj);
+    }
+
+    /* Force scrollbar update if needed:
+     */
+    if (mask & SCROLLCMD_CHANGED) {
+	ScrollbarUpdateRequired(entryPtr->entry.xscrollHandle);
+    }
+
+    /* Recompute the displayString, in case showChar changed:
+     */
+    if (entryPtr->entry.displayString != entryPtr->entry.string)
+	ckfree(entryPtr->entry.displayString);
+
+    entryPtr->entry.displayString
+	= entryPtr->entry.showChar
+	? EntryDisplayString(entryPtr->entry.showChar, entryPtr->entry.numChars)
+	: entryPtr->entry.string
+	;
+
+    /* Update textLayout:
+     */
+    EntryUpdateTextLayout(entryPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* EntryPostConfigure --
+ * 	Post-configuration hook for entry widgets.
+ */
+static int EntryPostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if ((mask & TEXTVAR_CHANGED) && entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace != NULL) {
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(entryPtr->entry.textVariableTrace);
+    }
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout and display.
+ */
+
+/* EntryTextArea --
+ * 	Return bounding box of entry display ("owner-draw") area.
+ */
+static Ttk_Box
+EntryTextArea(Entry *entryPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &entryPtr->core;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *node = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(corePtr->layout, "textarea");
+    return node ? Ttk_LayoutNodeParcel(node) : Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin);
+}
+
+/* EntryCharPosition --
+ * 	Return the X coordinate of the specified character index.
+ * 	Precondition: textLayout and layoutX up-to-date.
+ */
+static int
+EntryCharPosition(Entry *entryPtr, int index)
+{
+    int xPos;
+    Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->entry.textLayout, index, &xPos, NULL, NULL, NULL);
+    return xPos + entryPtr->entry.layoutX;
+}
+
+/* EntryDoLayout --
+ * 	Layout hook for entry widgets.
+ *
+ * 	Determine position of textLayout based on xscroll.first, justify,
+ * 	and display area.
+ *
+ * 	Recalculates layoutX, layoutY, and rightIndex,
+ * 	and updates xscroll accordingly.
+ * 	May adjust xscroll.first to ensure the maximum #characters are onscreen.
+ */
+static void
+EntryDoLayout(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &entryPtr->core;
+    Tk_TextLayout textLayout = entryPtr->entry.textLayout;
+    int leftIndex = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.first;
+    int rightIndex;
+    Ttk_Box textarea;
+
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin));
+    textarea = EntryTextArea(entryPtr);
+
+    /* Center the text vertically within the available parcel:
+     */
+    entryPtr->entry.layoutY = textarea.y +
+	(textarea.height - entryPtr->entry.layoutHeight)/2;
+
+    /* Recompute where the leftmost character on the display will
+     * be drawn (layoutX) and adjust leftIndex if necessary.
+     */
+    if (entryPtr->entry.layoutWidth <= textarea.width) {
+	/* Everything fits.  Set leftIndex to zero (no need to scroll),
+	 * and compute layoutX based on -justify.
+	 */
+	int extraSpace = textarea.width - entryPtr->entry.layoutWidth;
+	leftIndex = 0;
+	rightIndex = entryPtr->entry.numChars;
+	entryPtr->entry.layoutX = textarea.x;
+	if (entryPtr->entry.justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) {
+	    entryPtr->entry.layoutX += extraSpace;
+	} else if (entryPtr->entry.justify == TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER) {
+	    entryPtr->entry.layoutX += extraSpace / 2;
+	}
+    } else {
+	/* The whole string doesn't fit in the window.
+	 * Limit leftIndex to leave at most one character's worth
+	 * of empty space on the right.
+	 */
+	int overflow = entryPtr->entry.layoutWidth - textarea.width;
+	int maxLeftIndex = 1 + Tk_PointToChar(textLayout, overflow, 0);
+	int leftX;
+
+	if (leftIndex > maxLeftIndex) {
+	    leftIndex = maxLeftIndex;
+	}
+
+	/* Compute layoutX and rightIndex.
+	 * rightIndex is set to one past the last fully-visible character.
+	 */
+	Tk_CharBbox(textLayout, leftIndex, &leftX, NULL, NULL, NULL);
+	rightIndex = Tk_PointToChar(textLayout, leftX + textarea.width, 0);
+	entryPtr->entry.layoutX = textarea.x - leftX;
+    }
+
+    Scrolled(entryPtr->entry.xscrollHandle,
+	    leftIndex, rightIndex, entryPtr->entry.numChars);
+}
+
+/* EntryGetGC -- Helper routine.
+ *      Get a GC using the specified foreground color and the entry's font.
+ *      Result must be freed with Tk_FreeGC().
+ */
+static GC EntryGetGC(Entry *entryPtr, Tcl_Obj *colorObj)
+{
+    Tk_Window tkwin = entryPtr->core.tkwin;
+    Tk_Font font = Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, entryPtr->entry.fontObj);
+    XColor *colorPtr;
+    unsigned long mask = 0ul;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+
+    gcValues.line_width = 1; mask |= GCLineWidth;
+    gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(font); mask |= GCFont;
+    if (colorObj != 0 && (colorPtr=Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin,colorObj)) != 0) {
+	gcValues.foreground = colorPtr->pixel;
+	mask |= GCForeground;
+    }
+    return Tk_GetGC(entryPtr->core.tkwin, mask, &gcValues);
+}
+
+
+/* EntryDisplay --
+ *	Redraws the contents of an entry window.
+ */
+static void EntryDisplay(void *clientData, Drawable d)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = clientData;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = entryPtr->core.tkwin;
+    int leftIndex = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.first,
+	rightIndex = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.last,
+	selFirst = entryPtr->entry.selectFirst,
+	selLast = entryPtr->entry.selectLast;
+    EntryStyleData es;
+    GC gc;
+    int showSelection, showCursor;
+
+    EntryInitStyleData(entryPtr, &es);
+
+    showCursor = 
+	   (entryPtr->core.flags & CURSOR_ON) != 0
+	&& EntryEditable(entryPtr)
+	&& entryPtr->entry.insertPos >= leftIndex
+	&& entryPtr->entry.insertPos <= rightIndex
+	;
+    showSelection =
+	   (entryPtr->core.state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED) == 0
+	&& selFirst > -1
+	&& selLast > leftIndex
+	&& selFirst <= rightIndex
+	;
+
+    /* Adjust selection range to keep in display bounds.
+     */
+    if (showSelection) {
+	if (selFirst < leftIndex)
+	    selFirst = leftIndex;
+	if (selLast > rightIndex)
+	    selLast = rightIndex;
+    }
+
+    /* Draw widget background & border
+     */
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(entryPtr->core.layout, entryPtr->core.state, d);
+
+    /* Draw selection background
+     */
+    if (showSelection && es.selBorderObj) {
+	Tk_3DBorder selBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, es.selBorderObj);
+	int selStartX = EntryCharPosition(entryPtr, selFirst);
+	int selEndX = EntryCharPosition(entryPtr, selLast);
+	int borderWidth = 1;
+
+	Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, es.selBorderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+
+	if (selBorder) {
+	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, selBorder,
+		selStartX - borderWidth, entryPtr->entry.layoutY - borderWidth,
+		selEndX - selStartX + 2*borderWidth,
+		entryPtr->entry.layoutHeight + 2*borderWidth,
+		borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Draw cursor:
+     */
+    if (showCursor) {
+	int cursorX = EntryCharPosition(entryPtr, entryPtr->entry.insertPos),
+	    cursorY = entryPtr->entry.layoutY,
+	    cursorHeight = entryPtr->entry.layoutHeight,
+	    cursorWidth = 1;
+
+	Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL,es.insertWidthObj,&cursorWidth);
+	if (cursorWidth <= 0) {
+	    cursorWidth = 1;
+	}
+
+	/* @@@ should: maybe: SetCaretPos even when blinked off */
+	Tk_SetCaretPos(tkwin, cursorX, cursorY, cursorHeight);
+
+	gc = EntryGetGC(entryPtr, es.insertColorObj);
+	XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, 
+	    cursorX-cursorWidth/2, cursorY, cursorWidth, cursorHeight);
+	Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+    }
+
+    /* Draw the text:
+     */
+    gc = EntryGetGC(entryPtr, es.foregroundObj);
+    Tk_DrawTextLayout(
+	Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, entryPtr->entry.textLayout,
+	entryPtr->entry.layoutX, entryPtr->entry.layoutY,
+	leftIndex, rightIndex);
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+
+    /* Overwrite the selected portion (if any) in the -selectforeground color:
+     */
+    if (showSelection) {
+	gc = EntryGetGC(entryPtr, es.selForegroundObj);
+	Tk_DrawTextLayout(
+	    Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, entryPtr->entry.textLayout,
+	    entryPtr->entry.layoutX, entryPtr->entry.layoutY,
+	    selFirst, selLast);
+	Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands.
+ */
+
+/* EntryIndex --
+ *	Parse an index into an entry and return either its value
+ *	or an error.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.  If all went well, then *indexPtr is
+ *	filled in with the character index (into entryPtr) corresponding to
+ *	string.  The index value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and
+ *	the number of characters in the string, inclusive.  If an
+ *	error occurs then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ */
+static int
+EntryIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For error messages. */
+    Entry *entryPtr,		/* Entry widget to query */
+    Tcl_Obj *indexObj,		/* Symbolic index name */
+    int *indexPtr)		/* Return value */
+{
+#   define EntryWidth(e) (Tk_Width(entryPtr->core.tkwin)) /* Not Right */
+    int length;
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(indexObj, &length);
+
+    if (strncmp(string, "end", length) == 0) {
+	*indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.numChars;
+    } else if (strncmp(string, "insert", length) == 0) {
+	*indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.insertPos;
+    } else if (strncmp(string, "left", length) == 0) {	/* for debugging */
+	*indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.first;
+    } else if (strncmp(string, "right", length) == 0) {	/* for debugging */
+	*indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.last;
+    } else if (strncmp(string, "sel.", 4) == 0) {
+	if (entryPtr->entry.selectFirst < 0) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "selection isn't in widget ",
+		    Tk_PathName(entryPtr->core.tkwin), NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (strncmp(string, "sel.first", length) == 0) {
+	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.selectFirst;
+	} else if (strncmp(string, "sel.last", length) == 0) {
+	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.selectLast;
+	} else {
+	    goto badIndex;
+	}
+    } else if (string[0] == '@') {
+	int roundUp = 0;
+	int maxWidth = EntryWidth(entryPtr);
+	int x;
+
+	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string + 1, &x) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto badIndex;
+	}
+	if (x > maxWidth) {
+	    x = maxWidth;
+	    roundUp = 1;
+	}
+	*indexPtr = Tk_PointToChar(entryPtr->entry.textLayout,
+		x - entryPtr->entry.layoutX, 0);
+
+	if (*indexPtr < entryPtr->entry.xscroll.first) {
+	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.xscroll.first;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Special trick:  if the x-position was off-screen to the right,
+	 * round the index up to refer to the character just after the
+	 * last visible one on the screen.  This is needed to enable the
+	 * last character to be selected, for example.
+	 */
+
+	if (roundUp && (*indexPtr < entryPtr->entry.numChars)) {
+	    *indexPtr += 1;
+	}
+    } else {
+	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, indexPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto badIndex;
+	}
+	if (*indexPtr < 0) {
+	    *indexPtr = 0;
+	} else if (*indexPtr > entryPtr->entry.numChars) {
+	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->entry.numChars;
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+badIndex:
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad entry index \"", string, "\"", NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* $entry bbox $index --
+ * 	Return the bounding box of the character at the specified index.
+ */
+static int
+EntryBBoxCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Box b;
+    int index;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if ((index == entryPtr->entry.numChars) && (index > 0)) {
+	index--;
+    }
+    Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->entry.textLayout, index, 
+	    &b.x, &b.y, &b.width, &b.height);
+    b.x += entryPtr->entry.layoutX;
+    b.y += entryPtr->entry.layoutY;
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Ttk_NewBoxObj(b));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry delete $from ?$to? --
+ *	Delete the characters in the range [$from,$to).
+ *	$to defaults to $from+1 if not specified.
+ */
+static int
+EntryDeleteCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int first, last;
+
+    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &first) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	last = first + 1;
+    } else if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[3], &last) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (last >= first && EntryEditable(entryPtr)) {
+	return DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry get --
+ * 	Return the current value of the entry widget.
+ */
+static int
+EntryGetCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    if (objc != 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_SetResult(interp, entryPtr->entry.string, TCL_VOLATILE);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry icursor $index --
+ * 	Set the insert cursor position.
+ */
+static int
+EntryICursorCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pos");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2],
+	    &entryPtr->entry.insertPos) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&entryPtr->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry index $index --
+ * 	Return numeric value (0..numChars) of the specified index.
+ */
+static int
+EntryIndexCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int index;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry insert $index $text --
+ * 	Insert $text after position $index.
+ * 	Silent no-op if the entry is disabled or read-only.
+ */
+static int
+EntryInsertCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int index;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (EntryEditable(entryPtr)) {
+	return InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* selection clear --
+ * 	Clear selection.
+ */
+static int EntrySelectionClearCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    entryPtr->entry.selectFirst = entryPtr->entry.selectLast = -1;
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&entryPtr->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry selection present --
+ * 	Returns 1 if any characters are selected, 0 otherwise.
+ */
+static int EntrySelectionPresentCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	    Tcl_NewBooleanObj(entryPtr->entry.selectFirst >= 0));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry selection range $start $end --
+ * 	Explicitly set the selection range.
+ */
+static int EntrySelectionRangeCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int start, end;
+    if (objc != 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (    EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[3], &start) != TCL_OK
+         || EntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, objv[4], &end) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (entryPtr->core.state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    if (start >= end) {
+	entryPtr->entry.selectFirst = entryPtr->entry.selectLast = -1;
+    } else {
+	entryPtr->entry.selectFirst = start;
+	entryPtr->entry.selectLast = end;
+	EntryOwnSelection(entryPtr);
+    }
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&entryPtr->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry selection $command ?arg arg...?
+ *	Ensemble, see above.
+ */
+static int EntrySelectionCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    static WidgetCommandSpec EntrySelectionCommands[] = {
+	{ "clear", EntrySelectionClearCommand },
+	{ "present", EntrySelectionPresentCommand },
+	{ "range", EntrySelectionRangeCommand },
+	{0,0}
+    };
+    return WidgetEnsembleCommand(
+	    EntrySelectionCommands, 2, interp, objc, objv, recordPtr);
+}
+
+/* $entry set $value
+ * 	Sets the value of an entry widget.
+ */
+static int EntrySetCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "value");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    EntrySetValue(entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry validate --
+ * 	Trigger forced validation.  Returns 1/0 if validation succeeds/fails
+ * 	or error status from -validatecommand / -invalidcommand.
+ */
+static int EntryValidateCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    int code;
+
+    if (objc != 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    code = EntryRevalidate(interp, entryPtr, VALIDATE_FORCED);
+
+    if (code == TCL_ERROR)
+	return code;
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(code == TCL_OK));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $entry xview	-- horizontal scrolling interface
+ */
+static int EntryXViewCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Entry *entryPtr = recordPtr;
+    return ScrollviewCommand(interp, objc, objv, entryPtr->entry.xscrollHandle);
+}
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec EntryCommands[] =
+{
+    { "bbox", 		EntryBBoxCommand },
+    { "cget", 		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "configure", 	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "delete", 	EntryDeleteCommand },
+    { "get", 		EntryGetCommand },
+    { "icursor", 	EntryICursorCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { "index", 		EntryIndexCommand },
+    { "insert", 	EntryInsertCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "selection", 	EntrySelectionCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "validate", 	EntryValidateCommand },
+    { "xview", 		EntryXViewCommand },
+    {0,0}
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Entry widget definition.
+ */
+
+WidgetSpec EntryWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TEntry",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Entry), 		/* recordSize */
+    EntryOptionSpecs, 		/* optionSpecs */
+    EntryCommands,  		/* subcommands */
+    EntryInitialize,     	/* initializeProc */
+    EntryCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    EntryConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    EntryPostConfigure,  	/* postConfigureProc */
+    WidgetGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    WidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    EntryDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    EntryDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Combobox widget record.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*postCommandObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*valuesObj;
+    int 	currentIndex;
+} ComboboxPart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore core;
+    EntryPart entry;
+    ComboboxPart combobox;
+} Combobox;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ComboboxOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-postcommand", "postCommand", "PostCommand",
+        "", Tk_Offset(Combobox, combobox.postCommandObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-values", "values", "Values",
+        "", Tk_Offset(Combobox, combobox.valuesObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(EntryOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/* ComboboxInitialize --
+ * 	Initialization hook for combobox widgets.
+ */
+static int
+ComboboxInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Combobox *cb = recordPtr;
+    cb->combobox.currentIndex = -1;
+    TrackElementState(&cb->core);
+    return EntryInitialize(interp, recordPtr);
+}
+
+/* ComboboxConfigure --
+ * 	Configuration hook for combobox widgets.
+ */
+static int
+ComboboxConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Combobox *cbPtr = recordPtr;
+    int unused;
+
+    /* Make sure -values is a valid list:
+     */
+    if (Tcl_ListObjLength(interp,cbPtr->combobox.valuesObj,&unused) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    return EntryConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask);
+}
+
+/* $cb current ?newIndex? -- get or set current index.
+ * 	Setting the current index updates the combobox value,
+ * 	but the value and -values may be changed independently
+ * 	of the index.  Instead of trying to keep currentIndex
+ * 	in sync at all times, [$cb current] double-checks 
+ */
+static int ComboboxCurrentCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Combobox *cbPtr = recordPtr;
+    int currentIndex = cbPtr->combobox.currentIndex;
+    const char *currentValue = cbPtr->entry.string;
+    int nValues;
+    Tcl_Obj **values;
+
+    Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp,cbPtr->combobox.valuesObj,&nValues,&values);
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	/* Check if currentIndex still valid:
+	 */
+	if (    currentIndex < 0 
+	     || currentIndex >= nValues
+	     || strcmp(currentValue,Tcl_GetString(values[currentIndex]))
+	   )
+	{
+	    /* Not valid.  Check current value against each element in -values:
+	     */
+	    for (currentIndex = 0; currentIndex < nValues; ++currentIndex) {
+		if (!strcmp(currentValue,Tcl_GetString(values[currentIndex]))) {
+		    break;
+		}
+	    }
+	    if (currentIndex >= nValues) {
+		/* Not found */
+		currentIndex = -1;
+	    }
+	}
+	cbPtr->combobox.currentIndex = currentIndex;
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(currentIndex));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 3) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &currentIndex) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (currentIndex < 0 || currentIndex >= nValues) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
+		    "Index ", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), " out of range",
+		    NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	cbPtr->combobox.currentIndex = currentIndex;
+
+	return EntrySetValue(recordPtr, Tcl_GetString(values[currentIndex]));
+    } else {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?newIndex?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Combobox widget definition.
+ */
+static WidgetCommandSpec ComboboxCommands[] =
+{
+    { "bbox", 		EntryBBoxCommand },
+    { "cget", 		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "configure", 	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "current", 	ComboboxCurrentCommand },
+    { "delete", 	EntryDeleteCommand },
+    { "get", 		EntryGetCommand },
+    { "icursor", 	EntryICursorCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { "index", 		EntryIndexCommand },
+    { "insert", 	EntryInsertCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "selection", 	EntrySelectionCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "set", 		EntrySetCommand },
+    { "xview", 		EntryXViewCommand },
+    {0,0}
+};
+
+WidgetSpec ComboboxWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TCombobox",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Combobox), 		/* recordSize */
+    ComboboxOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    ComboboxCommands,  		/* subcommands */
+    ComboboxInitialize,     	/* initializeProc */
+    EntryCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    ComboboxConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    EntryPostConfigure,  	/* postConfigureProc */
+    WidgetGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    WidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    EntryDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    EntryDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Textarea element.
+ *
+ * Text display area for Entry widgets.
+ * Just computes requested size; display is handled by the widget itself.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*fontObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*widthObj;
+} TextareaElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TextareaElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-font", TK_OPTION_FONT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextareaElement,fontObj), DEF_ENTRY_FONT },
+    { "-width", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextareaElement,widthObj), "20" },
+    {0,0,0}
+};
+
+static void TextareaElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TextareaElement *textarea = elementRecord;
+    Tk_Font font = Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, textarea->fontObj);
+    int avgWidth = Tk_TextWidth(font, "0", 1);
+    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+    int prefWidth = 1;
+
+    Tk_GetFontMetrics(font, &fm);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, textarea->widthObj, &prefWidth);
+    if (prefWidth <= 0)
+	prefWidth = 1;
+
+    *heightPtr = fm.linespace;
+    *widthPtr = prefWidth * avgWidth;
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TextareaElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TextareaElement),
+    TextareaElementOptions,
+    TextareaElementGeometry,
+    NullElementDraw
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(EntryLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Entry.field", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	TTK_GROUP("Entry.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Entry.textarea", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(ComboboxLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Combobox.field", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Combobox.downarrow", TTK_PACK_RIGHT|TTK_FILL_Y)
+	TTK_GROUP("Combobox.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_EXPAND,
+	    TTK_NODE("Combobox.textarea", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/* EntryWidget_Init --
+ * 	Register entry-based widgets and related resources.
+ */
+int EntryWidget_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr =  Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, themePtr, "textarea", &TextareaElementSpec, 0);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "TEntry", EntryLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "TCombobox", ComboboxLayout);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::entry", &EntryWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::combobox", &ComboboxWidgetSpec);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkFrame.c b/generic/ttk/ttkFrame.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c0a9b6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkFrame.c
@@ -0,0 +1,620 @@
+/* $Id: ttkFrame.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: frame and labelframe widgets
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+#include "ttkManager.h"
+
+/* ======================================================================
+ * +++ Frame widget:
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj	*borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*paddingObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*widthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*heightObj;
+} FramePart;
+
+typedef struct 
+{
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    FramePart	frame;
+} Frame;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec FrameOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(Frame,frame.borderWidthObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Pad", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(Frame,frame.paddingObj), -1, 
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(Frame,frame.reliefObj), -1, 
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Frame,frame.widthObj), -1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Frame,frame.heightObj), -1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(CoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec FrameCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "identify",   WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { NULL, NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * FrameMargins --
+ * 	Compute internal margins for a frame widget.
+ * 	This includes the -borderWidth, plus any additional -padding.
+ */
+static Ttk_Padding FrameMargins(Frame *framePtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Padding margins = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+
+    /* Check -padding:
+     */
+    if (framePtr->frame.paddingObj) {
+	Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, 
+	    framePtr->core.tkwin, framePtr->frame.paddingObj, &margins);
+    }
+
+    /* Add padding for border:
+     */
+    if (framePtr->frame.borderWidthObj) {
+	int border = 0;
+	Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, 
+	    framePtr->core.tkwin, framePtr->frame.borderWidthObj, &border);
+	margins = Ttk_AddPadding(margins, Ttk_UniformPadding((short)border));
+    }
+
+    return margins;
+}
+
+/* FrameSize procedure --
+ * 	The frame doesn't request a size of its own by default,
+ * 	but it does have an internal border.  See also <<NOTE-SIZE>>
+ */
+static int FrameSize(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Frame *framePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_SetMargins(framePtr->core.tkwin, FrameMargins(framePtr));
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ * FrameConfigure -- configure hook.
+ *	<<NOTE-SIZE>> Usually the size of a frame is controlled by 
+ *	a geometry manager (pack, grid); the -width and -height
+ *	options are only effective if geometry propagation is turned
+ *	off or if the [place] GM is used for child widgets.
+ *
+ *	To avoid geometry blinking, we issue a geometry request
+ *	in the Configure hook instead of the Size hook, and only
+ *	if -width and/or -height is nonzero and one of them
+ *	or the other size-related options (-borderwidth, -padding)
+ *	has been changed.
+ */
+
+static int FrameConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Frame *framePtr = recordPtr;
+    int width, height;
+
+    /*
+     * Make sure -padding resource, if present, is correct:
+     */
+    if (framePtr->frame.paddingObj) {
+	Ttk_Padding unused;
+	if (Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(interp,
+		    	framePtr->core.tkwin,
+			framePtr->frame.paddingObj,
+			&unused) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* See <<NOTE-SIZE>>
+     */
+    if (  TCL_OK != Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(
+	    interp,framePtr->core.tkwin,framePtr->frame.widthObj,&width)
+       || TCL_OK != Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(
+	    interp,framePtr->core.tkwin,framePtr->frame.heightObj,&height)
+       ) 
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if ((width > 0 || height > 0) && (mask & GEOMETRY_CHANGED)) {
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(framePtr->core.tkwin, width, height);
+    }
+
+    return CoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask);
+}
+
+/* public */
+WidgetSpec FrameWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TFrame",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Frame),		/* recordSize */
+    FrameOptionSpecs,		/* optionSpecs */
+    FrameCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    NullInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    NullCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    FrameConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    NullPostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    WidgetGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    FrameSize,			/* sizeProc */
+    WidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/* ======================================================================
+ * +++ Labelframe widget:
+ */
+
+#define DEFAULT_LABELINSET	8
+#define DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH	2
+
+int TtkGetLabelAnchorFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_PositionSpec *anchorPtr)
+{
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+    char c = *string++;
+    Ttk_PositionSpec flags = 0;
+
+    /* First character determines side:
+     */
+    switch (c) {
+	case 'w' : flags = TTK_PACK_LEFT; 	break;
+	case 'e' : flags = TTK_PACK_RIGHT; 	break;
+	case 'n' : flags = TTK_PACK_TOP; 	break;
+	case 's' : flags = TTK_PACK_BOTTOM; 	break;
+	default  : goto error;
+    }
+    
+    /* Remaining characters are as per -sticky:
+     */
+    while ((c = *string++) != '\0') {
+	switch (c) {
+	    case 'w' : flags |= TTK_STICK_W; break;
+	    case 'e' : flags |= TTK_STICK_E; break;
+	    case 'n' : flags |= TTK_STICK_N; break;
+	    case 's' : flags |= TTK_STICK_S; break;
+	    default  : goto error;
+	}
+    }
+
+    *anchorPtr = flags;
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    if (interp) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	    "Bad label anchor specification ", Tcl_GetString(objPtr),
+	    NULL);
+    }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* LabelAnchorSide --
+ * 	Returns the side corresponding to a LabelAnchor value.
+ */
+static Ttk_Side LabelAnchorSide(Ttk_PositionSpec flags)
+{
+    if (flags & TTK_PACK_LEFT) 		return TTK_SIDE_LEFT;
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_RIGHT)	return TTK_SIDE_RIGHT;
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_TOP)	return TTK_SIDE_TOP;
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_BOTTOM)	return TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM;
+    /*NOTREACHED*/
+    return TTK_SIDE_TOP;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Labelframe widget record:
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj 	*labelAnchorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*textObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*underlineObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*labelWidgetObj;
+
+    Ttk_Manager	*mgr;
+    Tk_Window	labelWidget;	/* Set in configureProc */
+    Ttk_Box	labelParcel;	/* Set in layoutProc */
+} LabelframePart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore  	core;
+    FramePart   	frame;
+    LabelframePart	label;
+} Labelframe;
+
+#define LABELWIDGET_CHANGED 0x100
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec LabelframeOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-labelanchor", "labelAnchor", "LabelAnchor",
+	"nw", Tk_Offset(Labelframe, label.labelAnchorObj),-1,
+        0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Labelframe,label.textObj), -1, 
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED }, 
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
+	"-1", Tk_Offset(Labelframe,label.underlineObj), -1, 
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-labelwidget", "labelWidget", "LabelWidget", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(Labelframe,label.labelWidgetObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,LABELWIDGET_CHANGED|GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(FrameOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * Labelframe style parameters:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    int 		borderWidth;	/* border width */
+    Ttk_Padding 	padding;	/* internal padding */
+    Ttk_PositionSpec	labelAnchor;	/* corner/side to place label */
+    Ttk_Padding		labelMargins;	/* extra space around label */
+    int 		labelOutside;	/* true=>place label outside border */
+} LabelframeStyle;
+
+static void LabelframeStyleOptions(Labelframe *lf, LabelframeStyle *style)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout layout = lf->core.layout;
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+
+    style->borderWidth = DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH;
+    style->padding = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+    style->labelAnchor = TTK_PACK_TOP | TTK_STICK_W;
+    style->labelMargins = 
+	Ttk_MakePadding(DEFAULT_LABELINSET,0,DEFAULT_LABELINSET,0);
+    style->labelOutside = 0;
+
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(layout, "-borderwidth", 0)) != NULL) {
+	Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, lf->core.tkwin, objPtr, &style->borderWidth);
+    }
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(layout, "-padding", 0)) != NULL) {
+	Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, lf->core.tkwin, objPtr, &style->padding);
+    }
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(layout,"-labelanchor", 0)) != NULL) {
+	TtkGetLabelAnchorFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &style->labelAnchor);
+    }
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(layout,"-labelmargins", 0)) != NULL) {
+	Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &style->labelMargins);
+    }
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(layout,"-labeloutside", 0)) != NULL) {
+	Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &style->labelOutside);
+    }
+
+    return;
+}
+
+/* LabelframeLabelSize --
+ * 	Extract the requested width and height of the labelframe's label:
+ * 	taken from the label widget if specified, otherwise the text label.
+ */
+static void 
+LabelframeLabelSize(Labelframe *lframePtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &lframePtr->core;
+    Tk_Window labelWidget = lframePtr->label.labelWidget;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *textNode = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(corePtr->layout, "text");
+
+    if (labelWidget) {
+	*widthPtr = Tk_ReqWidth(labelWidget);
+	*heightPtr = Tk_ReqHeight(labelWidget);
+    } else if (textNode) { 
+	Ttk_LayoutNodeReqSize(corePtr->layout, textNode, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    } else {
+	*widthPtr = *heightPtr = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * LabelframeSize --
+ * 	Like the frame, this doesn't request a size of its own
+ * 	but it does have internal padding and a minimum size.
+ */
+static int LabelframeSize(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframePtr = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &lframePtr->core;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    LabelframeStyle style;
+    int labelWidth, labelHeight;
+
+    LabelframeStyleOptions(lframePtr, &style);
+
+    /* Compute base margins (See also: FrameMargins)
+     */
+    margins = Ttk_AddPadding(
+		style.padding, Ttk_UniformPadding((short)style.borderWidth));
+
+    /* Adjust margins based on label size and position:
+     */
+    LabelframeLabelSize(lframePtr, &labelWidth, &labelHeight);
+    labelWidth += Ttk_PaddingWidth(style.labelMargins);
+    labelHeight += Ttk_PaddingHeight(style.labelMargins);
+
+    switch (LabelAnchorSide(style.labelAnchor)) {
+	case TTK_SIDE_LEFT:	margins.left   += labelWidth;	break;
+	case TTK_SIDE_RIGHT:	margins.right  += labelWidth;	break;
+	case TTK_SIDE_TOP:	margins.top    += labelHeight;	break;
+	case TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM:	margins.bottom += labelHeight;	break;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_SetMargins(corePtr->tkwin,margins);
+
+    /* Request minimum size based on border width and label size:
+     */
+    Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(corePtr->tkwin, 
+	    labelWidth + 2*style.borderWidth,
+	    labelHeight + 2*style.borderWidth);
+
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ * LabelframeDoLayout --
+ * 	Labelframe layout hook.  
+ *
+ * Side effects: Computes labelParcel.
+ */
+
+static void LabelframeDoLayout(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframePtr = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &lframePtr->core;
+    Ttk_Box borderParcel = Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin);
+    Ttk_LayoutNode
+	*textNode = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(corePtr->layout, "text"),
+	*borderNode = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(corePtr->layout, "border");
+    int lw, lh;			/* Label width and height */
+    LabelframeStyle style;
+    Ttk_Box labelParcel;
+
+    /*
+     * Do base layout:
+     */
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,borderParcel);
+
+    /*
+     * Compute label parcel:
+     */
+    LabelframeStyleOptions(lframePtr, &style);
+    LabelframeLabelSize(lframePtr, &lw, &lh);
+    lw += Ttk_PaddingWidth(style.labelMargins);
+    lh += Ttk_PaddingHeight(style.labelMargins);
+
+    labelParcel = Ttk_PadBox(
+	Ttk_PositionBox(&borderParcel, lw, lh, style.labelAnchor),
+	style.labelMargins);
+
+    if (!style.labelOutside) {
+	/* Move border edge so it's over label:
+	*/
+	switch (LabelAnchorSide(style.labelAnchor)) {
+	    case TTK_SIDE_LEFT: 	borderParcel.x -= lw / 2;
+	    case TTK_SIDE_RIGHT:	borderParcel.width += lw/2; 	break;
+	    case TTK_SIDE_TOP:  	borderParcel.y -= lh / 2;
+	    case TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM:	borderParcel.height += lh / 2;	break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* 
+     * Place border and label:
+     */
+    if (borderNode) {
+	Ttk_PlaceLayoutNode(corePtr->layout, borderNode, borderParcel);
+    }
+    if (textNode) {
+	Ttk_PlaceLayoutNode(corePtr->layout, textNode, labelParcel);
+    }
+    /* labelWidget placed in LabelframePlaceSlaves GM hook */
+    lframePtr->label.labelParcel = labelParcel;
+}
+
+/* LabelframePlaceSlaves --
+ * 	Sets the position and size of the labelwidget.  
+ */
+static void LabelframePlaceSlaves(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframe = recordPtr;
+
+    if (Ttk_NumberSlaves(lframe->label.mgr) == 1) {
+	Ttk_Box b;
+	LabelframeDoLayout(recordPtr);
+	b = lframe->label.labelParcel;
+	/* ASSERT: slave #0 is lframe->label.labelWidget */
+	Ttk_PlaceSlave(lframe->label.mgr, 0, b.x,b.y,b.width,b.height);
+    }
+}
+
+/* Labelframe geometry manager:
+ */
+static void LabelAdded(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex) { /* no-op */ }
+static void LabelRemoved(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex) { /* no-op */ }
+static int LabelConfigured(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Manager *mgr, Ttk_Slave *slave, unsigned mask)
+    { return TCL_OK; }
+
+/* LabelframeLostSlave --
+ * 	Called when the labelWidget slave is involuntarily lost;
+ * 	unset the -labelwidget option.
+ * Notes:
+ * 	Do this here instead of in the SlaveRemoved hook, 
+ * 	since the latter is also called when the widget voluntarily
+ * 	forgets the slave.  The latter happens in the ConfigureProc
+ * 	at a time when the widget is in an inconsistent state.
+ */
+static void LabelframeLostSlave(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window slaveWindow)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = clientData;
+    Labelframe *lframePtr = slave->manager->managerData;
+
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(lframePtr->label.labelWidgetObj);
+    lframePtr->label.labelWidgetObj = 0;
+    lframePtr->label.labelWidget = 0;
+    Ttk_LostSlaveProc(clientData, slaveWindow);
+}
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec LabelOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0, 0,0}
+};
+
+static Ttk_ManagerSpec LabelframeManagerSpec = 
+{
+    { "labelframe", Ttk_GeometryRequestProc, LabelframeLostSlave },
+    LabelOptionSpecs, 0,
+
+    LabelframeSize,
+    LabelframePlaceSlaves,
+
+    LabelAdded,
+    LabelRemoved,
+    LabelConfigured
+};
+
+/* LabelframeInitialize --
+ * 	Initialization hook.
+ */
+static int LabelframeInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframe = recordPtr;
+
+    lframe->label.mgr = Ttk_CreateManager(
+	&LabelframeManagerSpec, lframe, lframe->core.tkwin);
+    lframe->label.labelWidget = 0;
+    lframe->label.labelParcel = Ttk_MakeBox(-1,-1,-1,-1);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* LabelframeCleanup --
+ * 	Cleanup hook.
+ */
+static void LabelframeCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframe = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_DeleteManager(lframe->label.mgr);
+}
+
+/* RaiseLabelWidget --
+ * 	Raise the -labelwidget to ensure that the labelframe doesn't 
+ * 	obscure it (if it's not a direct child), or bring it to
+ * 	the top of the stacking order (if it is).
+ */
+static void RaiseLabelWidget(Labelframe *lframe)
+{
+    Tk_Window parent = Tk_Parent(lframe->label.labelWidget);
+    Tk_Window sibling = NULL;
+    Tk_Window w = lframe->core.tkwin;
+
+    while (w && w != parent) {
+	sibling = w;
+	w = Tk_Parent(w);
+    }
+
+    Tk_RestackWindow(lframe->label.labelWidget, Above, sibling);
+}
+
+/* LabelframeConfigure --
+ * 	Configuration hook.
+ */
+static int LabelframeConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp,void *recordPtr,int mask)
+{
+    Labelframe *lframePtr = recordPtr;
+    Tk_Window labelWidget = NULL;
+    Ttk_PositionSpec unused;
+
+    /* Validate -labelwidget option:
+     */
+    if (lframePtr->label.labelWidgetObj) {
+	const char *pathName = Tcl_GetString(lframePtr->label.labelWidgetObj);
+	if (pathName && *pathName) {
+	    labelWidget =
+		Tk_NameToWindow(interp, pathName, lframePtr->core.tkwin);
+	    if (!labelWidget) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (!Ttk_Maintainable(interp, labelWidget, lframePtr->core.tkwin)) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (TtkGetLabelAnchorFromObj(
+    	interp, lframePtr->label.labelAnchorObj, &unused) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Base class configuration:
+     */
+    if (FrameConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Update -labelwidget changes, if any:
+     */
+    if (mask & LABELWIDGET_CHANGED) {
+	if (Ttk_NumberSlaves(lframePtr->label.mgr) == 1) {
+	    Ttk_ForgetSlave(lframePtr->label.mgr, 0);
+	}
+
+	lframePtr->label.labelWidget = labelWidget;
+
+	if (labelWidget) {
+	    Ttk_AddSlave(interp, lframePtr->label.mgr, labelWidget, 0,  0,0);
+	    RaiseLabelWidget(lframePtr);
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (mask & GEOMETRY_CHANGED) {
+	Ttk_ManagerSizeChanged(lframePtr->label.mgr);
+	Ttk_ManagerLayoutChanged(lframePtr->label.mgr);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* public */
+WidgetSpec LabelframeWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TLabelframe",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Labelframe),		/* recordSize */
+    LabelframeOptionSpecs, 	/* optionSpecs */
+    FrameCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    LabelframeInitialize,	/* initializeProc */
+    LabelframeCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    LabelframeConfigure,	/* configureProc */
+    NullPostConfigure,  	/* postConfigureProc */
+    WidgetGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    LabelframeSize,		/* sizeProc */
+    LabelframeDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkImage.c b/generic/ttk/ttkImage.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e93235
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkImage.c
@@ -0,0 +1,291 @@
+/* $Id: ttkImage.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * 	Ttk widget set -- image element factory.
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) 2004 Pat Thoyts <patthoyts@users.sf.net>
+ * Copyright (C) 2004 Joe English
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b))
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Drawing utilities.
+ */
+
+/* LPadding, CPadding, RPadding --
+ * 	Split a box+padding pair into left, center, and right boxes.
+ */
+static Ttk_Box LPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return Ttk_MakeBox(b.x, b.y, p.left, b.height); }
+
+static Ttk_Box CPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return Ttk_MakeBox(b.x+p.left, b.y, b.width-p.left-p.right, b.height); }
+
+static Ttk_Box RPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return  Ttk_MakeBox(b.x+b.width-p.right, b.y, p.right, b.height); }
+
+/* TPadding, MPadding, BPadding --
+ * 	Split a box+padding pair into top, middle, and bottom parts.
+ */
+static Ttk_Box TPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return Ttk_MakeBox(b.x, b.y, b.width, p.top); }
+
+static Ttk_Box MPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return Ttk_MakeBox(b.x, b.y+p.top, b.width, b.height-p.top-p.bottom); }
+
+static Ttk_Box BPadding(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+    { return Ttk_MakeBox(b.x, b.y+b.height-p.bottom, b.width, p.bottom); }
+
+/* Ttk_Fill --
+ *	Fill the destination area of the drawable by replicating
+ *	the source area of the image.
+ */
+static void Ttk_Fill(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tk_Image image, Ttk_Box src, Ttk_Box dst)
+{
+    int dr = dst.x + dst.width;
+    int db = dst.y + dst.height;
+    int x,y;
+
+    if (!(src.width && src.height && dst.width && dst.height))
+	return;
+
+    for (x = dst.x; x < dr; x += src.width) {
+	int cw = MIN(src.width, dr - x);
+	for (y = dst.y; y <= db; y += src.height) {
+	    int ch = MIN(src.height, db - y);
+	    Tk_RedrawImage(image, src.x, src.y, cw, ch, d, x, y);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/* Ttk_Stripe --
+ * 	Fill a horizontal stripe of the destination drawable.
+ */
+static void Ttk_Stripe(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tk_Image image,
+    Ttk_Box src, Ttk_Box dst, Ttk_Padding p)
+{
+    Ttk_Fill(tkwin, d, image, LPadding(src,p), LPadding(dst,p));
+    Ttk_Fill(tkwin, d, image, CPadding(src,p), CPadding(dst,p));
+    Ttk_Fill(tkwin, d, image, RPadding(src,p), RPadding(dst,p));
+}
+
+/* Ttk_Tile --
+ * 	Fill successive horizontal stripes of the destination drawable.
+ */
+static void Ttk_Tile(
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Tk_Image image,
+    Ttk_Box src, Ttk_Box dst, Ttk_Padding p)
+{
+    Ttk_Stripe(tkwin, d, image, TPadding(src,p), TPadding(dst,p), p);
+    Ttk_Stripe(tkwin, d, image, MPadding(src,p), MPadding(dst,p), p);
+    Ttk_Stripe(tkwin, d, image, BPadding(src,p), BPadding(dst,p), p);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Image element definition.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {		/* ClientData for image elements */
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache;	/* Resource cache for images */
+    Tcl_Obj *baseImage; 	/* Name of default image */
+    Ttk_StateMap imageMap;	/* State-based lookup table for images */
+    Tcl_Obj *stickyObj;	 	/* Stickiness specification, NWSE */
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;		/* Border specification */
+    Tcl_Obj *paddingObj;	/* Padding specification */
+    int minWidth;		/* Minimum width; overrides image width */
+    int minHeight;		/* Minimum width; overrides image width */
+    unsigned sticky;
+    Ttk_Padding border;		/* Fixed border region */
+    Ttk_Padding padding;	/* Internal padding */
+} ImageData;
+
+static void FreeImageData(void *clientData)
+{
+    ImageData *imageData = clientData;
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(imageData->baseImage);
+    if (imageData->imageMap) {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(imageData->imageMap);
+    }
+    if (imageData->stickyObj) {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(imageData->stickyObj);
+    }
+    if (imageData->borderObj) {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(imageData->borderObj);
+    }
+    if (imageData->paddingObj) {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(imageData->paddingObj);
+    }
+    ckfree(clientData);
+}
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ImageOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    { TK_OPTION_STRING, "-sticky", "sticky", "Sticky",
+	"nswe", Tk_Offset(ImageData,stickyObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    { TK_OPTION_STRING, "-border", "border", "Border",
+	"0", Tk_Offset(ImageData,borderObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    { TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Padding",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(ImageData,paddingObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    { TK_OPTION_STRING, "-map", "map", "Map",
+	"", Tk_Offset(ImageData,imageMap), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    { TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
+	"-1", -1, Tk_Offset(ImageData, minWidth),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    { TK_OPTION_INT, "-height", "height", "Height",
+	"-1", -1, Tk_Offset(ImageData, minHeight),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    { TK_OPTION_END }
+};
+
+static void ImageElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ImageData *imageData = clientData;
+    Tk_Image image = Ttk_UseImage(imageData->cache,tkwin,imageData->baseImage);
+
+    if (image) {
+	Tk_SizeOfImage(image, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    }
+    if (imageData->minWidth >= 0) {
+	*widthPtr = imageData->minWidth;
+    }
+    if (imageData->minHeight >= 0) {
+	*heightPtr = imageData->minHeight;
+    }
+
+    *paddingPtr = imageData->padding;
+    *widthPtr -= Ttk_PaddingWidth(imageData->padding);
+    *heightPtr -= Ttk_PaddingHeight(imageData->padding);
+}
+
+static void ImageElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    ImageData *imageData = clientData;
+    Tcl_Obj *imageObj = 0;
+    Tk_Image image;
+    int imgWidth, imgHeight;
+    Ttk_Box src, dst;
+
+    if (imageData->imageMap) {
+	imageObj = Ttk_StateMapLookup(NULL, imageData->imageMap, state);
+    }
+    if (!imageObj) {
+	imageObj = imageData->baseImage;
+    }
+    image = Ttk_UseImage(imageData->cache, tkwin, imageObj);
+
+    if (!image) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    Tk_SizeOfImage(image, &imgWidth, &imgHeight);
+    src = Ttk_MakeBox(0, 0, imgWidth, imgHeight);
+    dst = Ttk_StickBox(b, imgWidth, imgHeight, imageData->sticky);
+
+    Ttk_Tile(tkwin, d, image, src, dst, imageData->border);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec ImageElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(NullElement),
+    NullElementOptions,
+    ImageElementGeometry,
+    ImageElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Image element factory.
+ */
+static int
+Ttk_CreateImageElement(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    void *clientData,
+    Ttk_Theme theme,
+    const char *elementName,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])
+{
+    Tk_OptionTable imageOptionTable =
+	Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, ImageOptionSpecs);
+    ImageData *imageData;
+
+    imageData = (ImageData*)ckalloc(sizeof(*imageData));
+
+    if (objc <= 0) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Must supply a base image", NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    imageData->cache = Ttk_GetResourceCache(interp);
+    imageData->imageMap = imageData->stickyObj
+	= imageData->borderObj = imageData->paddingObj = 0;
+    imageData->minWidth = imageData->minHeight = -1;
+    imageData->sticky = TTK_FILL_BOTH;	/* ??? Is this sensible */
+    imageData->border = imageData->padding = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+
+    /* Can't use Tk_InitOptions() here, since we don't have a Tk_Window
+     */
+    if (TCL_OK != Tk_SetOptions(interp, (ClientData)imageData,
+	    imageOptionTable, objc-1, objv+1,
+	    NULL/*tkwin*/, NULL/*savedOptions*/, NULL/*mask*/))
+    {
+	ckfree((ClientData)imageData);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    imageData->baseImage = Tcl_DuplicateObj(objv[0]);
+
+    if (imageData->borderObj && Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(
+		interp, imageData->borderObj, &imageData->border) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    imageData->padding = imageData->border;
+
+    if (imageData->paddingObj && Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(
+		interp, imageData->paddingObj, &imageData->padding) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    if (imageData->stickyObj && Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(
+		interp, imageData->stickyObj, &imageData->sticky) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    if (!Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme,
+				elementName, &ImageElementSpec, imageData))
+    {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_RegisterCleanup(interp, imageData, FreeImageData);
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(elementName, -1));
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    FreeImageData(imageData);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+void Ttk_ImageInit(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_RegisterElementFactory(interp, "image", Ttk_CreateImageElement, NULL);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkInit.c b/generic/ttk/ttkInit.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..723708f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkInit.c
@@ -0,0 +1,289 @@
+/* $Id: ttkInit.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Ttk package: initialization routine and miscellaneous utilities.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*
+ * Legal values for the button -default option.
+ * See also: enum Ttk_ButtonDefaultState in ttkTheme.h.
+ */
+CONST char *TTKDefaultStrings[] = {
+    "normal", "active", "disabled", NULL
+};
+
+int Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *statePtr)
+{
+    *statePtr = TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED;
+    return Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr,
+	    TTKDefaultStrings, "default state", 0, statePtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Legal values for the -compound option.
+ * See also: enum Ttk_Compound in ttkTheme.h
+ */
+const char *TTKCompoundStrings[] = {
+    "none", "text", "image", "center",
+    "top", "bottom", "left", "right", NULL
+};
+
+int Ttk_GetCompoundFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *statePtr)
+{
+    *statePtr = TTK_COMPOUND_NONE;
+    return Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr,
+	    TTKCompoundStrings, "compound layout", 0, statePtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Legal values for the -orient option.
+ * See also: enum TTK_ORIENT in ttkTheme.h
+ */
+CONST char *TTKOrientStrings[] = {
+    "horizontal", "vertical", NULL
+};
+
+int Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr)
+{
+    *resultPtr = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    return Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr,
+	    TTKOrientStrings, "orientation", 0, resultPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Recognized values for the -state compatibility option.
+ * Other options are accepted and interpreted as synonyms for "normal".
+ */
+static const char *TTKStateStrings[] = {
+    "normal", "readonly", "disabled", "active", NULL
+};
+enum { 
+    TTK_COMPAT_STATE_NORMAL,
+    TTK_COMPAT_STATE_READONLY,
+    TTK_COMPAT_STATE_DISABLED,
+    TTK_COMPAT_STATE_ACTIVE
+};
+
+/* CheckStateOption -- 
+ * 	Handle -state compatibility option.
+ *
+ *	NOTE: setting -state disabled / -state enabled affects the 
+ *	widget state, but the internal widget state does *not* affect 
+ *	the value of the -state option.
+ *	This option is present for compatibility only.
+ */
+void CheckStateOption(WidgetCore *corePtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    int stateOption = TTK_COMPAT_STATE_NORMAL;
+    unsigned all = TTK_STATE_DISABLED|TTK_STATE_READONLY|TTK_STATE_ACTIVE;
+#   define SETFLAGS(f) WidgetChangeState(corePtr, f, all^f)
+
+    (void)Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(NULL,objPtr,TTKStateStrings,"",0,&stateOption);
+    switch (stateOption) {
+	case TTK_COMPAT_STATE_NORMAL:
+	default:
+	    SETFLAGS(0);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPAT_STATE_READONLY:
+	    SETFLAGS(TTK_STATE_READONLY);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPAT_STATE_DISABLED:
+	    SETFLAGS(TTK_STATE_DISABLED);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPAT_STATE_ACTIVE:
+	    SETFLAGS(TTK_STATE_ACTIVE);
+	    break;
+    }
+#   undef SETFLAGS
+}
+
+/* SendVirtualEvent --
+ * 	Send a virtual event notification to the specified target window.
+ * 	Equivalent to "event generate $tgtWindow <<$eventName>>"
+ *
+ * 	Note that we use Tk_QueueWindowEvent, not Tk_HandleEvent,
+ * 	so this routine does not reenter the interpreter.
+ */
+void SendVirtualEvent(Tk_Window tgtWin, const char *eventName)
+{
+    XEvent event;
+
+    memset(&event, 0, sizeof(event));
+    event.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
+    event.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(tgtWin));
+    event.xany.send_event = False;
+    event.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(tgtWin);
+    event.xany.display = Tk_Display(tgtWin);
+    ((XVirtualEvent *) &event)->name = Tk_GetUid(eventName);
+
+    Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+}
+
+/* EnumerateOptions, GetOptionValue --
+ *	Common factors for data accessor commands.
+ */
+int EnumerateOptions(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+    while (specPtr->type != TK_OPTION_END)
+    {
+	Tcl_Obj *optionName = Tcl_NewStringObj(specPtr->optionName, -1);
+	Tcl_Obj *optionValue =
+	    Tk_GetOptionValue(interp,recordPtr,optionTable,optionName,tkwin);
+	if (optionValue) {
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, optionName);
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, optionValue);
+	}
+	++specPtr;
+
+	if (specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_END && specPtr->clientData != NULL) {
+	    /* Chain to next option spec array: */
+	    specPtr = specPtr->clientData;
+	}
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int GetOptionValue(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, Tcl_Obj *optionName,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *result =
+	Tk_GetOptionValue(interp,recordPtr,optionTable,optionName,tkwin);
+    if (result) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * Core Option specifications:
+ * type name dbName dbClass default objOffset intOffset flags clientData mask
+ */
+
+/* public */ 
+Tk_OptionSpec CoreOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
+	"", Tk_Offset(WidgetCore, takeFocusPtr), -1, 0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(WidgetCore, cursorObj), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-style", "style", "Style", "",
+	Tk_Offset(WidgetCore,styleObj), -1, 0,0,STYLE_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "", "", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(WidgetCore,classObj), -1, 0,0,READONLY_OPTION},
+    {TK_OPTION_END}
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget definitions.
+ */
+
+extern WidgetSpec FrameWidgetSpec;
+extern WidgetSpec LabelframeWidgetSpec;
+extern WidgetSpec LabelWidgetSpec;
+extern WidgetSpec ButtonWidgetSpec;
+extern WidgetSpec CheckbuttonWidgetSpec;
+extern WidgetSpec RadiobuttonWidgetSpec;
+extern WidgetSpec MenubuttonWidgetSpec;
+extern WidgetSpec ScrollbarWidgetSpec;
+extern WidgetSpec ScaleWidgetSpec;
+extern WidgetSpec SeparatorWidgetSpec;
+extern WidgetSpec SizegripWidgetSpec;
+
+extern void Progressbar_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void Notebook_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void EntryWidget_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void Treeview_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void Paned_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+
+#ifdef TTK_SQUARE_WIDGET
+extern void SquareWidget_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+#endif
+
+static void RegisterWidgets(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "::ttk::frame", &FrameWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "::ttk::labelframe", &LabelframeWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "::ttk::label", &LabelWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "::ttk::button", &ButtonWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "::ttk::checkbutton", &CheckbuttonWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "::ttk::radiobutton", &RadiobuttonWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "::ttk::menubutton", &MenubuttonWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "::ttk::scrollbar", &ScrollbarWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "::ttk::scale", &ScaleWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "::ttk::separator", &SeparatorWidgetSpec);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "::ttk::sizegrip", &SizegripWidgetSpec);
+    Notebook_Init(interp);
+    EntryWidget_Init(interp);
+    Progressbar_Init(interp);
+    Paned_Init(interp);
+#ifdef TTK_TREEVIEW_WIDGET
+    Treeview_Init(interp);
+#endif
+
+#ifdef TTK_SQUARE_WIDGET
+    SquareWidget_Init(interp);
+#endif
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Built-in themes.
+ */
+
+extern int AltTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern int ClassicTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern int ClamTheme_Init(Tcl_Interp *);
+
+extern int Ttk_ImageInit(Tcl_Interp *);
+
+static void RegisterThemes(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_ImageInit(interp);	/* not really a theme... */
+    AltTheme_Init(interp);
+    ClassicTheme_Init(interp);
+    ClamTheme_Init(interp);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk initialization.
+ */
+
+extern TtkStubs ttkStubs;
+
+int DLLEXPORT
+Ttk_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    /*
+     * This will be run for both safe and regular interp init.
+     * Use Tcl_IsSafe if necessary to not initialize unsafe bits.
+     */
+    Ttk_StylePkgInit(interp);
+
+    RegisterElements(interp);
+    RegisterWidgets(interp);
+    RegisterThemes(interp);
+
+    Ttk_PlatformInit(interp);
+
+#if 0
+    Tcl_PkgProvideEx(interp, "Ttk", TTK_PATCH_LEVEL, (void*)&ttkStubs);
+#endif
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkLabel.c b/generic/ttk/ttkLabel.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e2ccc6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkLabel.c
@@ -0,0 +1,740 @@
+/* $Id: ttkLabel.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: text, image, and label elements.
+ *
+ * The label element combines text and image elements,
+ * with layout determined by the "-compound" option.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <tcl.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Text element.
+ *
+ * This element displays a textual label in the foreground color.
+ *
+ * Optionally underlines the mnemonic character if the -underline resource
+ * is present and >= 0.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    /*
+     * Element options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj	*textObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*fontObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*underlineObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*widthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*anchorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*justifyObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*wrapLengthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj     *embossedObj;
+
+    /*
+     * Computed resources:
+     */
+    Tk_Font		tkfont;
+    Tk_TextLayout	textLayout;
+    int 		width;
+    int 		height;
+    int			embossed;
+
+} TextElement;
+
+/* Text element options table.
+ * NB: Keep in sync with label element option table.
+ */
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TextElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-text", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,textObj), "" },
+    { "-font", TK_OPTION_FONT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,fontObj), DEFAULT_FONT },
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,foregroundObj), "black" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-underline", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,underlineObj), "-1"},
+    { "-width", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,widthObj), "-1"},
+    { "-anchor", TK_OPTION_ANCHOR,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,anchorObj), "center"},
+    { "-justify", TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,justifyObj), "left" },
+    { "-wraplength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,wrapLengthObj), "0" },
+    { "-embossed", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(TextElement,embossedObj), "0"},
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static int TextSetup(TextElement *text, Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetString(text->textObj);
+    Tk_Justify justify = TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT;
+    int wrapLength = 0;
+
+    text->tkfont = Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, text->fontObj);
+    Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(NULL, text->justifyObj, &justify);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, text->wrapLengthObj, &wrapLength);
+    Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(NULL, text->embossedObj, &text->embossed);
+
+    text->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(
+	    text->tkfont, string, -1/*numChars*/, wrapLength, justify,
+	    0/*flags*/, &text->width, &text->height);
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ * TextReqWidth -- compute the requested width of a text element.
+ *
+ * If -width is positive, use that as the width
+ * If -width is negative, use that as the minimum width
+ * If not specified or empty, use the natural size of the text
+ */
+
+static int TextReqWidth(TextElement *text)
+{
+    int reqWidth;
+
+    if (   text->widthObj
+	&& Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, text->widthObj, &reqWidth) == TCL_OK)
+    {
+	int avgWidth = Tk_TextWidth(text->tkfont, "0", 1);
+	if (reqWidth <= 0) {
+	    int specWidth = avgWidth * -reqWidth;
+	    if (specWidth > text->width)
+		return specWidth;
+	} else {
+	    return avgWidth * reqWidth;
+	}
+    }
+    return text->width;
+}
+
+static void TextCleanup(TextElement *text)
+{
+    Tk_FreeTextLayout(text->textLayout);
+}
+
+/*
+ * TextDraw --
+ * 	Draw a text element.
+ * 	Called by TextElementDraw() and LabelElementDraw().
+ */
+static void TextDraw(TextElement *text, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b)
+{
+    XColor *color = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, text->foregroundObj);
+    int underline = -1;
+    int lastChar = -1;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    GC gc1, gc2;
+    Tk_Anchor anchor = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER;
+
+    gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(text->tkfont);
+    gcValues.foreground = color->pixel;
+    gc1 = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCFont | GCForeground, &gcValues);
+    gcValues.foreground = WhitePixelOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+    gc2 = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCFont | GCForeground, &gcValues);
+
+    /* 
+     * Place text according to -anchor:
+     */
+    Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(NULL, text->anchorObj, &anchor);
+    b = Ttk_AnchorBox(b, text->width, text->height, anchor);
+
+    /*
+     * Clip text if it's too wide:
+     * @@@ BUG: This will overclip multi-line text.
+     */
+    if (b.width < text->width) {
+	lastChar = Tk_PointToChar(text->textLayout, b.width, 1) + 1;
+    }
+
+    if (text->embossed) {
+	Tk_DrawTextLayout(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc2,
+	    text->textLayout, b.x+1, b.y+1, 0/*firstChar*/, lastChar);
+    }
+    Tk_DrawTextLayout(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc1,
+	    text->textLayout, b.x, b.y, 0/*firstChar*/, lastChar);
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, text->underlineObj, &underline);
+    if (underline >= 0 && (lastChar == -1 || underline <= lastChar)) {
+	if (text->embossed) {
+	    Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc2,
+		text->textLayout, b.x+1, b.y+1, underline);
+	}
+	Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc1,
+	    text->textLayout, b.x, b.y, underline);
+    }
+
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc1);
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc2);
+}
+
+static void TextElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TextElement *text = elementRecord;
+
+    if (!TextSetup(text, tkwin))
+	return;
+
+    *heightPtr = text->height;
+    *widthPtr = TextReqWidth(text);
+
+    TextCleanup(text);
+
+    return;
+}
+
+static void TextElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    TextElement *text = elementRecord;
+    if (TextSetup(text, tkwin)) {
+	TextDraw(text, tkwin, d, b);
+	TextCleanup(text);
+    }
+}
+
+/*public*/ Ttk_ElementSpec TextElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TextElement),
+    TextElementOptions,
+    TextElementSize,
+    TextElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ * ImageTextElement --
+ * 	Same as TextElement, but erases the background area first.
+ */
+static void ImageTextElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    TextElement *text = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder bd = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin,text->backgroundObj);
+
+    if (!TextSetup(text, tkwin))
+	return;
+
+    XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d,
+	Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, bd, TK_3D_FLAT_GC), b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height);
+
+    TextDraw(text, tkwin, d, b);
+    TextCleanup(text);
+}
+
+/*public*/ Ttk_ElementSpec ImageTextElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TextElement),
+    TextElementOptions,
+    TextElementSize,
+    ImageTextElementDraw
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Image element.
+ *
+ * Draws an image.
+ *
+ * The clientData parameter is a Tcl_Interp, which is needed for
+ * the call to Tk_GetImage().
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj	*imageObj;
+
+    Tcl_Obj 	*stippleObj;	/* For TTK_STATE_DISABLED */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*backgroundObj;	/* " " */
+
+    Tk_Image	tkimg;
+    int 	width;
+    int		height;
+    int		doStipple;
+} ImageElement;
+
+/* ===> NB: Keep in sync with label element option table.  <===
+ */
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec ImageElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-image", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(ImageElement,imageObj), "" },
+    { "-stipple", TK_OPTION_STRING, 	/* Really: TK_OPTION_BITMAP */
+	Tk_Offset(ImageElement,stippleObj), "gray50" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(ImageElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+/* NullImageChanged --
+ * 	No-op Tk_ImageChangedProc for Tk_GetImage.
+ */
+static void NullImageChanged(ClientData clientData,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight)
+{ }
+
+/*
+ * ImageSetup() --
+ * 	Look up the Tk_Image from the image element's imageObj resource.
+ * 	Caller must release the image with ImageCleanup().
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	1 if successful, 0 if there was an error (unreported)
+ * 	or the image resource was not specified.
+ */
+
+static int ImageSetup(
+    ImageElement *image, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    const char *imageName;
+    Tcl_Obj *imageObj = image->imageObj;
+    Tcl_Obj **mapList = NULL;
+    int i, mapCnt = 0;
+
+    if (!imageObj)		/* No -image option specified */
+	return 0;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp,imageObj,&mapCnt,&mapList) == TCL_ERROR)
+	return 0;
+
+    if (mapCnt == 0)		/* -image is an empty list */
+	return 0;
+
+    /* Only enable disabled-stippling if there's no state map:
+     * @@@ Possibly: Don't do disabled-stippling at all;
+     * @@@ it's ugly and out of fashion.
+     */
+    image->doStipple = mapCnt == 1;
+
+    /* Locate which image to use based on current state:
+     */
+    imageObj = mapList[0];
+    for (i = 1; i < mapCnt - 1; i += 2) {
+	Ttk_StateSpec stateSpec;
+
+	if (Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp,mapList[i],&stateSpec) != TCL_OK) {
+	    /* shouldn't happen, but can */
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	if (Ttk_StateMatches(state, &stateSpec)) {
+	    imageObj = mapList[i+1];
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    imageName = Tcl_GetString(imageObj);
+    if (!imageName || !*imageName)	/* Empty string. */
+	return 0;
+
+    image->tkimg = Tk_GetImage(interp, tkwin, imageName, NullImageChanged, 0);
+    if (!image->tkimg)			/* No such image */
+	return 0;
+
+    Tk_SizeOfImage(image->tkimg, &image->width, &image->height);
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+static void ImageCleanup(ImageElement *image)
+{
+    Tk_FreeImage(image->tkimg);
+}
+
+/*
+ * StippleOver --
+ * 	Draw a stipple over the image area, to make it look "grayed-out"
+ * 	when TTK_STATE_DISABLED is set.
+ */
+static void StippleOver(
+    ImageElement *image, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y)
+{
+    Pixmap stipple = Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj(NULL, tkwin, image->stippleObj);
+    XColor *color = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, image->backgroundObj);
+
+    if (stipple != None) {
+	unsigned long mask = GCFillStyle | GCStipple | GCForeground;
+	XGCValues gcvalues;
+	GC gc;
+	gcvalues.foreground = color->pixel;
+	gcvalues.fill_style = FillStippled;
+	gcvalues.stipple = stipple;
+	gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, mask, &gcvalues);
+	XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin),d,gc,x,y,image->width,image->height);
+	Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+	Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(tkwin, image->stippleObj);
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImageDraw(
+    ImageElement *image, Tk_Window tkwin,Drawable d,Ttk_Box b,Ttk_State state)
+{
+    int width = image->width, height = image->height;
+
+    /* Clip width and height to remain within window bounds:
+     */
+    if (b.x + width > Tk_Width(tkwin)) {
+	width = Tk_Width(tkwin) - b.x;
+    }
+    if (b.y + height > Tk_Height(tkwin)) {
+	height = Tk_Height(tkwin) - b.y;
+    }
+
+    Tk_RedrawImage(image->tkimg, 0,0, width, height, d, b.x, b.y);
+
+    if (image->doStipple && (state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED)) {
+	StippleOver(image, tkwin, d, b.x,b.y);
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImageElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    ImageElement *image = elementRecord;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = clientData;
+
+    if (ImageSetup(image, tkwin, interp, 0)) {
+	*widthPtr = image->width;
+	*heightPtr = image->height;
+	ImageCleanup(image);
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImageElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    ImageElement *image = elementRecord;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = clientData;
+
+    if (ImageSetup(image, tkwin, interp, state)) {
+	ImageDraw(image, tkwin, d, b, state);
+	ImageCleanup(image);
+    }
+}
+
+/*public*/ Ttk_ElementSpec ImageElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(ImageElement),
+    ImageElementOptions,
+    ImageElementSize,
+    ImageElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Label element.
+ *
+ * Displays an image and/or text, as determined by the -compound option.
+ *
+ * The clientData parameter is a Tcl_Interp; this is needed for the
+ * image part.
+ *
+ * Differences from Tk 8.4 compound elements:
+ *
+ * This adds two new values for the -compound option, "text"
+ * and "image".  (This is useful for configuring toolbars to
+ * display icons, text and icons, or text only, as found in
+ * many browsers.)
+ *
+ * "-compound none" is supported, but I'd like to get rid of it;
+ * it makes the logic more complex, and the only benefit is
+ * backwards compatibility with Tk < 8.3.0 scripts.
+ *
+ * This adds a new resource, -space, for determining how much
+ * space to leave between the text and image; Tk 8.4 reuses the
+ * -padx or -pady option for this purpose.
+ *
+ * -width always specifies the length in characters of the text part;
+ *  in Tk 8.4 it's either characters or pixels, depending on the
+ *  value of -compound.
+ *
+ * Negative values of -width are interpreted as a minimum width
+ * on all platforms, not just on Windows.
+ *
+ * Tk 8.4 ignores -padx and -pady if -compound is set to "none".
+ * Here, padding is handled by a different element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    /*
+     * Element options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj		*compoundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj		*spaceObj;
+    TextElement 	text;
+    ImageElement	image;
+
+    /*
+     * Computed values (see LabelSetup)
+     */
+    Ttk_Compound	compound;
+    int  		space;
+    int 		totalWidth, totalHeight;
+} LabelElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec LabelElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-compound", TK_OPTION_ANY,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,compoundObj), "none" },
+    { "-space", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,spaceObj), "4" },
+
+    /* Text element part:
+     * NB: Keep in sync with TextElementOptions.
+     */
+    { "-text", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.textObj), "" },
+    { "-font", TK_OPTION_FONT,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.fontObj), DEFAULT_FONT },
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.foregroundObj), "black" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-underline", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.underlineObj), "-1"},
+    { "-width", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.widthObj), ""},
+    { "-anchor", TK_OPTION_ANCHOR,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.anchorObj), "center"},
+    { "-justify", TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.justifyObj), "left" },
+    { "-wraplength", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.wrapLengthObj), "0" },
+    { "-embossed", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,text.embossedObj), "0"},
+
+    /* Image element part:
+     * NB: Keep in sync with ImageElementOptions.
+     */
+    { "-image", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,image.imageObj), "" },
+    { "-stipple", TK_OPTION_STRING, 	/* Really: TK_OPTION_BITMAP */
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,image.stippleObj), "gray50" },
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(LabelElement,image.backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+/*
+ * LabelSetup --
+ * 	Fills in computed fields of the label element.
+ *
+ * 	Calculate the text, image, and total width and height.
+ */
+
+#define MAX(a,b) ((a) > (b) ? a : b);
+static void LabelSetup(
+    LabelElement *c, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL,tkwin,c->spaceObj,&c->space);
+    Ttk_GetCompoundFromObj(NULL,c->compoundObj,(int*)&c->compound);
+
+    /*
+     * Deal with TTK_COMPOUND_NONE.
+     */
+    if (c->compound == TTK_COMPOUND_NONE) {
+	if (ImageSetup(&c->image, tkwin, interp, state)) {
+	    c->compound = TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE;
+	} else {
+	    c->compound = TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT;
+	}
+    } else if (c->compound != TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT) {
+    	if (!ImageSetup(&c->image, tkwin, interp, state)) {
+	    c->compound = TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT;
+	}
+    }
+    if (c->compound != TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE)
+	TextSetup(&c->text, tkwin);
+
+    /*
+     * ASSERT:
+     * if c->compound != IMAGE, then TextSetup() has been called
+     * if c->compound != TEXT, then ImageSetup() has returned successfully
+     * c->compound != COMPOUND_NONE.
+     */
+
+    switch (c->compound)
+    {
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_NONE:
+	    /* Can't happen */
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT:
+	    c->totalWidth  = c->text.width;
+	    c->totalHeight = c->text.height;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE:
+	    c->totalWidth  = c->image.width;
+	    c->totalHeight = c->image.height;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_CENTER:
+	    c->totalWidth  = MAX(c->image.width, c->text.width);
+	    c->totalHeight = MAX(c->image.height, c->text.height);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TOP:
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_BOTTOM:
+	    c->totalWidth  = MAX(c->image.width, c->text.width);
+	    c->totalHeight = c->image.height + c->text.height + c->space;
+	    break;
+
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_LEFT:
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_RIGHT:
+	    c->totalWidth  = c->image.width + c->text.width + c->space;
+	    c->totalHeight = MAX(c->image.height, c->text.height);
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+static void LabelCleanup(LabelElement *c)
+{
+    if (c->compound != TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT)
+	ImageCleanup(&c->image);
+    if (c->compound != TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE)
+	TextCleanup(&c->text);
+}
+
+static void LabelElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    LabelElement *label = elementRecord;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = clientData;
+    int textReqWidth = 0;
+
+    LabelSetup(label, tkwin, interp, 0);
+
+    *heightPtr = label->totalHeight;
+
+    /* Requested width based on -width option, not actual text width:
+     */
+    if (label->compound != TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE)
+	textReqWidth = TextReqWidth(&label->text);
+
+    switch (label->compound) 
+    {
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT:
+	    *widthPtr = textReqWidth;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE:
+	    *widthPtr = label->image.width;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TOP:
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_BOTTOM:
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_CENTER:
+	    *widthPtr = MAX(label->image.width, textReqWidth); 
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_LEFT:
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_RIGHT:
+	    *widthPtr = label->image.width + textReqWidth + label->space; 
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_NONE:
+	    break; /* Can't happen */
+    }
+
+    LabelCleanup(label);
+}
+
+/*
+ * DrawCompound --
+ * 	Helper routine for LabelElementDraw;
+ * 	Handles layout for -compound {left,right,top,bottom}
+ */
+static void DrawCompound(
+    LabelElement *l, Ttk_Box b, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_State state,
+    int imageSide, int textSide)
+{
+    Ttk_Box imageBox =
+	Ttk_PlaceBox(&b, l->image.width, l->image.height, imageSide, 0);
+    Ttk_Box textBox =
+	Ttk_PlaceBox(&b, l->text.width, l->text.height, textSide, 0);
+    ImageDraw(&l->image,tkwin,d,imageBox,state);
+    TextDraw(&l->text,tkwin,d,textBox);
+}
+
+static void LabelElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    LabelElement *l = elementRecord;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = clientData;
+    Tk_Anchor anchor = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER;
+
+    LabelSetup(l, tkwin, interp, state);
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust overall parcel based on -anchor:
+     */
+    Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(NULL, l->text.anchorObj, &anchor);
+    b = Ttk_AnchorBox(b, l->totalWidth, l->totalHeight, anchor);
+
+    /*
+     * Draw text and/or image parts based on -compound:
+     */
+    switch (l->compound)
+    {
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_NONE:
+	    /* Can't happen */
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT:
+	    TextDraw(&l->text,tkwin,d,b);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE:
+	    ImageDraw(&l->image,tkwin,d,b,state);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_CENTER:
+	{
+	    Ttk_Box pb = Ttk_AnchorBox(
+		b, l->image.width, l->image.height, TK_ANCHOR_CENTER);
+	    ImageDraw(&l->image, tkwin, d, pb, state);
+	    pb = Ttk_AnchorBox(
+		b, l->text.width, l->text.height, TK_ANCHOR_CENTER);
+	    TextDraw(&l->text, tkwin, d, pb);
+	    break;
+	}
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_TOP:
+	    DrawCompound(l, b, tkwin, d, state, TTK_SIDE_TOP, TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_BOTTOM:
+	    DrawCompound(l, b, tkwin, d, state, TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM, TTK_SIDE_TOP);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_LEFT:
+	    DrawCompound(l, b, tkwin, d, state, TTK_SIDE_LEFT, TTK_SIDE_RIGHT);
+	    break;
+	case TTK_COMPOUND_RIGHT:
+	    DrawCompound(l, b, tkwin, d, state, TTK_SIDE_RIGHT, TTK_SIDE_LEFT);
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    LabelCleanup(l);
+}
+
+/*public*/ Ttk_ElementSpec LabelElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(LabelElement),
+    LabelElementOptions,
+    LabelElementSize,
+    LabelElementDraw
+};
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkLayout.c b/generic/ttk/ttkLayout.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..54ebc34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkLayout.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1200 @@
+/*
+ * layout.c --
+ *
+ * Generic layout processing.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ *
+ * $Id: ttkLayout.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkThemeInt.h"
+
+#define MAX(a,b) (a > b ? a : b)
+#define MIN(a,b) (a < b ? a : b)
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Ttk_Box and Ttk_Padding utilities:
+ */
+
+Ttk_Box
+Ttk_MakeBox(int x, int y, int width, int height)
+{
+    Ttk_Box b;
+    b.x = x; b.y = y; b.width = width; b.height = height;
+    return b;
+}
+
+int
+Ttk_BoxContains(Ttk_Box box, int x, int y)
+{
+    return box.x <= x && x < box.x + box.width
+	&& box.y <= y && y < box.y + box.height;
+}
+
+Tcl_Obj *
+Ttk_NewBoxObj(Ttk_Box box)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *result[4];
+
+    result[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(box.x);
+    result[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(box.y);
+    result[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(box.width);
+    result[3] = Tcl_NewIntObj(box.height);
+
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(4, result);
+}
+
+
+
+/*
+ * packTop, packBottom, packLeft, packRight --
+ * 	Carve out a parcel of the specified height (resp width)
+ * 	from the specified cavity.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	The new parcel.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Adjust the cavity.
+ */
+
+static Ttk_Box packTop(Ttk_Box *cavity, int height)
+{
+    Ttk_Box parcel;
+    height = MIN(height, cavity->height);
+    parcel = Ttk_MakeBox(cavity->x, cavity->y, cavity->width, height);
+    cavity->y += height;
+    cavity->height -= height;
+    return parcel;
+}
+
+static Ttk_Box packBottom(Ttk_Box *cavity, int height)
+{
+    height = MIN(height, cavity->height);
+    cavity->height -= height;
+    return Ttk_MakeBox(
+	cavity->x, cavity->y + cavity->height,
+	cavity->width, height);
+}
+
+static Ttk_Box packLeft(Ttk_Box *cavity, int width)
+{
+    Ttk_Box parcel;
+    width = MIN(width, cavity->width);
+    parcel = Ttk_MakeBox(cavity->x, cavity->y, width,cavity->height);
+    cavity->x += width;
+    cavity->width -= width;
+    return parcel;
+}
+
+static Ttk_Box packRight(Ttk_Box *cavity, int width)
+{
+    width = MIN(width, cavity->width);
+    cavity->width -= width;
+    return Ttk_MakeBox(cavity->x + cavity->width,
+	    cavity->y, width, cavity->height);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_PackBox --
+ * 	Carve out a parcel of the specified size on the specified side
+ * 	in the specified cavity.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	The new parcel.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Adjust the cavity.
+ */
+
+Ttk_Box Ttk_PackBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int width, int height, Ttk_Side side)
+{
+    switch (side) {
+	default:
+	case TTK_SIDE_TOP:	return packTop(cavity, height);
+	case TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM:	return packBottom(cavity, height);
+	case TTK_SIDE_LEFT:	return packLeft(cavity, width);
+	case TTK_SIDE_RIGHT:	return packRight(cavity, width);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_PadBox --
+ * 	Shrink a box by the specified padding amount.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_PadBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+{
+    b.x += p.left;
+    b.y += p.top;
+    b.width -= (p.left + p.right);
+    b.height -= (p.top + p.bottom);
+    if (b.width <= 0) b.width = 1;
+    if (b.height <= 0) b.height = 1;
+    return b;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ExpandBox --
+ * 	Grow a box by the specified padding amount.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_ExpandBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p)
+{
+    b.x -= p.left;
+    b.y -= p.top;
+    b.width += (p.left + p.right);
+    b.height += (p.top + p.bottom);
+    return b;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_StickBox --
+ * 	Place a box of size w * h in the specified parcel,
+ * 	according to the specified sticky bits.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_StickBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int width, int height, unsigned sticky)
+{
+    int dx, dy;
+
+    if (width > parcel.width) width = parcel.width;
+    if (height > parcel.height) height = parcel.height;
+
+    dx = parcel.width - width;
+    dy = parcel.height - height;
+
+    /*
+     * X coordinate adjustment:
+     */
+    switch (sticky & (TTK_STICK_W | TTK_STICK_E))
+    {
+	case TTK_STICK_W | TTK_STICK_E:
+	    /* no-op -- use entire parcel width */
+	    break;
+	case TTK_STICK_W:
+	    parcel.width = width;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_STICK_E:
+	    parcel.x += dx;
+	    parcel.width = width;
+	    break;
+	default :
+	    parcel.x += dx / 2;
+	    parcel.width = width;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Y coordinate adjustment:
+     */
+    switch (sticky & (TTK_STICK_N | TTK_STICK_S))
+    {
+	case TTK_STICK_N | TTK_STICK_S:
+	    /* use entire parcel height */
+	    break;
+	case TTK_STICK_N:
+	    parcel.height = height;
+	    break;
+	case TTK_STICK_S:
+	    parcel.y += dy;
+	    parcel.height = height;
+	    break;
+	default :
+	    parcel.y += dy / 2;
+	    parcel.height = height;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    return parcel;
+}
+
+/*
+ * AnchorToSticky --
+ * 	Convert a Tk_Anchor enum to a TTK_STICKY bitmask.
+ */
+static Ttk_Sticky AnchorToSticky(Tk_Anchor anchor)
+{
+    switch (anchor)
+    {
+	case TK_ANCHOR_N:	return TTK_STICK_N;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:	return TTK_STICK_N | TTK_STICK_E;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_E:	return TTK_STICK_E;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:	return TTK_STICK_S | TTK_STICK_E;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_S:	return TTK_STICK_S;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:	return TTK_STICK_S | TTK_STICK_W;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_W:	return TTK_STICK_W;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:	return TTK_STICK_N | TTK_STICK_W;
+	default:
+	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:	return 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_AnchorBox --
+ * 	Place a box of size w * h in the specified parcel,
+ * 	according to the specified anchor.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_AnchorBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int width, int height, Tk_Anchor anchor)
+{
+    return Ttk_StickBox(parcel, width, height, AnchorToSticky(anchor));
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_PlaceBox --
+ * 	Combine Ttk_PackBox() and Ttk_StickBox().
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_PlaceBox(
+    Ttk_Box *cavity, int width, int height, Ttk_Side side, unsigned sticky)
+{
+    return Ttk_StickBox(
+	    Ttk_PackBox(cavity, width, height, side), width, height, sticky);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_PositionBox --
+ * 	Pack and stick a box according to PositionSpec flags.
+ */
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box
+Ttk_PositionBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int width, int height, Ttk_PositionSpec flags)
+{
+    Ttk_Box parcel;
+
+	 if (flags & TTK_EXPAND)	parcel = *cavity;
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_TOP)	parcel = packTop(cavity, height);
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_LEFT)	parcel = packLeft(cavity, width);
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_BOTTOM)	parcel = packBottom(cavity, height);
+    else if (flags & TTK_PACK_RIGHT)	parcel = packRight(cavity, width);
+    else				parcel = *cavity;
+
+    return Ttk_StickBox(parcel, width, height, flags);
+}
+
+/*
+ * TTKInitPadding --
+ * 	Common factor of Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj and Ttk_GetBorderFromObj.
+ * 	Initializes Ttk_Padding record, supplying default values
+ * 	for missing entries.
+ */
+static void TTKInitPadding(int padc, int pixels[4], Ttk_Padding *pad)
+{
+    switch (padc)
+    {
+	case 1:	pixels[1] = pixels[0]; /*FALLTHRU*/
+	case 2:	pixels[2] = pixels[0]; /*FALLTHRU*/
+	case 3:	pixels[3] = pixels[1]; /*FALLTHRU*/
+    }
+
+    pad->left	= (short)pixels[0];
+    pad->top	= (short)pixels[1];
+    pad->right	= (short)pixels[2];
+    pad->bottom	= (short)pixels[3];
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj --
+ *
+ * 	Extract a padding specification from a Tcl_Obj * scaled
+ * 	to work with a particular Tk_Window.
+ *
+ * 	The string representation of a Ttk_Padding is a list
+ * 	of one to four Tk_Pixel specifications, corresponding
+ * 	to the left, top, right, and bottom padding.
+ *
+ * 	If the 'bottom' (fourth) element is missing, it defaults to 'top'.
+ * 	If the 'right' (third) element is missing, it defaults to 'left'.
+ * 	If the 'top' (second) element is missing, it defaults to 'left'.
+ *
+ * 	The internal representation is a Tcl_ListObj containing
+ * 	one to four Tk_PixelObj objects.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR.  In the latter case an error message is
+ * 	left in 'interp' and '*paddingPtr' is set to all-zeros.
+ * 	Otherwise, *paddingPtr is filled in with the padding specification.
+ *
+ */
+int Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+    Ttk_Padding *pad)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **padv;
+    int i, padc, pixels[4];
+
+    if (TCL_OK != Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &padc, &padv)) {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    if (padc > 4) {
+	if (interp) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Wrong #elements in padding spec", NULL);
+	}
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    for (i=0; i < padc; ++i) {
+	if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, padv[i], &pixels[i]) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+    }
+
+    TTKInitPadding(padc, pixels, pad);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    pad->left = pad->top = pad->right = pad->bottom = 0;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_GetBorderFromObj --
+ * 	Same as Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj, except padding is a list of integers
+ * 	instead of Tk_Pixel specifications.  Does not require a Tk_Window
+ * 	parameter.
+ *
+ */
+int Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Padding *pad)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **padv;
+    int i, padc, pixels[4];
+
+    if (TCL_OK != Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &padc, &padv)) {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    if (padc > 4) {
+	if (interp) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Wrong #elements in border spec", NULL);
+	}
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    for (i=0; i < padc; ++i) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, padv[i], &pixels[i]) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+    }
+
+    TTKInitPadding(padc, pixels, pad);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    pad->left = pad->top = pad->right = pad->bottom = 0;
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_MakePadding --
+ *	Return an initialized Ttk_Padding structure.
+ */
+Ttk_Padding Ttk_MakePadding(short left, short top, short right, short bottom)
+{
+    Ttk_Padding pad;
+    pad.left = left;
+    pad.top = top;
+    pad.right = right;
+    pad.bottom = bottom;
+    return pad;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UniformPadding --
+ * 	Returns a uniform Ttk_Padding structure, with the same
+ * 	border width on all sides.
+ */
+Ttk_Padding Ttk_UniformPadding(short borderWidth)
+{
+    Ttk_Padding pad;
+    pad.left = pad.top = pad.right = pad.bottom = borderWidth;
+    return pad;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_AddPadding --
+ *	Combine two padding records.
+ */
+Ttk_Padding Ttk_AddPadding(Ttk_Padding p1, Ttk_Padding p2)
+{
+    p1.left += p2.left;
+    p1.top += p2.top;
+    p1.right += p2.right;
+    p1.bottom += p2.bottom;
+    return p1;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_RelievePadding --
+ * 	Add an extra n pixels of padding according to specified relief.
+ * 	This may be used in element geometry procedures to simulate
+ * 	a "pressed-in" look for pushbuttons.
+ */
+Ttk_Padding Ttk_RelievePadding(Ttk_Padding padding, int relief, int n)
+{
+    switch (relief)
+    {
+	case TK_RELIEF_RAISED:
+	    padding.right += n;
+	    padding.bottom += n;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN:	/* shift */
+	    padding.left += n;
+	    padding.top += n;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	{
+	    int h1 = n/2, h2 = h1 + n % 2;
+	    padding.left += h1;
+	    padding.top += h1;
+	    padding.right += h2;
+	    padding.bottom += h2;
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    return padding;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetStickyFromObj --
+ * 	Returns a stickiness specification from the specified Tcl_Obj*,
+ * 	consisting of any combination of n, s, e, and w.
+ *
+ * Returns: TCL_OK if objPtr holds a valid stickiness specification,
+ *	otherwise TCL_ERROR.  interp is used for error reporting if non-NULL.
+ *
+ */
+int Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Ttk_Sticky *result)
+{
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+    Ttk_Sticky sticky = 0;
+    char c;
+
+    while ((c = *string++) != '\0') {
+	switch (c) {
+	    case 'w': case 'W': sticky |= TTK_STICK_W; break;
+	    case 'e': case 'E': sticky |= TTK_STICK_E; break;
+	    case 'n': case 'N': sticky |= TTK_STICK_N; break;
+	    case 's': case 'S': sticky |= TTK_STICK_S; break;
+	    default:
+	    	if (interp) {
+		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			"Bad -sticky specification ",
+			Tcl_GetString(objPtr),
+			NULL);
+		}
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    *result = sticky;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_NewStickyObj --
+ * 	Construct a new Tcl_Obj * containing a stickiness specification.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewStickyObj(Ttk_Sticky sticky)
+{
+    char buf[5];
+    char *p = buf;
+
+    if (sticky & TTK_STICK_N)	*p++ = 'n';
+    if (sticky & TTK_STICK_S)	*p++ = 's';
+    if (sticky & TTK_STICK_W)	*p++ = 'w';
+    if (sticky & TTK_STICK_E)	*p++ = 'e';
+
+    *p = '\0';
+    return Tcl_NewStringObj(buf, p - buf);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout nodes.
+ */
+struct Ttk_LayoutNode_
+{
+    unsigned		flags;		/* Packing and sticky flags */
+    Ttk_Element 	element;	/* Element implementation */
+    Ttk_State 	 	state;		/* Current state */
+    Ttk_Box 		parcel;		/* allocated parcel */
+    Ttk_LayoutNode	*next, *child;
+};
+
+static Ttk_LayoutNode *Ttk_NewLayoutNode(unsigned flags, Ttk_Element element)
+{
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *node = (Ttk_LayoutNode*)ckalloc(sizeof(Ttk_LayoutNode));
+
+    node->flags = flags;
+    node->element = element;
+    node->state = 0u;
+    node->next = node->child = 0;
+    /* parcel uninitialized */
+
+    return node;
+}
+
+static void Ttk_FreeLayoutNode(Ttk_LayoutNode *node)
+{
+    while (node) {
+	Ttk_LayoutNode *next = node->next;
+	Ttk_FreeLayoutNode(node->child);
+	ckfree((ClientData)node);
+	node = next;
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout templates.
+ */
+
+struct Ttk_TemplateNode_ {
+    char *name;
+    unsigned flags;
+    struct Ttk_TemplateNode_ *next, *child;
+};
+
+static Ttk_TemplateNode *Ttk_NewTemplateNode(const char *name, unsigned flags)
+{
+    Ttk_TemplateNode *op = (Ttk_TemplateNode*)ckalloc(sizeof(*op));
+    op->name = ckalloc(strlen(name) + 1); strcpy(op->name, name);
+    op->flags = flags;
+    op->next = op->child = 0;
+    return op;
+}
+
+void Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(Ttk_LayoutTemplate op)
+{
+    while (op) {
+	Ttk_LayoutTemplate next = op->next;
+	Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(op->child);
+	ckfree(op->name);
+	ckfree((ClientData)op);
+	op = next;
+    }
+}
+
+/* InstantiateLayout --
+ *	Create a layout tree from a template.
+ */
+static Ttk_LayoutNode *
+Ttk_InstantiateLayout(Ttk_Theme theme, Ttk_TemplateNode *op)
+{
+    Ttk_Element elementImpl = Ttk_GetElement(theme, op->name);
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *node = Ttk_NewLayoutNode(op->flags, elementImpl);
+
+    if (op->next) {
+	node->next = Ttk_InstantiateLayout(theme,op->next);
+    }
+    if (op->child) {
+	node->child = Ttk_InstantiateLayout(theme,op->child);
+    }
+
+    return node;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate --
+ *	Convert a Tcl list into a layout template.
+ *
+ * Syntax:
+ * 	layoutSpec ::= { elementName ?-option value ...? }+
+ */
+
+/* NB: This must match bit definitions TTK_PACK_LEFT etc. */
+static const char *packSideStrings[] =
+    { "left", "right", "top", "bottom", NULL };
+
+Ttk_LayoutTemplate Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    enum {  OP_SIDE, OP_STICKY, OP_EXPAND, OP_BORDER, OP_UNIT, OP_CHILDREN };
+    static const char *optStrings[] = {
+	    "-side", "-sticky", "-expand", "-border", "-unit", "-children", 0 };
+
+    int i = 0, objc;
+    Tcl_Obj **objv;
+    Ttk_TemplateNode *head = 0, *tail = 0;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+	return 0;
+
+    while (i < objc) {
+	char *elementName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	unsigned flags = 0x0, sticky = TTK_FILL_BOTH;
+	Tcl_Obj *childSpec = 0;
+
+	/*
+	 * Parse options:
+	 */
+	++i;
+	while (i < objc) {
+	    const char *optName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	    int option, value;
+
+	    if (optName[0] != '-')
+		break;
+
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(
+		    interp, objv[i], optStrings, "option", 0, &option)
+		!= TCL_OK)
+	    {
+		goto error;
+	    }
+
+	    if (++i >= objc) {
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			"Missing value for option ",Tcl_GetString(objv[i-1]),
+			NULL);
+		goto error;
+	    }
+
+	    switch (option) {
+		case OP_SIDE:	/* <<NOTE-PACKSIDE>> */
+		    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], packSideStrings,
+				"side", 0, &value) != TCL_OK)
+		    {
+			goto error;
+		    }
+		    flags |= (TTK_PACK_LEFT << value);
+
+		    break;
+		case OP_STICKY:
+		    if (Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(interp,objv[i],&sticky) != TCL_OK)
+			goto error;
+		    break;
+		case OP_EXPAND:
+		    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp,objv[i],&value) != TCL_OK)
+			goto error;
+		    if (value)
+			flags |= TTK_EXPAND;
+		    break;
+		case OP_BORDER:
+		    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp,objv[i],&value) != TCL_OK)
+			goto error;
+		    if (value)
+			flags |= TTK_BORDER;
+		    break;
+		case OP_UNIT:
+		    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp,objv[i],&value) != TCL_OK)
+			goto error;
+		    if (value)
+			flags |= TTK_UNIT;
+		    break;
+		case OP_CHILDREN:
+		    childSpec = objv[i];
+		    break;
+	    }
+	    ++i;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Build new node:
+	 */
+	if (tail) {
+	    tail->next = Ttk_NewTemplateNode(elementName, flags | sticky);
+	    tail = tail->next;
+	} else {
+	    head = tail = Ttk_NewTemplateNode(elementName, flags | sticky);
+	}
+	if (childSpec) {
+	    tail->child = Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate(interp, childSpec);
+	    if (!tail->child) {
+		goto error;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    return head;
+
+error:
+    Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(head);
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_BuildLayoutTemplate --
+ * 	Build a layout template tree from a statically defined
+ * 	Ttk_LayoutSpec array.
+ */
+Ttk_LayoutTemplate Ttk_BuildLayoutTemplate(Ttk_LayoutSpec spec)
+{
+    Ttk_TemplateNode *first = 0, *last = 0;
+
+    for ( ; !(spec->opcode & TTK_LAYOUT_END) ; ++spec) {
+	if (spec->elementName) {
+	    Ttk_TemplateNode *node =
+		Ttk_NewTemplateNode(spec->elementName, spec->opcode);
+
+	    if (last) {
+		last->next = node;
+	    } else {
+		first = node;
+	    }
+	    last = node;
+	}
+
+	if (spec->opcode & TTK_CHILDREN) {
+	    last->child = Ttk_BuildLayoutTemplate(spec+1);
+	    while (!(spec->opcode & TTK_LAYOUT_END)) {
+		++spec;
+	    }
+	}
+    } /* for */
+
+    return first;
+}
+
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UnparseLayoutTemplate(Ttk_TemplateNode *node) 
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+
+#   define APPENDOBJ(obj) Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, obj)
+#   define APPENDSTR(str) APPENDOBJ(Tcl_NewStringObj(str,-1))
+
+    while (node) {
+	unsigned flags = node->flags;
+
+	APPENDSTR(node->name);
+
+	/* Back-compute -side.  <<NOTE-PACKSIDE>>
+	 * @@@ NOTES: Ick.
+	 */
+	if (flags & TTK_EXPAND) {
+	    APPENDSTR("-expand");
+	    APPENDSTR("1"); 
+	} else {
+	    if (flags & _TTK_MASK_PACK) {
+		int side = 0;
+		unsigned sideFlags = flags & _TTK_MASK_PACK;
+
+		while ((sideFlags & TTK_PACK_LEFT) == 0) {
+		    ++side; 
+		    sideFlags >>= 1;
+		}
+		APPENDSTR("-side");
+		APPENDSTR(packSideStrings[side]);
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/* In Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate, default -sticky is "nsew",
+	 * so always include this even if no sticky bits are set.
+	 */
+	APPENDSTR("-sticky");
+	APPENDOBJ(Ttk_NewStickyObj(flags & _TTK_MASK_STICK));
+
+	/* @@@ Check again: are these necessary? */
+	if (flags & TTK_BORDER)	{ APPENDSTR("-border"); APPENDSTR("1"); }
+	if (flags & TTK_UNIT) 	{ APPENDSTR("-unit"); APPENDSTR("1"); }
+
+	if (node->child) {
+	    APPENDSTR("-children");
+	    APPENDOBJ(Ttk_UnparseLayoutTemplate(node->child));
+	}
+	node = node->next;
+    }
+
+#   undef APPENDOBJ
+#   undef APPENDSTR
+
+    return result;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layouts.
+ */
+struct Ttk_Layout_
+{
+    Ttk_Style	 	style;
+    void 		*recordPtr;
+    Tk_OptionTable	optionTable;
+    Tk_Window		tkwin;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode	*root;
+};
+
+static Ttk_Layout TTKNewLayout(
+    Ttk_Style style,
+    void *recordPtr,Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *root)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout layout = (Ttk_Layout)ckalloc(sizeof(*layout));
+    layout->style = style;
+    layout->recordPtr = recordPtr;
+    layout->optionTable = optionTable;
+    layout->tkwin = tkwin;
+    layout->root = root;
+    return layout;
+}
+
+void Ttk_FreeLayout(Ttk_Layout layout)
+{
+    Ttk_FreeLayoutNode(layout->root);
+    ckfree((ClientData)layout);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_CreateLayout --
+ *	Create a layout from the specified theme and style name.
+ *	Returns: New layout, 0 on error.
+ *	Leaves an error message in interp's result if there is an error.
+ */
+Ttk_Layout Ttk_CreateLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* where to leave error messages */
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr,
+    const char *styleName,
+    void *recordPtr,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,
+    Tk_Window tkwin)
+{
+    Ttk_Style style = Ttk_GetStyle(themePtr, styleName);
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate layoutTemplate =
+	Ttk_FindLayoutTemplate(themePtr,styleName);
+    Ttk_Element bgelement = Ttk_GetElement(themePtr, "background");
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *bgnode;
+
+    if (!layoutTemplate) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Layout ", styleName, " not found", NULL);
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    bgnode = Ttk_NewLayoutNode(TTK_FILL_BOTH, bgelement);
+    bgnode->next = Ttk_InstantiateLayout(themePtr, layoutTemplate);
+
+    return TTKNewLayout(style, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin, bgnode);
+}
+
+/* Ttk_CreateSublayout --
+ * 	Creates a new sublayout.
+ *
+ * 	Sublayouts are used to draw subparts of a compound widget.
+ *	They use the same Tk_Window, but a different option table 
+ *	and data record.
+ */
+Ttk_Layout
+Ttk_CreateSublayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr,
+    Ttk_Layout parentLayout,
+    const char *baseName,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable)
+{
+    Tcl_DString buf;
+    const char *styleName;
+    Ttk_Style style;
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate layoutTemplate;
+
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&buf);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&buf, Ttk_StyleName(parentLayout->style), -1);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&buf, baseName, -1);
+    styleName = Tcl_DStringValue(&buf);
+
+    style = Ttk_GetStyle(themePtr, styleName);
+    layoutTemplate = Ttk_FindLayoutTemplate(themePtr, styleName);
+
+    if (!layoutTemplate) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Layout ", styleName, " not found", NULL);
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&buf);
+
+    return TTKNewLayout(
+	    style, 0, optionTable, parentLayout->tkwin, 
+	    Ttk_InstantiateLayout(themePtr, layoutTemplate));
+}
+
+/* Ttk_RebindSublayout --
+ * 	Bind sublayout to new data source.
+ */
+void Ttk_RebindSublayout(Ttk_Layout layout, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    layout->recordPtr = recordPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_QueryOption --
+ * 	Look up an option from a layout's associated option.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_QueryOption(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, const char *optionName, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    return Ttk_QueryStyle(
+	layout->style,layout->recordPtr,layout->optionTable,optionName,state);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Size computation.
+ */
+static void Ttk_NodeListSize(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node,
+    Ttk_State state, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr); /* Forward */
+
+static void Ttk_NodeSize(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node, Ttk_State state,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    int elementWidth, elementHeight, subWidth, subHeight;
+    Ttk_Padding elementPadding;
+
+    Ttk_ElementSize(node->element,
+	layout->style, layout->recordPtr,layout->optionTable, layout->tkwin,
+	state|node->state,
+	&elementWidth, &elementHeight, &elementPadding);
+
+    Ttk_NodeListSize(layout,node->child,state,&subWidth,&subHeight);
+    subWidth += Ttk_PaddingWidth(elementPadding);
+    subHeight += Ttk_PaddingHeight(elementPadding);
+
+    *widthPtr = MAX(elementWidth, subWidth);
+    *heightPtr = MAX(elementHeight, subHeight);
+    *paddingPtr = elementPadding;
+}
+
+static void Ttk_NodeListSize(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node,
+    Ttk_State state, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    if (!node) {
+	*widthPtr = *heightPtr = 0;
+    } else {
+	int width, height, restWidth, restHeight;
+	Ttk_Padding unused;
+
+	Ttk_NodeSize(layout, node, state, &width, &height, &unused);
+	Ttk_NodeListSize(layout, node->next, state, &restWidth, &restHeight);
+
+	if (node->flags & (TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_PACK_RIGHT)) {
+	    *widthPtr = width + restWidth;
+	} else {
+	    *widthPtr = MAX(width, restWidth);
+	}
+
+	if (node->flags & (TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_PACK_BOTTOM)) {
+	    *heightPtr = height + restHeight;
+	} else {
+	    *heightPtr = MAX(height, restHeight);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding --
+ * 	Returns the internal padding of a layout node.
+ */
+Ttk_Padding Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node)
+{
+    int unused;
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+    Ttk_ElementSize(node->element,
+	layout->style, layout->recordPtr, layout->optionTable, layout->tkwin,
+	0/*state*/, &unused, &unused, &padding);
+    return padding;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel --
+ * 	Returns the inner area of a specified layout node,
+ * 	based on current parcel and element's internal padding.
+ */
+Ttk_Box Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel(Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node)
+{
+    Ttk_Padding padding = Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding(layout, node);
+    return Ttk_PadBox(node->parcel, padding);
+}
+
+/* Ttk_LayoutSize --
+ * 	Compute requested size of a layout.
+ */
+void Ttk_LayoutSize(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_State state, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_NodeListSize(layout, layout->root, state, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+}
+
+void Ttk_LayoutNodeReqSize(	/* @@@ Rename this */
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Padding unused;
+    Ttk_NodeSize(layout, node, 0/*state*/, widthPtr, heightPtr, &unused);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout placement.
+ */
+
+/* Ttk_PlaceNodeList --
+ *	Compute parcel for each node in a layout tree
+ *	according to position specification and overall size.
+ */
+static void Ttk_PlaceNodeList(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node, Ttk_State state, Ttk_Box cavity)
+{
+    for (; node; node = node->next)
+    {
+	int width, height;
+	Ttk_Padding padding;
+
+	/* Compute node size: (@@@ cache this instead?)
+	 */
+	Ttk_NodeSize(layout, node, state, &width, &height, &padding);
+
+	/* Compute parcel:
+	 */
+	node->parcel = Ttk_PositionBox(&cavity, width, height, node->flags);
+
+	/* Place child nodes:
+	 */
+	if (node->child) {
+	    Ttk_Box childBox = Ttk_PadBox(node->parcel, padding);
+	    Ttk_PlaceNodeList(layout,node->child, state, childBox);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+void Ttk_PlaceLayout(Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_State state, Ttk_Box b)
+{
+    Ttk_PlaceNodeList(layout, layout->root, state,  b);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout drawing.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_DrawLayout --
+ * 	Draw a layout tree.
+ */
+static void Ttk_DrawNodeList(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_State state, Ttk_LayoutNode *node, Drawable d)
+{
+    for (; node; node = node->next)
+    {
+	int border = node->flags & TTK_BORDER;
+	int substate = state;
+
+	if (node->flags & TTK_UNIT)
+	    substate |= node->state;
+
+	if (node->child && border)
+	    Ttk_DrawNodeList(layout, substate, node->child, d);
+
+	Ttk_DrawElement(
+	    node->element,
+	    layout->style,layout->recordPtr,layout->optionTable,layout->tkwin,
+	    d, node->parcel, state | node->state);
+
+	if (node->child && !border)
+	    Ttk_DrawNodeList(layout, substate, node->child, d);
+    }
+}
+
+void Ttk_DrawLayout(Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_State state, Drawable d)
+{
+    Ttk_DrawNodeList(layout, state, layout->root, d);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Inquiry and modification.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_LayoutIdentify --
+ * 	Find the layout node at the specified x,y coordinate.
+ */
+static Ttk_LayoutNode *
+Ttk_LayoutNodeIdentify(Ttk_LayoutNode *node, int x, int y)
+{
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *closest = NULL;
+
+    for (; node; node = node->next) {
+	if (Ttk_BoxContains(node->parcel, x, y)) {
+	    closest = node;
+	    if (node->child && !(node->flags & TTK_UNIT)) {
+		Ttk_LayoutNode *childNode =
+			Ttk_LayoutNodeIdentify(node->child, x,y);
+		if (childNode) {
+		    closest = childNode;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    return closest;
+}
+
+Ttk_LayoutNode *Ttk_LayoutIdentify(Ttk_Layout layout, int x, int y)
+{
+    return Ttk_LayoutNodeIdentify(layout->root, x, y);
+}
+
+/*
+ * tail --
+ * 	Return the last component of an element name, e.g.,
+ * 	"Scrollbar.thumb" => "thumb"
+ */
+static const char *tail(const char *elementName)
+{
+    const char *dot;
+    while ((dot=strchr(elementName,'.')) != NULL)
+	elementName = dot + 1;
+    return elementName;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_LayoutFindNode --
+ * 	Look up a layout node by name.
+ */
+static Ttk_LayoutNode *
+Ttk_LayoutNodeFind(Ttk_LayoutNode *node, const char *nodeName)
+{
+    for (; node ; node = node->next) {
+	if (!strcmp(tail(Ttk_LayoutNodeName(node)), nodeName))
+	    return node;
+
+	if (node->child) {
+	    Ttk_LayoutNode *childNode =
+		Ttk_LayoutNodeFind(node->child, nodeName);
+	    if (childNode)
+		return childNode;
+	}
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+Ttk_LayoutNode *Ttk_LayoutFindNode(Ttk_Layout layout, const char *nodeName)
+{
+    return Ttk_LayoutNodeFind(layout->root, nodeName);
+}
+
+const char *Ttk_LayoutNodeName(Ttk_LayoutNode *node)
+{
+    return Ttk_ElementName(node->element);
+}
+
+Ttk_Box Ttk_LayoutNodeParcel(Ttk_LayoutNode *node)
+{
+    return node->parcel;
+}
+
+void Ttk_LayoutNodeSetParcel(Ttk_LayoutNode *node, Ttk_Box parcel)
+{
+    node->parcel = parcel;
+}
+
+void Ttk_PlaceLayoutNode(Ttk_Layout layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *node, Ttk_Box b)
+{
+    node->parcel = b;
+    if (node->child) {
+	Ttk_PlaceNodeList(layout, node->child, 0,
+	    Ttk_PadBox(b, Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding(layout, node)));
+    }
+}
+
+void Ttk_ChangeElementState(Ttk_LayoutNode *node,unsigned set,unsigned clr)
+{
+    node->state = (node->state | set) & ~clr;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkManager.c b/generic/ttk/ttkManager.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e41b36d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkManager.c
@@ -0,0 +1,605 @@
+/* $Id: ttkManager.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright 2005, Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: support routines for geometry managers.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkManager.h"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ The Geometry Propagation Dance.
+ *
+ * When a slave window requests a new size or some other parameter changes,
+ * the manager recomputes the required size for the master window and calls
+ * Tk_GeometryRequest().  This is scheduled as an idle handler so multiple
+ * updates can be processed as a single batch.
+ *
+ * If all goes well, the master's manager will process the request
+ * (and so on up the chain to the toplevel window), and the master
+ * window will eventually receive a <Configure> event.  At this point
+ * it recomputes the size and position of all slaves and places them.
+ *
+ * If all does not go well, however, the master's request may be ignored
+ * (typically because the top-level window has a fixed, user-specified size).
+ * Tk doesn't provide any notification when this happens; to account for this,
+ * we also schedule an idle handler to call the layout procedure
+ * after making a geometry request.
+ *
+ * +++ Slave removal <<NOTE-LOSTSLAVE>>.
+ *
+ * There are three conditions under which a slave is removed:
+ *
+ * (1) Another GM claims control
+ * (2) Manager voluntarily relinquishes control
+ * (3) Slave is destroyed
+ *
+ * In case (1), Tk calls the manager's lostSlaveProc.
+ * Case (2) is performed by calling Tk_ManageGeometry(slave,NULL,0);
+ * in this case Tk does _not_ call the LostSlaveProc (documented behavior).
+ * Tk doesn't handle case (3) either; to account for that we
+ * register an event handler on the slave widget to track <Destroy> events.
+ *
+ */
+
+/* ++ manager->flags bits:
+ */
+#define MGR_UPDATE_PENDING	0x1
+#define MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED	0x2
+#define MGR_RELAYOUT_REQUIRED	0x4
+
+/* ++ slave->flags bits:
+ */
+#define SLAVE_MAPPED 		0x1	/* slave to be mapped when master is */
+
+static void ManagerIdleProc(void *);	/* forward */
+
+/* ++ ScheduleUpdate --
+ * 	Schedule a call to recompute the size and/or layout,
+ *	depending on flags.
+ */
+static void ScheduleUpdate(Ttk_Manager *mgr, unsigned flags)
+{
+    if (!(mgr->flags & MGR_UPDATE_PENDING)) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ManagerIdleProc, mgr);
+	mgr->flags |= MGR_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+    mgr->flags |= flags;
+}
+
+/* ++ RecomputeSize --
+ * 	Recomputes the required size of the master window,
+ * 	makes geometry request.
+ */
+static void RecomputeSize(Ttk_Manager *mgr)
+{
+    int width = 1, height = 1;
+
+    if (mgr->managerSpec->RequestedSize(mgr->managerData, &width, &height)) {
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(mgr->masterWindow, width, height);
+	ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RELAYOUT_REQUIRED);
+    }
+    mgr->flags &= ~MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED;
+}
+
+/* ++ RecomputeLayout --
+ * 	Recompute geometry of all slaves.
+ */
+static void RecomputeLayout(Ttk_Manager *mgr)
+{
+    mgr->managerSpec->PlaceSlaves(mgr->managerData);
+    mgr->flags &= ~MGR_RELAYOUT_REQUIRED;
+}
+
+/* ++ ManagerIdleProc --
+ * 	DoWhenIdle procedure for deferred updates.
+ */
+static void ManagerIdleProc(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = clientData;
+    mgr->flags &= ~MGR_UPDATE_PENDING;
+
+    if (mgr->flags & MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED) {
+	RecomputeSize(mgr);
+    } 
+    if (mgr->flags & MGR_RELAYOUT_REQUIRED) {
+	if (mgr->flags & MGR_UPDATE_PENDING) {
+	    /* RecomputeSize has scheduled another update; relayout later */
+	    return;
+	}
+	RecomputeLayout(mgr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Event handlers.
+ */
+
+/* ++ ManagerEventHandler --
+ * 	Recompute slave layout when master widget is resized.
+ * 	Keep the slave's map state in sync with the master's.
+ */
+static const int ManagerEventMask = StructureNotifyMask;
+static void ManagerEventHandler(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = clientData;
+    int i;
+
+    switch (eventPtr->type) 
+    {
+	case ConfigureNotify:
+	    RecomputeLayout(mgr);
+	    break;
+	case MapNotify:
+	    for (i = 0; i < mgr->nSlaves; ++i) {
+		Ttk_Slave *slave = mgr->slaves[i];
+		if (slave->flags & SLAVE_MAPPED) {
+		    Tk_MapWindow(slave->slaveWindow);
+		}
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case UnmapNotify:
+	    for (i = 0; i < mgr->nSlaves; ++i) {
+		Ttk_Slave *slave = mgr->slaves[i];
+		Tk_UnmapWindow(slave->slaveWindow);
+	    }
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+/* ++ SlaveEventHandler --
+ * 	Notifies manager when a slave is destroyed
+ * 	(see <<NOTE-LOSTSLAVE>>).
+ */
+static const unsigned SlaveEventMask = StructureNotifyMask;
+static void SlaveEventHandler(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = clientData;
+    if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
+	slave->manager->managerSpec->tkGeomMgr.lostSlaveProc(
+	    clientData, slave->slaveWindow);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slave initialization and cleanup.
+ */
+
+static Ttk_Slave *CreateSlave(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Manager *mgr, Tk_Window slaveWindow)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = (Ttk_Slave*)ckalloc(sizeof(*slave));
+    int status;
+
+    slave->slaveWindow = slaveWindow;
+    slave->manager = mgr;
+    slave->flags = 0;
+    slave->slaveData = ckalloc(mgr->managerSpec->slaveSize);
+    memset(slave->slaveData, 0, mgr->managerSpec->slaveSize);
+
+    if (!mgr->slaveOptionTable) {
+	mgr->slaveOptionTable =
+	    Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, mgr->managerSpec->slaveOptionSpecs);
+    }
+
+    status = Tk_InitOptions(
+	interp, slave->slaveData, mgr->slaveOptionTable, slaveWindow);
+
+    if (status != TCL_OK) {
+	ckfree((ClientData)slave->slaveData);
+	ckfree((ClientData)slave);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    return slave;
+}
+
+static void DeleteSlave(Ttk_Slave *slave)
+{
+    Tk_FreeConfigOptions(
+	slave->slaveData, slave->manager->slaveOptionTable, slave->slaveWindow);
+    ckfree((ClientData)slave->slaveData);
+    ckfree((ClientData)slave);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Manager initialization and cleanup.
+ */
+
+Ttk_Manager *Ttk_CreateManager(
+    Ttk_ManagerSpec *managerSpec, void *managerData, Tk_Window masterWindow)
+{
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = (Ttk_Manager*)ckalloc(sizeof(*mgr));
+
+    mgr->managerSpec 	= managerSpec;
+    mgr->managerData	= managerData;
+    mgr->masterWindow	= masterWindow;
+    mgr->slaveOptionTable= 0;
+    mgr->nSlaves 	= 0;
+    mgr->slaves 	= NULL;
+    mgr->flags  	= 0;
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(
+	mgr->masterWindow, ManagerEventMask, ManagerEventHandler, mgr);
+
+    return mgr;
+}
+
+void Ttk_DeleteManager(Ttk_Manager *mgr)
+{
+    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(
+	mgr->masterWindow, ManagerEventMask, ManagerEventHandler, mgr);
+
+    while (mgr->nSlaves > 0) {
+	Ttk_ForgetSlave(mgr, mgr->nSlaves - 1);
+    }
+    if (mgr->slaves) {
+	ckfree((ClientData)mgr->slaves);
+    }
+    if (mgr->slaveOptionTable) {
+	Tk_DeleteOptionTable(mgr->slaveOptionTable);
+    }
+
+    Tk_CancelIdleCall(ManagerIdleProc, mgr);
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)mgr);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slave management.
+ */
+
+/* ++ InsertSlave --
+ * 	Adds slave to the list of managed windows.
+ */
+static void InsertSlave(Ttk_Manager *mgr, Ttk_Slave *slave, int index)
+{
+    int endIndex = mgr->nSlaves++;
+    mgr->slaves = (Ttk_Slave**)ckrealloc(
+	    (ClientData)mgr->slaves, mgr->nSlaves * sizeof(Ttk_Slave *));
+
+    while (endIndex > index) {
+	mgr->slaves[endIndex] = mgr->slaves[endIndex - 1];
+	--endIndex;
+    }
+
+    mgr->slaves[index] = slave;
+
+    Tk_ManageGeometry(slave->slaveWindow,
+	&mgr->managerSpec->tkGeomMgr, (ClientData)slave);
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(slave->slaveWindow,
+	SlaveEventMask, SlaveEventHandler, (ClientData)slave);
+
+    ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED);
+}
+
+/* RemoveSlave --
+ * 	Unmanage and delete the slave.
+ *
+ * NOTES/ASSUMPTIONS:
+ *
+ * [1] It's safe to call Tk_UnmapWindow / Tk_UnmaintainGeometry even if this 
+ * routine is called from the slave's DestroyNotify event handler.
+ */
+static void RemoveSlave(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int index)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = mgr->slaves[index];
+    int i;
+
+    /* Notify manager:
+     */
+    mgr->managerSpec->SlaveRemoved(mgr, index);
+
+    /* Remove from array:
+     */
+    --mgr->nSlaves;
+    for (i = index ; i < mgr->nSlaves; ++i) {
+	mgr->slaves[i] = mgr->slaves[i+1];
+    }
+
+    /* Clean up:
+     */
+    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(
+	slave->slaveWindow, SlaveEventMask, SlaveEventHandler, slave);
+
+    /* Note [1] */
+    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slave->slaveWindow, mgr->masterWindow);
+    Tk_UnmapWindow(slave->slaveWindow);
+
+    DeleteSlave(slave);
+
+    ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tk_GeomMgr hooks.
+ */
+
+void Ttk_GeometryRequestProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window slaveWindow)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = clientData;
+    ScheduleUpdate(slave->manager, MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED);
+}
+
+void Ttk_LostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window slaveWindow)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = clientData;
+    int index = Ttk_SlaveIndex(slave->manager, slave->slaveWindow);
+
+    /* ASSERT: index >= 0 */
+    RemoveSlave(slave->manager, index);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Public API.
+ */
+
+/* ++ Ttk_AddSlave --
+ * 	Create and configure new slave window, insert at specified index.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR; in the case of TCL_ERROR, the slave
+ * 	is not added and an error message is left in interp.
+ */
+int Ttk_AddSlave(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Manager *mgr, Tk_Window slaveWindow,
+    int index, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave;
+
+    /* Sanity-checks:
+     */
+    if (!Ttk_Maintainable(interp, slaveWindow, mgr->masterWindow)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Ttk_SlaveIndex(mgr, slaveWindow) >= 0) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	    Tk_PathName(slaveWindow), " already added",
+	    NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Create, configure, and insert slave:
+     */
+    slave = CreateSlave(interp, mgr, slaveWindow);
+    if (Ttk_ConfigureSlave(interp, mgr, slave, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
+	DeleteSlave(slave);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    InsertSlave(mgr, slave, index);
+    mgr->managerSpec->SlaveAdded(mgr, index);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_ConfigureSlave --
+ */
+int Ttk_ConfigureSlave(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Manager *mgr, Ttk_Slave *slave,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])
+{
+    Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+    int mask = 0;
+
+    /* ASSERT: mgr->slaveOptionTable != NULL */
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, slave->slaveData, mgr->slaveOptionTable,
+	    objc, objv, slave->slaveWindow, &savedOptions, &mask) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (mgr->managerSpec->SlaveConfigured(interp,mgr,slave,mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RELAYOUT_REQUIRED);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_ForgetSlave --
+ * 	Unmanage the specified slave.
+ */
+void Ttk_ForgetSlave(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex)
+{
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow = mgr->slaves[slaveIndex]->slaveWindow;
+    RemoveSlave(mgr, slaveIndex);
+    Tk_ManageGeometry(slaveWindow, NULL, 0);
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_PlaceSlave --
+ * 	Set the position and size of the specified slave window.
+ *
+ * NOTES:
+ * 	Contrary to documentation, Tk_MaintainGeometry doesn't always
+ * 	map the slave.
+ */
+void Ttk_PlaceSlave(
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex, int x, int y, int width, int height)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = mgr->slaves[slaveIndex];
+    Tk_MaintainGeometry(slave->slaveWindow,mgr->masterWindow,x,y,width,height);
+    slave->flags |= SLAVE_MAPPED;
+    if (Tk_IsMapped(mgr->masterWindow)) {
+	Tk_MapWindow(slave->slaveWindow);
+    }
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_UnmapSlave --
+ * 	Unmap the specified slave, but leave it managed.
+ */
+void Ttk_UnmapSlave(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = mgr->slaves[slaveIndex];
+    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slave->slaveWindow, mgr->masterWindow);
+    slave->flags &= ~SLAVE_MAPPED;
+    /* Contrary to documentation, Tk_UnmaintainGeometry doesn't always 
+     * unmap the slave:
+     */
+    Tk_UnmapWindow(slave->slaveWindow);
+}
+
+/* LayoutChanged, SizeChanged --
+ * 	Schedule a relayout, resp. resize request.
+ */
+void Ttk_ManagerLayoutChanged(Ttk_Manager *mgr)
+{
+    ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RELAYOUT_REQUIRED);
+}
+
+void Ttk_ManagerSizeChanged(Ttk_Manager *mgr)
+{
+    ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED);
+}
+
+/* +++ Accessors.
+ */
+int Ttk_NumberSlaves(Ttk_Manager *mgr) 
+{
+    return mgr->nSlaves; 
+}
+void *Ttk_SlaveData(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex)
+{
+    return mgr->slaves[slaveIndex]->slaveData;
+}
+Tk_Window Ttk_SlaveWindow(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex)
+{
+    return mgr->slaves[slaveIndex]->slaveWindow;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utility routines.
+ */
+
+/* ++ Ttk_SlaveIndex --
+ * 	Returns the index of specified slave window, -1 if not found.
+ */
+int Ttk_SlaveIndex(Ttk_Manager *mgr, Tk_Window slaveWindow)
+{
+    int index;
+    for (index = 0; index < mgr->nSlaves; ++index)
+	if (mgr->slaves[index]->slaveWindow == slaveWindow)
+	    return index;
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_GetSlaveFromObj(interp, mgr, objPtr, indexPtr) --
+ * 	Return the index of the slave specified by objPtr.
+ * 	Slaves may be specified as an integer index or
+ * 	as the name of the managed window.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	Pointer to slave; stores slave index in *indexPtr.
+ * 	On error, returns NULL and leaves an error message in interp.
+ */
+
+Ttk_Slave *Ttk_GetSlaveFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Manager *mgr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *indexPtr)
+{
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+    int slaveIndex = 0;
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+
+    /* Try interpreting as an integer first:
+     */
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &slaveIndex) == TCL_OK) {
+	if (slaveIndex < 0 || slaveIndex >= mgr->nSlaves) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		"Slave index ", Tcl_GetString(objPtr), " out of bounds",
+		NULL);
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	*indexPtr = slaveIndex;
+	return mgr->slaves[slaveIndex];
+    }
+
+    /* Try interpreting as a slave window name;
+     */
+    if (   (*string == '.')
+	&& (tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, mgr->masterWindow)))
+    {
+	slaveIndex = Ttk_SlaveIndex(mgr, tkwin);
+	if (slaveIndex < 0) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		string, " is not managed by ", Tk_PathName(mgr->masterWindow),
+		NULL);
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	*indexPtr = slaveIndex;
+	return mgr->slaves[slaveIndex];
+    }
+
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Invalid slave specification ", string, NULL);
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_ReorderSlave(mgr, fromIndex, toIndex) --
+ * 	Change slave order.
+ */
+void Ttk_ReorderSlave(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int fromIndex, int toIndex)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *moved = mgr->slaves[fromIndex];
+
+    /* Shuffle down: */
+    while (fromIndex > toIndex) {
+	mgr->slaves[fromIndex] = mgr->slaves[fromIndex - 1];
+	--fromIndex;
+    }
+    /* Or, shuffle up: */
+    while (fromIndex < toIndex) {
+	mgr->slaves[fromIndex] = mgr->slaves[fromIndex + 1];
+	++fromIndex;
+    }
+    /* ASSERT: fromIndex == toIndex */
+    mgr->slaves[fromIndex] = moved;
+
+    /* Schedule a relayout.  In general, rearranging slaves
+     * may also change the size:
+     */
+    ScheduleUpdate(mgr, MGR_RESIZE_REQUIRED);
+}
+
+/* ++ Ttk_Maintainable(interp, slave, master) --
+ * 	Utility routine.  Verifies that 'master' may be used to maintain
+ *	the geometry of 'slave' via Tk_MaintainGeometry:
+ * 
+ * 	+ 'master' is either 'slave's parent -OR-
+ * 	+ 'master is a descendant of 'slave's parent.
+ * 	+ 'slave' is not a toplevel window
+ * 	+ 'slave' belongs to the same toplevel as 'master'
+ *
+ * Returns: 1 if OK; otherwise 0, leaving an error message in 'interp'.
+ */
+int Ttk_Maintainable(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master)
+{
+    Tk_Window ancestor = master, parent = Tk_Parent(slave), sibling = NULL;
+
+    if (Tk_IsTopLevel(slave) || slave == master) {
+	goto badWindow;
+    }
+
+    while (ancestor != parent) {
+	if (Tk_IsTopLevel(ancestor)) {
+	    goto badWindow;
+	}
+	sibling = ancestor;
+	ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor);
+    }
+
+    return 1;
+
+badWindow:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
+	"can't add ", Tk_PathName(slave),
+	" as slave of ", Tk_PathName(master),
+	NULL);
+    return 0;
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkManager.h b/generic/ttk/ttkManager.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d046cd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkManager.h
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+/* $Id: ttkManager.h,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2005, Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: Geometry management utilities.
+ *
+ * TODO: opacify data structures.
+ */
+
+#ifndef TTK_MANAGER_H
+#define TTK_MANAGER_H 1
+
+typedef struct TtkManager_ Ttk_Manager; /* forward */
+typedef struct TtkSlave_ Ttk_Slave; /* forward */
+
+/*
+ * Geometry manager specification record:
+ *
+ * RequestedSize computes the requested size of the master window.
+ *
+ * PlaceSlaves sets the position and size of all managed slaves
+ * by calling Ttk_PlaceSlave().
+ *
+ * SlaveAdded() is called after a new slave has been added.
+ *
+ * SlaveRemoved() is called immediately before a slave is removed.
+ * NB: the associated slave window may have been destroyed when this
+ * routine is called.
+ */
+typedef struct {			/* Manager hooks */
+    Tk_GeomMgr tkGeomMgr;		/* "real" Tk Geometry Manager */
+    Tk_OptionSpec *slaveOptionSpecs;	/* slave record options */
+    size_t slaveSize;			/* size of slave record */
+
+    int  (*RequestedSize)(void *managerData, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+    void (*PlaceSlaves)(void *managerData);
+
+    void (*SlaveAdded)(Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex);
+    void (*SlaveRemoved)(Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex);
+    int  (*SlaveConfigured)(
+	    Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Manager *, Ttk_Slave *, unsigned mask);
+} Ttk_ManagerSpec;
+
+/*
+ * Default implementations for Tk_GeomMgr hooks:
+ */
+extern void Ttk_GeometryRequestProc(ClientData, Tk_Window slave);
+extern void Ttk_LostSlaveProc(ClientData, Tk_Window slave);
+
+struct TtkSlave_
+{
+    Tk_Window 		slaveWindow;
+    Ttk_Manager 	*manager;
+    void 		*slaveData;
+    unsigned		flags;			/* private; see manager.c */
+};
+
+struct TtkManager_
+{
+    Ttk_ManagerSpec	*managerSpec;
+    void 		*managerData;
+    Tk_Window   	masterWindow;
+    Tk_OptionTable 	slaveOptionTable;
+    unsigned		flags;			/* private; see manager.c */
+    int 	 	nSlaves;
+    Ttk_Slave 		**slaves;
+};
+
+/*
+ * Public API:
+ */
+extern Ttk_Manager *Ttk_CreateManager(
+	Ttk_ManagerSpec *, void *managerData, Tk_Window masterWindow);
+extern void Ttk_DeleteManager(Ttk_Manager *);
+
+extern int Ttk_AddSlave(
+    Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Manager *, Tk_Window, int position,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+
+extern void Ttk_ForgetSlave(Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex);
+
+extern int Ttk_ConfigureSlave(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Manager *, Ttk_Slave *,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+
+extern void Ttk_ReorderSlave(Ttk_Manager *, int fromIndex, int toIndex);
+    /* Rearrange slave positions */
+
+extern void Ttk_PlaceSlave(
+    Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex, int x, int y, int width, int height);
+    /* Position and map the slave */
+
+extern void Ttk_UnmapSlave(Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex);
+    /* Unmap the slave */
+
+extern void Ttk_ManagerSizeChanged(Ttk_Manager *);
+extern void Ttk_ManagerLayoutChanged(Ttk_Manager *);
+    /* Notify manager that size (resp. layout) needs to be recomputed */
+
+/* Utilities:
+ */
+extern int Ttk_SlaveIndex(Ttk_Manager *, Tk_Window);
+    /* Returns: index in slave array of specified window, -1 if not found */
+
+extern Ttk_Slave *Ttk_GetSlaveFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Manager *, Tcl_Obj *, int *indexPtr);
+
+/* Accessor functions:
+ */
+extern int Ttk_NumberSlaves(Ttk_Manager *);
+    /* Returns: number of managed slaves */
+
+extern void *Ttk_SlaveData(Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex);
+    /* Returns: private data associated with slave */
+
+extern Tk_Window Ttk_SlaveWindow(Ttk_Manager *, int slaveIndex);
+    /* Returns: slave window */
+
+extern int Ttk_Maintainable(Tcl_Interp *, Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master);
+    /* Returns: 1 if master can manage slave; 0 otherwise leaving error msg */
+
+#endif
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkNotebook.c b/generic/ttk/ttkNotebook.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8b6640
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkNotebook.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1264 @@
+/* $Id: ttkNotebook.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * NOTE-ACTIVE: activeTabIndex is not always correct (it's
+ * more trouble than it's worth to track this 100%)
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+#include "ttkManager.h"
+
+#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b))
+#define MAX(a,b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b))
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tab resources.
+ */
+
+#define DEFAULT_MIN_TAB_WIDTH 24
+
+static const char *TabStateStrings[] = { "normal", "disabled", "hidden", 0 };
+typedef enum {
+    TAB_STATE_NORMAL, TAB_STATE_DISABLED, TAB_STATE_HIDDEN
+} TAB_STATE;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    /* Internal data:
+     */
+    int 	width, height;		/* Requested size of tab */
+    Ttk_Box	parcel;			/* Tab position */
+
+    /* Tab options:
+     */
+    TAB_STATE 	state;
+
+    /* Child window options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj	*paddingObj;		/* Padding inside pane */
+    Ttk_Padding	padding;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*stickyObj;
+    Ttk_Sticky	sticky;
+
+    /* Label options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *textObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *imageObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *compoundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *underlineObj;
+
+} Tab;
+
+/* Two different option tables are used for tabs:
+ * TabOptionSpecs is used to draw the tab, and only includes resources
+ * relevant to the tab.
+ *
+ * PaneOptionSpecs includes additional options for child window placement
+ * and is used to configure the slave.
+ */
+static Tk_OptionSpec TabOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "", "",
+	"normal", -1,Tk_Offset(Tab,state),
+	0,(ClientData)TabStateStrings,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Tab,textObj), -1, 0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image", NULL/*default*/,
+	Tk_Offset(Tab,imageObj), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
+	"none", Tk_Offset(Tab,compoundObj), -1,
+	0,(ClientData)TTKCompoundStrings,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline", "-1",
+	Tk_Offset(Tab,underlineObj), -1, 0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_END}
+};
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec PaneOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Padding", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Tab,paddingObj), -1, 0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-sticky", "sticky", "Sticky", "nsew",
+	Tk_Offset(Tab,stickyObj), -1, 0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(TabOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Notebook resources.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;		/* Default width */
+    Tcl_Obj *heightObj;		/* Default height */
+    Tcl_Obj *paddingObj;	/* Padding around notebook */
+
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr;		/* Geometry manager */
+    Tk_OptionTable tabOptionTable;	/* Tab options */
+    Tk_OptionTable paneOptionTable;	/* Tab+pane options */
+    int currentIndex;		/* index of currently selected tab */
+    int activeIndex;		/* index of currently active tab */
+    Ttk_Layout tabLayout;	/* Sublayout for tabs */
+
+    Ttk_Box clientArea;		/* Where to pack slave widgets */
+} NotebookPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    NotebookPart notebook;
+} Notebook;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec NotebookOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    WIDGET_TAKES_FOCUS,
+
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Notebook,notebook.widthObj),-1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-height", "height", "Height", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Notebook,notebook.heightObj),-1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Padding", NULL,
+	Tk_Offset(Notebook,notebook.paddingObj),-1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(CoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/* Notebook style options:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Ttk_PositionSpec	tabPosition;	/* Where to place tabs */
+    Ttk_Padding 	tabMargins;	/* Margins around tab row */
+    Ttk_PositionSpec 	tabPlacement;	/* How to pack tabs within tab row */
+    Ttk_Orient		tabOrient;	/* ... */
+    int 		minTabWidth;	/* Minimum tab width */
+    Ttk_Padding 	padding;	/* External padding */
+} NotebookStyle;
+
+static void NotebookStyleOptions(Notebook *nb, NotebookStyle *nbstyle)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+
+    nbstyle->tabPosition = TTK_PACK_TOP | TTK_STICK_W;
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(nb->core.layout, "-tabposition", 0)) != 0) {
+	TtkGetLabelAnchorFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &nbstyle->tabPosition);
+    }
+
+    /* compute tabPlacement and tabOrient as function of tabPosition:
+     */
+    if (nbstyle->tabPosition & TTK_PACK_LEFT) {
+	nbstyle->tabPlacement = TTK_PACK_TOP | TTK_STICK_E;
+	nbstyle->tabOrient = TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL;
+    } else if (nbstyle->tabPosition & TTK_PACK_RIGHT) {
+	nbstyle->tabPlacement = TTK_PACK_TOP | TTK_STICK_W;
+	nbstyle->tabOrient = TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL;
+    } else if (nbstyle->tabPosition & TTK_PACK_BOTTOM) {
+	nbstyle->tabPlacement = TTK_PACK_LEFT | TTK_STICK_N;
+	nbstyle->tabOrient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    } else { /* Assume TTK_PACK_TOP */
+	nbstyle->tabPlacement = TTK_PACK_LEFT | TTK_STICK_S;
+	nbstyle->tabOrient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    }
+
+    nbstyle->tabMargins = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(nb->core.layout, "-tabmargins", 0)) != 0) {
+	Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &nbstyle->tabMargins);
+    }
+
+    nbstyle->padding = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(nb->core.layout, "-padding", 0)) != 0) {
+	Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,nb->core.tkwin,objPtr,&nbstyle->padding);
+    }
+
+    nbstyle->minTabWidth = DEFAULT_MIN_TAB_WIDTH;
+    if ((objPtr = Ttk_QueryOption(nb->core.layout, "-mintabwidth", 0)) != 0) {
+	Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &nbstyle->minTabWidth);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tab management.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * IdentifyTab --
+ * 	Return the index of the tab at point x,y,
+ * 	or -1 if no tab at that point.
+ */
+static int IdentifyTab(Notebook *nb, int x, int y)
+{
+    int index;
+    for (index = 0; index < Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr); ++index) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr,index);
+	if (	tab->state != TAB_STATE_HIDDEN
+	     && Ttk_BoxContains(tab->parcel, x,y))
+	{
+	    return index;
+	}
+    }
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/*
+ * ActivateTab --
+ * 	Set the active tab index, redisplay if necessary.
+ */
+static void ActivateTab(Notebook *nb, int index)
+{
+    if (index != nb->notebook.activeIndex) {
+	nb->notebook.activeIndex = index;
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * TabState --
+ * 	Return the state of the specified tab, based on
+ * 	notebook state, currentIndex, activeIndex, and user-specified tab state.
+ *	The USER1 bit is set for the leftmost tab, and USER2
+ * 	is set for the rightmost tab.
+ */
+static Ttk_State TabState(Notebook *nb, int index)
+{
+    Ttk_State state = nb->core.state;
+    Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, index);
+
+    if (index == nb->notebook.currentIndex) {
+	state |= TTK_STATE_SELECTED;
+    } else {
+	state &= ~TTK_STATE_FOCUS;
+    }
+
+    if (index == nb->notebook.activeIndex) {
+	state |= TTK_STATE_ACTIVE;
+    }
+    if (index == 0) {
+    	state |= TTK_STATE_USER1;
+    }
+    if (index == Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr) - 1) {
+    	state |= TTK_STATE_USER2;
+    }
+    if (tab->state == TAB_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	state |= TTK_STATE_DISABLED;
+    }
+
+    return state;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Geometry management - size computation.
+ */
+
+/* TabrowSize --
+ *	Compute max height and total width of all tabs (horizontal layouts)
+ *	or total height and max width (vertical layouts).
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Sets width and height fields for all tabs.
+ *
+ * Notes:
+ * 	Hidden tabs are included in the perpendicular computation
+ * 	(max height/width) but not parallel (total width/height).
+ */
+static void TabrowSize(
+    Notebook *nb, Ttk_Orient orient, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout tabLayout = nb->notebook.tabLayout;
+    int tabrowWidth = 0, tabrowHeight = 0;
+    int i;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr); ++i) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, i);
+	Ttk_State tabState = TabState(nb,i);
+
+	Ttk_RebindSublayout(tabLayout, tab);
+	Ttk_LayoutSize(tabLayout,tabState,&tab->width,&tab->height);
+
+	if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    tabrowHeight = MAX(tabrowHeight, tab->height);
+	    if (tab->state != TAB_STATE_HIDDEN) { tabrowWidth += tab->width; }
+	} else {
+	    tabrowWidth = MAX(tabrowWidth, tab->width);
+	    if (tab->state != TAB_STATE_HIDDEN) { tabrowHeight += tab->height; }
+	}
+    }
+
+    *widthPtr = tabrowWidth;
+    *heightPtr = tabrowHeight;
+}
+
+/* NotebookSize -- GM and widget size hook.
+ *
+ * Total height is tab height + client area height + pane internal padding
+ * Total width is max(client width, tab width) + pane internal padding
+ * Client area size determined by max size of slaves,
+ * overridden by -width and/or -height if nonzero.
+ */
+
+static int NotebookSize(void *clientData, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = clientData;
+    NotebookStyle nbstyle;
+    Ttk_Padding padding;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *clientNode = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(nb->core.layout, "client");
+    int clientWidth = 0, clientHeight = 0,
+    	reqWidth = 0, reqHeight = 0,
+	tabrowWidth = 0, tabrowHeight = 0;
+    int i;
+
+    NotebookStyleOptions(nb, &nbstyle);
+
+    /* Compute max requested size of all slaves:
+     */
+    for (i = 0; i < Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr); ++i) {
+	Tk_Window slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(nb->notebook.mgr, i);
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, i);
+	int slaveWidth
+	    = Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow) + Ttk_PaddingWidth(tab->padding);
+	int slaveHeight
+	    = Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow) + Ttk_PaddingHeight(tab->padding);
+
+	clientWidth = MAX(clientWidth, slaveWidth);
+	clientHeight = MAX(clientHeight, slaveHeight);
+    }
+
+    /* Client width/height overridable by widget options:
+     */
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, nb->notebook.widthObj,&reqWidth);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, nb->notebook.heightObj,&reqHeight);
+    if (reqWidth > 0)
+	clientWidth = reqWidth;
+    if (reqHeight > 0)
+	clientHeight = reqHeight;
+
+    /* Tab row:
+     */
+    TabrowSize(nb, nbstyle.tabOrient, &tabrowWidth, &tabrowHeight);
+    tabrowHeight += Ttk_PaddingHeight(nbstyle.tabMargins);
+    tabrowWidth += Ttk_PaddingWidth(nbstyle.tabMargins);
+
+    /* Account for exterior and interior padding:
+     */
+    padding = nbstyle.padding;
+    if (clientNode) {
+	Ttk_Padding ipad =
+	    Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding(nb->core.layout, clientNode);
+	padding = Ttk_AddPadding(padding, ipad);
+    }
+
+    *widthPtr = MAX(tabrowWidth, clientWidth) + Ttk_PaddingWidth(padding);
+    *heightPtr = tabrowHeight + clientHeight + Ttk_PaddingHeight(padding);
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Geometry management - layout.
+ */
+
+/* SqueezeTabs --
+ *	If the notebook is not wide enough to display all tabs,
+ *	attempt to decrease tab widths to fit.
+ *
+ *	All tabs are shrunk by an equal amount, but will not be made
+ *	smaller than the minimum width.  (If all the tabs still do
+ *	not fit in the available space, the rightmost tabs are truncated).
+ *
+ *	The algorithm does not always yield an optimal layout, but does
+ *	have the important property that decreasing the available width
+ *	by one pixel will cause at most one tab to shrink by one pixel;
+ *	this means that tabs resize "smoothly" when the window shrinks
+ *	and grows.
+ *
+ * @@@ <<NOTE-TABPOSITION>> bug: only works for horizontal orientations
+ */
+
+static void SqueezeTabs(
+    Notebook *nb, int desiredWidth, int availableWidth, int minTabWidth)
+{
+    int nTabs = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    int shrinkage = desiredWidth - availableWidth;
+    int extra = 0;
+    int i;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < nTabs; ++i) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr,i);
+	int shrink = (shrinkage/nTabs) + (i < (shrinkage%nTabs)) + extra;
+	int shrinkability = MAX(0, tab->width - minTabWidth);
+	int delta = MIN(shrinkability, shrink);
+	tab->width -= delta;
+	extra = shrink - delta;
+    }
+}
+
+/* PlaceTabs --
+ * 	Compute all tab parcels.
+ */
+static void PlaceTabs(
+    Notebook *nb, Ttk_Box tabrowBox, Ttk_PositionSpec tabPlacement)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout tabLayout = nb->notebook.tabLayout;
+    int nTabs = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    int i;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < nTabs; ++i) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, i);
+	Ttk_State tabState = TabState(nb, i);
+
+	if (tab->state != TAB_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+	    Ttk_Padding expand = Ttk_UniformPadding(0);
+	    Tcl_Obj *expandObj = Ttk_QueryOption(tabLayout,"-expand",tabState);
+
+	    if (expandObj) {
+		Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(NULL, expandObj, &expand);
+	    }
+
+	    tab->parcel =
+		Ttk_ExpandBox(
+		    Ttk_PositionBox(&tabrowBox,
+			tab->width, tab->height, tabPlacement),
+		    expand);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/* NotebookDoLayout --
+ *	Computes notebook layout and places tabs.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Sets clientArea, used to place slave panes.
+ */
+static void NotebookDoLayout(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    Tk_Window nbwin = nb->core.tkwin;
+    Ttk_Box cavity = Ttk_WinBox(nbwin);
+    int tabrowWidth = 0, tabrowHeight = 0;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *clientNode = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(nb->core.layout, "client");
+    Ttk_Box tabrowBox;
+    NotebookStyle nbstyle;
+
+    NotebookStyleOptions(nb, &nbstyle);
+
+    /* Notebook internal padding:
+     */
+    cavity = Ttk_PadBox(cavity, nbstyle.padding);
+
+    /* Layout for notebook background (base layout):
+     */
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(nb->core.layout, nb->core.state, Ttk_WinBox(nbwin));
+
+    /* Place tabs:
+     */
+    TabrowSize(nb, nbstyle.tabOrient, &tabrowWidth, &tabrowHeight);
+    tabrowBox = Ttk_PadBox(
+		    Ttk_PositionBox(&cavity,
+			tabrowWidth + Ttk_PaddingWidth(nbstyle.tabMargins),
+			tabrowHeight + Ttk_PaddingHeight(nbstyle.tabMargins),
+			nbstyle.tabPosition),
+		    nbstyle.tabMargins);
+
+    if (tabrowWidth > tabrowBox.width) {
+	SqueezeTabs(nb, tabrowWidth, tabrowBox.width, nbstyle.minTabWidth);
+    }
+    PlaceTabs(nb, tabrowBox, nbstyle.tabPlacement);
+
+    /* Layout for client area frame:
+     */
+    if (clientNode) {
+	Ttk_PlaceLayoutNode(nb->core.layout, clientNode, cavity);
+	cavity = Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel(nb->core.layout, clientNode);
+    }
+
+    if (cavity.height <= 0) cavity.height = 1;
+    if (cavity.width <= 0) cavity.width = 1;
+
+    nb->notebook.clientArea = cavity;
+}
+
+/*
+ * NotebookPlaceSlave --
+ * 	Set the position and size of a child widget
+ * 	based on the current client area and slave options:
+ */
+static void NotebookPlaceSlave(Notebook *nb, int slaveIndex)
+{
+    Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, slaveIndex);
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(nb->notebook.mgr, slaveIndex);
+    Ttk_Box slaveBox =
+	Ttk_StickBox(Ttk_PadBox(nb->notebook.clientArea, tab->padding),
+	    Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow), Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow),tab->sticky);
+
+    Ttk_PlaceSlave(nb->notebook.mgr, slaveIndex,
+	slaveBox.x, slaveBox.y, slaveBox.width, slaveBox.height);
+}
+
+/* NotebookPlaceSlaves --
+ * 	Geometry manager hook.
+ */
+static void NotebookPlaceSlaves(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    int currentIndex = nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    if (currentIndex >= 0) {
+	NotebookDoLayout(nb);
+	NotebookPlaceSlave(nb, currentIndex);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * SelectTab(nb, index) --
+ * 	Change the currently-selected tab.
+ */
+static void SelectTab(Notebook *nb, int index)
+{
+    Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr,index);
+    int currentIndex = nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+
+    if (index == currentIndex) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (TabState(nb, index) & TTK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /* Unhide the tab if it is currently hidden and being selected.
+     */
+    if (tab->state == TAB_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+	tab->state = TAB_STATE_NORMAL;
+    }
+
+    if (currentIndex >= 0) {
+	Ttk_UnmapSlave(nb->notebook.mgr, currentIndex);
+    }
+
+    NotebookPlaceSlave(nb, index);
+
+    nb->notebook.currentIndex = index;
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+
+    SendVirtualEvent(nb->core.tkwin, "NotebookTabChanged");
+}
+
+/* NextTab --
+ * 	Returns the index of the next tab after the specified tab
+ * 	in the normal state (e.g., not hidden or disabled),
+ * 	or -1 if all tabs are disabled or hidden.
+ */
+static int NextTab(Notebook *nb, int index)
+{
+    int nTabs = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    int nextIndex;
+
+    /* Scan forward for following usable tab:
+     */
+    for (nextIndex = index + 1; nextIndex < nTabs; ++nextIndex) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, nextIndex);
+	if (tab->state == TAB_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    return nextIndex;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Not found -- scan backwards.
+     */
+    for (nextIndex = index - 1; nextIndex >= 0; --nextIndex) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, nextIndex);
+	if (tab->state == TAB_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    return nextIndex;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Still nothing.  Give up.
+     */
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/* SelectNearestTab --
+ * 	Handles the case where the current tab is forgotten, hidden,
+ * 	or destroyed. Select the next available tab; or, if there is none,
+ * 	leaves all tabs unselected.
+ */
+static void SelectNearestTab(Notebook *nb)
+{
+    int nextIndex = NextTab(nb, nb->notebook.currentIndex);
+
+    if (nextIndex >= 0) {
+	SelectTab(nb, nextIndex);
+    } else {
+	/* No available tabs -- unmap current one.
+	 * ASSERT: this is safe to do even when the slave is being destroyed.
+	 */
+	if (nb->notebook.currentIndex >= 0) {
+	    Ttk_UnmapSlave(nb->notebook.mgr, nb->notebook.currentIndex);
+	    SendVirtualEvent(nb->core.tkwin, "NotebookTabChanged");
+	}
+	nb->notebook.currentIndex = -1;
+    }
+}
+
+/* TabAdded -- GM SlaveAdded hook.
+ */
+static void TabAdded(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int slaveIndex) { /* No-op */ }
+
+/* TabRemoved -- GM SlaveRemoved hook.
+ * 	Select the next tab if the current one is being removed.
+ * 	Adjust currentIndex to account for removed slave if needed.
+ */
+static void TabRemoved(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int index)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = mgr->managerData;
+
+    if (index == nb->notebook.currentIndex) {
+	SelectNearestTab(nb);
+    }
+
+    if (index < nb->notebook.currentIndex) {
+	--nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    }
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+}
+
+/* TabConfigured -- GM slaveConfigured hook.
+ */
+static int TabConfigured(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Manager *mgr, Ttk_Slave *slave, unsigned mask)
+{
+    Tab *tab = slave->slaveData;
+    Ttk_Sticky sticky = tab->sticky;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = mgr->masterWindow;
+
+    /* Check options:
+     * @@@ TODO: validate -image option with GetImageList()
+     */
+    if (Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(interp, tab->stickyObj, &sticky) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(interp,tkwin,tab->paddingObj,&tab->padding)
+	!= TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tab->sticky = sticky;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static Ttk_ManagerSpec NotebookManagerSpec =
+{
+    { "notebook", Ttk_GeometryRequestProc, Ttk_LostSlaveProc },
+    PaneOptionSpecs, sizeof(Tab),
+
+    NotebookSize,
+    NotebookPlaceSlaves,
+    TabAdded,
+    TabRemoved,
+    TabConfigured
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Event handlers.
+ */
+
+/* NotebookEventHandler --
+ * 	Tracks the active tab.
+ */
+static const int NotebookEventMask
+    = StructureNotifyMask
+    | PointerMotionMask
+    | LeaveWindowMask
+    ;
+static void NotebookEventHandler(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = clientData;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) { /* Remove self */
+	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(nb->core.tkwin,
+	    NotebookEventMask, NotebookEventHandler, clientData);
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == MotionNotify) {
+	int index = IdentifyTab(nb, eventPtr->xmotion.x, eventPtr->xmotion.y);
+	ActivateTab(nb, index);
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify) {
+	ActivateTab(nb, -1);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utilities.
+ */
+
+/* FindTabIndex --
+ *	Find the index of the specified tab.
+ *	Tab identifiers are one of:
+ *
+ *	+ positional specifications @x,y,
+ *	+ "current",
+ *	+ numeric indices [0..nTabs],
+ *	+ slave window names
+ *
+ *	Stores index of specified tab in *index_rtn, -1 if not found.
+ *
+ *	Returns TCL_ERROR and leaves an error message in interp->result
+ *	if the tab identifier was incorrect.
+ *
+ *	See also: GetTabIndex.
+ */
+static int FindTabIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Notebook *nb, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *index_rtn)
+{
+    const char *string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
+    int x, y;
+
+    *index_rtn = -1;
+
+    /* Check for @x,y ...
+     */
+    if (string[0] == '@' && sscanf(string, "@%d,%d",&x,&y) == 2) {
+	*index_rtn = IdentifyTab(nb, x, y);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* ... or "current" ...
+     */
+    if (!strcmp(string, "current")) {
+	*index_rtn = nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* ... or integer index or slave window name:
+     */
+    if (Ttk_GetSlaveFromObj(
+	    interp, nb->notebook.mgr, objPtr, index_rtn) != NULL)
+    {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* Nothing matched; Ttk_GetSlaveFromObj will have left error message.
+     */
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* GetTabIndex --
+ * 	Get the index of an existing tab.
+ * 	Tab identifiers are as per FindTabIndex.
+ * 	Returns TCL_ERROR if the tab does not exist.
+ */
+static int GetTabIndex(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Notebook *nb, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *index_rtn)
+{
+    int status = FindTabIndex(interp, nb, objPtr, index_rtn);
+
+    if (status == TCL_OK && *index_rtn < 0) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	    "tab '", Tcl_GetString(objPtr), "' not found",
+	    NULL);
+	status = TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget command routines.
+ */
+
+/* $nb add window ?options ... ?
+ */
+static int NotebookAddCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    int index = nb->notebook.mgr->nSlaves;
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow;
+
+    if (objc <= 2 || objc % 2 != 1) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?options...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    slaveWindow = Tk_NameToWindow(interp,Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),nb->core.tkwin);
+    if (!slaveWindow) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Create and initialize new tab:
+     */
+    if (TCL_OK != Ttk_AddSlave(
+	    interp, nb->notebook.mgr, slaveWindow, index, objc-3,objv+3) )
+    {
+    	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* If no tab is currently selected (or if this is the first tab),
+     * select this one:
+     */
+    if (nb->notebook.currentIndex < 0) {
+	SelectTab(nb, index);
+    }
+
+    TtkResizeWidget(&nb->core);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $nb insert $index $tab ?options...?
+ * 	Insert new tab, or move existing one.
+ */
+static int NotebookInsertCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    int current = nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    int srcIndex, destIndex;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (objc < 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "index slave ?options...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "end")) {
+	destIndex = Ttk_NumberSlaves(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    } else if (!Ttk_GetSlaveFromObj(
+		interp, nb->notebook.mgr, objv[2], &destIndex)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (!Ttk_GetSlaveFromObj(interp, nb->notebook.mgr, objv[3], &srcIndex)) {
+	/* Try adding new slave:
+	 */
+	Tk_Window slaveWindow =
+	    Tk_NameToWindow(interp,Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),nb->core.tkwin);
+	if (!slaveWindow) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (Ttk_AddSlave(interp, nb->notebook.mgr, slaveWindow,
+		destIndex, objc - 4, objv + 4) != TCL_OK)
+	{
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (nb->notebook.currentIndex <= destIndex) {
+	    ++nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+	}
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* else - move existing slave: */
+
+    if (destIndex >= nb->notebook.mgr->nSlaves) {
+	destIndex  = nb->notebook.mgr->nSlaves - 1;
+    }
+    Ttk_ReorderSlave(nb->notebook.mgr, srcIndex, destIndex);
+
+    /* Adjust internal indexes:
+     */
+    nb->notebook.activeIndex = -1;
+    if (current == srcIndex) {
+	nb->notebook.currentIndex = destIndex;
+    } else if (destIndex <= current && current < srcIndex) {
+	++nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    } else if (srcIndex < current && current <= destIndex) {
+	--nb->notebook.currentIndex;
+    }
+
+    if (objc > 4) {
+	status = Ttk_ConfigureSlave(interp, nb->notebook.mgr,
+	     nb->notebook.mgr->slaves[destIndex], objc-4,objv+4);
+    }
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&nb->core);
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* $nb forget $item --
+ * 	Removes the selected tab.
+ */
+static int NotebookForgetCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    int index;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tab");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (GetTabIndex(interp, nb, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    Ttk_ForgetSlave(nb->notebook.mgr, index);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $nb identify $x $y --
+ * 	Returns name of tab element at $x,$y; empty string if none.
+ */
+static int NotebookIdentifyCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *node = NULL;
+    int x, y, tabIndex;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (   Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tabIndex = IdentifyTab(nb, x, y);
+    if (tabIndex >= 0) {
+	Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, tabIndex);
+	Ttk_State state = TabState(nb, tabIndex);
+	Ttk_Layout tabLayout = nb->notebook.tabLayout;
+
+	Ttk_RebindSublayout(tabLayout, tab);
+	Ttk_PlaceLayout(tabLayout, state, tab->parcel);
+
+	node = Ttk_LayoutIdentify(tabLayout, x, y); 
+    }
+
+    if (node) {
+	const char *elementName = Ttk_LayoutNodeName(node);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,Tcl_NewStringObj(elementName,-1));
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $nb index $item --
+ * 	Returns the integer index of the tab specified by $item,
+ * 	the empty string if $item does not identify a tab.
+ *	See above for valid item formats.
+ */
+static int NotebookIndexCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    int index, status;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tab");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Special-case for "end":
+     */
+    if (!strcmp("end", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]))) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(nb->notebook.mgr->nSlaves));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    status = FindTabIndex(interp, nb, objv[2], &index);
+    if (status == TCL_OK && index >= 0) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+    }
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* $nb select ?$item? --
+ * 	Select the specified tab, or return the widget path of
+ * 	the currently-selected pane.
+ */
+static int NotebookSelectCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	if (nb->notebook.currentIndex >= 0) {
+	    Tk_Window pane = Ttk_SlaveWindow(
+		nb->notebook.mgr, nb->notebook.currentIndex);
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(pane), -1));
+	}
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 3) {
+	int index, status = GetTabIndex(interp, nb, objv[2], &index);
+	if (status == TCL_OK) {
+	    SelectTab(nb, index);
+	}
+	return status;
+    } /*else*/
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?tab?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* $nb tabs --
+ * 	Return list of tabs.
+ */
+static int NotebookTabsCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = nb->notebook.mgr;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc != 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    result = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+    for (i = 0; i < mgr->nSlaves; ++i) {
+	const char *pathName = Tk_PathName(Ttk_SlaveWindow(mgr,i));
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, Tcl_NewStringObj(pathName,-1));
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $nb tab $tab ?-option ?value -option value...??
+ */
+static int NotebookTabCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = nb->notebook.mgr;
+    int index;
+    Ttk_Slave *slave;
+    Tab *tab;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "tab ?-option ?value??...");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (GetTabIndex(interp, nb, objv[2], &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    slave = mgr->slaves[index];
+    tab = Ttk_SlaveData(mgr, index);
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	return EnumerateOptions(interp, tab,
+	    PaneOptionSpecs, nb->notebook.paneOptionTable, nb->core.tkwin);
+    } else if (objc == 4) {
+	return GetOptionValue(interp, tab, objv[3],
+	    nb->notebook.paneOptionTable, nb->core.tkwin);
+    } /* else */
+
+    if (Ttk_ConfigureSlave(interp, mgr, slave, objc - 3,objv + 3) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* If the current tab has become disabled or hidden,
+     * select the next nondisabled, unhidden one:
+     */
+    if (index == nb->notebook.currentIndex && tab->state != TAB_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	SelectNearestTab(nb);
+    }
+
+    TtkResizeWidget(&nb->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* Subcommand table:
+ */
+static WidgetCommandSpec NotebookCommands[] =
+{
+    { "add",    	NotebookAddCommand },
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "forget",		NotebookForgetCommand },
+    { "identify",	NotebookIdentifyCommand },
+    { "index",		NotebookIndexCommand },
+    { "insert",  	NotebookInsertCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "select",		NotebookSelectCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "tab",   		NotebookTabCommand },
+    { "tabs",   	NotebookTabsCommand },
+    { 0,0 }
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget class hooks.
+ */
+
+static int NotebookInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+
+    nb->notebook.mgr = Ttk_CreateManager(
+	    &NotebookManagerSpec, recordPtr, nb->core.tkwin);
+
+    nb->notebook.tabOptionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp,TabOptionSpecs);
+    nb->notebook.paneOptionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp,PaneOptionSpecs);
+
+    nb->notebook.currentIndex = -1;
+    nb->notebook.activeIndex = -1;
+    nb->notebook.tabLayout = 0;
+
+    nb->notebook.clientArea = Ttk_MakeBox(0,0,1,1);
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(
+	nb->core.tkwin, NotebookEventMask, NotebookEventHandler, recordPtr);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static void NotebookCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+
+    Ttk_DeleteManager(nb->notebook.mgr);
+    Tk_DeleteOptionTable(nb->notebook.tabOptionTable);
+    Tk_DeleteOptionTable(nb->notebook.paneOptionTable);
+
+    if (nb->notebook.tabLayout)
+	Ttk_FreeLayout(nb->notebook.tabLayout);
+}
+
+static int NotebookConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData, int mask)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = clientData;
+
+    /*
+     * Error-checks:
+     */
+    if (nb->notebook.paddingObj) {
+	/* Check for valid -padding: */
+	Ttk_Padding unused;
+	if (Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(
+		    interp, nb->core.tkwin, nb->notebook.paddingObj, &unused)
+		!= TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return CoreConfigure(interp, clientData, mask);
+}
+
+/* NotebookGetLayout  --
+ * 	GetLayout widget hook.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout NotebookGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Layout notebookLayout = WidgetGetLayout(interp, theme, recordPtr);
+    Ttk_Layout tabLayout;
+
+    if (!notebookLayout) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    tabLayout = Ttk_CreateSublayout(
+	interp, theme, notebookLayout, ".Tab",	nb->notebook.tabOptionTable);
+
+    if (tabLayout) {
+	if (nb->notebook.tabLayout) {
+	    Ttk_FreeLayout(nb->notebook.tabLayout);
+	}
+	nb->notebook.tabLayout = tabLayout;
+    }
+
+    return notebookLayout;
+}
+
+/* +++ Display routines.
+ */
+
+static void DisplayTab(Notebook *nb, int index, Drawable d)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout tabLayout = nb->notebook.tabLayout;
+    Tab *tab = Ttk_SlaveData(nb->notebook.mgr, index);
+    Ttk_State state = TabState(nb, index);
+
+    if (tab->state != TAB_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+	Ttk_RebindSublayout(tabLayout, tab);
+	Ttk_PlaceLayout(tabLayout, state, tab->parcel);
+	Ttk_DrawLayout(tabLayout, state, d);
+    }
+}
+
+static void NotebookDisplay(void *clientData, Drawable d)
+{
+    Notebook *nb = clientData;
+    int index;
+
+    /* Draw notebook background (base layout):
+     */
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(nb->core.layout, nb->core.state, d);
+
+    /* Draw tabs from left to right, but draw the current tab last
+     * so it will overwrite its neighbors.
+     */
+    for (index = 0; index < nb->notebook.mgr->nSlaves; ++index) {
+	if (index != nb->notebook.currentIndex) {
+	    DisplayTab(nb, index, d);
+	}
+    }
+    if (nb->notebook.currentIndex >= 0) {
+	DisplayTab(nb, nb->notebook.currentIndex, d);
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget specification and layout definitions.
+ */
+
+static WidgetSpec NotebookWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TNotebook",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Notebook),		/* recordSize */
+    NotebookOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    NotebookCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    NotebookInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    NotebookCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    NotebookConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    NullPostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    NotebookGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    NotebookSize,		/* geometryProc */
+    NotebookDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    NotebookDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(NotebookLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Notebook.client", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(TabLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Notebook.tab", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_GROUP("Notebook.padding", TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_GROUP("Notebook.focus", TTK_PACK_TOP|TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+		TTK_NODE("Notebook.label", TTK_PACK_TOP))))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+int Notebook_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "Tab", TabLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "TNotebook", NotebookLayout);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::notebook", &NotebookWidgetSpec);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkPanedwindow.c b/generic/ttk/ttkPanedwindow.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b55e50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkPanedwindow.c
@@ -0,0 +1,809 @@
+/* $Id: ttkPanedwindow.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2005, Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: ttk::panedwindow widget.
+ *
+ * TODO: track active/pressed sash.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkManager.h"
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+#define MIN_SASH_THICKNESS 5
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout algorithm.
+ *
+ * (pos=x/y, size=width/height, depending on -orient=horizontal/vertical)
+ *
+ * Each pane carries two pieces of state: the request size and the
+ * position of the following sash.  (The final pane has no sash,
+ * its sash position is used as a sentinel value).
+ *
+ * Pane geometry is determined by the sash positions.
+ * When resizing, sash positions are computed from the request sizes,
+ * the available space, and pane weights (see ComputePositions()).
+ * This ensures continuous resize behavior (that is: changing
+ * the size by X pixels then changing the size by Y pixels
+ * gives the same result as changing the size by X+Y pixels
+ * in one step).
+ *
+ * The request size is initially set to the slave window's requested size.
+ * When the user drags a sash, each pane's request size is set to its
+ * actual size.  This ensures that panes "stay put" on the next resize.
+ *
+ * If reqSize == 0, use 0 for the weight as well.  This ensures that
+ * "collapsed" panes stay collapsed during a resize, regardless of
+ * their nominal -weight.
+ *
+ * +++ Invariants.
+ *
+ * #sash 		=  #pane - 1
+ * pos(pane[0]) 	=  0
+ * pos(sash[i]) 	=  pos(pane[i]) + size(pane[i]), 0 <= i <= #sash
+ * pos(pane[i+1]) 	=  pos(sash[i]) + size(sash[i]), 0 <= i <  #sash
+ * pos(sash[#sash])	=  size(pw)   // sentinel value, constraint
+ *
+ * size(pw) 		=  sum(size(pane(0..#pane))) + sum(size(sash(0..#sash)))
+ * size(pane[i]) 	>= 0,  for 0 <= i < #pane
+ * size(sash[i]) 	>= 0,  for 0 <= i < #sash
+ * ==> pos(pane[i]) <= pos(sash[i]) <= pos(pane[i+1]), for 0 <= i < #sash
+ *
+ * Assumption: all sashes are the same size.
+ */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget record.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj 	*orientObj;
+    int 	orient;
+    Ttk_Manager	*mgr;
+    Ttk_Layout	sashLayout;
+    int 	sashThickness;
+} PanedPart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore	core;
+    PanedPart	paned;
+} Paned;
+
+/* @@@ NOTE: -orient is readonly 'cause dynamic oriention changes NYI
+ */
+static Tk_OptionSpec PanedOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient", "vertical",
+	Tk_Offset(Paned,paned.orientObj), Tk_Offset(Paned,paned.orient),
+	0,(ClientData)TTKOrientStrings,READONLY_OPTION|STYLE_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(CoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Slave pane record.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    int 	reqSize;		/* Pane request size */
+    int 	sashPos;		/* Folowing sash position */
+    int 	weight; 		/* Pane -weight, for resizing */
+} Pane;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec PaneOptionSpecs[] = {
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-weight", "weight", "Weight", "0",
+	-1,Tk_Offset(Pane,weight), 0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0,0,0}
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout algorithm.
+ */
+
+/* ShoveUp --
+ * 	Place sash i at specified position, recursively shoving
+ * 	previous sashes upwards as needed, until hitting the top
+ * 	of the window.  If that happens, shove back down.
+ *
+ * 	Returns: final position of sash i.
+ */
+
+static int ShoveUp(Paned *pw, int i, int pos)
+{
+    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, i);
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+
+    if (i == 0) {
+	if (pos < 0)
+	    pos = 0;
+    } else {
+	Pane *prevPane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, i-1);
+	if (pos < prevPane->sashPos + sashThickness)
+	    pos = ShoveUp(pw, i-1, pos - sashThickness) + sashThickness;
+    }
+    return pane->sashPos = pos;
+}
+
+/* ShoveDown --
+ * 	Same as ShoveUp, but going in the opposite direction
+ * 	and stopping at the sentinel sash.
+ */
+static int ShoveDown(Paned *pw, int i, int pos)
+{
+    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr,i);
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+
+    if (i == pw->paned.mgr->nSlaves - 1) {
+	pos = pane->sashPos; /* Sentinel value == master window size */
+    } else {
+	Pane *nextPane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr,i+1);
+	if (pos + sashThickness > nextPane->sashPos)
+	    pos = ShoveDown(pw, i+1, pos + sashThickness) - sashThickness;
+    }
+    return pane->sashPos = pos;
+}
+
+/* PanedSize --
+ * 	Compute the requested size of the paned widget.
+ * 	Used as both the WidgetSpec sizeProc and the ManagerSpec sizeProc.
+ */
+static int PanedSize(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int nPanes = Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr);
+    int nSashes = nPanes - 1;
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+    int width = 0, height = 0;
+    int index;
+
+    if (pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	for (index = 0; index < nPanes; ++index) {
+	    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	    Tk_Window slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+
+	    if (height < Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow))
+		height = Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow);
+	    width += pane->reqSize;
+	}
+	width += nSashes * sashThickness;
+    } else {
+	for (index = 0; index < nPanes; ++index) {
+	    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	    Tk_Window slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+
+	    if (width < Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow))
+		width = Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow);
+	    height += pane->reqSize;
+	}
+	height += nSashes * sashThickness;
+    }
+
+    *widthPtr = width;
+    *heightPtr = height;
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/* AdjustPanes --
+ * 	Set pane request sizes from sash positions.
+ *
+ * NOTE:
+ * 	AdjustPanes followed by ComputePositions (called during relayout)
+ * 	will leave the sashes in the same place, as long as available size
+ * 	remains contant.
+ */
+static void AdjustPanes(Paned *pw)
+{
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+    int pos = 0;
+    int index;
+
+    for (index = 0; index < Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr); ++index) {
+	Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	int size = pane->sashPos - pos;
+	pane->reqSize = size >= 0 ? size : 0;
+	pos = pane->sashPos + sashThickness;
+    }
+}
+
+/* ComputePositions --
+ *	Set sash positions from pane request sizes and available space.
+ *
+ *	Allocate pane->reqSize pixels to each pane, and distribute
+ *	the difference = available size - requested size according
+ *	to pane->weight.
+ *
+ *	If there's still some left over, squeeze panes from the bottom up
+ *	(This can happen if all weights are zero, or if one or more panes
+ *	are too small to absorb the required shrinkage).
+ *
+ * Notes:
+ * 	This doesn't distribute the remainder pixels as evenly as it could
+ * 	when more than one pane has weight > 1.
+ */
+static void ComputePositions(Paned *pw)
+{
+    Ttk_Manager *mgr = pw->paned.mgr;
+    int nPanes = Ttk_NumberSlaves(mgr);
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+    int available
+	= pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL
+	? Tk_Width(pw->core.tkwin) : Tk_Height(pw->core.tkwin);
+    int reqSize = 0, totalWeight = 0;
+    int difference, delta, remainder, pos, i;
+
+    if (nPanes == 0)
+	return;
+
+    /* Compute total required size and total available weight:
+     */
+    for (i = 0; i < nPanes; ++i) {
+	Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(mgr, i);
+	reqSize += pane->reqSize;
+	totalWeight += pane->weight * (pane->reqSize != 0);
+    }
+
+    /* Compute difference to be redistributed:
+     */
+    difference = available - reqSize - sashThickness*(nPanes-1);
+    if (totalWeight != 0) {
+	delta = difference / totalWeight;
+	remainder = difference % totalWeight;
+	if (remainder < 0) {
+	    --delta;
+	    remainder += totalWeight;
+	}
+    } else {
+	delta = remainder = 0;
+    }
+    /* ASSERT: 0 <= remainder < totalWeight */
+
+    /* Place sashes:
+     */
+    pos = 0;
+    for (i = 0; i < nPanes; ++i) {
+	Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(mgr, i);
+	int weight = pane->weight * (pane->reqSize != 0);
+	int size = pane->reqSize + delta * weight;
+
+	if (weight > remainder)
+	    weight = remainder;
+	remainder -= weight;
+	size += weight;
+
+	if (size < 0)
+	    size = 0;
+
+	pane->sashPos = (pos += size);
+	pos += sashThickness;
+    }
+
+    /* Handle emergency shrink/emergency stretch:
+     * Set sentinel sash position to end of widget,
+     * shove preceding sashes up.
+     */
+    ShoveUp(pw, nPanes - 1, available);
+}
+
+/* PlacePanes --
+ *	Places slave panes based on sash positions.
+ */
+static void PlacePanes(Paned *pw)
+{
+    int horizontal = pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    int width = Tk_Width(pw->core.tkwin), height = Tk_Height(pw->core.tkwin);
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+    int pos = 0;
+    int index;
+
+    for (index = 0; index < Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr); ++index) {
+	Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	int size = pane->sashPos - pos;
+
+	if (size > 0) {
+	    if (horizontal) {
+		Ttk_PlaceSlave(pw->paned.mgr, index, pos, 0, size, height);
+	    } else {
+		Ttk_PlaceSlave(pw->paned.mgr, index, 0, pos, width, size);
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    Ttk_UnmapSlave(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	}
+
+	pos = pane->sashPos + sashThickness;
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Manager specification.
+ */
+
+static void PanedPlaceSlaves(void *managerData)
+{
+    Paned *pw = managerData;
+    ComputePositions(pw);
+    PlacePanes(pw);
+}
+
+static void PaneAdded(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int index)
+{
+    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(mgr, index);
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow = Ttk_SlaveWindow(mgr, index);
+    Paned *pw = mgr->managerData;
+
+    /* See also: PanedGeometryRequestProc */
+    pane->reqSize
+	= pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL
+	? Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow) : Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow);
+}
+
+static void PaneRemoved(Ttk_Manager *mgr, int i) { /*no-op*/ }
+
+static int PaneConfigured(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Manager *mgr, Ttk_Slave *slave, unsigned mask)
+{
+    Pane *pane = slave->slaveData;
+    if (pane->weight < 0) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-weight must be nonnegative", NULL);
+	pane->weight = 0;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* PanedGeometryRequestProc --
+ * 	Update pane request size, but only if slave is currently unmapped.
+ * 	Geometry requests from mapped slaves are not directly honored,
+ * 	in order to avoid unexpected pane resizes (esp. while the
+ * 	user is dragging a sash [#1325286]).
+ */
+
+static void PanedGeometryRequestProc(
+    ClientData clientData, Tk_Window slaveWindow)
+{
+    Ttk_Slave *slave = clientData;
+    Pane *pane = slave->slaveData;
+    Paned *pw = slave->manager->managerData;
+
+    if (!Tk_IsMapped(slaveWindow)) {
+	pane->reqSize
+	    = pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL
+	    ? Tk_ReqWidth(slaveWindow) : Tk_ReqHeight(slaveWindow);
+    }
+
+    /* Continue with default GeometryRequestProc:
+     */
+    Ttk_GeometryRequestProc(clientData, slaveWindow);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ManagerSpec PanedManagerSpec = {
+    { "paned", PanedGeometryRequestProc, Ttk_LostSlaveProc },
+    PaneOptionSpecs, sizeof(Pane),
+    PanedSize,
+    PanedPlaceSlaves,
+    PaneAdded,
+    PaneRemoved,
+    PaneConfigured,
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Event handler.
+ *
+ * Tk does not execute binding scripts for <Leave> events when
+ * the pointer crosses from a parent to a child.  This widget
+ * needs to know when that happens, though, so it can reset
+ * the cursor.
+ *
+ * This event handler generates an <<EnteredChild>> virtual event
+ * on LeaveNotify/NotifyInferior.
+ */
+
+static const unsigned PanedEventMask = LeaveWindowMask;
+static void PanedEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    if (   eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify
+	&& eventPtr->xcrossing.detail == NotifyInferior)
+    {
+	SendVirtualEvent(corePtr->tkwin, "EnteredChild");
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization and cleanup hooks.
+ */
+
+static int PanedInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(pw->core.tkwin,
+	PanedEventMask, PanedEventProc, recordPtr);
+    pw->paned.mgr = Ttk_CreateManager(&PanedManagerSpec, pw, pw->core.tkwin);
+    pw->paned.sashLayout = 0;
+    pw->paned.sashThickness = 1;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static void PanedCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+
+    if (pw->paned.sashLayout)
+	Ttk_FreeLayout(pw->paned.sashLayout);
+    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(pw->core.tkwin,
+	PanedEventMask, PanedEventProc, recordPtr);
+    Ttk_DeleteManager(pw->paned.mgr);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout management hooks.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout PanedGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme themePtr, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Layout panedLayout = WidgetGetLayout(interp, themePtr, recordPtr);
+    int horizontal = pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    const char *layoutName = horizontal ? ".Vertical.Sash" : ".Horizontal.Sash";
+    Ttk_Layout sashLayout = Ttk_CreateSublayout(interp, themePtr, panedLayout,
+	    layoutName, pw->core.optionTable);
+
+    if (sashLayout) {
+	int sashWidth, sashHeight;
+
+	if (pw->paned.sashLayout)
+	    Ttk_FreeLayout(pw->paned.sashLayout);
+	pw->paned.sashLayout = sashLayout;
+
+	Ttk_LayoutSize(sashLayout, 0, &sashWidth, &sashHeight);
+
+	pw->paned.sashThickness = horizontal ? sashWidth : sashHeight;
+
+	/* Sanity-check:
+	 */
+	if (pw->paned.sashThickness < MIN_SASH_THICKNESS)
+	    pw->paned.sashThickness = MIN_SASH_THICKNESS;
+
+	Ttk_ManagerSizeChanged(pw->paned.mgr);
+    }
+
+    return panedLayout;
+}
+
+static void PanedDisplay(void *recordPtr, Drawable d)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int horizontal = pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    Ttk_Layout sashLayout = pw->paned.sashLayout;
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+    Ttk_State state = pw->core.state;
+    int nPanes = Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr);
+    int i;
+
+    WidgetDisplay(recordPtr, d);
+
+    /* Draw sashes:
+     */
+    if (horizontal) {
+	int height = Tk_Height(pw->core.tkwin);
+	for (i = 0; i < nPanes; ++i) {
+	    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, i);
+	    Ttk_PlaceLayout(sashLayout, state,
+		Ttk_MakeBox(pane->sashPos, 0, sashThickness, height));
+	    Ttk_DrawLayout(sashLayout, state, d);
+	}
+    } else {
+	int width = Tk_Width(pw->core.tkwin);
+	for (i = 0; i < nPanes; ++i) {
+	    Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, i);
+	    Ttk_PlaceLayout(sashLayout, state,
+		Ttk_MakeBox(0, pane->sashPos, width, sashThickness));
+	    Ttk_DrawLayout(sashLayout, state, d);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands.
+ */
+
+/* $pw add window [ options ... ]
+ */
+static int PanedAddCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    slaveWindow = Tk_NameToWindow(
+	interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), pw->core.tkwin);
+
+    if (!slaveWindow) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    return Ttk_AddSlave(interp, pw->paned.mgr, slaveWindow,
+	    Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr), objc - 3, objv + 3);
+}
+
+/* $pw insert $index $slave ?options...?
+ * 	Insert new slave, or move existing one.
+ */
+static int PanedInsertCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int srcIndex, destIndex;
+    Tk_Window slaveWindow;
+
+    if (objc < 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "index slave ?options...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    slaveWindow = Tk_NameToWindow(
+	interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), pw->core.tkwin);
+    if (!slaveWindow) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "end")) {
+	destIndex = Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr);
+    } else if (!Ttk_GetSlaveFromObj(interp,pw->paned.mgr,objv[2],&destIndex)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    srcIndex = Ttk_SlaveIndex(pw->paned.mgr, slaveWindow);
+    if (srcIndex < 0) { /* New slave: */
+	return Ttk_AddSlave(interp, pw->paned.mgr, slaveWindow,
+		destIndex, objc - 4, objv + 4);
+    } /* else -- move existing slave: */
+
+    if (destIndex >= pw->paned.mgr->nSlaves)
+	destIndex  = pw->paned.mgr->nSlaves - 1;
+    Ttk_ReorderSlave(pw->paned.mgr, srcIndex, destIndex);
+
+    return objc == 4 ? TCL_OK :
+	Ttk_ConfigureSlave(interp, pw->paned.mgr,
+	     pw->paned.mgr->slaves[destIndex], objc-4,objv+4);
+}
+
+/* $pw forget $pane
+ */
+static int PanedForgetCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int paneIndex;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "pane");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (!Ttk_GetSlaveFromObj(interp, pw->paned.mgr, objv[2], &paneIndex)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Ttk_ForgetSlave(pw->paned.mgr, paneIndex);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $pw identify $x $y
+ * @@@ TODO: implement as documented, or change documentation.
+ */
+static int PanedIdentifyCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int sashThickness = pw->paned.sashThickness;
+    int x, y, pos;
+    int index;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "x y");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (   Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK
+    ) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    pos = pw->paned.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL ? x : y;
+    for (index = 0; index < pw->paned.mgr->nSlaves - 1; ++index) {
+	Pane *pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, index);
+	if (pane->sashPos <= pos && pos <= pane->sashPos + sashThickness) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;	/* empty list */
+}
+
+/* $pw pane $pane ?-option ?value -option value ...??
+ * 	Query/modify pane options.
+ */
+static int PanedPaneCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int paneIndex;
+    Ttk_Slave *slave;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "pane ?-option value...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    slave = Ttk_GetSlaveFromObj(interp,pw->paned.mgr,objv[2],&paneIndex);
+    if (!slave) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    switch (objc) {
+	case 3:
+	    return EnumerateOptions(interp, slave->slaveData, PaneOptionSpecs,
+			pw->paned.mgr->slaveOptionTable, slave->slaveWindow);
+	case 4:
+	    return GetOptionValue(interp, slave->slaveData,objv[3],
+			pw->paned.mgr->slaveOptionTable, slave->slaveWindow);
+	default:
+	    return Ttk_ConfigureSlave(
+		    interp, pw->paned.mgr, slave, objc-3,objv+3);
+    }
+}
+
+/* $pw sashpos $index ?$newpos?
+ * 	Query or modify sash position.
+ */
+static int PanedSashposCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Paned *pw = recordPtr;
+    int sashIndex, position = -1;
+    Pane *pane;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "index ?newpos?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &sashIndex) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (sashIndex < 0 || sashIndex >= Ttk_NumberSlaves(pw->paned.mgr) - 1) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	    "sash index ", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), " out of range",
+	    NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    pane = Ttk_SlaveData(pw->paned.mgr, sashIndex);
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(pane->sashPos));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+    /* else -- set new sash position */
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &position) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (position < pane->sashPos) {
+	ShoveUp(pw, sashIndex, position);
+    } else {
+	ShoveDown(pw, sashIndex, position);
+    }
+
+    AdjustPanes(pw);
+    Ttk_ManagerLayoutChanged(pw->paned.mgr);
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(pane->sashPos));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec PanedCommands[] =
+{
+    { "add", 		PanedAddCommand },
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "forget", 	PanedForgetCommand },
+    { "identify", 	PanedIdentifyCommand },
+    { "insert", 	PanedInsertCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "pane",   	PanedPaneCommand },
+    { "sashpos",  	PanedSashposCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { 0,0 }
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget specification.
+ */
+
+static WidgetSpec PanedWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TPanedwindow",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Paned),		/* recordSize */
+    PanedOptionSpecs,		/* optionSpecs */
+    PanedCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    PanedInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    PanedCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    CoreConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    NullPostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    PanedGetLayout,		/* getLayoutProc */
+    PanedSize, 			/* sizeProc */
+    WidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    PanedDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Elements and layouts.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *thicknessObj;
+} SashElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SashElementOptions[] = {
+    { "-sashthickness", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	    Tk_Offset(SashElement,thicknessObj), "5" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void SashElementSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SashElement *sash = elementRecord;
+    int thickness = MIN_SASH_THICKNESS;
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, sash->thicknessObj, &thickness);
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = thickness;
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SashElementSpec = {
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SashElement),
+    SashElementOptions,
+    SashElementSize,
+    NullElementDraw
+};
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(PanedLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Paned.background", 0)	/* @@@ BUG: empty layouts don't work */
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(HorizontalSashLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Sash.hsash", TTK_FILL_X)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(VerticalSashLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Sash.vsash", TTK_FILL_Y)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Registration routine.
+ */
+void Paned_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::panedwindow", &PanedWidgetSpec);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, themePtr, "hsash", &SashElementSpec, 0);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, themePtr, "vsash", &SashElementSpec, 0);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "TPanedwindow", PanedLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "Horizontal.Sash", HorizontalSashLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr, "Vertical.Sash", VerticalSashLayout);
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkProgress.c b/generic/ttk/ttkProgress.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb1bc0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkProgress.c
@@ -0,0 +1,551 @@
+/* $Id: ttkProgress.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) Joe English, Pat Thoyts, Michael Kirkham
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: progress bar widget.
+ */
+
+#include <math.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget record:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_PROGRESSBAR_LENGTH "100"
+enum {
+    TTK_PROGRESSBAR_DETERMINATE, TTK_PROGRESSBAR_INDETERMINATE
+};
+static const char *ProgressbarModeStrings[] = {
+    "determinate", "indeterminate", NULL
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj 	*orientObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*lengthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*modeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*variableObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*maximumObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*valueObj;
+    Tcl_Obj 	*phaseObj;
+
+    int 	mode;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *variableTrace;	/* Trace handle for -variable option */
+    int 	period;			/* Animation period */
+    int 	maxPhase;		/* Max animation phase */
+    Tcl_TimerToken timer;		/* Animation timer */
+
+} ProgressbarPart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore 		core;
+    ProgressbarPart	progress;
+} Progressbar;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ProgressbarOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient",
+	"horizontal", Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.orientObj), -1,
+	0, (ClientData)TTKOrientStrings, STYLE_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-length", "length", "Length",
+        DEF_PROGRESSBAR_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.lengthObj), -1,
+	0, 0, GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-mode", "mode", "ProgressMode", "determinate",
+	Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.modeObj),
+	Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.mode),
+	0, (ClientData)ProgressbarModeStrings, 0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-maximum", "maximum", "Maximum",
+	"100", Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.maximumObj), -1,
+	0, 0, 0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.variableObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-value", "value", "Value",
+	"0.0", Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.valueObj), -1,
+	0, 0, 0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-phase", "phase", "Phase",
+	"0", Tk_Offset(Progressbar,progress.phaseObj), -1,
+	0, 0, 0 },
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(CoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Animation procedures:
+ */
+
+/* AnimationEnabled --
+ * 	Returns 1 if animation should be active, 0 otherwise.
+ */
+static int AnimationEnabled(Progressbar *pb)
+{
+    double maximum = 100, value = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.maximumObj, &maximum);
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.valueObj, &value);
+
+    return pb->progress.period > 0
+	&& value > 0.0
+	&& (   value < maximum
+	    || pb->progress.mode == TTK_PROGRESSBAR_INDETERMINATE);
+}
+
+/* AnimateProgressProc --
+ * 	Timer callback for progress bar animation.
+ * 	Increments the -phase option, redisplays the widget,
+ * 	and reschedules itself if animation still enabled.
+ */
+static void AnimateProgressProc(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = clientData;
+
+    pb->progress.timer = 0;
+
+    if (AnimationEnabled(pb)) {
+	int phase = 0;
+	Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.phaseObj, &phase);
+
+	/*
+	 * Update -phase:
+	 */
+	++phase;
+	if (pb->progress.maxPhase)
+	    phase %= pb->progress.maxPhase;
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(pb->progress.phaseObj);
+	pb->progress.phaseObj = Tcl_NewIntObj(phase);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(pb->progress.phaseObj);
+
+	/*
+	 * Reschedule:
+	 */
+	pb->progress.timer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(
+	    pb->progress.period, AnimateProgressProc, clientData);
+
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(&pb->core);
+    }
+}
+
+/* CheckAnimation --
+ * 	If animation is enabled and not scheduled, schedule it.
+ * 	If animation is disabled but scheduled, cancel it.
+ */
+static void CheckAnimation(Progressbar *pb)
+{
+    if (AnimationEnabled(pb)) {
+	if (pb->progress.timer == 0) {
+	    pb->progress.timer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(
+		pb->progress.period, AnimateProgressProc, (ClientData)pb);
+	}
+    } else {
+	if (pb->progress.timer != 0) {
+	    Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(pb->progress.timer);
+	    pb->progress.timer = 0;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Trace hook for progressbar -variable option:
+ */
+
+static void VariableChanged(void *recordPtr, const char *value)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *newValue;
+    double scratch;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&pb->core)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (!value) {
+	/* Linked variable is unset -- disable widget */
+	WidgetChangeState(&pb->core, TTK_STATE_DISABLED, 0);
+	return;
+    }
+    WidgetChangeState(&pb->core, 0, TTK_STATE_DISABLED);
+
+    newValue = Tcl_NewStringObj(value, -1);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(newValue);
+    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, newValue, &scratch) != TCL_OK) {
+	WidgetChangeState(&pb->core, TTK_STATE_INVALID, 0);
+	return;
+    }
+    WidgetChangeState(&pb->core, 0, TTK_STATE_INVALID);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(pb->progress.valueObj);
+    pb->progress.valueObj = newValue;
+
+    CheckAnimation(pb);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&pb->core);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget class methods:
+ */
+
+static int ProgressbarInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    pb->progress.variableTrace = 0;
+    pb->progress.timer = 0;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static void ProgressbarCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    if (pb->progress.variableTrace)
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(pb->progress.variableTrace);
+    if (pb->progress.timer)
+	Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(pb->progress.timer);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Configure hook:
+ *
+ * @@@ TODO: deal with [$pb configure -value ... -variable ...]
+ */
+static int ProgressbarConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *varName = pb->progress.variableObj;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = 0;
+
+    if (varName != NULL && *Tcl_GetString(varName) != '\0') {
+	vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(interp, varName, VariableChanged, recordPtr);
+	if (!vt) return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (CoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (vt) Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (pb->progress.variableTrace) {
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(pb->progress.variableTrace);
+    }
+    pb->progress.variableTrace = vt;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Post-configuration hook:
+ */
+static int ProgressbarPostConfigure(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (pb->progress.variableTrace) {
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(pb->progress.variableTrace);
+	if (WidgetDestroyed(&pb->core)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (status != TCL_OK) {
+	    /* Unset -variable: */
+	    Ttk_UntraceVariable(pb->progress.variableTrace);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(pb->progress.variableObj);
+	    pb->progress.variableTrace = 0;
+	    pb->progress.variableObj = NULL;
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    CheckAnimation(pb);
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Size hook:
+ * 	Compute base layout size, overrid
+ */
+static int ProgressbarSize(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    int length = 100, orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+
+    WidgetSize(recordPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+
+    /* Override requested width (height) based on -length and -orient
+     */
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, pb->core.tkwin, pb->progress.lengthObj, &length);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.orientObj, &orient);
+
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	*widthPtr = length;
+    } else {
+	*heightPtr = length;
+    }
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Layout hook:
+ * 	Adjust size and position of pbar element, if present.
+ */
+
+static void ProgressbarDeterminateLayout(
+    Progressbar *pb,
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *pbarNode,
+    Ttk_Box parcel,
+    double fraction,
+    Ttk_Orient orient)
+{
+    if (fraction < 0.0) fraction = 0.0;
+    if (fraction > 1.0) fraction = 1.0;
+
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	parcel.width = (int)(parcel.width * fraction);
+    } else {
+	int newHeight = (int)(parcel.height * fraction);
+	parcel.y += (parcel.height - newHeight);
+	parcel.height = newHeight;
+    }
+    Ttk_PlaceLayoutNode(pb->core.layout, pbarNode, parcel);
+}
+
+static void ProgressbarIndeterminateLayout(
+    Progressbar *pb,
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *pbarNode,
+    Ttk_Box parcel,
+    double fraction,
+    Ttk_Orient orient)
+{
+    Ttk_Box pbarBox = Ttk_LayoutNodeParcel(pbarNode);
+
+    fraction = fmod(fabs(fraction), 2.0);
+    if (fraction > 1.0) {
+	fraction = 2.0 - fraction;
+    }
+
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	pbarBox.x = parcel.x + (int)(fraction * (parcel.width-pbarBox.width));
+    } else {
+	pbarBox.y = parcel.y + (int)(fraction * (parcel.height-pbarBox.height));
+    }
+    Ttk_PlaceLayoutNode(pb->core.layout, pbarNode, pbarBox);
+}
+
+static void ProgressbarDoLayout(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &pb->core;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *pbarNode = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(corePtr->layout, "pbar");
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *troughNode = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(corePtr->layout, "trough");
+    double value = 0.0, maximum = 100.0;
+    int orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    Ttk_Box parcel = Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin);
+
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin));
+
+    /* Adjust the bar size:
+     */
+
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.valueObj, &value);
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.maximumObj, &maximum);
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.orientObj, &orient);
+
+    if (pbarNode) {
+	double fraction = value / maximum;
+
+	if (troughNode) {
+	    parcel = Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel(corePtr->layout, troughNode);
+	}
+
+	if (pb->progress.mode == TTK_PROGRESSBAR_DETERMINATE) {
+	    ProgressbarDeterminateLayout(
+		pb, pbarNode, parcel, fraction, orient);
+	} else {
+	    ProgressbarIndeterminateLayout(
+		pb, pbarNode, parcel, fraction, orient);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+static Ttk_Layout ProgressbarGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Layout layout = WidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+	interp, theme, recordPtr, pb->progress.orientObj);
+
+    /*
+     * Check if the style supports animation:
+     */
+    pb->progress.period = 0;
+    pb->progress.maxPhase = 0;
+    if (layout) {
+	Tcl_Obj *periodObj = Ttk_QueryOption(layout,"-period", 0);
+	Tcl_Obj *maxPhaseObj = Ttk_QueryOption(layout,"-maxphase", 0);
+	if (periodObj)
+	    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, periodObj, &pb->progress.period);
+	if (maxPhaseObj)
+	    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, maxPhaseObj, &pb->progress.maxPhase);
+    }
+
+    return layout;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands:
+ */
+
+/* $sb step ?amount?
+ */
+static int ProgressbarStepCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Progressbar *pb = recordPtr;
+    double value = 0.0, stepAmount = 1.0;
+    Tcl_Obj *newValueObj; 
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &stepAmount) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    } else if (objc != 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2,objv, "?stepAmount?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    (void)Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.valueObj, &value);
+    value += stepAmount;
+
+    /* In determinate mode, wrap around if value exceeds maximum:
+     */
+    if (pb->progress.mode == TTK_PROGRESSBAR_DETERMINATE) {
+	double maximum = 100.0;
+	(void)Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, pb->progress.maximumObj, &maximum);
+	value = fmod(value, maximum);
+    }
+
+    newValueObj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value);
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&pb->core);
+
+    /* Update value by setting the linked -variable, if there is one: 
+     */
+    if (pb->progress.variableTrace) {
+	return Tcl_ObjSetVar2(
+		    interp, pb->progress.variableObj, 0, newValueObj,
+		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY | TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG)
+	    ? TCL_OK : TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Otherwise, change the -value directly:
+     */
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(newValueObj);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(pb->progress.valueObj);
+    pb->progress.valueObj = newValueObj;
+    CheckAnimation(pb);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $sb start|stop ?args? --
+ * Change [$sb $cmd ...] to [ttk::progressbar::$cmd ...] 
+ * and pass to interpreter.
+ */
+static int ProgressbarStartStopCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *cmdName, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *cmd = Tcl_NewListObj(objc, objv);
+    Tcl_Obj *prefix[2];
+    int status;
+
+    /* ASSERT: objc >= 2 */
+
+    prefix[0] = Tcl_NewStringObj(cmdName, -1);
+    prefix[1] = objv[0];
+    Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp, cmd, 0,2, 2,prefix);
+
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(cmd);
+    status = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, cmd, 0);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(cmd);
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+static int ProgressbarStartCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    return ProgressbarStartStopCommand(
+	interp, "::ttk::progressbar::start", objc, objv);
+}
+
+static int ProgressbarStopCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    return ProgressbarStartStopCommand(
+	interp, "::ttk::progressbar::stop", objc, objv);
+}
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec ProgressbarCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "start", 		ProgressbarStartCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "step", 		ProgressbarStepCommand },
+    { "stop", 		ProgressbarStopCommand },
+    { NULL, NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * Widget specification:
+ */
+static WidgetSpec ProgressbarWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TProgressbar",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Progressbar),	/* recordSize */
+    ProgressbarOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    ProgressbarCommands,	/* subcommands */
+    ProgressbarInitialize,	/* initializeProc */
+    ProgressbarCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    ProgressbarConfigure,	/* configureProc */
+    ProgressbarPostConfigure,	/* postConfigureProc */
+    ProgressbarGetLayout,	/* getLayoutProc */
+    ProgressbarSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    ProgressbarDoLayout,	/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Layouts:
+ */
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(VerticalProgressbarLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Vertical.Progressbar.trough", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Vertical.Progressbar.pbar", TTK_PACK_BOTTOM|TTK_FILL_X))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(HorizontalProgressbarLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Horizontal.Progressbar.trough", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Horizontal.Progressbar.pbar", TTK_PACK_LEFT|TTK_FILL_Y))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*
+ * Initialization:
+ */
+int Progressbar_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr,
+	"Vertical.TProgressbar", VerticalProgressbarLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(themePtr,
+	"Horizontal.TProgressbar", HorizontalProgressbarLayout);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::progressbar", &ProgressbarWidgetSpec);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkScale.c b/generic/ttk/ttkScale.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..346183a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkScale.c
@@ -0,0 +1,503 @@
+/* $Id: ttkScale.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * Copyright (C) 2004 Pat Thoyts <patthoyts@users.sourceforge.net>
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: scale widget.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+#define DEF_SCALE_LENGTH "100"
+
+#define MAX(a,b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b))
+#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b))
+
+/*
+ * Scale widget record
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    /* slider element options */
+    Tcl_Obj *fromObj;         /* minimum value */
+    Tcl_Obj *toObj;           /* maximum value */
+    Tcl_Obj *valueObj;        /* current value */
+    Tcl_Obj *lengthObj;       /* length of the long axis of the scale */
+    Tcl_Obj *orientObj;       /* widget orientation */
+    int orient;
+
+    /* widget options */
+    Tcl_Obj *commandObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *variableObj;
+
+    /* internal state */
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *variableTrace;
+
+} ScalePart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    ScalePart  scale;
+} Scale;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ScaleOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    WIDGET_TAKES_FOCUS,
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.commandObj), -1, 
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-variable", "variable", "Variable", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.variableObj), -1, 
+	0,0,0},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient", "horizontal",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.orientObj),
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.orient), 0, 
+	(ClientData)TTKOrientStrings, STYLE_CHANGED },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-from", "from", "From", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.fromObj), -1, 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-to", "to", "To", "1.0",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.toObj), -1, 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-value", "value", "Value", "0",
+	Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.valueObj), -1, 0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-length", "length", "Length",
+	DEF_SCALE_LENGTH, Tk_Offset(Scale,scale.lengthObj), -1, 0, 0, 
+    	GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(CoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+static XPoint ValueToPoint(Scale *scalePtr, double value);
+static double PointToValue(Scale *scalePtr, int x, int y);
+
+/* ScaleVariableChanged --
+ * 	Variable trace procedure for scale -variable;
+ * 	Updates the scale's value.
+ * 	If the linked variable is not a valid double, 
+ * 	sets the 'invalid' state.
+ */
+static void ScaleVariableChanged(void *recordPtr, const char *value)
+{
+    Scale *scale = recordPtr;
+    double v;
+
+    if (value == NULL || Tcl_GetDouble(0, value, &v) != TCL_OK) {
+	WidgetChangeState(&scale->core, TTK_STATE_INVALID, 0);
+    } else {
+	Tcl_Obj *valueObj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(v);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(valueObj);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(scale->scale.valueObj);
+	scale->scale.valueObj = valueObj;
+	WidgetChangeState(&scale->core, 0, TTK_STATE_INVALID);
+    }
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&scale->core);
+}
+
+/* ScaleInitialize --
+ * 	Scale widget initialization hook.
+ */
+static int ScaleInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scale *scalePtr = recordPtr;
+
+    TrackElementState(&scalePtr->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static void ScaleCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scale *scale = recordPtr;
+
+    if (scale->scale.variableTrace) {
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(scale->scale.variableTrace);
+	scale->scale.variableTrace = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/* ScaleConfigure --
+ * 	Configuration hook.
+ */
+static int ScaleConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Scale *scale = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *varName = scale->scale.variableObj;
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *vt = 0;
+
+    if (varName != NULL && *Tcl_GetString(varName) != '\0') {
+	vt = Ttk_TraceVariable(interp,varName, ScaleVariableChanged,recordPtr);
+	if (!vt) return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (CoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (vt) Ttk_UntraceVariable(vt);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (scale->scale.variableTrace) {
+	Ttk_UntraceVariable(scale->scale.variableTrace);
+    }
+    scale->scale.variableTrace = vt;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* ScalePostConfigure --
+ * 	Post-configuration hook.
+ */
+static int ScalePostConfigure(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Scale *scale = recordPtr;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (scale->scale.variableTrace) {
+	status = Ttk_FireTrace(scale->scale.variableTrace);
+	if (WidgetDestroyed(&scale->core)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (status != TCL_OK) {
+	    /* Unset -variable: */
+	    Ttk_UntraceVariable(scale->scale.variableTrace);
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(scale->scale.variableObj);
+	    scale->scale.variableTrace = 0;
+	    scale->scale.variableObj = NULL;
+	    status = TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* ScaleGetLayout --
+ *	getLayout hook.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout 
+ScaleGetLayout(Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scale *scalePtr = recordPtr;
+    return WidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+	interp, theme, recordPtr, scalePtr->scale.orientObj);
+}
+
+/*
+ * TroughBox --
+ * 	Returns the inner area of the trough element.
+ */
+static Ttk_Box TroughBox(Scale *scalePtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &scalePtr->core;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *node = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(corePtr->layout, "trough");
+
+    if (node) {
+	return Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel(corePtr->layout, node);
+    } else {
+	return Ttk_MakeBox(
+		0,0, Tk_Width(corePtr->tkwin), Tk_Height(corePtr->tkwin));
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * TroughRange --
+ * 	Return the value area of the trough element, adjusted
+ * 	for slider size.
+ */
+static Ttk_Box TroughRange(Scale *scalePtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Box troughBox = TroughBox(scalePtr);
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *slider=Ttk_LayoutFindNode(scalePtr->core.layout,"slider");
+
+    /*
+     * If this is a scale widget, adjust range for slider:
+     */
+    if (slider) {
+	Ttk_Box sliderBox = Ttk_LayoutNodeParcel(slider);
+	if (scalePtr->scale.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    troughBox.x += sliderBox.width / 2;
+	    troughBox.width -= sliderBox.width;
+	} else {
+	    troughBox.y += sliderBox.height / 2;
+	    troughBox.height -= sliderBox.height;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return troughBox;
+}
+
+/*
+ * ScaleFraction --
+ */
+static double ScaleFraction(Scale *scalePtr, double value)
+{
+    double from = 0, to = 1, fraction;
+
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, scalePtr->scale.fromObj, &from);
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, scalePtr->scale.toObj, &to);
+
+    if (from == to) {
+	return 1.0;
+    }
+
+    fraction = (value - from) / (to - from);
+
+    return fraction < 0 ? 0 : fraction > 1 ? 1 : fraction;
+}
+
+/* $scale get ?x y? --
+ * 	Returns the current value of the scale widget, or if $x and 
+ * 	$y are specified, the value represented by point @x,y.
+ */
+static int
+ScaleGetCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scale *scalePtr = recordPtr;
+    int x, y, r = TCL_OK;
+    double value = 0;
+
+    if ((objc != 2) && (objc != 4)) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "get ?x y?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, scalePtr->scale.valueObj);
+    } else {
+	r = Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x);
+	if (r == TCL_OK)
+	    r = Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y);
+	if (r == TCL_OK) {
+	    value = PointToValue(scalePtr, x, y);
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value));
+	}
+    }
+    return r;
+}
+
+/* $scale set $newValue
+ */
+static int
+ScaleSetCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scale *scalePtr = recordPtr;
+    double from = 0.0, to = 1.0, value;
+    int result = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "set value");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &value) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (scalePtr->core.state & TTK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* ASSERT: fromObj and toObj are valid doubles.
+     */
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, scalePtr->scale.fromObj, &from);
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, scalePtr->scale.toObj, &to);
+
+    /* Limit new value to between 'from' and 'to':
+     */
+    if (from < to) {
+	value = value < from ? from : value > to ? to : value;
+    } else {
+	value = value < to ? to : value > from ? from : value;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Set value:
+     */
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(scalePtr->scale.valueObj);
+    scalePtr->scale.valueObj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(value);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(scalePtr->scale.valueObj);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&scalePtr->core);
+
+    /*
+     * Set attached variable, if any:
+     */
+    if (scalePtr->scale.variableObj != NULL) {
+	Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, scalePtr->scale.variableObj, NULL,
+	    scalePtr->scale.valueObj, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    }
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(&scalePtr->core)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Invoke -command, if any:
+     */
+    if (scalePtr->scale.commandObj != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *cmdObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(scalePtr->scale.commandObj);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(cmdObj);
+	Tcl_AppendToObj(cmdObj, " ", 1);
+	Tcl_AppendObjToObj(cmdObj, scalePtr->scale.valueObj);
+	result = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, cmdObj, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(cmdObj);
+    }
+
+    return result;
+}
+
+static int
+ScaleCoordsCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scale *scalePtr = recordPtr;
+    double value;
+    int r = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (objc < 2 || objc > 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "coords ?value?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	r = Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &value);
+    } else {
+	r = Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, scalePtr->scale.valueObj, &value);
+    }
+
+    if (r == TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_Obj *point[2];
+	XPoint pt = ValueToPoint(scalePtr, value);
+	point[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pt.x);
+	point[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(pt.y);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, point));
+    }
+    return r;
+}
+
+static void ScaleDoLayout(void *clientData)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *sliderNode = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(corePtr->layout, "slider");
+
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin));
+
+    /* Adjust the slider position:
+     */
+    if (sliderNode) {
+	Scale *scalePtr = clientData;
+	Ttk_Box troughBox = TroughBox(scalePtr);
+	Ttk_Box sliderBox = Ttk_LayoutNodeParcel(sliderNode);
+	double value = 0.0;
+	double fraction;
+	int range;
+
+	Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, scalePtr->scale.valueObj, &value);
+	fraction = ScaleFraction(scalePtr, value);
+
+	if (scalePtr->scale.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	    range = troughBox.width - sliderBox.width;
+	    sliderBox.x += (int)(fraction * range);
+	} else {
+	    range = troughBox.height - sliderBox.height;
+	    sliderBox.y += (int)(fraction * range);
+	}
+	Ttk_PlaceLayoutNode(corePtr->layout, sliderNode, sliderBox);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * ScaleSize --
+ * 	Compute requested size of scale.
+ */
+static int ScaleSize(void *clientData, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    Scale *scalePtr = clientData;
+    int length;
+
+    Ttk_LayoutSize(corePtr->layout, corePtr->state, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+
+    /* Assert the -length configuration option */
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, corePtr->tkwin,
+	    scalePtr->scale.lengthObj, &length);
+    if (scalePtr->scale.orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	*heightPtr = MAX(*heightPtr, length);
+    } else {
+	*widthPtr = MAX(*widthPtr, length);
+    }
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+static double
+PointToValue(Scale *scalePtr, int x, int y)
+{
+    Ttk_Box troughBox = TroughRange(scalePtr);
+    double from = 0, to = 1, fraction;
+
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, scalePtr->scale.fromObj, &from);
+    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(NULL, scalePtr->scale.toObj, &to);
+
+    if (scalePtr->scale.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	fraction = (double)(x - troughBox.x) / (double)troughBox.width;
+    } else {
+	fraction = (double)(y - troughBox.y) / (double)troughBox.height;
+    }
+
+    fraction = fraction < 0 ? 0 : fraction > 1 ? 1 : fraction;
+
+    return from + fraction * (to-from);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Return the center point in the widget corresponding to the given
+ * value. This point can be used to center the slider.
+ */
+
+static XPoint
+ValueToPoint(Scale *scalePtr, double value)
+{
+    Ttk_Box troughBox = TroughRange(scalePtr);
+    double fraction = ScaleFraction(scalePtr, value);
+    XPoint pt = {0, 0};
+
+    if (scalePtr->scale.orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL) {
+	pt.x = troughBox.x + (int)(fraction * troughBox.width);
+	pt.y = troughBox.y + troughBox.height / 2;
+    } else {
+	pt.x = troughBox.x + troughBox.width / 2;
+	pt.y = troughBox.y + (int)(fraction * troughBox.height);
+    }
+    return pt;
+}
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec ScaleCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",   WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",        WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "state",       WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "instate",     WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "identify",    WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { "set",         ScaleSetCommand },
+    { "get",         ScaleGetCommand },
+    { "coords",      ScaleCoordsCommand },
+    { 0, 0 }
+};
+
+WidgetSpec ScaleWidgetSpec = 
+{
+    "TScale",			/* Class name */
+    sizeof(Scale),		/* record size */
+    ScaleOptionSpecs,		/* option specs */
+    ScaleCommands,		/* widget commands */
+    ScaleInitialize,		/* initialization proc */
+    ScaleCleanup,		/* cleanup proc */
+    ScaleConfigure,		/* configure proc */
+    ScalePostConfigure,		/* postConfigure */
+    ScaleGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    ScaleSize,			/* sizeProc */
+    ScaleDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkScroll.c b/generic/ttk/ttkScroll.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..32c9477
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkScroll.c
@@ -0,0 +1,248 @@
+/* $Id: ttkScroll.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * Support routines for scrollable widgets.
+ *
+ * (This is sort of half-baked; needs some work)
+ *
+ * Scrollable interface:
+ *
+ * 	+ 'first' is controlled by [xy]view widget command 
+ * 	  and other scrolling commands like 'see';
+ *      + 'total' depends on widget contents;
+ *      + 'last' depends on first, total, and widget size.
+ *
+ * Choreography (typical usage):
+ *
+ * 	1. User adjusts scrollbar, scrollbar widget calls its -command
+ * 	2. Scrollbar -command invokes the scrollee [xy]view widget method
+ * 	3. ScrollviewCommand calls ScrollTo(), which updates 
+ * 	   'first' and schedules a redisplay.
+ * 	4. Once the scrollee knows 'total' and 'last' (typically in 
+ * 	   the LayoutProc), call Scrolled(h,first,last,total) to 
+ * 	   synchronize the scrollbar.
+ * 	5. The scrollee -[xy]scrollcommand is called (in an idle callback)
+ * 	6. Which calls the scrollbar 'set' method and redisplays the scrollbar.
+ *
+ * If the scrollee has internal scrolling (e.g., a 'see' method), 
+ * it should ScrollTo() directly (step 2).
+ *
+ * If the widget value changes, it should call Scrolled() (step 4).
+ * (This usually happens automatically when the widget is redisplayed).
+ *
+ * If the scrollee's -[xy]scrollcommand changes, it should call
+ * ScrollbarUpdateRequired, which will invoke step (5) (@@@ Fix this)
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/* Private data:
+ */
+#define SCROLL_UPDATE_PENDING  (0x1)
+#define SCROLL_UPDATE_REQUIRED (0x2)
+
+struct ScrollHandleRec
+{
+    unsigned 	flags;
+    WidgetCore	*corePtr;
+    Scrollable	*scrollPtr;
+};
+
+/* CreateScrollHandle --
+ * 	Initialize scroll handle.
+ */
+ScrollHandle CreateScrollHandle(WidgetCore *corePtr, Scrollable *scrollPtr)
+{
+    ScrollHandle h = (ScrollHandle)ckalloc(sizeof(*h));
+
+    h->flags = 0;
+    h->corePtr = corePtr;
+    h->scrollPtr = scrollPtr;
+
+    scrollPtr->first = 0;
+    scrollPtr->last = 1;
+    scrollPtr->total = 1;
+    return h;
+}
+
+void FreeScrollHandle(ScrollHandle h)
+{
+    Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData)h, TCL_DYNAMIC);
+}
+
+/* UpdateScrollbar --
+ *	Call the -scrollcommand callback to sync the scrollbar.
+ * 	Returns: Whatever the -scrollcommand does.
+ */
+static int UpdateScrollbar(Tcl_Interp *interp, ScrollHandle h)
+{
+    Scrollable *s = h->scrollPtr;
+    char args[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
+    int code;
+
+    h->flags &= ~(SCROLL_UPDATE_PENDING | SCROLL_UPDATE_REQUIRED);
+
+    if (s->scrollCmd == NULL)
+	return TCL_OK;
+
+    sprintf(args, " %g %g",
+		(double)s->first / s->total,
+		(double)s->last / s->total);
+
+    Tcl_Preserve(h->corePtr);
+    code = Tcl_VarEval(interp, s->scrollCmd, args, NULL);
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(h->corePtr)) {
+	Tcl_Release(h->corePtr);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_Release(h->corePtr);
+
+    if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	/* Disable the -scrollcommand, add to stack trace:
+	 */
+	ckfree(s->scrollCmd);
+	s->scrollCmd = 0;
+
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, /* @@@ "horizontal" / "vertical" */
+		"\n    (scrolling command executed by ");
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, Tk_PathName(h->corePtr->tkwin));
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, ")");
+    }
+    return code;
+}
+
+/* UpdateScrollbarBG --
+ * 	Idle handler to update the scrollbar.
+ */
+static void UpdateScrollbarBG(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    ScrollHandle h = (ScrollHandle)clientData;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = h->corePtr->interp;
+    int code;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(h->corePtr)) {
+	Tcl_Release(clientData);
+	return;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+    code = UpdateScrollbar(interp, h);
+    if (code == TCL_ERROR && !Tcl_InterpDeleted(interp)) {
+	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+    }
+    Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+    Tcl_Release(clientData);
+}
+
+/* Scrolled --
+ * 	Update scroll info, schedule scrollbar update.
+ */
+void Scrolled(ScrollHandle h, int first, int last, int total)
+{
+    Scrollable *s = h->scrollPtr;
+    
+    /* Sanity-check inputs:
+     */
+    if (total <= 0) {
+	first = 0;
+	last = 1;
+	total = 1;
+    }
+
+    if (s->first != first || s->last != last || s->total != total
+	    || (h->flags & SCROLL_UPDATE_REQUIRED))
+    {
+	s->first = first;
+	s->last = last;
+	s->total = total;
+
+	if (!(h->flags & SCROLL_UPDATE_PENDING)) {
+	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData)h);
+	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateScrollbarBG, (ClientData)h);
+	    h->flags |= SCROLL_UPDATE_PENDING;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/* ScrollbarUpdateRequired --
+ * 	Force a scrollbar update at the next call to Scrolled(),
+ * 	even if scroll parameters haven't changed (e.g., if
+ * 	-yscrollcommand has changed).
+ */
+
+void ScrollbarUpdateRequired(ScrollHandle h)
+{
+    h->flags |= SCROLL_UPDATE_REQUIRED;
+}
+
+/* ScrollviewCommand --
+ * 	Widget [xy]view command implementation.
+ *
+ *  $w [xy]view -- return current view region
+ *  $w [xy]view $index -- set topmost item
+ *  $w [xy]view moveto $fraction
+ *  $w [xy]view scroll $number $what -- scrollbar interface
+ */
+int ScrollviewCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], ScrollHandle h)
+{
+    Scrollable *s = h->scrollPtr;
+    int newFirst = s->first;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
+	sprintf(buf, "%g %g",
+		(double)s->first / s->total,
+		(double)s->last / s->total);
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 3) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &newFirst) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    } else {
+	double fraction;
+	int count;
+
+	switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, &count)) {
+	    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
+		newFirst = (int) ((fraction * s->total) + 0.5);
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+		newFirst = s->first + count;
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
+		int perPage = s->last - s->first;	/* @@@ */
+		newFirst = s->first + count * perPage;
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    ScrollTo(h, newFirst);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void ScrollTo(ScrollHandle h, int newFirst)
+{
+    Scrollable *s = h->scrollPtr;
+
+    if (newFirst >= s->total)
+	newFirst = s->total - 1;
+    if (newFirst > s->first && s->last >= s->total) /* don't scroll past end */
+	newFirst = s->first;
+    if (newFirst < 0)
+	newFirst = 0;
+
+    if (newFirst != s->first) {
+	s->first = newFirst;
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(h->corePtr);
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkScrollbar.c b/generic/ttk/ttkScrollbar.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1431c46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkScrollbar.c
@@ -0,0 +1,316 @@
+/* $Id: ttkScrollbar.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ * Ttk widget set: scrollbar widget implementation.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Scrollbar widget record.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj	*commandObj;
+
+    int 	orient;
+    Tcl_Obj	*orientObj;
+
+    double	first;			/* top fraction */
+    double	last;			/* bottom fraction */
+
+    Ttk_Box	troughBox;		/* trough parcel */ 
+    int 	minSize;		/* minimum size of thumb */
+} ScrollbarPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    ScrollbarPart scrollbar;
+} Scrollbar;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ScrollbarOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command", "",
+	Tk_Offset(Scrollbar,scrollbar.commandObj), -1, 0,0,0},
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient", "vertical",
+	Tk_Offset(Scrollbar,scrollbar.orientObj),
+	Tk_Offset(Scrollbar,scrollbar.orient),
+	0,(ClientData)TTKOrientStrings,STYLE_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(CoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget hooks.
+ */
+
+static int 
+ScrollbarInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scrollbar *sb = recordPtr;
+    sb->scrollbar.first = 0.0;
+    sb->scrollbar.last = 1.0;
+
+    TrackElementState(&sb->core);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static Ttk_Layout ScrollbarGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scrollbar *sb = recordPtr;
+    return WidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+	interp, theme, recordPtr, sb->scrollbar.orientObj);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ScrollbarDoLayout --
+ * 	Layout hook.  Adjusts the position of the scrollbar thumb.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Sets sb->troughBox and sb->minSize.
+ */
+static void ScrollbarDoLayout(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scrollbar *sb = recordPtr;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = &sb->core;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *thumb;
+    Ttk_Box thumbBox;
+    int thumbWidth, thumbHeight;
+    double first, last, size;
+    int minSize;
+
+    /*
+     * Use generic layout manager to compute initial layout:
+     */
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin));
+
+    /*
+     * Locate thumb element, extract parcel and requested minimum size:
+     */
+    thumb = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(corePtr->layout, "thumb");
+    if (!thumb)	/* Something has gone wrong -- bail */
+	return;
+
+    sb->scrollbar.troughBox = thumbBox = Ttk_LayoutNodeParcel(thumb);
+    Ttk_LayoutNodeReqSize(
+	corePtr->layout, thumb, &thumbWidth,&thumbHeight);
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust thumb element parcel:
+     */
+    first = sb->scrollbar.first;
+    last  = sb->scrollbar.last;
+
+    if (sb->scrollbar.orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	minSize = thumbHeight;
+	size = thumbBox.height - minSize;
+	thumbBox.y += (int)(size * first);
+	thumbBox.height = (int)(size * last) + minSize - (int)(size * first);
+    } else {
+	minSize = thumbWidth;
+	size = thumbBox.width - minSize;
+	thumbBox.x += (int)(size * first);
+	thumbBox.width = (int)(size * last) + minSize - (int)(size * first);
+    }
+    sb->scrollbar.minSize = minSize;
+    Ttk_PlaceLayoutNode(corePtr->layout, thumb, thumbBox);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands.
+ */
+
+/* $sb set $first $last --
+ * 	Set the position of the scrollbar.
+ */
+static int
+ScrollbarSetCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scrollbar *scrollbar = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *firstObj, *lastObj;
+    double first, last;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "first last");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    firstObj = objv[2];
+    lastObj = objv[3];
+    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, firstObj, &first) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, lastObj, &last) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    /* Range-checks:
+     */
+    if (first < 0.0) {
+	first = 0.0;
+    } else if (first > 1.0) {
+	first = 1.0;
+    }
+
+    if (last < first) {
+	last = first;
+    } else if (last > 1.0) {
+	last = 1.0;
+    }
+
+    /* ASSERT: 0.0 <= first <= last <= 1.0 */
+
+    scrollbar->scrollbar.first = first;
+    scrollbar->scrollbar.last = last;
+    if (first <= 0.0 && last >= 1.0) {
+	scrollbar->core.state |= TTK_STATE_DISABLED;
+    } else {
+	scrollbar->core.state &= ~TTK_STATE_DISABLED;
+    }
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&scrollbar->core);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $sb get --
+ * 	Returns the last thing passed to 'set'.
+ */
+static int
+ScrollbarGetCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scrollbar *scrollbar = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *result[2];
+
+    if (objc != 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    result[0] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(scrollbar->scrollbar.first);
+    result[1] = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(scrollbar->scrollbar.last);
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(2, result));
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $sb delta $dx $dy --
+ * 	Returns the percentage change corresponding to a mouse movement
+ * 	of $dx, $dy.
+ */
+static int
+ScrollbarDeltaCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scrollbar *sb = recordPtr;
+    double dx, dy;
+    double delta = 0.0;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "dx dy");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &dx) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[3], &dy) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    delta = 0.0;
+    if (sb->scrollbar.orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	int size = sb->scrollbar.troughBox.height - sb->scrollbar.minSize;
+	if (size > 0) {
+	    delta = (double)dy / (double)size;
+	}
+    } else {
+	int size = sb->scrollbar.troughBox.width - sb->scrollbar.minSize;
+	if (size > 0) {
+	    delta = (double)dx / (double)size;
+	}
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(delta));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $sb fraction $x $y --
+ * 	Returns a real number between 0 and 1 indicating  where  the
+ * 	point given by x and y lies in the trough area of the scrollbar. 
+ */
+static int
+ScrollbarFractionCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Scrollbar *sb = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Box b = sb->scrollbar.troughBox;
+    int minSize = sb->scrollbar.minSize;
+    double x, y;
+    double fraction = 0.0;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    fraction = 0.0;
+    if (sb->scrollbar.orient == TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL) {
+	if (b.height > minSize) {
+	    fraction = (double)(y - b.y) / (double)(b.height - minSize);
+	}
+    } else {
+	if (b.width > minSize) {
+	    fraction = (double)(x - b.x) / (double)(b.width - minSize);
+	}
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(fraction));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec ScrollbarCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "delta",    	ScrollbarDeltaCommand },
+    { "fraction",    	ScrollbarFractionCommand },
+    { "get",    	ScrollbarGetCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "set",  		ScrollbarSetCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { 0,0 }
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget specification.
+ */
+WidgetSpec ScrollbarWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TScrollbar",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Scrollbar),		/* recordSize */
+    ScrollbarOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    ScrollbarCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    ScrollbarInitialize,	/* initializeProc */
+    NullCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    CoreConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    NullPostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    ScrollbarGetLayout,		/* getLayoutProc */
+    WidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    ScrollbarDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkSeparator.c b/generic/ttk/ttkSeparator.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7914928
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkSeparator.c
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/* $Id: ttkSeparator.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: separator and sizegrip widgets.
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/* +++ Separator widget record:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj	*orientObj;
+    int 	orient;
+} SeparatorPart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    SeparatorPart separator;
+} Separator;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec SeparatorOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-orient", "orient", "Orient", "horizontal",
+	Tk_Offset(Separator,separator.orientObj),
+	Tk_Offset(Separator,separator.orient),
+	0,(ClientData)TTKOrientStrings,STYLE_CHANGED },
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(CoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * GetLayout hook --
+ * 	Choose layout based on -orient option.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout SeparatorGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Separator *sep = recordPtr;
+    return WidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+	interp, theme, recordPtr, sep->separator.orientObj);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Widget commands:
+ */
+static WidgetCommandSpec SeparatorCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { NULL, NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * Widget specification:
+ */
+WidgetSpec SeparatorWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TSeparator",		/* className */
+    sizeof(Separator),		/* recordSize */
+    SeparatorOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    SeparatorCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    NullInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    NullCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    CoreConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    NullPostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    SeparatorGetLayout,		/* getLayoutProc */
+    WidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    WidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/* +++ Sizegrip widget:
+ * 	Has no options or methods other than the standard ones.
+ */
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec SizegripCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { NULL, NULL }
+};
+
+WidgetSpec SizegripWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TSizegrip",		/* className */
+    sizeof(WidgetCore),		/* recordSize */
+    CoreOptionSpecs, 		/* optionSpecs */
+    SizegripCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    NullInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    NullCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    CoreConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    NullPostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    WidgetGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    WidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    WidgetDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkSquare.c b/generic/ttk/ttkSquare.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eec4776
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkSquare.c
@@ -0,0 +1,303 @@
+/* square.c - Copyright (C) 2004 Pat Thoyts <patthoyts@users.sourceforge.net>
+ *
+ * Minimal sample ttk widget.
+ *
+ * $Id: ttkSquare.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+#ifndef DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH
+#define DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH "2"
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * First, we setup the widget record. The Ttk package provides a structure
+ * that contains standard widget data so it is only necessary to define
+ * a structure that holds the data required for our widget. We do this by
+ * defining a widget part and then specifying the widget record as the
+ * concatenation of the two structures.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *heightObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *paddingObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *anchorObj;
+} SquarePart;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    WidgetCore core;
+    SquarePart square;
+} Square;
+
+/*
+ * Widget options.
+ *
+ * This structure is the same as the option specification structure used
+ * for Tk widgets. For each option we provide the type, name and options
+ * database name and class name and the position in the structure and
+ * default values. At the bottom we bring in the standard widget option
+ * defined for all widgets.
+ */
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec SquareOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    WIDGET_TAKES_FOCUS,
+
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
+     DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH, Tk_Offset(Square,square.borderWidthObj), -1,
+     0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
+     DEFAULT_BACKGROUND, Tk_Offset(Square,square.foregroundObj),
+     -1, 0, 0, 0},
+    
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", "width", "Width",
+     "50", Tk_Offset(Square,square.widthObj), -1, 0, 0,
+     GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height",
+     "50", Tk_Offset(Square,square.heightObj), -1, 0, 0,
+     GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Pad", NULL,
+     Tk_Offset(Square,square.paddingObj), -1, 
+     TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    
+    {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
+     NULL, Tk_Offset(Square,square.reliefObj), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    
+    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
+     NULL, Tk_Offset(Square,square.anchorObj), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+    
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(CoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*
+ * Almost all of the widget functionality is handled by the default Ttk
+ * widget code and the contained element. The one thing that we must handle
+ * is the -anchor option which positions the square element within the parcel
+ * of space available for the widget.
+ * To do this we must find out the layout preferences for the square
+ * element and adjust its position within our region.
+ *
+ * Note that if we do not have a "square" elememt then just the default
+ * layout will be done. So if someone places a label element into the
+ * widget layout it will still be handled but the -anchor option will be
+ * passed onto the label element instead of handled here.
+ */
+
+static void
+SquareDoLayout(void *clientData)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = (WidgetCore *)clientData;
+    Ttk_Box winBox;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *squareNode;
+
+    squareNode = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(corePtr->layout, "square");
+    winBox = Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin);
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout, corePtr->state, winBox);
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust the position of the square element within the widget according
+     * to the -anchor option.
+     */
+
+    if (squareNode) {
+	Square *squarePtr = clientData;
+	Tk_Anchor anchor = TK_ANCHOR_CENTER;
+	Ttk_Box b;
+
+	b = Ttk_LayoutNodeParcel(squareNode);
+	if (squarePtr->square.anchorObj != NULL)
+	    Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->square.anchorObj, &anchor);
+	b = Ttk_AnchorBox(winBox, b.width, b.height, anchor);
+
+	Ttk_PlaceLayoutNode(corePtr->layout, squareNode, b);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Widget commands. A widget is impelemented as an ensemble and the
+ * subcommands are listed here. Ttk provides default implementations
+ * that are sufficient for our needs.
+ */
+
+static WidgetCommandSpec SquareCommands[] =
+{
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "identify",	WidgetIdentifyCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { NULL, NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * The Widget specification structure holds all the implementation 
+ * information about this widget and this is what must be registered
+ * with Tk in the package initialization code (see bottom).
+ */
+
+WidgetSpec SquareWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "TSquare",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Square),		/* recordSize */
+    SquareOptionSpecs,		/* optionSpecs */
+    SquareCommands,		/* subcommands */
+    NullInitialize,		/* initializeProc */
+    NullCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    CoreConfigure,		/* configureProc */
+    NullPostConfigure,		/* postConfigureProc */
+    WidgetGetLayout,		/* getLayoutProc */
+    WidgetSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    SquareDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    WidgetDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/* ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 
+ * Square element
+ *
+ * In this section we demonstrate what is required to create a new themed
+ * element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *borderObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *borderWidthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *reliefObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *widthObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *heightObj;
+} SquareElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec SquareElementOptions[] = 
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,borderObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_BORDER, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,foregroundObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-borderwidth", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,borderWidthObj),
+    	DEFAULT_BORDERWIDTH },
+    { "-relief", TK_OPTION_RELIEF, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,reliefObj),
+    	"raised" },
+    { "-width",  TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,widthObj), "20"},
+    { "-height", TK_OPTION_PIXELS, Tk_Offset(SquareElement,heightObj), "20"},
+    { NULL }
+};
+
+/*
+ * The element geometry function is called when the layout code wishes to
+ * find out how big this element wants to be. We must return our preferred
+ * size and padding information
+ */
+
+static void
+SquareElementGeometry(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord,
+    Tk_Window tkwin, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    SquareElement *square = elementRecord;
+    int borderWidth = 0;
+
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, square->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    *paddingPtr = Ttk_UniformPadding((short)borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, square->widthObj, widthPtr);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, square->heightObj, heightPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Draw the element in the box provided.
+ */
+
+static void
+SquareElementDraw(void *clientData, void *elementRecord,
+    Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, unsigned int state)
+{
+    SquareElement *square = elementRecord;
+    Tk_3DBorder border = NULL, foreground = NULL;
+    int borderWidth = 1, relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+
+    border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, square->borderObj);
+    foreground = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, square->foregroundObj);
+    Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, square->borderWidthObj, &borderWidth);
+    Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, square->reliefObj, &relief);
+
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, foreground,
+	b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height, borderWidth, relief);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec SquareElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(SquareElement),
+    SquareElementOptions,
+    SquareElementGeometry,
+    SquareElementDraw
+};
+
+/* ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Layout section.
+ *
+ * Every widget class needs a layout style that specifies which elements
+ * are part of the widget and how they should be placed. The element layout
+ * engine is similar to the Tk pack geometry manager. Read the documentation
+ * for the details. In this example we just need to have the square element
+ * that has been defined for this widget placed on a background. We will
+ * also need some padding to keep it away from the edges. 
+ */
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(SquareLayout)
+     TTK_NODE("Square.background", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+     TTK_GROUP("Square.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	 TTK_NODE("Square.square", 0))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/* ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 
+ *
+ * Widget initialization.
+ *
+ * This file defines a new element and a new widget. We need to register
+ * the element with the themes that will need it. In this case we will 
+ * register with the default theme that is the root of the theme inheritance
+ * tree. This means all themes will find this element.
+ * We then need to register the widget class style. This is the layout
+ * specification. If a different theme requires an alternative layout, we
+ * could register that here. For instance, in some themes the scrollbars have
+ * one uparrow, in other themes there are two uparrow elements.
+ * Finally we register the widget itself. This step creates a tcl command so
+ * that we can actually create an instance of this class. The widget is
+ * linked to a particular style by the widget class name. This is important
+ * to realise as the programmer may change the classname when creating a
+ * new instance. If this is done, a new layout will need to be created (which
+ * can be done at script level). Some widgets may require particular elements
+ * to be present but we try to avoid this where possible. In this widget's C
+ * code, no reference is made to any particular elements. The programmer is
+ * free to specify a new style using completely different elements.
+ */
+
+/* public */ int
+SquareWidget_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    /* register the new elements for this theme engine */
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "square", &SquareElementSpec, NULL);
+    
+    /* register the layout for this theme */
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "TSquare", SquareLayout);
+    
+    /* register the widget */
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::square", &SquareWidgetSpec);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkState.c b/generic/ttk/ttkState.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8923fa6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkState.c
@@ -0,0 +1,268 @@
+/*
+ * $Id: ttkState.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Tk widget state utilities.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+/*
+ * Table of state names.  Must be kept in sync with TTK_STATE_*
+ * #defines in ttkTheme.h.
+ */
+static const char *stateNames[] =
+{
+    "active",		/* Mouse cursor is over widget or element */
+    "disabled",		/* Widget is disabled */
+    "focus",		/* Widget has keyboard focus */
+    "pressed",		/* Pressed or "armed" */
+    "selected",		/* "on", "true", "current", etc. */
+    "background",	/* Top-level window lost focus (Mac,Win "inactive") */
+    "alternate",	/* Widget-specific alternate display style */
+    "invalid",		/* Bad value */
+    "readonly",		/* Editing/modification disabled */
+    NULL
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ StateSpec object type:
+ *
+ * The string representation consists of a list of state names,
+ * each optionally prefixed by an exclamation point (!).
+ *
+ * The internal representation uses the upper half of the longValue
+ * to store the on bits and the lower half to store the off bits.
+ * If we ever get more than 16 states, this will need to be reconsidered...
+ */
+
+static int  StateSpecSetFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *obj);
+/* static void StateSpecFreeIntRep(Tcl_Obj *); */
+#define StateSpecFreeIntRep 0		/* not needed */
+static void StateSpecDupIntRep(Tcl_Obj *, Tcl_Obj *);
+static void StateSpecUpdateString(Tcl_Obj *);
+
+static
+struct Tcl_ObjType StateSpecObjType =
+{
+    "StateSpec",
+    StateSpecFreeIntRep,
+    StateSpecDupIntRep,
+    StateSpecUpdateString,
+    StateSpecSetFromAny
+};
+
+static void StateSpecDupIntRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr, Tcl_Obj *copyPtr)
+{
+    copyPtr->internalRep.longValue = srcPtr->internalRep.longValue;
+    copyPtr->typePtr = &StateSpecObjType;
+}
+
+static int StateSpecSetFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    int status;
+    int objc;
+    Tcl_Obj **objv;
+    int i;
+    unsigned int onbits = 0, offbits = 0;
+
+    status = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv);
+    if (status != TCL_OK)
+	return status;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < objc; ++i) {
+	char *stateName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	int on, j;
+
+	if (*stateName == '!') {
+	    ++stateName;
+	    on = 0;
+	} else {
+	    on = 1;
+	}
+
+	for (j = 0; stateNames[j] != 0; ++j) {
+	    if (strcmp(stateName, stateNames[j]) == 0)
+		break;
+	}
+
+    	if (stateNames[j] == 0) {
+	    if (interp) {
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Invalid state name ", stateName,NULL);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (on) {
+	    onbits |= (1<<j);
+	} else {
+	    offbits |= (1<<j);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Invalidate old intrep:
+     */
+    if (objPtr->typePtr && objPtr->typePtr->freeIntRepProc) {
+	objPtr->typePtr->freeIntRepProc(objPtr);
+    }
+
+    objPtr->typePtr = &StateSpecObjType;
+    objPtr->internalRep.longValue = (onbits << 16) | offbits;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static void StateSpecUpdateString(Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    unsigned int onbits = (objPtr->internalRep.longValue & 0xFFFF0000) >> 16;
+    unsigned int offbits = objPtr->internalRep.longValue & 0x0000FFFF;
+    unsigned int mask = onbits | offbits;
+    Tcl_DString result;
+    int i, len;
+
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&result);
+
+    for (i=0; stateNames[i] != NULL; ++i) {
+	if (mask & (1<<i)) {
+	    if (offbits & (1<<i))
+		Tcl_DStringAppend(&result, "!", 1);
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&result, stateNames[i], -1);
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&result, " ", 1);
+	}
+    }
+
+    len = Tcl_DStringLength(&result);
+    if (len) {
+	/* 'len' includes extra trailing ' ' */
+	objPtr->bytes = Tcl_Alloc((unsigned)len);
+	objPtr->length = len-1;
+	strncpy(objPtr->bytes, Tcl_DStringValue(&result), (size_t)len-1);
+	objPtr->bytes[len-1] = '\0';
+    } else {
+	/* empty string */
+	objPtr->length = 0;
+	objPtr->bytes = Tcl_Alloc(1);
+	*objPtr->bytes = '\0';
+    }
+
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&result);
+}
+
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(unsigned int onbits, unsigned int offbits)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
+
+    Tcl_InvalidateStringRep(objPtr);
+    objPtr->typePtr = &StateSpecObjType;
+    objPtr->internalRep.longValue = (onbits << 16) | offbits;
+
+    return objPtr;
+}
+
+int Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+    Ttk_StateSpec *spec)
+{
+    if (objPtr->typePtr != &StateSpecObjType) {
+	int status = StateSpecSetFromAny(interp, objPtr);
+	if (status != TCL_OK)
+	    return status;
+    }
+
+    spec->onbits = (objPtr->internalRep.longValue & 0xFFFF0000) >> 16;
+    spec->offbits = objPtr->internalRep.longValue & 0x0000FFFF;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+
+/*
+ * Tk_StateMapLookup --
+ *
+ * 	A state map is a paired list of StateSpec / value pairs.
+ *	Returns the value corresponding to the first matching state
+ *	specification, or NULL if not found or an error occurs.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StateMapLookup(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Where to leave error messages; may be NULL */
+    Ttk_StateMap map,		/* State map */
+    Ttk_State state)    	/* State to look up */
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **specs;
+    int nSpecs;
+    int j, status;
+
+    status = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, map, &nSpecs, &specs);
+    if (status != TCL_OK)
+	return NULL;
+
+    for (j = 0; j < nSpecs; j += 2) {
+	Ttk_StateSpec spec;
+	status = Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, specs[j], &spec);
+	if (status != TCL_OK)
+	    return NULL;
+	if (Ttk_StateMatches(state, &spec))
+	    return specs[j+1];
+    }
+    if (interp) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "No match in state map", NULL);
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj --
+ * 	Returns a Ttk_StateMap from a Tcl_Obj*.
+ * 	Since a Ttk_StateMap is just a specially-formatted Tcl_Obj, 
+ * 	this basically just checks for errors.
+ */
+Ttk_StateMap Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Where to leave error messages; may be NULL */
+    Tcl_Obj *mapObj)		/* State map */
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **specs;
+    int nSpecs;
+    int j, status;
+
+    status = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, mapObj, &nSpecs, &specs);
+    if (status != TCL_OK)
+	return NULL;
+
+    if (nSpecs % 2 != 0) {
+	if (interp)
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+		    "State map must have an even number of elements",
+		    TCL_STATIC);
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    for (j = 0; j < nSpecs; j += 2) {
+	Ttk_StateSpec spec;
+	if (Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, specs[j], &spec) != TCL_OK)
+	    return NULL;
+    }
+
+    return mapObj;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_StateTableLooup --
+ * 	Look up an index from a statically allocated state table.
+ */
+int Ttk_StateTableLookup(Ttk_StateTable *map, unsigned int state)
+{
+    while ((state & map->onBits) != map->onBits
+	    || (~state & map->offBits) != map->offBits)
+    {
+	++map;
+    }
+    return map->index;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkStubInit.c b/generic/ttk/ttkStubInit.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c1223d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkStubInit.c
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+/*
+ * $Id: ttkStubInit.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * This file is (mostly) automatically generated from ttk.decls.
+ * It is compiled and linked in with the ttk package proper.
+ */
+
+#include "tk.h"
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+/* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */
+
+TtkStubs ttkStubs = {
+    TCL_STUB_MAGIC,
+    TTK_STUBS_EPOCH,
+    TTK_STUBS_REVISION,
+    0,
+    Ttk_GetTheme, /* 0 */
+    Ttk_GetDefaultTheme, /* 1 */
+    Ttk_GetCurrentTheme, /* 2 */
+    Ttk_CreateTheme, /* 3 */
+    Ttk_RegisterCleanup, /* 4 */
+    Ttk_RegisterElementSpec, /* 5 */
+    Ttk_RegisterElement, /* 6 */
+    Ttk_RegisterElementFactory, /* 7 */
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout, /* 8 */
+    0, /* 9 */
+    Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj, /* 10 */
+    Ttk_NewStateSpecObj, /* 11 */
+    Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj, /* 12 */
+    Ttk_StateMapLookup, /* 13 */
+    Ttk_StateTableLookup, /* 14 */
+    0, /* 15 */
+    0, /* 16 */
+    0, /* 17 */
+    0, /* 18 */
+    0, /* 19 */
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj, /* 20 */
+    Ttk_GetBorderFromObj, /* 21 */
+    Ttk_GetStickyFromObj, /* 22 */
+    Ttk_MakePadding, /* 23 */
+    Ttk_UniformPadding, /* 24 */
+    Ttk_AddPadding, /* 25 */
+    Ttk_RelievePadding, /* 26 */
+    Ttk_MakeBox, /* 27 */
+    Ttk_BoxContains, /* 28 */
+    Ttk_PackBox, /* 29 */
+    Ttk_StickBox, /* 30 */
+    Ttk_AnchorBox, /* 31 */
+    Ttk_PadBox, /* 32 */
+    Ttk_ExpandBox, /* 33 */
+    Ttk_PlaceBox, /* 34 */
+    Ttk_NewBoxObj, /* 35 */
+    0, /* 36 */
+    0, /* 37 */
+    0, /* 38 */
+    0, /* 39 */
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj, /* 40 */
+};
+
+/* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkStubLib.c b/generic/ttk/ttkStubLib.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e13abde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkStubLib.c
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+ * $Id: ttkStubLib.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * SOURCE: tk/generic/tkStubLib.c, version 1.9 2004/03/17
+ */
+
+#include "tk.h"
+
+#define USE_TTK_STUBS 1
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+const TtkStubs *ttkStubsPtr;
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TtkInitializeStubs --
+ *	Load the Ttk package, initialize stub table pointer.
+ *	Do not call this function directly, use Ttk_InitStubs() macro instead.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The actual version of the package that satisfies the request, or
+ *	NULL to indicate that an error occurred.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sets the stub table pointer.
+ *
+ */
+const char *TtkInitializeStubs(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *version, int epoch, int revision)
+{
+    int exact = 0;
+    const char *packageName = "Ttk";
+    const char *errMsg = NULL;
+    ClientData pkgClientData = NULL;
+    const char *actualVersion= Tcl_PkgRequireEx(
+	interp, packageName, version, exact, &pkgClientData);
+    TtkStubs *stubsPtr = pkgClientData;
+
+    if (!actualVersion) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    if (!stubsPtr) {
+	errMsg = "missing stub table pointer";
+	goto error;
+    }
+    if (stubsPtr->epoch != epoch) {
+	errMsg = "epoch number mismatch";
+	goto error;
+    }
+    if (stubsPtr->revision < revision) {
+	errMsg = "require later revision";
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    ttkStubsPtr = stubsPtr;
+    return actualVersion;
+
+error:
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	"Error loading ", packageName, " package",
+	" (requested version '", version,
+	"', loaded version '", actualVersion, "'): ",
+	errMsg, 
+	NULL);
+    return NULL;
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTagSet.c b/generic/ttk/ttkTagSet.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd4d3a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTagSet.c
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+/* $Id: ttkTagSet.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: tag tables.  Half-baked, work in progress.
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) 2005, Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>	/* for memset() */
+#include <tcl.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Internal data structures.
+ */
+struct TtkTag {
+    Tcl_Obj **tagRecord;	/* ... hrmph. */
+};
+
+struct TtkTagTable {
+    Tk_OptionTable	tagOptionTable;	/* ... */
+    int         	tagRecordSize;	/* size of tag record */
+    Tcl_HashTable	tags;		/* defined tags */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tags.
+ */
+static Ttk_Tag NewTag(Ttk_TagTable tagTable)
+{
+    Ttk_Tag tag = (Ttk_Tag)ckalloc(sizeof(*tag));
+    tag->tagRecord = (Tcl_Obj **)ckalloc(tagTable->tagRecordSize);
+    memset(tag->tagRecord, 0, tagTable->tagRecordSize);
+    return tag;
+}
+
+static void DeleteTag(Ttk_Tag tag, int nOptions) 
+{
+    int i;
+    for (i = 0; i < nOptions; ++i) {
+	if (tag->tagRecord[i]) {
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(tag->tagRecord[i]);
+	}
+    }
+    ckfree((void*)tag->tagRecord);
+    ckfree((void*)tag);
+}
+
+Tcl_Obj **Ttk_TagRecord(Ttk_Tag tag)
+{
+    return tag->tagRecord;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tag tables.
+ */
+
+Ttk_TagTable Ttk_CreateTagTable(
+    Tk_OptionTable tagOptionTable, int tagRecordSize)
+{
+    Ttk_TagTable tagTable = (Ttk_TagTable)ckalloc(sizeof(*tagTable));
+    tagTable->tagOptionTable = tagOptionTable;
+    tagTable->tagRecordSize = tagRecordSize;
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&tagTable->tags, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    return tagTable;
+}
+
+void Ttk_DeleteTagTable(Ttk_TagTable tagTable)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int nOptions = tagTable->tagRecordSize / sizeof(Tcl_Obj *);
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&tagTable->tags, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	DeleteTag(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr), nOptions);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&tagTable->tags);
+    ckfree((void*)tagTable);
+}
+
+Ttk_Tag Ttk_GetTag(Ttk_TagTable tagTable, const char *tagName)
+{
+    int isNew = 0;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(
+	&tagTable->tags, tagName, &isNew);
+
+    if (isNew) {
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, NewTag(tagTable));
+    }
+    return Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+}
+
+Ttk_Tag Ttk_GetTagFromObj(Ttk_TagTable tagTable, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    return Ttk_GetTag(tagTable, Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
+}
+
+/* Ttk_GetTagListFromObj --
+ * 	Extract an array of pointers to Ttk_Tags from a Tcl_Obj.
+ * 	(suitable for passing to Tk_BindEvent).
+ *
+ * Result must be passed to Ttk_FreeTagList().
+ */
+extern int Ttk_GetTagListFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, 
+    Ttk_TagTable tagTable,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+    int *nTags_rtn,
+    void **taglist_rtn)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **objv;
+    int i, objc;
+    void **tags;
+
+    *taglist_rtn = NULL; *nTags_rtn = 0;
+
+    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) {
+    	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tags = (void**)ckalloc((objc+1) * sizeof(void*));
+    for (i=0; i<objc; ++i) {
+	tags[i] = Ttk_GetTagFromObj(tagTable, objv[i]);
+    }
+    tags[i] = NULL;
+
+    *taglist_rtn = tags;
+    *nTags_rtn = objc;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+void Ttk_FreeTagList(void **taglist)
+{
+    if (taglist) 
+	ckfree((ClientData)taglist);
+}
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.c b/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8b8010
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1719 @@
+/*
+ * tkTheme.c --
+ *
+ *	This file implements the widget styles and themes support.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2002 Frederic Bonnet
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * $Id: ttkTheme.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkThemeInt.h"
+
+#ifdef NO_PRIVATE_HEADERS
+EXTERN CONST Tk_OptionSpec *TkGetOptionSpec (CONST char *name,
+                            Tk_OptionTable optionTable);
+#else
+#include <tkInt.h>
+#endif
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Styles.
+ *
+ * Invariants:
+ * 	If styleName contains a dot, parentStyle->styleName is everything
+ * 	after the first dot; otherwise, parentStyle is the theme's root
+ * 	style ".".  The root style's parentStyle is NULL.
+ *
+ */
+
+typedef struct Ttk_Style_
+{
+    const char		*styleName;	/* points to hash table key */
+    Tcl_HashTable	settingsTable;	/* KEY: string; VALUE: StateMap */
+    Tcl_HashTable	defaultsTable;	/* KEY: string; VALUE: resource */
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate	layoutTemplate;	/* Layout template for style, or NULL */
+    Ttk_Style		parentStyle;	/* Previous style in chain */
+    Ttk_ResourceCache	cache;		/* Back-pointer to resource cache */
+} Style;
+
+static Style *NewStyle()
+{
+    Style *stylePtr = (Style*)ckalloc(sizeof(Style));
+
+    stylePtr->styleName = NULL;
+    stylePtr->parentStyle = NULL;
+    stylePtr->layoutTemplate = NULL;
+    stylePtr->cache = NULL;
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&stylePtr->settingsTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&stylePtr->defaultsTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    return stylePtr;
+}
+
+static void FreeStyle(Style *stylePtr)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&stylePtr->settingsTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Ttk_StateMap stateMap = (Ttk_StateMap)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(stateMap);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&stylePtr->settingsTable);
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&stylePtr->defaultsTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *defaultValue = (Ttk_StateMap)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(defaultValue);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&stylePtr->defaultsTable);
+
+    Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(stylePtr->layoutTemplate);
+
+    ckfree((char*)stylePtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * LookupStateMap --
+ * 	Look up dynamic resource settings in the in the specified style.
+ */
+
+static Ttk_StateMap LookupStateMap(Ttk_Style stylePtr, const char *optionName)
+{
+    while (stylePtr) {
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =
+	    Tcl_FindHashEntry(&stylePtr->settingsTable, optionName);
+	if (entryPtr)
+	    return (Ttk_StateMap)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	stylePtr = stylePtr->parentStyle;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ * LookupDefault --
+ * 	Look up default resource setting the in the specified style.
+ */
+static Tcl_Obj *LookupDefault(Ttk_Style stylePtr, const char *optionName)
+{
+    while (stylePtr) {
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =
+	    Tcl_FindHashEntry(&stylePtr->defaultsTable, optionName);
+	if (entryPtr)
+	    return (Tcl_Obj *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	stylePtr = stylePtr->parentStyle;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Elements.
+ */
+typedef const Tk_OptionSpec **OptionMap;
+    /* array of Tk_OptionSpecs mapping widget options to element options */
+
+typedef struct Ttk_ElementImpl_		/* Element implementation */
+{
+    const char *name;		/* Points to hash table key */
+    Ttk_ElementSpec *specPtr;	/* Template provided during registration. */
+    void *clientData;		/* Client data passed in at registration time */
+    void *elementRecord;	/* Scratch buffer for element record storage */
+    int nResources;		/* #Element options */
+    Tcl_Obj **defaultValues;	/* Array of option default values */
+    Tcl_HashTable optMapCache;	/* Map: Tk_OptionTable * -> OptionMap */
+} ElementImpl;
+
+/* TTKGetOptionSpec --
+ * 	Look up a Tk_OptionSpec by name from a Tk_OptionTable,
+ * 	and verify that it's compatible with the specified Tk_OptionType,
+ * 	along with other constraints (see below).
+ */
+static const Tk_OptionSpec *TTKGetOptionSpec(
+    const char *optionName,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,
+    Tk_OptionType optionType)
+{
+    const Tk_OptionSpec *optionSpec = TkGetOptionSpec(optionName, optionTable);
+
+    if (!optionSpec)
+	return 0;
+
+    /* Make sure widget option has a Tcl_Obj* entry:
+     */
+    if (optionSpec->objOffset < 0) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    /* Grrr.  Ignore accidental mismatches caused by prefix-matching:
+     */
+    if (strcmp(optionSpec->optionName, optionName)) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    /* Ensure that the widget option type is compatible with
+     * the element option type.
+     *
+     * TK_OPTION_STRING element options are compatible with anything.
+     * As a workaround for the workaround for Bug #967209,
+     * TK_OPTION_STRING widget options are also compatible with anything
+     * (see <<NOTE-NULLOPTIONS>>).
+     */
+    if (   optionType != TK_OPTION_STRING
+	&& optionSpec->type != TK_OPTION_STRING
+	&& optionType != optionSpec->type)
+    {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    return optionSpec;
+}
+
+/* BuildOptionMap --
+ * 	Construct the mapping from element options to widget options.
+ */
+static OptionMap
+BuildOptionMap(ElementImpl *elementImpl, Tk_OptionTable optionTable)
+{
+    OptionMap optionMap = (OptionMap)ckalloc(
+	    sizeof(const Tk_OptionSpec) * elementImpl->nResources);
+    int i;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < elementImpl->nResources; ++i) {
+	Ttk_ElementOptionSpec *e = elementImpl->specPtr->options+i;
+	optionMap[i] = TTKGetOptionSpec(e->optionName, optionTable, e->type);
+    }
+
+    return optionMap;
+}
+
+/* GetOptionMap --
+ * 	Return a cached OptionMap matching the specified optionTable
+ * 	for the specified element, creating it if necessary.
+ */
+static OptionMap
+GetOptionMap(ElementImpl *elementImpl, Tk_OptionTable optionTable)
+{
+    OptionMap optionMap;
+    int isNew;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(
+	&elementImpl->optMapCache, (ClientData)optionTable, &isNew);
+
+    if (isNew) {
+	optionMap = BuildOptionMap(elementImpl, optionTable);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, optionMap);
+    } else {
+	optionMap = (OptionMap)(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+    }
+
+    return optionMap;
+}
+
+/*
+ * NewElementImpl --
+ * 	Allocate and initialize an element implementation record
+ * 	from the specified element specification.
+ */
+static ElementImpl *
+NewElementImpl(const char *name, Ttk_ElementSpec *specPtr,void *clientData)
+{
+    ElementImpl *elementImpl = (ElementImpl*)ckalloc(sizeof(ElementImpl));
+    int i;
+
+    elementImpl->name = name;
+    elementImpl->specPtr = specPtr;
+    elementImpl->clientData = clientData;
+    elementImpl->elementRecord = ckalloc(specPtr->elementSize);
+
+    /* Count #element resources:
+     */
+    for (i = 0; specPtr->options[i].optionName != 0; ++i)
+	continue;
+    elementImpl->nResources = i;
+
+    /* Initialize default values:
+     */
+    elementImpl->defaultValues = (Tcl_Obj**)
+	ckalloc(elementImpl->nResources * sizeof(Tcl_Obj *));
+    for (i=0; i < elementImpl->nResources; ++i) {
+        const char *defaultValue = specPtr->options[i].defaultValue;
+	if (defaultValue) {
+	    elementImpl->defaultValues[i] = Tcl_NewStringObj(defaultValue,-1);
+	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(elementImpl->defaultValues[i]);
+	} else {
+	    elementImpl->defaultValues[i] = 0;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Initialize option map cache:
+     */
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&elementImpl->optMapCache, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
+
+    return elementImpl;
+}
+
+/*
+ * FreeElementImpl --
+ * 	Release resources associated with an element implementation record.
+ */
+static void FreeElementImpl(ElementImpl *elementImpl)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int i;
+
+    /*
+     * Free default values:
+     */
+    for (i = 0; i < elementImpl->nResources; ++i) {
+	if (elementImpl->defaultValues[i]) {
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(elementImpl->defaultValues[i]);
+	}
+    }
+    ckfree((ClientData)elementImpl->defaultValues);
+
+    /*
+     * Free option map cache:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&elementImpl->optMapCache, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	ckfree(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&elementImpl->optMapCache);
+
+    ckfree(elementImpl->elementRecord);
+    ckfree((ClientData)elementImpl);
+}
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Themes.
+ */
+
+static int ThemeEnabled(Ttk_Theme theme, void *clientData) { return 1; }
+    /* Default ThemeEnabledProc -- always return true */
+
+typedef struct Ttk_Theme_
+{
+    Ttk_Theme parentPtr;             	/* Parent theme. */
+    Tcl_HashTable elementTable;	     	/* Map element names to ElementImpls */
+    Tcl_HashTable styleTable;	     	/* Map style names to Styles */
+    Ttk_Style rootStyle;		/* "." style, root of chain */
+    Ttk_ThemeEnabledProc *enabledProc;	/* Function called by SetTheme */
+    void *enabledData;              	/* ClientData for enabledProc */
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache;		/* Back-pointer to resource cache */
+} Theme;
+
+static Theme *NewTheme(Ttk_ResourceCache cache, Ttk_Theme parent)
+{
+    Theme *themePtr = (Theme*)ckalloc(sizeof(Theme));
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int unused;
+
+    themePtr->parentPtr = parent;
+    themePtr->enabledProc = ThemeEnabled;
+    themePtr->enabledData = NULL;
+    themePtr->cache = cache;
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&themePtr->elementTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&themePtr->styleTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    /*
+     * Create root style "."
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&themePtr->styleTable, ".", &unused);
+    themePtr->rootStyle = NewStyle();
+    themePtr->rootStyle->styleName = 
+	Tcl_GetHashKey(&themePtr->styleTable, entryPtr);
+    themePtr->rootStyle->cache = themePtr->cache;
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData)themePtr->rootStyle);
+
+    return themePtr;
+}
+
+static void FreeTheme(Theme *themePtr)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Free associated ElementImpl's
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&themePtr->elementTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	ElementImpl *elementImpl = (ElementImpl *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	FreeElementImpl(elementImpl);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&themePtr->elementTable);
+
+    /*
+     * Free style table:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&themePtr->styleTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Style *stylePtr = (Style*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	FreeStyle(stylePtr);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&themePtr->styleTable);
+
+    /*
+     * Free theme record:
+     */
+    ckfree((char *)themePtr);
+
+    return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Element constructors.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    Ttk_ElementFactory	factory;
+    void		*clientData;
+} FactoryRec;
+
+/*
+ * Cleanup records:
+ */
+typedef struct CleanupStruct {
+    void *clientData;
+    Ttk_CleanupProc *cleanupProc;
+    struct CleanupStruct *next;
+} Cleanup;
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Master style package data structure.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Owner interp */
+    Tcl_HashTable themeTable;		/* KEY: name; VALUE: Theme pointer */
+    Tcl_HashTable factoryTable; 	/* KEY: name; VALUE: FactoryRec ptr */
+    Theme *defaultTheme;		/* Default theme; global fallback*/
+    Theme *currentTheme;		/* Currently-selected theme */
+    Cleanup *cleanupList;		/* Cleanup records */
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache;		/* Resource cache */
+    int themeChangePending;		/* scheduled ThemeChangedProc call? */
+} StylePackageData;
+
+static void ThemeChangedProc(ClientData);	/* Forward */
+
+/* Ttk_StylePkgFree --
+ *	Cleanup procedure for StylePackageData.
+ */
+static void Ttk_StylePkgFree(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)clientData;
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    Theme *themePtr;
+    Cleanup *cleanup;
+
+    /*
+     * Cancel any pending ThemeChanged calls:
+     */
+    if (pkgPtr->themeChangePending) {
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ThemeChangedProc, pkgPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Free themes.
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&pkgPtr->themeTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	themePtr = (Theme *) Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	FreeTheme(themePtr);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&pkgPtr->themeTable);
+
+    /*
+     * Free element constructor table:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&pkgPtr->factoryTable, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	ckfree(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&pkgPtr->factoryTable);
+
+    /*
+     * Release cache:
+     */
+    Ttk_FreeResourceCache(pkgPtr->cache);
+
+    /*
+     * Call all registered cleanup procedures:
+     */
+    cleanup = pkgPtr->cleanupList;
+    while (cleanup) {
+	Cleanup *next = cleanup->next;
+	cleanup->cleanupProc(cleanup->clientData);
+	ckfree((ClientData)cleanup);
+	cleanup = next;
+    }
+
+    ckfree((char*)pkgPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * GetStylePackageData --
+ * 	Look up the package data registered with the interp.
+ */
+
+static StylePackageData *GetStylePackageData(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    return (StylePackageData*)Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "StylePackage", NULL);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_RegisterCleanup --
+ *
+ *	Register a function to be called when a theme engine is deleted.
+ *	(This only happens when the main interp is destroyed). The cleanup
+ *	function is called with the current Tcl interpreter and the client
+ *	data provided here.
+ *
+ */
+void Ttk_RegisterCleanup(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, ClientData clientData, Ttk_CleanupProc *cleanupProc)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    Cleanup *cleanup = (Cleanup*)ckalloc(sizeof(*cleanup));
+
+    cleanup->clientData = clientData;
+    cleanup->cleanupProc = cleanupProc;
+    cleanup->next = pkgPtr->cleanupList;
+    pkgPtr->cleanupList = cleanup;
+}
+
+/* ThemeChangedProc -- 
+ * 	Notify all widgets that the theme has been changed.
+ * 	Scheduled as an idle callback; clientData is a StylePackageData *.
+ *
+ * 	Sends a <<ThemeChanged>> event to every widget in the hierarchy.
+ * 	Ttk widgets respond to this by calling the  WorldChanged class proc,
+ * 	which in turn recreates the layout.
+ *
+ * 	The Tk C API doesn't doesn't provide an easy way to traverse
+ * 	the widget hierarchy, so this is done by evaluating a Tcl script. 
+ */
+
+static void ThemeChangedProc(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    static char ThemeChangedScript[] = "ttk::ThemeChanged";
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)clientData;
+
+    if (Tcl_EvalEx(pkgPtr->interp, ThemeChangedScript, -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL)
+	    != TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_BackgroundError(pkgPtr->interp);
+    }
+    pkgPtr->themeChangePending = 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ * ThemeChanged --
+ * 	Schedule a call to ThemeChanged if one is not already pending.
+ */
+static void ThemeChanged(StylePackageData *pkgPtr)
+{
+    if (!pkgPtr->themeChangePending) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ThemeChangedProc, pkgPtr);
+	pkgPtr->themeChangePending = 1;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_CreateTheme --
+ *	Create a new theme and register it in the global theme table.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	Pointer to new Theme structure; NULL if named theme already exists.
+ * 	Leaves an error message in interp's result on error.
+ */
+
+Ttk_Theme
+Ttk_CreateTheme(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in which to create theme */
+    const char *name,		/* Name of the theme to create. */
+    Ttk_Theme parent) 		/* Parent/fallback theme, NULL for default */
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int newEntry;
+    Theme *themePtr;
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&pkgPtr->themeTable, name, &newEntry);
+    if (!newEntry) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Theme ", name, " already exists", NULL);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Initialize new theme:
+     */
+    if (!parent) parent = pkgPtr->defaultTheme;
+
+    themePtr = NewTheme(pkgPtr->cache, parent);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData) themePtr);
+
+    return themePtr;
+}
+
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_SetThemeEnabledProc --
+ *	Sets a procedure that is used to check that this theme is available.
+ */
+
+void Ttk_SetThemeEnabledProc(
+    Ttk_Theme theme, Ttk_ThemeEnabledProc enabledProc, void *enabledData)
+{
+    theme->enabledProc = enabledProc;
+    theme->enabledData = enabledData;
+}
+
+/*
+ * LookupTheme --
+ *	Retrieve a registered theme by name.  If not found, 
+ *	returns NULL and leaves an error message in interp's result.
+ */
+
+static Ttk_Theme LookupTheme(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* where to leave error messages */
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr,	/* style package master record */
+    const char *name)		/* theme name */
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&pkgPtr->themeTable, name);
+    if (!entryPtr) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "theme \"", name, "\" doesn't exist", NULL);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    return (Ttk_Theme)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetTheme --
+ *	Public interface to LookupTheme.
+ */
+Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *themeName)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+
+    return LookupTheme(interp, pkgPtr, themeName);
+}
+
+Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    return pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+}
+
+Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    return pkgPtr->defaultTheme;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UseTheme --
+ * 	Set the current theme, notify all widgets that the theme has changed.
+ */
+int Ttk_UseTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme  theme)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+
+    /*
+     * Check if selected theme is enabled:
+     */
+    while (theme && !theme->enabledProc(theme, theme->enabledData)) {
+    	theme = theme->parentPtr;
+    }
+    if (!theme) {
+    	/* This shouldn't happen -- default theme should always work */
+	Tcl_Panic("No themes available?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    pkgPtr->currentTheme = theme;
+    ThemeChanged(pkgPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetResourceCache --
+ * 	Return the resource cache associated with 'interp'
+ */
+Ttk_ResourceCache
+Ttk_GetResourceCache(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    return pkgPtr->cache;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Register a new layout specification with a style.
+ * @@@ TODO: Make sure layoutName is not ".", root style must not have a layout
+ */
+static void Ttk_RegisterLayoutTemplate(
+    Ttk_Theme theme,			/* Target theme */
+    const char *layoutName,		/* Name of new layout */
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate layoutTemplate)	/* Template */
+{
+    Ttk_Style style = Ttk_GetStyle(theme, layoutName);
+    if (style->layoutTemplate) {
+	Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(style->layoutTemplate);
+    }
+    style->layoutTemplate = layoutTemplate;
+}
+
+void Ttk_RegisterLayout(
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr,		/* Target theme */
+    const char *layoutName,	/* Name of new layout */
+    Ttk_LayoutSpec specPtr)	/* Static layout information */
+{
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate layoutTemplate = Ttk_BuildLayoutTemplate(specPtr);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayoutTemplate(themePtr, layoutName, layoutTemplate);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetStyle --
+ * 	Look up a Style from a Theme, create new style if not found.
+ */
+Ttk_Style Ttk_GetStyle(Ttk_Theme themePtr, const char *styleName)
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int newStyle;
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&themePtr->styleTable, styleName, &newStyle);
+    if (newStyle) {
+	Ttk_Style stylePtr = NewStyle();
+	const char *dot = strchr(styleName, '.');
+
+	if (dot) {
+	    stylePtr->parentStyle = Ttk_GetStyle(themePtr, dot + 1);
+	} else {
+	    stylePtr->parentStyle = themePtr->rootStyle;
+	}
+
+	stylePtr->styleName = Tcl_GetHashKey(&themePtr->styleTable, entryPtr);
+	stylePtr->cache = stylePtr->parentStyle->cache;
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData)stylePtr);
+	return stylePtr;
+    }
+    return (Style*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+}
+
+/* FindLayoutTemplate --
+ * 	Locate a layout template in the layout table, checking
+ * 	generic names to specific names first, then looking for
+ * 	the full name in the parent theme.
+ */
+Ttk_LayoutTemplate
+Ttk_FindLayoutTemplate(Ttk_Theme themePtr, const char *layoutName)
+{
+    while (themePtr) {
+	Ttk_Style stylePtr = Ttk_GetStyle(themePtr, layoutName);
+	while (stylePtr) {
+	    if (stylePtr->layoutTemplate) {
+		return stylePtr->layoutTemplate;
+	    }
+	    stylePtr = stylePtr->parentStyle;
+	}
+	themePtr = themePtr->parentPtr;
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+const char *Ttk_StyleName(Ttk_Style stylePtr)
+{
+    return stylePtr->styleName;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_GetElement --
+ *	Look up an element implementation by name in a given theme.
+ *	If not found, try generic element names in this theme, then
+ *	repeat the lookups in the parent theme.
+ *	If not found, return the null element.
+ */
+Ttk_Element Ttk_GetElement(Ttk_Theme themePtr, const char *elementName)
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    const char *dot = elementName;
+
+    /*
+     * Check if element has already been registered:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&themePtr->elementTable, elementName);
+    if (entryPtr) {
+	return (Ttk_Element)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Check generic names:
+     */
+    while (!entryPtr && ((dot = strchr(dot, '.')) != NULL)) {
+	dot++;
+	entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&themePtr->elementTable, dot);
+    }
+    if (entryPtr) {
+	return (ElementImpl *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Check parent theme:
+     */
+    if (themePtr->parentPtr) {
+	return Ttk_GetElement(themePtr->parentPtr, elementName);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Not found, and this is the root theme; return null element, "".
+     * (@@@ SHOULD: signal a background error)
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&themePtr->elementTable, "");
+    /* ASSERT: entryPtr != 0 */
+    return (Ttk_Element)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+}
+
+const char *Ttk_ElementName(ElementImpl *elementImpl)
+{
+    return elementImpl->name;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_RegisterElementFactory --
+ *	Register a new element factory.
+ */
+int Ttk_RegisterElementFactory(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,	const char *name,
+    Ttk_ElementFactory factory, void *clientData)
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = GetStylePackageData(interp);
+    FactoryRec *recPtr = (FactoryRec*)ckalloc(sizeof(*recPtr));
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int newEntry;
+
+    recPtr->factory = factory;
+    recPtr->clientData = clientData;
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&pkgPtr->factoryTable, name, &newEntry);
+    if (!newEntry) {
+    	/* Free old factory: */
+	ckfree(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+    }
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, recPtr);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+
+/* Ttk_CloneElement -- element factory procedure.
+ * 	(style element create $name) "from" $theme ?$element?
+ */
+static int Ttk_CloneElement(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData,
+    Ttk_Theme theme, const char *elementName,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])
+{
+    Ttk_Theme fromTheme;
+    ElementImpl *fromElement;
+
+    if (objc <= 0 || objc > 2) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 0, objv, "theme ?element?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    fromTheme = Ttk_GetTheme(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[0]));
+    if (!fromTheme) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	fromElement = Ttk_GetElement(fromTheme, Tcl_GetString(objv[1]));
+    } else {
+	fromElement = Ttk_GetElement(fromTheme, elementName);
+    }
+    if (!fromElement) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, elementName,
+		fromElement->specPtr, fromElement->clientData) == NULL)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_RegisterElement--
+ *	Register an element in the given theme.
+ *	Returns: Element handle if successful, NULL otherwise.
+ *	On failure, leaves an error message in interp's result 
+ *	if interp is non-NULL.
+ */
+
+Ttk_Element Ttk_RegisterElement(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Where to leave error messages */
+    Ttk_Theme theme,		/* Style engine providing the implementation. */
+    const char *name,		/* Name of new element */
+    Ttk_ElementSpec *specPtr, 	/* Static template information */
+    void *clientData)		/* application-specific data */
+{
+    ElementImpl *elementImpl;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int newEntry;
+
+    if (specPtr->version != TK_STYLE_VERSION_2) {
+	/* Version mismatch */
+	if (interp) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Internal error: Ttk_RegisterElement (",
+		name, "): invalid version",
+		NULL);
+	}
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&theme->elementTable, name, &newEntry);
+    if (!newEntry) {
+	if (interp) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Duplicate element ", name, NULL);
+	}
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&theme->elementTable, entryPtr);
+    elementImpl = NewElementImpl(name, specPtr, clientData);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, elementImpl);
+
+    return elementImpl;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_RegisterElementSpec (deprecated) --
+ * 	Register a new element.
+ */
+int Ttk_RegisterElementSpec(Ttk_Theme theme,
+    const char *name, Ttk_ElementSpec *specPtr, void *clientData)
+{
+    return Ttk_RegisterElement(NULL, theme, name, specPtr, clientData) 
+	   ? TCL_OK : TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Element record initialization.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * AllocateResource --
+ * 	Extra initialization for element options like TK_OPTION_COLOR, etc.
+ *
+ * Returns: 1 if OK, 0 on failure.
+ *
+ * Note: if resource allocation fails at this point (just prior
+ * to drawing an element), there's really no good place to
+ * report the error.  Instead we just silently fail.
+ */
+
+static int AllocateResource(
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tcl_Obj **destPtr,
+    int optionType)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *resource = *destPtr;
+
+    switch (optionType)
+    {
+	case TK_OPTION_FONT:
+	    return (*destPtr = Ttk_UseFont(cache, tkwin, resource)) != NULL;
+	case TK_OPTION_COLOR:
+	    return (*destPtr = Ttk_UseColor(cache, tkwin, resource)) != NULL;
+	case TK_OPTION_BORDER:
+	    return (*destPtr = Ttk_UseBorder(cache, tkwin, resource)) != NULL;
+	default:
+	    /* no-op; always succeeds */
+	    return 1;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * InitializeElementRecord --
+ *
+ * 	Fill in the element record based on the element's option table.
+ * 	Resources are initialized from:
+ * 	the corresponding widget option if present and non-NULL,
+ * 	otherwise the dynamic state map if specified,
+ * 	otherwise from the corresponding widget resource if present,
+ * 	otherwise the default value specified at registration time.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	1 if OK, 0 if an error is detected.
+ *
+ * NOTES:
+ * 	Tcl_Obj * reference counts are _NOT_ adjusted.
+ */
+
+static
+int InitializeElementRecord(
+    ElementImpl *element,	/* Element instance to initialize */
+    Ttk_Style style,		/* Style table */
+    char *widgetRecord,		/* Source of widget option values */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,	/* Option table describing widget record */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Corresponding window */
+    Ttk_State state)	/* Widget or element state */
+{
+    char *elementRecord = element->elementRecord;
+    OptionMap optionMap = GetOptionMap(element,optionTable);
+    int nResources = element->nResources;
+    Ttk_ResourceCache cache = style->cache;
+    Ttk_ElementOptionSpec *elementOption = element->specPtr->options;
+
+    int i;
+    for (i=0; i<nResources; ++i, ++elementOption) {
+	Tcl_Obj **dest = (Tcl_Obj **)
+	    (elementRecord + elementOption->offset);
+	const char *optionName = elementOption->optionName;
+	Tcl_Obj *stateMap = LookupStateMap(style, optionName);
+	Tcl_Obj *dynamicSetting = 0;
+	Tcl_Obj *widgetValue = 0;
+	Tcl_Obj *elementDefault = element->defaultValues[i];
+
+	if (stateMap) {
+	    dynamicSetting = Ttk_StateMapLookup(NULL, stateMap, state);
+	}
+
+	if (optionMap[i]) {
+	    widgetValue = *(Tcl_Obj **)
+		(widgetRecord + optionMap[i]->objOffset);
+	}
+
+	if (widgetValue) {
+	    *dest = widgetValue;
+	} else if (dynamicSetting) {
+	    *dest = dynamicSetting;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_Obj *styleDefault = LookupDefault(style, optionName);
+	    *dest = styleDefault ? styleDefault : elementDefault;
+	}
+
+	if (!AllocateResource(cache, tkwin, dest, elementOption->type)) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Public API.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_QueryStyle --
+ * 	Look up a style option based on the current state.
+ */
+Tcl_Obj *Ttk_QueryStyle(
+    Ttk_Style style,		/* Style to query */
+    void *recordPtr,		/* Widget record */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,	/* Option table describing widget record */
+    const char *optionName,	/* Option name */
+    Ttk_State state) 		/* Current state */
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *stateMap;
+    const Tk_OptionSpec *optionSpec;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+
+    /*
+     * Check widget record:
+     */
+    optionSpec = TTKGetOptionSpec(optionName, optionTable, TK_OPTION_ANY);
+    if (optionSpec) {
+	result = *(Tcl_Obj**)(((char*)recordPtr) + optionSpec->objOffset);
+	if (result) {
+	    return result;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Check dynamic settings:
+     */
+    stateMap = LookupStateMap(style, optionName);
+    if (stateMap) {
+	result = Ttk_StateMapLookup(NULL, stateMap, state);
+	if (result) {
+	    return result;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Use style default:
+     */
+    return LookupDefault(style, optionName);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_ElementSize --
+ *	Compute the requested size of the given element.
+ */
+
+void
+Ttk_ElementSize(
+    ElementImpl *element,		/* Element to query */
+    Ttk_Style style,			/* Style settings */
+    char *recordPtr,			/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,		/* Description of widget record */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,			/* The widget window. */
+    Ttk_State state,			/* Current widget state */
+    int *widthPtr, 			/* Requested width */
+    int *heightPtr,			/* Reqested height */
+    Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)		/* Requested inner border */
+{
+    paddingPtr->left = paddingPtr->right = paddingPtr->top = paddingPtr->bottom
+	= *widthPtr = *heightPtr = 0;
+
+    if (!InitializeElementRecord(element, style, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin,  state))
+	return;
+    element->specPtr->size(
+	element->clientData, element->elementRecord,
+	tkwin, widthPtr, heightPtr, paddingPtr);
+    *widthPtr += paddingPtr->left + paddingPtr->right;
+    *heightPtr += paddingPtr->top + paddingPtr->bottom;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_DrawElement --
+ *	Draw the given widget element in a given drawable area.
+ */
+
+void
+Ttk_DrawElement(
+    ElementImpl *element,		/* Element instance */
+    Ttk_Style style,			/* Style settings */
+    char *recordPtr,			/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,		/* Description of option table */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,			/* The widget window. */
+    Drawable d,				/* Where to draw element. */
+    Ttk_Box b,				/* Element area */
+    Ttk_State state)			/* Widget or element state flags. */
+{
+    if (b.width <= 0 || b.height <= 0)
+	return;
+    if (!InitializeElementRecord(element, style, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin,  state))
+	return;
+    element->specPtr->draw(
+	element->clientData, element->elementRecord,
+	tkwin, d, b, state);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ 'style' command ensemble procedures.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * EnumerateHashTable --
+ * 	Helper routine.  Sets interp's result to the list of all keys
+ * 	in the hash table.
+ *
+ * Returns: TCL_OK.
+ * Side effects: Sets interp's result.
+ */
+
+static int EnumerateHashTable(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_HashTable *ht)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(ht, &search);
+
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *nameObj = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tcl_GetHashKey(ht, entryPtr),-1);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, nameObj);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* HashTableToDict --
+ * 	Helper routine.  Converts a TCL_STRING_KEYS Tcl_HashTable 
+ * 	with Tcl_Obj * entries into a dictionary.
+ */
+static Tcl_Obj* HashTableToDict(Tcl_HashTable *ht)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(ht, &search);
+
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_Obj *nameObj = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tcl_GetHashKey(ht, entryPtr),-1);
+	Tcl_Obj *valueObj = (Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, nameObj);
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, valueObj);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+
+    return result;
+}
+
+/* + style map $style ? -resource statemap ... ?
+ *
+ * 	Note that resource names are unconstrained; the Style
+ * 	doesn't know what resources individual elements may use.
+ */
+static int
+StyleMapCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,		/* Master StylePackageData pointer */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* Current interpreter */
+    int objc,				/* Number of arguments */
+    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])		/* Argument objects */
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    const char *styleName;
+    Style *stylePtr;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+usage:
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp,2,objv,"style ?-option ?value...??");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    styleName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+    stylePtr = Ttk_GetStyle(theme, styleName);
+
+    /* NOTE: StateMaps are actually Tcl_Obj *s, so HashTableToDict works
+     * for settingsTable.
+     */
+    if (objc == 3) {		/* style map $styleName */
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, HashTableToDict(&stylePtr->settingsTable));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 4) {	/* style map $styleName -option */
+	const char *optionName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = 
+	    Tcl_FindHashEntry(&stylePtr->settingsTable, optionName);
+	if (entryPtr) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, (Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	}
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc % 2 != 1) {
+	goto usage;
+    }
+
+    for (i = 3; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	const char *optionName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	Tcl_Obj *stateMap = objv[i+1];
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+	int newEntry;
+
+	/* Make sure 'stateMap' is legal:
+	 * (@@@ SHOULD: check for valid resource values as well,
+	 * but we don't know what types they should be at this level.)
+	 */
+	if (!Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj(interp, stateMap))
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+	entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(
+		&stylePtr->settingsTable,optionName,&newEntry);
+
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(stateMap);
+	if (!newEntry) {
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount((Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	}
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, stateMap);
+    }
+    ThemeChanged(pkgPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + style configure $style -option ?value...
+ */
+static int StyleConfigureCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    const char *styleName;
+    Style *stylePtr;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+usage:
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp,2,objv,"style ?-option ?value...??");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    styleName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+    stylePtr = Ttk_GetStyle(theme, styleName);
+
+    if (objc == 3) {		/* style default $styleName */
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, HashTableToDict(&stylePtr->defaultsTable));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 4) {	/* style default $styleName -option */
+	const char *optionName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = 
+	    Tcl_FindHashEntry(&stylePtr->defaultsTable, optionName);
+	if (entryPtr) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, (Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	}
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc % 2 != 1) {
+	goto usage;
+    }
+
+    for (i = 3; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	const char *optionName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	Tcl_Obj *value = objv[i+1];
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+	int newEntry;
+
+	entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(
+		&stylePtr->defaultsTable,optionName,&newEntry);
+
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(value);
+	if (!newEntry) {
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount((Tcl_Obj*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	}
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, value);
+    }
+
+    ThemeChanged(pkgPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + style lookup $style -option ?statespec? ?defaultValue?
+ */
+static int StyleLookupCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    Ttk_Style style = NULL;
+    const char *optionName;
+    Ttk_State state = 0ul;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+
+    if (objc < 4 || objc > 6) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "style -option ?state? ?default?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    style = Ttk_GetStyle(theme, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
+    if (!style) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    optionName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+
+    if (objc >= 5) {
+	Ttk_StateSpec stateSpec;
+	/* @@@ SB: Ttk_GetStateFromObj(); 'offbits' spec is ignored */
+	if (Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, objv[4], &stateSpec) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	state = stateSpec.onbits;
+    }
+
+    result = Ttk_QueryStyle(style, NULL,NULL, optionName, state);
+    if (result == NULL && objc >= 6) { /* Use caller-supplied fallback */
+	result = objv[5];
+    }
+
+    if (result) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + style theme create name ?-parent $theme? ?-settings { script }?
+ */
+static int StyleThemeCreateCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)clientData;
+    static const char *optStrings[] =
+    	 { "-parent", "-settings", NULL };
+    enum { OP_PARENT, OP_SETTINGS };
+    Ttk_Theme parentTheme = pkgPtr->defaultTheme, newTheme;
+    Tcl_Obj *settingsScript = NULL;
+    const char *themeName;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc < 4 || objc % 2 != 0) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "name ?options?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    themeName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+
+    for (i=4; i < objc; i +=2) {
+	int option;
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(
+	    interp, objv[i], optStrings, "option", 0, &option) != TCL_OK)
+	{
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	switch (option) {
+	    case OP_PARENT:
+		parentTheme = LookupTheme(
+		    interp, pkgPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]));
+		if (!parentTheme)
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+	    	break;
+	    case OP_SETTINGS:
+		settingsScript = objv[i+1];
+		break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    newTheme = Ttk_CreateTheme(interp, themeName, parentTheme);
+    if (!newTheme) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Evaluate the -settings script, if supplied:
+     */
+    if (settingsScript) {
+	Ttk_Theme oldTheme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+	int status;
+
+	pkgPtr->currentTheme = newTheme;
+	status = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, settingsScript, 0);
+	pkgPtr->currentTheme = oldTheme;
+	return status;
+    } else {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + style theme names --
+ * 	Return list of registered themes.
+ */
+static int StyleThemeNamesCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    return EnumerateHashTable(interp, &pkgPtr->themeTable);
+}
+
+/* + style theme settings $theme $script
+ *
+ * 	Temporarily sets the current theme to $themeName,
+ * 	evaluates $script, then restores the old theme.
+ */
+static int
+StyleThemeSettingsCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,		/* Master StylePackageData pointer */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* Current interpreter */
+    int objc,				/* Number of arguments */
+    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])		/* Argument objects */
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme oldTheme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    Ttk_Theme newTheme;
+    int status;
+
+    if (objc != 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "theme script");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    newTheme = LookupTheme(interp, pkgPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+    if (!newTheme)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    pkgPtr->currentTheme = newTheme;
+    status = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, objv[4], 0);
+    pkgPtr->currentTheme = oldTheme;
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* + style element create name type ? ...args ?
+ */
+static int StyleElementCreateCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    const char *elementName, *factoryName;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    FactoryRec *recPtr;
+
+    if (objc < 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 5, objv, "name type ?options...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    elementName = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+    factoryName = Tcl_GetString(objv[4]);
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&pkgPtr->factoryTable, factoryName);
+    if (!entryPtr) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "No such element type ", factoryName, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    recPtr = (FactoryRec *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+
+    return recPtr->factory(interp, recPtr->clientData,
+	    theme, elementName, objc - 5, objv + 5);
+}
+
+/* + style element names --
+ * 	Return a list of elements defined in the current theme.
+ */
+static int StyleElementNamesCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return EnumerateHashTable(interp, &theme->elementTable);
+}
+
+/* + style element options $element --
+ */
+static int StyleElementOptionsCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "element");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&theme->elementTable, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+    if (entryPtr) {
+	ElementImpl *elementImpl = (ElementImpl *)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+	Ttk_ElementSpec *specPtr = elementImpl->specPtr;
+	Ttk_ElementOptionSpec *option = specPtr->options;
+	Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+
+	while (option->optionName) {
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(
+		interp, result, Tcl_NewStringObj(option->optionName,-1));
+	    ++option;
+	}
+
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
+	"element ", Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), " not found",
+	NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* + style layout name ?spec?
+ */
+static int StyleLayoutCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme = pkgPtr->currentTheme;
+    const char *layoutName;
+    Ttk_LayoutTemplate layoutTemplate;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name ?spec?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    layoutName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	layoutTemplate = Ttk_FindLayoutTemplate(theme, layoutName);
+	if (!layoutTemplate) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Layout ", layoutName, " not found", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Ttk_UnparseLayoutTemplate(layoutTemplate));
+    } else {
+	layoutTemplate = Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate(interp, objv[3]);
+	if (!layoutTemplate) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Ttk_RegisterLayoutTemplate(theme, layoutName, layoutTemplate);
+	ThemeChanged(pkgPtr);
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + style theme use $theme --
+ *  	Sets the current theme to $theme
+ */
+static int
+StyleThemeUseCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,		/* Master StylePackageData pointer */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* Current interpreter */
+    int objc,				/* Number of arguments */
+    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])		/* Argument objects */
+{
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_Theme theme;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "theme");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    theme = LookupTheme(interp, pkgPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+    if (!theme) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    return Ttk_UseTheme(interp, theme);
+}
+
+/*
+ * StyleObjCmd --
+ *	Implementation of the [style] command.
+ */
+
+struct Ensemble {
+    const char *name;		/* subcommand name */
+    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *command; 	/* subcommand implementation, OR: */
+    struct Ensemble *ensemble;	/* subcommand ensemble */
+};
+
+struct Ensemble StyleThemeEnsemble[] = {
+    { "create", StyleThemeCreateCmd, 0 },
+    { "names", StyleThemeNamesCmd, 0 },
+    { "settings", StyleThemeSettingsCmd, 0 },
+    { "use", StyleThemeUseCmd, 0 },
+    { NULL, 0, 0 }
+};
+
+struct Ensemble StyleElementEnsemble[] = {
+    { "create", StyleElementCreateCmd, 0 },
+    { "names", StyleElementNamesCmd, 0 },
+    { "options", StyleElementOptionsCmd, 0 },
+    { NULL, 0, 0 }
+};
+
+struct Ensemble StyleEnsemble[] = {
+    { "configure", StyleConfigureCmd, 0 },
+    { "map", StyleMapCmd, 0 },
+    { "lookup", StyleLookupCmd, 0 },
+    { "layout", StyleLayoutCmd, 0 },
+    { "theme", 0, StyleThemeEnsemble },
+    { "element", 0, StyleElementEnsemble },
+
+    { "default", StyleConfigureCmd, 0 }, /* TEMP: for pre-0.7 compatibility */
+    { NULL, 0, 0 }
+};
+
+static int
+StyleObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,		/* Master StylePackageData pointer */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* Current interpreter */
+    int objc,				/* Number of arguments */
+    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])		/* Argument objects */
+{
+    struct Ensemble *ensemble = StyleEnsemble;
+    int optPtr = 1;
+    int index;
+
+    while (optPtr < objc) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp,
+		objv[optPtr], ensemble, sizeof(ensemble[0]),
+		"command", 0, &index)
+	    != TCL_OK)
+	{
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (ensemble[index].command) {
+	    return ensemble[index].command(clientData, interp, objc, objv);
+	}
+	ensemble = ensemble[index].ensemble;
+	++optPtr;
+    }
+    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, optPtr, objv, "option ?arg arg...?");
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_StylePkgInit --
+ *	Initializes all the structures that are used by the style
+ *	package on a per-interp basis.
+ */
+
+void Ttk_StylePkgInit(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Tcl_Namespace *nsPtr;
+
+    StylePackageData *pkgPtr = (StylePackageData *)
+	ckalloc(sizeof(StylePackageData));
+
+    pkgPtr->interp = interp;
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&pkgPtr->themeTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&pkgPtr->factoryTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    pkgPtr->cleanupList = NULL;
+    pkgPtr->cache = Ttk_CreateResourceCache(interp);
+    pkgPtr->themeChangePending = 0;
+
+    Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "StylePackage", Ttk_StylePkgFree,
+	(ClientData)pkgPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Create the default system theme:
+     *
+     * pkgPtr->defaultTheme must be initialized to 0 before
+     * calling Ttk_CreateTheme for the first time, since it's used
+     * as the parent theme.
+     */
+    pkgPtr->defaultTheme = 0;
+    pkgPtr->defaultTheme = pkgPtr->currentTheme =
+	Ttk_CreateTheme(interp, "default", NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * Register null element, used as a last-resort fallback:
+     */
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, pkgPtr->defaultTheme, "", &NullElementSpec, 0);
+
+    /*
+     * Register commands:
+     */
+    Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "::ttk::style", StyleObjCmd,
+	    (ClientData)pkgPtr, 0);
+
+    nsPtr = Tcl_FindNamespace(interp, "::ttk", (Tcl_Namespace *) NULL,
+	    TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG);
+    Tcl_Export(interp, nsPtr, "style", 0 /* dontResetList */);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElementFactory(interp, "from", Ttk_CloneElement, 0);
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.h b/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2bdba70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTheme.h
@@ -0,0 +1,409 @@
+/*
+ * ttkTheme.h --
+ *      Declarations for Tk style engine.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ *
+ * $Id: ttkTheme.h,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ */
+
+#ifndef TKTHEME_H
+#define TKTHEME_H 1
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#if defined(BUILD_ttk)
+#	define TTKAPI DLLEXPORT
+#	undef USE_TTK_STUBS
+#else
+#	define TTKAPI DLLIMPORT
+#endif
+
+/* Ttk syncs to the Tk version & patchlevel */
+#define TTK_VERSION    TK_VERSION
+#define TTK_PATCH_LEVEL TK_PATCH_LEVEL
+
+/*
+ * Statically branched from tile 0.7.8.
+ */
+#ifdef TTK_DEFINE_TILE
+#define TILE_VERSION		"0.7.8"
+#define TILE_PATCH_LEVEL	TILE_VERSION
+#endif
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Defaults for element option specifications.
+ */
+#define DEFAULT_FONT 		"TkDefaultFont"
+#define DEFAULT_BACKGROUND	"#d9d9d9"
+#define DEFAULT_FOREGROUND	"black"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget states.
+ * 	Keep in sync with stateNames[] in tkstate.c.
+ */
+
+typedef unsigned int Ttk_State;
+
+#define TTK_STATE_ACTIVE	(1<<0)
+#define TTK_STATE_DISABLED	(1<<1)
+#define TTK_STATE_FOCUS		(1<<2)
+#define TTK_STATE_PRESSED	(1<<3)
+#define TTK_STATE_SELECTED	(1<<4)
+#define TTK_STATE_BACKGROUND	(1<<5)
+#define TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE	(1<<6)
+#define TTK_STATE_INVALID	(1<<7)
+#define TTK_STATE_READONLY 	(1<<8)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER7 	(1<<9)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER6		(1<<10)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER5		(1<<11)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER4		(1<<12)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER3		(1<<13)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER2		(1<<14)
+#define TTK_STATE_USER1		(1<<15)
+
+/* Maintenance note: if you get all the way to "USER1",
+ * see tkstate.c
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    unsigned int onbits;	/* bits to turn on */
+    unsigned int offbits;	/* bits to turn off */
+} Ttk_StateSpec;
+
+#define Ttk_StateMatches(state, spec) \
+    (((state) & ((spec)->onbits|(spec)->offbits)) == (spec)->onbits)
+
+#define Ttk_ModifyState(state, spec) \
+    (((state) & ~(spec)->offbits) | (spec)->onbits)
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *, Ttk_StateSpec *);
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(unsigned int onbits,unsigned int offbits);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ State maps and state tables.
+ */
+typedef Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StateMap;
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_StateMap Ttk_GetStateMapFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *);
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *Ttk_StateMapLookup(Tcl_Interp*, Ttk_StateMap, Ttk_State);
+
+/*
+ * Table for looking up an integer index based on widget state:
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    int index;			/* Value to return if this entry matches */
+    unsigned int onBits;	/* Bits which must be set */
+    unsigned int offBits;	/* Bits which must be cleared */
+} Ttk_StateTable;
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_StateTableLookup(Ttk_StateTable map[], Ttk_State);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Padding.
+ * 	Used to represent internal padding and borders.
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    short left;
+    short top;
+    short right;
+    short bottom;
+} Ttk_Padding;
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(Tcl_Interp*,Tk_Window,Tcl_Obj*,Ttk_Padding*);
+TTKAPI int Ttk_GetBorderFromObj(Tcl_Interp*,Tcl_Obj*,Ttk_Padding*);
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding Ttk_MakePadding(short l, short t, short r, short b);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding Ttk_UniformPadding(short borderWidth);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding Ttk_AddPadding(Ttk_Padding, Ttk_Padding);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Padding Ttk_RelievePadding(Ttk_Padding, int relief, int n);
+
+#define Ttk_PaddingWidth(p) ((p).left + (p).right)
+#define Ttk_PaddingHeight(p) ((p).top + (p).bottom)
+
+#define Ttk_SetMargins(tkwin, pad) \
+    Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(tkwin, pad.left, pad.right, pad.top, pad.bottom)
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Boxes.
+ * 	Used to represent rectangular regions
+ */
+typedef struct 	/* Hey, this is an XRectangle! */
+{
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    int width;
+    int height;
+} Ttk_Box;
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_MakeBox(int x, int y, int width, int height);
+TTKAPI int Ttk_BoxContains(Ttk_Box, int x, int y);
+
+#define Ttk_WinBox(tkwin) Ttk_MakeBox(0,0,Tk_Width(tkwin),Tk_Height(tkwin))
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout utilities.
+ */
+typedef enum {
+    TTK_SIDE_LEFT, TTK_SIDE_TOP, TTK_SIDE_RIGHT, TTK_SIDE_BOTTOM
+} Ttk_Side;
+
+typedef unsigned int Ttk_Sticky;
+
+/*
+ * -sticky bits for Ttk_StickBox:
+ */
+#define TTK_STICK_W	(0x1)
+#define TTK_STICK_E	(0x2)
+#define TTK_STICK_N	(0x4)
+#define TTK_STICK_S	(0x8)
+
+/*
+ * Aliases and useful combinations:
+ */
+#define TTK_FILL_X	(0x3)	/* -sticky ew */
+#define TTK_FILL_Y	(0xC)	/* -sticky ns */
+#define TTK_FILL_BOTH	(0xF)	/* -sticky nswe */
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_GetStickyFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *, Ttk_Sticky *);
+TTKAPI Tcl_Obj *Ttk_NewStickyObj(Ttk_Sticky);
+
+/*
+ * Extra bits for position specifications (combine -side and -sticky)
+ */
+
+typedef unsigned int Ttk_PositionSpec;	/* See below */
+
+#define TTK_PACK_LEFT	(0x10)	/* pack at left of current parcel */
+#define TTK_PACK_RIGHT	(0x20)	/* pack at right of current parcel */
+#define TTK_PACK_TOP	(0x40)	/* pack at top of current parcel */
+#define TTK_PACK_BOTTOM	(0x80)	/* pack at bottom of current parcel */
+#define TTK_EXPAND	(0x100)	/* use entire parcel */
+#define TTK_BORDER	(0x200)	/* draw this element after children */
+#define TTK_UNIT	(0x400)	/* treat descendants as a part of element */
+
+/*
+ * Extra bits for layout specifications
+ */
+#define TTK_CHILDREN	(0x1000)/* for LayoutSpecs -- children follow */
+#define TTK_LAYOUT_END	(0x2000)/* for LayoutSpecs -- end of child list */
+
+#define _TTK_MASK_STICK (0x0F)	/* See Ttk_UnparseLayout() */
+#define _TTK_MASK_PACK	(0xF0)	/* See Ttk_UnparseLayout(), packStrings */
+
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_PackBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_Side side);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_StickBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Ttk_Sticky sticky);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_AnchorBox(Ttk_Box parcel, int w, int h, Tk_Anchor anchor);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_PadBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_ExpandBox(Ttk_Box b, Ttk_Padding p);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_PlaceBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int w,int h, Ttk_Side,Ttk_Sticky);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Box Ttk_PositionBox(Ttk_Box *cavity, int w, int h, Ttk_PositionSpec);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Themes.
+ */
+extern void Ttk_StylePkgInit(Tcl_Interp *);
+
+typedef struct Ttk_Theme_ *Ttk_Theme;
+typedef struct Ttk_ElementImpl_ *Ttk_Element;
+typedef struct Ttk_Layout_ *Ttk_Layout;
+typedef struct Ttk_LayoutNode_ Ttk_LayoutNode;
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Theme Ttk_CreateTheme(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, Ttk_Theme parent);
+
+typedef int (Ttk_ThemeEnabledProc)(Ttk_Theme theme, void *clientData);
+extern void Ttk_SetThemeEnabledProc(Ttk_Theme, Ttk_ThemeEnabledProc, void *);
+
+extern int Ttk_UseTheme(Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Theme);
+
+typedef void (Ttk_CleanupProc)(void *clientData);
+TTKAPI void Ttk_RegisterCleanup(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, void *deleteData, Ttk_CleanupProc *cleanupProc);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Elements.
+ */
+
+enum TTKStyleVersion2 { TK_STYLE_VERSION_2 = 2 };
+
+typedef void (Ttk_ElementSizeProc)(void *clientData, void *elementRecord,
+        Tk_Window tkwin, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding*);
+typedef void (Ttk_ElementDrawProc)(void *clientData, void *elementRecord,
+        Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state);
+
+typedef struct Ttk_ElementOptionSpec 
+{
+    char *optionName;		/* Command-line name of the widget option */
+    Tk_OptionType type; 	/* Accepted option types */
+    int offset;			/* Offset of Tcl_Obj* field in element record */
+    char *defaultValue;		/* Default value to used if resource missing */
+} Ttk_ElementOptionSpec;
+
+#define TK_OPTION_ANY TK_OPTION_STRING
+
+typedef struct Ttk_ElementSpec {
+    enum TTKStyleVersion2 version;	/* Version of the style support. */
+    size_t elementSize;			/* Size of element record */ 
+    Ttk_ElementOptionSpec *options;	/* List of options, NULL-terminated */
+    Ttk_ElementSizeProc *size;		/* Compute min size and padding */
+    Ttk_ElementDrawProc *draw;  	/* Draw the element */
+} Ttk_ElementSpec;
+
+TTKAPI Ttk_Element Ttk_RegisterElement(
+	Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme theme, const char *elementName,
+	Ttk_ElementSpec *, void *clientData);
+
+typedef int (*Ttk_ElementFactory)
+	(Tcl_Interp *, void *clientData,
+	 Ttk_Theme, const char *elementName, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
+
+TTKAPI int Ttk_RegisterElementFactory(
+	Tcl_Interp *, const char *name, Ttk_ElementFactory, void *clientData);
+
+/*
+ * Null element implementation:
+ * has no geometry or layout; may be used as a stub or placeholder.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj	*unused;
+} NullElement;
+
+extern void NullElementGeometry
+	(void *, void *, Tk_Window, int *, int *, Ttk_Padding *);
+extern void NullElementDraw
+	(void *, void *, Tk_Window, Drawable, Ttk_Box, Ttk_State);
+extern Ttk_ElementOptionSpec NullElementOptions[];
+extern Ttk_ElementSpec NullElementSpec;
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout templates.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    const char *	elementName;
+    unsigned		opcode;
+} TTKLayoutInstruction, *Ttk_LayoutSpec;
+
+#define TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(name)	static TTKLayoutInstruction name[] = {
+#define TTK_GROUP(name, flags, children) \
+				{ name, flags | TTK_CHILDREN }, \
+				children \
+				{ 0, TTK_LAYOUT_END },
+#define TTK_NODE(name, flags)	{ name, flags },
+#define TTK_END_LAYOUT 		{ 0, TTK_LAYOUT_END } };
+
+TTKAPI void Ttk_RegisterLayout(
+    Ttk_Theme theme, const char *className, Ttk_LayoutSpec layoutSpec);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout instances.
+ */
+
+extern Ttk_Layout Ttk_CreateLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Theme, const char *name,
+    void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable, Tk_Window tkwin);
+
+extern Ttk_Layout Ttk_CreateSublayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Theme, Ttk_Layout, const char *name, Tk_OptionTable);
+
+extern void Ttk_FreeLayout(Ttk_Layout);
+
+extern void Ttk_LayoutSize(Ttk_Layout,Ttk_State,int *widthPtr,int *heightPtr);
+extern void Ttk_PlaceLayout(Ttk_Layout, Ttk_State, Ttk_Box);
+extern void Ttk_DrawLayout(Ttk_Layout, Ttk_State, Drawable);
+
+extern void Ttk_RebindSublayout(Ttk_Layout, void *recordPtr);
+
+extern Ttk_LayoutNode *Ttk_LayoutIdentify(Ttk_Layout, int x, int y);
+extern Ttk_LayoutNode *Ttk_LayoutFindNode(Ttk_Layout, const char *nodeName);
+
+extern const char *Ttk_LayoutNodeName(Ttk_LayoutNode *);
+extern Ttk_Box Ttk_LayoutNodeParcel(Ttk_LayoutNode *);
+extern Ttk_Box Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel(Ttk_Layout,Ttk_LayoutNode *);
+extern Ttk_Padding Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalPadding(Ttk_Layout,Ttk_LayoutNode *);
+extern void Ttk_LayoutNodeReqSize(Ttk_Layout, Ttk_LayoutNode *, int *w, int *h);
+
+extern void Ttk_LayoutNodeSetParcel(Ttk_LayoutNode *node, Ttk_Box parcel);
+extern void Ttk_PlaceLayoutNode(Ttk_Layout,Ttk_LayoutNode *, Ttk_Box);
+extern void Ttk_ChangeElementState(Ttk_LayoutNode *,unsigned set,unsigned clr);
+
+extern Tcl_Obj *Ttk_QueryOption(Ttk_Layout, const char *, Ttk_State);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Resource cache.
+ * 	See resource.c for explanation.
+ */
+
+typedef struct Ttk_ResourceCache_ *Ttk_ResourceCache;
+extern Ttk_ResourceCache Ttk_CreateResourceCache(Tcl_Interp *);
+extern void Ttk_FreeResourceCache(Ttk_ResourceCache);
+
+extern Ttk_ResourceCache Ttk_GetResourceCache(Tcl_Interp*);
+extern Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseFont(Ttk_ResourceCache, Tk_Window, Tcl_Obj *);
+extern Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseColor(Ttk_ResourceCache, Tk_Window, Tcl_Obj *);
+extern Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UseBorder(Ttk_ResourceCache, Tk_Window, Tcl_Obj *);
+extern Tk_Image Ttk_UseImage(Ttk_ResourceCache, Tk_Window, Tcl_Obj *);
+
+extern void Ttk_RegisterNamedColor(Ttk_ResourceCache, const char *, XColor *);
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Miscellaneous enumerations.
+ * 	Other stuff that element implementations need to know about.
+ */
+typedef enum 			/* -default option values */
+{
+    TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_NORMAL,	/* widget defaultable */
+    TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_ACTIVE,	/* currently the default widget */
+    TTK_BUTTON_DEFAULT_DISABLED	/* not defaultable */
+} Ttk_ButtonDefaultState;
+
+extern int Ttk_GetButtonDefaultStateFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *, int *);
+
+typedef enum 			/* -compound option values */
+{
+    TTK_COMPOUND_NONE,  	/* image if specified, otherwise text */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_TEXT,  	/* text only */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_IMAGE,  	/* image only */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_CENTER,	/* text overlays image */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_TOP,   	/* image above text */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_BOTTOM,	/* image below text */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_LEFT,   	/* image to left of text */
+    TTK_COMPOUND_RIGHT  	/* image to right of text */
+} Ttk_Compound;
+
+extern int Ttk_GetCompoundFromObj(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *, int *);
+
+typedef enum { 		/* -orient option values */
+    TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL,
+    TTK_ORIENT_VERTICAL 
+} Ttk_Orient;
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Stub table declarations:
+ */
+
+#include "ttkDecls.h"
+
+/*
+ * Drawing utilities for theme code:
+ * (@@@ find a better home for this)
+ */
+typedef enum { ARROW_UP, ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT } ArrowDirection;
+extern void ArrowSize(int h, ArrowDirection, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+extern void DrawArrow(Display *, Drawable, GC, Ttk_Box, ArrowDirection);
+extern void FillArrow(Display *, Drawable, GC, Ttk_Box, ArrowDirection);
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+#endif /* TKTHEME_H */
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkThemeInt.h b/generic/ttk/ttkThemeInt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..065dd44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkThemeInt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+/*
+ * $Id: ttkThemeInt.h,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Theme engine: private definitions.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English.  Freely redistributable.
+ */
+
+#ifndef TKTHEMEINT_INCLUDED
+#define TKTHEMEINT_INCLUDED 1
+
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+
+typedef struct Ttk_Style_ *Ttk_Style;
+typedef struct Ttk_TemplateNode_ Ttk_TemplateNode, *Ttk_LayoutTemplate;
+
+extern Ttk_Element Ttk_GetElement(Ttk_Theme theme, const char *name);
+extern const char *Ttk_ElementName(Ttk_Element);
+
+extern void Ttk_ElementSize(
+	Ttk_Element element, Ttk_Style, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable,
+	Tk_Window tkwin, Ttk_State state,
+	int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding*);
+extern void Ttk_DrawElement(
+	Ttk_Element element, Ttk_Style, char *recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable,
+	Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state);
+
+extern Tcl_Obj *Ttk_QueryStyle(
+    Ttk_Style, void *, Tk_OptionTable, const char *, Ttk_State state);
+
+extern Ttk_LayoutTemplate Ttk_ParseLayoutTemplate(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj *);
+extern Tcl_Obj *Ttk_UnparseLayoutTemplate(Ttk_LayoutTemplate);
+extern Ttk_LayoutTemplate Ttk_BuildLayoutTemplate(Ttk_LayoutSpec);
+extern void Ttk_FreeLayoutTemplate(Ttk_LayoutTemplate);
+
+extern Ttk_Style Ttk_GetStyle(Ttk_Theme themePtr, const char *styleName);
+extern Ttk_LayoutTemplate Ttk_FindLayoutTemplate(
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr, const char *layoutName);
+
+extern const char *Ttk_StyleName(Ttk_Style);
+
+
+#endif /* TKTHEMEINT_INCLUDED */
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTrace.c b/generic/ttk/ttkTrace.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..37a319b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTrace.c
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+/* $Id: ttkTrace.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ *
+ * Copyright 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Simplified interface to Tcl_TraceVariable.
+ *
+ * PROBLEM: Can't distinguish "variable does not exist" (which is OK) 
+ * from other errors (which are not).
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+struct TtkTraceHandle_
+{
+    Tcl_Interp		*interp;	/* Containing interpreter */
+    Tcl_Obj 		*varnameObj;	/* Name of variable being traced */
+    Ttk_TraceProc	callback;	/* Callback procedure */
+    void		*clientData;	/* Data to pass to callback */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Tcl_VarTraceProc for trace handles.
+ */
+static char *
+VarTraceProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Widget record pointer */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, 	/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    CONST char *name1,		/* (unused) */
+    CONST char *name2,		/* (unused) */
+    int flags)			/* Information about what happened. */
+{
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *tracePtr = clientData;
+    const char *name, *value;
+    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;
+
+    if (flags & TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    name = Tcl_GetString(tracePtr->varnameObj);
+
+    /*
+     * If the variable is being unset, then re-establish the trace:
+     */
+    if (flags & TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED) {
+	Tcl_TraceVar(interp, name,
+		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
+		VarTraceProc, clientData);
+	tracePtr->callback(tracePtr->clientData, NULL);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Call the callback:
+     */
+    valuePtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, name, NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    value = valuePtr ?  Tcl_GetString(valuePtr) : NULL;
+    tracePtr->callback(tracePtr->clientData, value);
+
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/* Ttk_TraceVariable(interp, varNameObj, callback, clientdata) --
+ * 	Attach a write trace to the specified variable,
+ * 	which will pass the variable's value to 'callback'
+ * 	whenever the variable is set.
+ *
+ * 	When the variable is unset, passes NULL to the callback
+ * 	and reattaches the trace.
+ */
+Ttk_TraceHandle *Ttk_TraceVariable(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Obj *varnameObj,
+    Ttk_TraceProc callback,
+    void *clientData)
+{
+    Ttk_TraceHandle *h = (Ttk_TraceHandle*)ckalloc(sizeof(*h));
+    int status;
+
+    h->interp = interp;
+    h->varnameObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(varnameObj);
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(h->varnameObj);
+    h->clientData = clientData;
+    h->callback = callback;
+
+    status = Tcl_TraceVar(interp, Tcl_GetString(varnameObj),
+	    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
+	    VarTraceProc, (ClientData)h);
+
+    if (status != TCL_OK) {
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(h->varnameObj);
+	ckfree((ClientData)h);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    return h;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_UntraceVariable --
+ * 	Remove previously-registered trace and free the handle.
+ */
+void Ttk_UntraceVariable(Ttk_TraceHandle *h)
+{
+    if (h) {
+	Tcl_UntraceVar(h->interp, Tcl_GetString(h->varnameObj),
+		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
+		VarTraceProc, (ClientData)h);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(h->varnameObj);
+	ckfree((ClientData)h);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * Ttk_FireTrace --
+ * 	Executes a trace handle as if the variable has been written.
+ *
+ * 	Note: may reenter the interpreter.
+ */
+int Ttk_FireTrace(Ttk_TraceHandle *tracePtr)
+{
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = tracePtr->interp;
+    void *clientData = tracePtr->clientData;
+    const char *name = Tcl_GetString(tracePtr->varnameObj);
+    Ttk_TraceProc callback = tracePtr->callback;
+    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;
+    const char *value;
+
+    /* Read the variable.
+     * Note that this can reenter the interpreter, and anything can happen --
+     * including the current trace handle being freed!
+     */
+    valuePtr = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, name, NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    value = valuePtr ? Tcl_GetString(valuePtr) : NULL;
+
+    /* Call callback.
+     */
+    callback(clientData, value);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTrack.c b/generic/ttk/ttkTrack.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4a6337e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTrack.c
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+/* $Id: ttkTrack.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * TrackElementState() -- helper routine for widgets
+ * like scrollbars in which individual elements may
+ * be active or pressed instead of the widget as a whole.
+ *
+ * Usage:
+ * 	TrackElementState(&recordPtr->core);
+ *
+ * Registers an event handler on the widget that tracks pointer
+ * events and updates the state of the element under the
+ * mouse cursor.
+ *
+ * The "active" element is the one under the mouse cursor,
+ * and is normally set to the ACTIVE state unless another element
+ * is currently being pressed.
+ *
+ * The active element becomes "pressed" on <ButtonPress> events,
+ * and remains "active" and "pressed" until the corresponding
+ * <ButtonRelease> event.
+ *
+ * TODO: Handle "chords" properly (e.g., <B1-ButtonPress-2>)
+ * TODO: Deal with grabs -- possible to get a Press event w/no corresponding Release.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+typedef struct 
+{
+    WidgetCore		*corePtr;	/* Widget to track */
+    Ttk_LayoutNode	*activeElement;	/* element under the mouse cursor */
+    Ttk_LayoutNode	*pressedElement; /* currently pressed element */
+} ElementStateTracker;
+
+/*
+ * ActivateElement(es, node) --
+ * 	Make 'node' the active element if non-NULL.
+ * 	Deactivates the currently active element if different.
+ *
+ * 	The active element has TTK_STATE_ACTIVE set _unless_
+ * 	another element is 'pressed'
+ */
+static void ActivateElement(ElementStateTracker *es, Ttk_LayoutNode *node)
+{
+    if (es->activeElement == node) {
+	/* No change */
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (!es->pressedElement) {
+	if (es->activeElement) {
+	    /* Deactivate old element */
+	    Ttk_ChangeElementState(es->activeElement, 0,TTK_STATE_ACTIVE);
+	} 
+	if (node) {
+	    /* Activate new element */
+	    Ttk_ChangeElementState(node, TTK_STATE_ACTIVE,0);
+	}
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(es->corePtr);
+    }
+
+    es->activeElement = node;
+}
+
+/* ReleaseElement --
+ * 	Releases the currently pressed element, if any.
+ */
+static void ReleaseElement(ElementStateTracker *es)
+{
+    if (!es->pressedElement)
+	return;
+
+    Ttk_ChangeElementState(
+	es->pressedElement, 0,TTK_STATE_PRESSED|TTK_STATE_ACTIVE);
+    es->pressedElement = 0;
+
+    /* Reactivate element under the mouse cursor:
+     */
+    if (es->activeElement)
+	Ttk_ChangeElementState(es->activeElement, TTK_STATE_ACTIVE,0);
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(es->corePtr);
+}
+
+/* PressElement --
+ * 	Presses the specified element.
+ */
+static void PressElement(ElementStateTracker *es, Ttk_LayoutNode *node)
+{
+    if (es->pressedElement) {
+	ReleaseElement(es);
+    }
+
+    if (node) {
+	Ttk_ChangeElementState(
+	    node, TTK_STATE_PRESSED|TTK_STATE_ACTIVE, 0);
+    }
+
+    es->pressedElement = node;
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(es->corePtr);
+}
+
+/* ElementStateEventProc --
+ * 	Event handler for tracking element states.
+ */
+
+static const unsigned ElementStateMask =
+      ButtonPressMask 
+    | ButtonReleaseMask 
+    | PointerMotionMask 
+    | LeaveWindowMask 
+    | EnterWindowMask
+    | StructureNotifyMask
+    ;
+
+static void
+ElementStateEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *ev)
+{
+    ElementStateTracker *es = (ElementStateTracker *)clientData;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *node;
+
+    switch (ev->type)
+    {
+	case MotionNotify :
+	    node = Ttk_LayoutIdentify(
+		es->corePtr->layout,ev->xmotion.x,ev->xmotion.y);
+	    ActivateElement(es, node);
+	    break;
+	case LeaveNotify:
+	    ActivateElement(es, 0);
+	    break;
+	case EnterNotify:
+	    node = Ttk_LayoutIdentify(
+		es->corePtr->layout,ev->xcrossing.x,ev->xcrossing.y);
+	    ActivateElement(es, node);
+	    break;
+	case ButtonPress:
+	    node = Ttk_LayoutIdentify(
+		es->corePtr->layout, ev->xbutton.x, ev->xbutton.y);
+	    if (node) 
+		PressElement(es, node);
+	    break;
+	case ButtonRelease:
+	    ReleaseElement(es);
+	    break;
+	case DestroyNotify:
+	    /* Unregister this event handler and free client data. 
+	     */
+	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(es->corePtr->tkwin,
+		    ElementStateMask, ElementStateEventProc, es);
+	    ckfree((ClientData)es);
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * TrackElementState --
+ * 	Register an event handler to manage the 'pressed'
+ * 	and 'active' states of individual widget elements.
+ */
+
+void TrackElementState(WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    ElementStateTracker *es = (ElementStateTracker*)ckalloc(sizeof(*es));
+    es->corePtr = corePtr;
+    es->activeElement = es->pressedElement = 0;
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(corePtr->tkwin,
+	    ElementStateMask,ElementStateEventProc,es);
+}
+
+
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkTreeview.c b/generic/ttk/ttkTreeview.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4038a5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkTreeview.c
@@ -0,0 +1,2973 @@
+/*
+ * $Id: ttkTreeview.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Joe English
+ *
+ * Ttk widget set: treeview widget.
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+#define DEF_TREE_ROWS		"10"
+#define DEF_TREE_PADDING	"4"
+#define DEF_COLWIDTH		"200"
+
+static const int ROWHEIGHT 	= 24;
+static const int HEADINGHEIGHT	= 24;
+static const int INDENT 	= 24;
+static const int HALO   	= 4;	/* separator */
+
+#define TTK_STATE_OPEN TTK_STATE_USER1
+#define TTK_STATE_LEAF TTK_STATE_USER2
+
+#define STATE_CHANGED	 	(0x100)	/* item state option changed */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tree items.
+ *
+ * INVARIANTS:
+ * 	item->children	==> item->children->parent == item
+ *	item->next	==> item->next->parent == item->parent
+ * 	item->next 	==> item->next->prev == item
+ * 	item->prev 	==> item->prev->next == item
+ */
+
+typedef struct TreeItemRec TreeItem;
+struct TreeItemRec
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;	/* Back-pointer to hash table entry */
+    TreeItem	*parent;	/* Parent item */
+    TreeItem	*children;	/* Linked list of child items */
+    TreeItem	*next;		/* Next sibling */
+    TreeItem	*prev;		/* Previous sibling */
+
+    /*
+     * Options and instance data:
+     */
+    Ttk_State 	state;
+    Tcl_Obj	*textObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*imageObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*valuesObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*openObj;
+    Tcl_Obj	*tagsObj;
+};
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ItemOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
+	"", Tk_Offset(TreeItem,textObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TreeItem,imageObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-values", "values", "Values",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TreeItem,valuesObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-open", "open", "Open",
+	"0", Tk_Offset(TreeItem,openObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tags", "tags", "Tags",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TreeItem,tagsObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0,0,0}
+};
+
+/* + NewItem --
+ * 	Allocate a new, uninitialized, unlinked item
+ */
+static TreeItem *NewItem(void)
+{
+    TreeItem *item = (TreeItem*)ckalloc(sizeof(*item));
+
+    item->entryPtr = 0;
+    item->parent = item->children = item->next = item->prev = NULL;
+
+    item->state = 0ul;
+    item->textObj = NULL;
+    item->imageObj = NULL;
+    item->valuesObj = NULL;
+    item->openObj = NULL;
+    item->tagsObj = NULL;
+
+    return item;
+}
+
+/* + FreeItem --
+ * 	Destroy an item
+ */
+static void FreeItem(TreeItem *item)
+{
+    if (item->textObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->textObj); }
+    if (item->imageObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->imageObj); }
+    if (item->valuesObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->valuesObj); }
+    if (item->openObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->openObj); }
+    if (item->tagsObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(item->tagsObj); }
+    ckfree((ClientData)item);
+}
+
+static void FreeItemCB(void *clientData) { FreeItem(clientData); }
+
+/* + DetachItem --
+ * 	Unlink an item from the tree.
+ */
+static void DetachItem(TreeItem *item)
+{
+    if (item->parent && item->parent->children == item)
+	item->parent->children = item->next;
+    if (item->prev)
+	item->prev->next = item->next;
+    if (item->next)
+	item->next->prev = item->prev;
+    item->next = item->prev = item->parent = NULL;
+}
+
+/* + InsertItem --
+ * 	Insert an item into the tree after the specified item.
+ *
+ * Preconditions:
+ * 	+ item is currently detached
+ * 	+ prev != NULL ==> prev->parent == parent.
+ */
+static void InsertItem(TreeItem *parent, TreeItem *prev, TreeItem *item)
+{
+    item->parent = parent;
+    item->prev = prev;
+    if (prev) {
+	item->next = prev->next;
+	prev->next = item;
+    } else {
+	item->next = parent->children;
+	parent->children = item;
+    }
+    if (item->next) {
+	item->next->prev = item;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + NextPreorder --
+ * 	Return the next item in preorder traversal order.
+ */
+
+static TreeItem *NextPreorder(TreeItem *item)
+{
+    if (item->children)
+	return item->children;
+    while (!item->next) {
+	item = item->parent;
+	if (!item)
+	    return 0;
+    }
+    return item->next;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Display items and tag options.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    Tcl_Obj *textObj;		/* taken from item / data cell */
+    Tcl_Obj *imageObj;		/* taken from item */
+    Tcl_Obj *anchorObj;		/* from column */
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;	/* remainder from tag */
+    Tcl_Obj *foregroundObj;	
+    Tcl_Obj *fontObj;
+} DisplayItem;
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec TagOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,textObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,imageObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,anchorObj), -1, 
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-background", "windowColor", "WindowColor", 
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,backgroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "textColor", "TextColor", 
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,foregroundObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(DisplayItem,fontObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0,0,0}
+};
+
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Columns.
+ *
+ * There are separate option tables associated with the column record:
+ * ColumnOptionSpecs is for configuring the column,
+ * and HeadingOptionSpecs is for drawing headings.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    int 	width;		/* Column width, in pixels */
+    Tcl_Obj	*idObj;		/* Column identifier, from -columns option */
+
+    Tcl_Obj	*anchorObj;	/* -anchor for cell data */
+
+    /* Column heading data:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*headingObj;		/* Heading label */
+    Tcl_Obj	*headingImageObj;	/* Heading image */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*headingAnchorObj;	/* -anchor for heading label */
+    Tcl_Obj	*headingCommandObj;	/* Command to execute */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*headingStateObj;	/* @@@ testing ... */
+    Ttk_State	headingState;		/* ... */
+
+    /* Temporary storage for cell data
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj 	*data;
+} TreeColumn;
+
+static void InitColumn(TreeColumn *column)
+{
+    column->width = 200;
+    column->idObj = 0;
+    column->anchorObj = 0;
+
+    column->headingState = 0;
+    column->headingObj = 0;
+    column->headingImageObj = 0;
+    column->headingAnchorObj = 0;
+    column->headingStateObj = 0;
+    column->headingCommandObj = 0;
+
+    column->data = 0;
+}
+
+static void FreeColumn(TreeColumn *column)	/* @@@ rename */
+{
+    if (column->idObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->idObj); }
+    if (column->anchorObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->anchorObj); }
+
+    if (column->headingObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingObj); }
+    if (column->headingImageObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingImageObj); }
+    if (column->headingAnchorObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingAnchorObj); }
+    if (column->headingStateObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingStateObj); }
+    if (column->headingCommandObj) { Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingCommandObj); }
+
+    /* Don't touch column->data, it's scratch storage */
+}
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec ColumnOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
+	DEF_COLWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,width),
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
+	"w", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,anchorObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-id", "id", "ID",
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,idObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,READONLY_OPTION },
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0,0,0}
+};
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec HeadingOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
+	"", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,headingObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
+	"", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,headingImageObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
+	"center", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,headingAnchorObj), -1,
+	0,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "", "",
+	"", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,headingCommandObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0 },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "state", "", "",
+	"", Tk_Offset(TreeColumn,headingStateObj), -1,
+	0,0,STATE_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0,0,0}
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ -show option:
+ * TODO: Implement SHOW_BRANCHES.
+ */
+
+#define SHOW_TREE 	(0x1) 	/* Show tree column? */
+#define SHOW_HEADINGS	(0x2)	/* Show heading row? */
+
+#define DEFAULT_SHOW	"tree headings"
+
+static const char *showStrings[] = {
+    "tree", "headings", NULL
+};
+
+static int GetEnumSetFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+    const char *table[],
+    unsigned *resultPtr)
+{
+    unsigned result = 0;
+    int i, objc;
+    Tcl_Obj **objv;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < objc; ++i) {
+	int index;
+	if (TCL_OK != Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(
+		    interp, objv[i], table, "value", TCL_EXACT, &index))
+	{
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	result |= (1 << index);
+    }
+
+    *resultPtr = result;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Treeview widget record.
+ *
+ * Dependencies:
+ * 	columns, columnNames: -columns
+ * 	displayColumns:	-columns, -displaycolumns
+ */
+typedef struct
+{
+    /* Resources acquired at initialization-time:
+     */
+    Tk_OptionTable itemOptionTable;
+    Tk_OptionTable columnOptionTable;
+    Tk_OptionTable headingOptionTable;
+    Tk_OptionTable tagOptionTable;
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+    Ttk_TagTable tagTable;
+
+    /* Acquired in GetLayout hook:
+     */
+    Ttk_Layout itemLayout;
+    Ttk_Layout cellLayout;
+    Ttk_Layout headingLayout;
+    Ttk_Layout rowLayout;
+
+    /* Tree data:
+     */
+    Tcl_HashTable items;	/* Map: item name -> item */
+    int serial;			/* Next item # for autogenerated names */
+    TreeItem *root;		/* Root item */
+
+    TreeColumn column0;		/* Column options for display column #0 */
+    TreeColumn *columns;	/* Array of column options for data columns */
+
+    TreeItem *focus;		/* Current focus item */
+
+    /* Widget options:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *columnsObj;	/* List of symbolic column names */
+    Tcl_Obj *displayColumnsObj;	/* List of columns to display */
+
+    Tcl_Obj *heightObj;		/* height (rows) */
+    Tcl_Obj *paddingObj;	/* internal padding */
+
+    Tcl_Obj *showObj;		/* -show list */
+    Tcl_Obj *selectModeObj;	/* -selectmode option */
+
+    Scrollable yscroll;
+    ScrollHandle yscrollHandle;
+
+    /* Derived resources:
+     */
+    Tcl_HashTable columnNames;	/* Map: column name -> column index */
+    int nColumns; 		/* #columns */
+    unsigned showFlags;		/* bitmask of subparts to display */
+
+    TreeColumn **displayColumns; /* List of columns for display (incl tree) */
+    int nDisplayColumns;	/* #display columns */
+    Ttk_Box headingArea;	/* Display area for column headings */
+    Ttk_Box treeArea;   	/* Display area for tree */
+
+} TreePart;
+
+typedef struct {
+    WidgetCore core;
+    TreePart tree;
+} Treeview;
+
+#define USER_MASK 		0x0100
+#define COLUMNS_CHANGED 	(USER_MASK)
+#define DCOLUMNS_CHANGED	(USER_MASK<<1)
+#define SCROLLCMD_CHANGED	(USER_MASK<<2)
+#define SHOW_CHANGED 		(USER_MASK<<3)
+
+static const char *SelectModeStrings[] = { "none", "browse", "extended", NULL };
+
+static Tk_OptionSpec TreeviewOptionSpecs[] =
+{
+    WIDGET_TAKES_FOCUS,
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-columns", "columns", "Columns",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.columnsObj), -1,
+	0,0,COLUMNS_CHANGED | GEOMETRY_CHANGED /*| READONLY_OPTION*/ },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-displaycolumns","displayColumns","DisplayColumns",
+	"", Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.displayColumnsObj), -1,
+	0,0,DCOLUMNS_CHANGED | GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-show", "show", "Show",
+	DEFAULT_SHOW, Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.showObj), -1,
+	0,0,SHOW_CHANGED | GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-selectmode", "selectMode", "SelectMode",
+	"extended", Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.selectModeObj), -1,
+	0,(ClientData)SelectModeStrings,0 },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height",
+	DEF_TREE_ROWS, Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.heightObj), -1,
+	0,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED},
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-padding", "padding", "Pad",
+	DEF_TREE_PADDING, Tk_Offset(Treeview,tree.paddingObj), -1,
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,GEOMETRY_CHANGED },
+
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-yscrollcommand", "yScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Treeview, tree.yscroll.scrollCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, SCROLLCMD_CHANGED},
+
+    WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(CoreOptionSpecs)
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utilities.
+ */
+typedef void (*HashEntryIterator)(void *hashValue);
+
+static void foreachHashEntry(Tcl_HashTable *ht, HashEntryIterator func)
+{
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(ht, &search);
+    while (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	func(Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr));
+	entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+}
+
+/* + unshare(objPtr) --
+ * 	Ensure that a Tcl_Obj * has refcount 1 -- either return objPtr
+ * 	itself,	or a duplicated copy.
+ */
+static Tcl_Obj *unshare(Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    if (Tcl_IsShared(objPtr)) {
+	Tcl_Obj *newObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(objPtr);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(newObj);
+	return newObj;
+    }
+    return objPtr;
+}
+
+/* DisplayLayout --
+ * 	Rebind, place, and draw a layout + object combination.
+ */
+static void DisplayLayout(
+    Ttk_Layout layout, void *recordPtr, Ttk_State state, Ttk_Box b, Drawable d)
+{
+    Ttk_RebindSublayout(layout, recordPtr);
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(layout, state, b);
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(layout, state, d);
+}
+
+/* + ColumnIndex --
+ * 	Maps column identifier to column index.
+ * 	Returns: -1 if not found, column index otherwise.
+ * 	Leaves an error message in interp->result on error.
+ *
+ * Column IDs may be specified by name or as a number.
+ */
+static int ColumnIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, Tcl_Obj *columnIDObj)
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int columnIndex;
+
+    /* Check for named column:
+     */
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(
+	    &tv->tree.columnNames, Tcl_GetString(columnIDObj));
+    if (entryPtr) {
+	return (int)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    /* Check for number:
+     */
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, columnIDObj, &columnIndex) == TCL_OK) {
+	if (columnIndex < 0 || columnIndex >= tv->tree.nColumns) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "Column index ",
+		    Tcl_GetString(columnIDObj),
+		    " out of bounds",
+		    NULL);
+	    return -1;
+	}
+
+	return columnIndex;
+    }
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	"Invalid column index ", Tcl_GetString(columnIDObj),
+	NULL);
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/* + FindItem --
+ * 	Locates the item with the specified identifier in the tree.
+ * 	If there is no such item, leaves an error message in interp.
+ */
+static TreeItem *FindItem(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, Tcl_Obj *itemNameObj)
+{
+    const char *itemName = Tcl_GetString(itemNameObj);
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr =  Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, itemName);
+
+    if (!entryPtr) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Item ", itemName, " not found", NULL);
+	return 0;
+    }
+    return (TreeItem*)Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+}
+
+/* + GetItemListFromObj --
+ * 	Parse a Tcl_Obj * as a list of items.
+ * 	Returns a NULL-terminated array of items; result must
+ * 	be ckfree()d. On error, returns NULL and leaves an error
+ * 	message in interp.
+ */
+
+static TreeItem **GetItemListFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
+{
+    TreeItem **items;
+    Tcl_Obj **elements;
+    int i, nElements;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp,objPtr,&nElements,&elements) != TCL_OK) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    items = (TreeItem**)ckalloc((nElements + 1)*sizeof(TreeItem*));
+    for (i = 0; i < nElements; ++i) {
+	items[i] = FindItem(interp, tv, elements[i]);
+	if (!items[i]) {
+	    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+    }
+    items[i] = NULL;
+    return items;
+}
+
+/* + ItemName --
+ * 	Returns the item's ID.
+ */
+static const char *ItemName(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item)
+{
+    return Tcl_GetHashKey(&tv->tree.items, item->entryPtr);
+}
+
+/* + ItemID --
+ * 	Returns a fresh Tcl_Obj * (refcount 0) holding the
+ * 	item identifier of the specified item.
+ */
+static Tcl_Obj *ItemID(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item)
+{
+    return Tcl_NewStringObj(ItemName(tv, item), -1);
+}
+
+/* + FindColumn --
+ */
+static TreeColumn *FindColumn(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, Tcl_Obj *columnIDObj)
+{
+    int column;
+
+    if (sscanf(Tcl_GetString(columnIDObj), "#%d", &column) == 1)
+    {	/* Display column specification, #n */
+	if (column >= 0 && column < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	    return tv->tree.displayColumns[column];
+	}
+	/* else */
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+	    "Column ", Tcl_GetString(columnIDObj), " out of range",
+	    NULL);
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    column = ColumnIndex(interp, tv, columnIDObj);
+    if (column >= 0)
+	return tv->tree.columns + column;
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Column configuration.
+ */
+
+/* + TreeviewFreeColumns --
+ * 	Free column data.
+ */
+static void TreeviewFreeColumns(Treeview *tv)
+{
+    int i;
+
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&tv->tree.columnNames);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&tv->tree.columnNames, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    if (tv->tree.columns) {
+	for (i = 0; i < tv->tree.nColumns; ++i)
+	    FreeColumn(tv->tree.columns + i);
+	ckfree((ClientData)tv->tree.columns);
+	tv->tree.columns = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewInitColumns --
+ *	Initialize column data when -columns changes.
+ *	Returns: TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR;
+ */
+static int TreeviewInitColumns(Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **columns;
+    int i, ncols;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(
+	    interp, tv->tree.columnsObj, &ncols, &columns) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Free old values:
+     */
+    TreeviewFreeColumns(tv);
+
+    /*
+     * Initialize columns array and columnNames hash table:
+     */
+    tv->tree.nColumns = ncols;
+    tv->tree.columns =
+	(TreeColumn*)ckalloc(tv->tree.nColumns * sizeof(TreeColumn));
+
+    for (i = 0; i < ncols; ++i) {
+	int isNew;
+	Tcl_Obj *columnName = Tcl_DuplicateObj(columns[i]);
+
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(
+	    &tv->tree.columnNames, Tcl_GetString(columnName), &isNew);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, i);
+
+	InitColumn(tv->tree.columns + i);
+	Tk_InitOptions(
+	    interp, (ClientData)(tv->tree.columns + i),
+	    tv->tree.columnOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+	Tk_InitOptions(
+	    interp, (ClientData)(tv->tree.columns + i),
+	    tv->tree.headingOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(columnName);
+	tv->tree.columns[i].idObj = columnName;
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewInitDisplayColumns --
+ * 	Initializes the 'displayColumns' array.
+ *
+ * 	Note that displayColumns[0] is always the tree column,
+ * 	even when SHOW_TREE is not set.
+ *
+ * @@@ TODO: disallow duplicated columns
+ */
+static int TreeviewInitDisplayColumns(Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv)
+{
+    Tcl_Obj **dcolumns;
+    int index, ndcols;
+    TreeColumn **displayColumns = 0;
+
+    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp,
+	    tv->tree.displayColumnsObj, &ndcols, &dcolumns) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (ndcols == 0) {
+	ndcols = tv->tree.nColumns;
+	displayColumns = (TreeColumn**)ckalloc((ndcols+1)*sizeof(TreeColumn*));
+	for (index = 0; index < ndcols; ++index) {
+	    displayColumns[index+1] = tv->tree.columns + index;
+	}
+    } else {
+	displayColumns = (TreeColumn**)ckalloc((ndcols+1)*sizeof(TreeColumn*));
+	for (index = 0; index < ndcols; ++index) {
+	    int columnIndex = ColumnIndex(interp, tv, dcolumns[index]);
+	    if (columnIndex == -1) {
+		ckfree((ClientData)displayColumns);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    displayColumns[index+1] = tv->tree.columns + columnIndex;
+	}
+    }
+    displayColumns[0] = &tv->tree.column0;
+
+    if (tv->tree.displayColumns)
+	ckfree((ClientData)tv->tree.displayColumns);
+    tv->tree.displayColumns = displayColumns;
+    tv->tree.nDisplayColumns = ndcols + 1;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Event handlers.
+ */
+
+static TreeItem *IdentifyItem(Treeview *tv,int y,Ttk_Box *itemPos); /*forward*/
+
+const unsigned int TreeviewBindEventMask =
+      KeyPressMask|KeyReleaseMask
+    | ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask
+    | PointerMotionMask|ButtonMotionMask
+    | VirtualEventMask
+    ;
+
+static void TreeviewBindEventProc(void *clientData, XEvent *event)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = clientData;
+    TreeItem *item = NULL;
+    Ttk_Box unused;
+    void *taglist;
+    int nTags;
+
+    /*
+     * Figure out where to deliver the event.
+     */
+
+    switch (event->type) 
+    {
+	case KeyPress:
+	case KeyRelease:
+	case VirtualEvent:
+	    item = tv->tree.focus;
+	    break;
+	case ButtonPress:
+	case ButtonRelease:
+	    item = IdentifyItem(tv, event->xbutton.y, &unused);
+	    break;
+	case MotionNotify:
+	    item = IdentifyItem(tv, event->xmotion.y, &unused);
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    if (!item) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /* ASSERT: Ttk_GetTagListFromObj returns TCL_OK. */
+    Ttk_GetTagListFromObj(NULL, tv->tree.tagTable, item->tagsObj,
+	    &nTags, &taglist);
+
+    /*
+     * Fire binding:
+     */
+    Tcl_Preserve(clientData);
+    Tk_BindEvent(tv->tree.bindingTable, event, tv->core.tkwin, nTags, taglist);
+    Tcl_Release(clientData);
+
+    Ttk_FreeTagList(taglist);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialization and cleanup.
+ */
+
+static int TreeviewInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    int unused;
+
+    tv->tree.itemOptionTable =
+	Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, ItemOptionSpecs);
+    tv->tree.columnOptionTable =
+	Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, ColumnOptionSpecs);
+    tv->tree.headingOptionTable =
+	Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, HeadingOptionSpecs);
+    tv->tree.tagOptionTable =
+	Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, TagOptionSpecs);
+
+    tv->tree.tagTable = Ttk_CreateTagTable(
+	tv->tree.tagOptionTable, sizeof(DisplayItem));
+    tv->tree.bindingTable = Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp);
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tv->core.tkwin,
+	TreeviewBindEventMask, TreeviewBindEventProc, tv);
+
+    tv->tree.itemLayout
+	= tv->tree.cellLayout
+	= tv->tree.headingLayout
+	= tv->tree.rowLayout
+	= 0;
+
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&tv->tree.columnNames, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    tv->tree.nColumns = tv->tree.nDisplayColumns = 0;
+    tv->tree.columns = NULL;
+    tv->tree.displayColumns = NULL;
+    tv->tree.showFlags = ~0;
+
+    InitColumn(&tv->tree.column0);
+    Tk_InitOptions(
+	interp, (ClientData)(&tv->tree.column0),
+	tv->tree.columnOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    Tk_InitOptions(
+	interp, (ClientData)(&tv->tree.column0),
+	tv->tree.headingOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&tv->tree.items, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+    tv->tree.serial = 0;
+
+    tv->tree.focus = 0;
+
+    /* Create root item "":
+     */
+    tv->tree.root = NewItem();
+    Tk_InitOptions(interp, (ClientData)tv->tree.root,
+	tv->tree.itemOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    tv->tree.root->entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, "", &unused);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(tv->tree.root->entryPtr, tv->tree.root);
+
+    /* Scroll handles:
+     */
+    tv->tree.yscrollHandle = CreateScrollHandle(&tv->core, &tv->tree.yscroll);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+static void TreeviewCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+
+    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(tv->core.tkwin,
+	    TreeviewBindEventMask,  TreeviewBindEventProc, tv);
+    Tk_DeleteBindingTable(tv->tree.bindingTable);
+    Ttk_DeleteTagTable(tv->tree.tagTable);
+
+    if (tv->tree.itemLayout) Ttk_FreeLayout(tv->tree.itemLayout);
+    if (tv->tree.cellLayout) Ttk_FreeLayout(tv->tree.cellLayout);
+    if (tv->tree.headingLayout) Ttk_FreeLayout(tv->tree.headingLayout);
+    if (tv->tree.rowLayout) Ttk_FreeLayout(tv->tree.rowLayout);
+
+    TreeviewFreeColumns(tv);
+
+    if (tv->tree.displayColumns)
+	Tcl_Free((ClientData)tv->tree.displayColumns);
+
+    foreachHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, FreeItemCB);
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&tv->tree.items);
+
+    FreeScrollHandle(tv->tree.yscrollHandle);
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewConfigure --
+ * 	Configuration widget hook.
+ *
+ * 	BUG: If user sets -columns and -displaycolumns, but -displaycolumns
+ * 	has an error, the widget is left in an inconsistent state.
+ */
+static int
+TreeviewConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr, int mask)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    unsigned showFlags = tv->tree.showFlags;
+
+    if (mask & COLUMNS_CHANGED) {
+	if (TreeviewInitColumns(interp, tv) != TCL_OK)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	mask |= DCOLUMNS_CHANGED;
+    }
+    if (mask & DCOLUMNS_CHANGED) {
+	if (TreeviewInitDisplayColumns(interp, tv) != TCL_OK)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (mask & SCROLLCMD_CHANGED) {
+	ScrollbarUpdateRequired(tv->tree.yscrollHandle);
+    }
+
+    if (  (mask & SHOW_CHANGED)
+	&& GetEnumSetFromObj(
+		    interp,tv->tree.showObj,showStrings,&showFlags) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (CoreConfigure(interp, recordPtr, mask) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tv->tree.showFlags = showFlags;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + ConfigureItem --
+ * 	Set item options.
+ */
+static int ConfigureItem(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (ClientData)item, tv->tree.itemOptionTable,
+		objc, objv, tv->core.tkwin,&savedOptions,0) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Make sure that -values is a valid list:
+     */
+    if (item->valuesObj) {
+	int unused;
+	if (Tcl_ListObjLength(interp, item->valuesObj, &unused) != TCL_OK)
+	    goto error;
+    }
+
+    /* Validate -image option.
+     * @@@ TODO: keep images array around
+     */
+    if (item->imageObj) {
+	Tk_Image *images = NULL;
+	if (GetImageList(interp, &tv->core, item->imageObj, &images) != TCL_OK)
+	    goto error;
+	if (images)
+	    FreeImageList(images);
+    }
+
+    /* Keep TTK_STATE_OPEN flag in sync with item->openObj.
+     * We use both a state flag and a Tcl_Obj* resource so elements
+     * can access the value in either way.
+     */
+    if (item->openObj) {
+	int isOpen;
+	if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, item->openObj, &isOpen) != TCL_OK)
+	    goto error;
+	if (isOpen)
+	    item->state |= TTK_STATE_OPEN;
+	else
+	    item->state &= ~TTK_STATE_OPEN;
+    }
+
+    /* Make sure -tags is a valid list
+     * (side effect: may create new tags)
+     */
+    if (item->tagsObj) {
+	void *taglist;
+	int nTags;
+	if (Ttk_GetTagListFromObj(interp, tv->tree.tagTable, item->tagsObj,
+		    &nTags, &taglist) != TCL_OK)
+	{
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	Ttk_FreeTagList(taglist);
+    }
+
+    /* All OK.
+     */
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* + ConfigureColumn --
+ * 	Set column options.
+ */
+static int ConfigureColumn(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, TreeColumn *column,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+    int mask;
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (ClientData)column,
+	    tv->tree.columnOptionTable, objc, objv, tv->core.tkwin,
+	    &savedOptions,&mask) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (mask & READONLY_OPTION) {
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Attempt to change read-only option", NULL);
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+    /* Propagate column width changes to overall widget request width,
+     * but only if the widget is currently unmapped, in order to prevent
+     * geometry jumping during interactive column resize.
+     */
+    if (mask & GEOMETRY_CHANGED && !Tk_IsMapped(tv->core.tkwin)) {
+	TtkResizeWidget(&tv->core);
+    }
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/* + ConfigureHeading --
+ * 	Set heading options.
+ */
+static int ConfigureHeading(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, TreeColumn *column,
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
+{
+    Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+    int mask;
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (ClientData)column,
+	    tv->tree.headingOptionTable, objc, objv, tv->core.tkwin,
+	    &savedOptions,&mask) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* @@@ testing ... */
+    if ((mask & STATE_CHANGED) && column->headingStateObj) {
+	Ttk_StateSpec stateSpec;
+	if (Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(
+		interp, column->headingStateObj, &stateSpec) != TCL_OK)
+	{
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	column->headingState = Ttk_ModifyState(column->headingState,&stateSpec);
+	Tcl_DecrRefCount(column->headingStateObj);
+	column->headingStateObj = Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(column->headingState,0);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(column->headingStateObj);
+    }
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Geometry routines.
+ */
+
+/* + CountRows --
+ * 	Count the number of viewable items.
+ */
+static int CountRows(TreeItem *item)
+{
+    int height = 1;
+
+    if (item->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN) {
+	TreeItem *child = item->children;
+	while (child) {
+	    height += CountRows(child);
+	    child = child->next;
+	}
+    }
+    return height;
+}
+
+/* + TreeWidth --
+ * 	Compute the requested tree width from the sum of visible column widths.
+ */
+static int TreeWidth(Treeview *tv)
+{
+    int i = (tv->tree.showFlags&SHOW_TREE) ? 0 : 1;
+    int width = 0;
+
+    while (i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	width += tv->tree.displayColumns[i++]->width;
+    }
+    return width;
+}
+
+/* + PlaceColumns -
+ * 	Adjust final column width to fill available space.
+ * 	@@@ NB: still not right -- see paned.c for correct algorithm
+ */
+static void PlaceColumns(Treeview *tv, int availableWidth)
+{
+#   define MIN_WIDTH 24
+    int colno = (tv->tree.showFlags & SHOW_TREE) ? 0 : 1;
+    TreeColumn *column = tv->tree.displayColumns[colno];
+
+    while (++colno < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	availableWidth -= column->width;
+	column = tv->tree.displayColumns[colno];
+    }
+    column->width = availableWidth;
+    if (column->width < MIN_WIDTH) {
+	column->width = MIN_WIDTH;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + IdentifyRow --
+ * 	Recursive search for item at specified y position.
+ * 	Main work routine for IdentifyItem(()
+ */
+static TreeItem *IdentifyRow(
+    TreeItem *item, 	/* where to start search */
+    Ttk_Box *bp,	/* Scan position */
+    int y)		/* target y coordinate */
+{
+    while (item) {
+	int next_ypos = bp->y + ROWHEIGHT;
+	if (bp->y <= y && y <= next_ypos) {
+	    bp->height = ROWHEIGHT;
+	    return item;
+	}
+	bp->y = next_ypos;
+	if (item->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN) {
+	    TreeItem *subitem = IdentifyRow(item->children, bp, y);
+	    if (subitem) {
+		bp->x += INDENT;
+		bp->width -= INDENT;
+		return subitem;
+	    }
+	}
+	item = item->next;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/* + IdentifyItem --
+ * 	Locate the item at the specified y position, if any.
+ * 	On return, *itemPos holds the parcel of the tree item.
+ */
+static TreeItem *IdentifyItem(Treeview *tv, int y, Ttk_Box *itemPos)
+{
+    *itemPos = Ttk_MakeBox(
+		    tv->tree.treeArea.x,
+		    tv->tree.treeArea.y - tv->tree.yscroll.first * ROWHEIGHT,
+		    tv->tree.column0.width,
+		    ROWHEIGHT);
+    return IdentifyRow(tv->tree.root->children, itemPos, y);
+}
+
+/* + IdentifyDisplayColumn --
+ * 	Returns the display column number at the specified x position,
+ * 	or -1 if x is outside any columns.
+ */
+static int IdentifyDisplayColumn(Treeview *tv, int x, int *x1)
+{
+    int colno = (tv->tree.showFlags & SHOW_TREE) ? 0 : 1;
+    int xpos = tv->tree.treeArea.x;
+
+    while (colno < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	TreeColumn *column = tv->tree.displayColumns[colno];
+	int next_xpos = xpos + column->width;
+	if (xpos <= x && x <= next_xpos + HALO) {
+	    *x1 = next_xpos;
+	    return colno;
+	}
+	++colno;
+	xpos = next_xpos;
+    }
+
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/* + SubtreeHeight --
+ * 	Returns the height of the visible subtree rooted at item.
+ */
+#define ItemHeight(item) (ROWHEIGHT)	/* TBFIXED */
+static int SubtreeHeight(TreeItem *item)
+{
+    int height = ItemHeight(item);
+    if (item->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN) {
+	TreeItem *child = item->children;
+	while (child) {
+	    height += SubtreeHeight(child);
+	    child = child->next;
+	}
+    }
+    return height;
+}
+
+/* + ItemYPosition --
+ * 	Returns Y position of specified item relative to root of tree,
+ * 	-1 if item is not viewable.
+ */
+static int ItemYPosition(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *p)
+{
+    TreeItem *root = tv->tree.root;
+    int ypos = 0;
+
+    for (;;) {
+	if (p->prev) {
+	    p = p->prev;
+	    ypos += SubtreeHeight(p);
+	} else {
+	    p = p->parent;
+	    if (!(p && (p->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN))) {
+		/* detached or closed ancestor */
+		return -1;
+	    }
+	    if (p == root) {
+		return ypos;
+	    }
+	    ypos += ItemHeight(p);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Display routines.
+ */
+
+/* + GetSublayout --
+ * 	Utility routine; acquires a sublayout for items, cells, etc.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout GetSublayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr,
+    Ttk_Layout parentLayout,
+    const char *layoutName,
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable,
+    Ttk_Layout *layoutPtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout newLayout = Ttk_CreateSublayout(
+	    interp, themePtr, parentLayout, layoutName, optionTable);
+
+    if (newLayout) {
+	if (*layoutPtr)
+	    Ttk_FreeLayout(*layoutPtr);
+	*layoutPtr = newLayout;
+    }
+    return newLayout;
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewGetLayout --
+ * 	GetLayout() widget hook.
+ */
+static Ttk_Layout TreeviewGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme themePtr, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Layout treeLayout = WidgetGetLayout(interp, themePtr, recordPtr);
+
+    if (!(
+	GetSublayout(interp, themePtr, treeLayout, ".Item",
+	    tv->tree.itemOptionTable, &tv->tree.itemLayout)
+     && GetSublayout(interp, themePtr, treeLayout, ".Cell",
+	    tv->tree.tagOptionTable, &tv->tree.cellLayout)	/*@@@HERE*/
+     && GetSublayout(interp, themePtr, treeLayout, ".Heading",
+	    tv->tree.headingOptionTable, &tv->tree.headingLayout)
+     && GetSublayout(interp, themePtr, treeLayout, ".Row",
+	    tv->tree.tagOptionTable, &tv->tree.rowLayout)	/*@@@HERE*/
+    )) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    return treeLayout;
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewDoLayout --
+ * 	DoLayout() widget hook.  Computes widget layout.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ * 	Computes headingArea and treeArea.
+ * 	Computes subtree height.
+ * 	Invokes scroll callbacks.
+ */
+static void TreeviewDoLayout(void *clientData)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = clientData;
+    unsigned showFlags = tv->tree.showFlags;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *clientNode = Ttk_LayoutFindNode(tv->core.layout, "client");
+
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(tv->core.layout,tv->core.state,Ttk_WinBox(tv->core.tkwin));
+    tv->tree.treeArea = clientNode
+	? Ttk_LayoutNodeInternalParcel(tv->core.layout,clientNode)
+	: Ttk_WinBox(tv->core.tkwin) ;
+
+    PlaceColumns(tv, tv->tree.treeArea.width);
+
+    if (showFlags & SHOW_HEADINGS) {
+	tv->tree.headingArea = Ttk_PackBox(
+	    &tv->tree.treeArea, 1, HEADINGHEIGHT, TTK_SIDE_TOP);
+    } else {
+	tv->tree.headingArea = Ttk_MakeBox(0,0,0,0);
+    }
+
+    tv->tree.root->state |= TTK_STATE_OPEN;
+    Scrolled(tv->tree.yscrollHandle,
+	    tv->tree.yscroll.first,
+	    tv->tree.yscroll.first + (tv->tree.treeArea.height / ROWHEIGHT),
+	    CountRows(tv->tree.root) - 1);
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewSize --
+ * 	SizeProc() widget hook.  Size is determined by
+ * 	-height option and column widths.
+ *
+ *  	<<NOTE-SLOP>>: Ought to compute extra width and height
+ *  	by checking the padding of TTK_OPTION_BORDER elements
+ *  	in the layout.  In the meantime, just add some extra for slop.
+ */
+static int TreeviewSize(void *clientData, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = clientData;
+    int nRows;
+    int slop = 12;	/* NOTE-SLOP */
+
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL,tv->core.tkwin, tv->tree.heightObj, &nRows);
+
+    *widthPtr = TreeWidth(tv) + slop;
+    *heightPtr = slop + ROWHEIGHT * nRows;
+
+    if (tv->tree.showFlags & SHOW_HEADINGS)
+	*heightPtr += HEADINGHEIGHT;
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/* + ItemState --
+ * 	Returns the state of the specified item, based
+ * 	on widget state, item state, and other information.
+ */
+static Ttk_State ItemState(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item)
+{
+    Ttk_State state = tv->core.state | item->state;
+    if (!item->children)
+	state |= TTK_STATE_LEAF;
+    if (item != tv->tree.focus)
+	state &= ~TTK_STATE_FOCUS;
+    return state;
+}
+
+/* + DrawHeadings --
+ *	Draw tree headings.
+ */
+static void DrawHeadings(Treeview *tv, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b)
+{
+    int i = (tv->tree.showFlags & SHOW_TREE) ? 0 : 1;
+    int x = 0;
+
+    while (i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	TreeColumn *column = tv->tree.displayColumns[i];
+	Ttk_Box parcel = Ttk_MakeBox(b.x+x, b.y, column->width, b.height);
+	DisplayLayout(tv->tree.headingLayout,
+	    column, column->headingState, parcel, d);
+	x += column->width;
+	++i;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + PrepareItem --
+ * 	Fill in a displayItem record from tag settings.
+ */
+static void PrepareItem(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, DisplayItem *displayItem)
+{
+    const int nOptions = sizeof(*displayItem)/sizeof(Tcl_Obj*);
+    Tcl_Obj **dest = (Tcl_Obj**)displayItem;
+    Tcl_Obj **objv = NULL;
+    int objc = 0;
+
+    memset(displayItem, 0, sizeof(*displayItem));
+
+    if (   item->tagsObj 
+    	&& Tcl_ListObjGetElements(NULL, item->tagsObj, &objc, &objv) == TCL_OK)
+    {
+	int i, j;
+	for (i=0; i<objc; ++i) {
+	    Ttk_Tag tag = Ttk_GetTagFromObj(tv->tree.tagTable, objv[i]);
+	    Tcl_Obj **tagRecord = Ttk_TagRecord(tag);
+
+	    if (tagRecord) {
+		for (j=0; j<nOptions; ++j) {
+		    if (tagRecord[j] != 0) {
+			dest[j] = tagRecord[j];
+		    }
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/* + DrawCells --
+ *	Draw data cells for specified item.
+ */
+static void DrawCells(
+    Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, DisplayItem *displayItem,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, int x, int y)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout layout = tv->tree.cellLayout;
+    Ttk_State state = ItemState(tv, item);
+    Ttk_Padding cellPadding = {4, 0, 4, 0};
+    int height = ROWHEIGHT;
+    int nValues = 0;
+    Tcl_Obj **values = 0;
+    int i;
+
+    if (!item->valuesObj) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_ListObjGetElements(NULL, item->valuesObj, &nValues, &values);
+    for (i = 0; i < tv->tree.nColumns; ++i) {
+	tv->tree.columns[i].data = (i < nValues) ? values[i] : 0;
+    }
+
+    for (i = 1; i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns; ++i) {
+	TreeColumn *column = tv->tree.displayColumns[i];
+	Ttk_Box parcel = Ttk_PadBox(
+	    Ttk_MakeBox(b.x+x, b.y+y, column->width, height), cellPadding);
+
+	displayItem->textObj = column->data;
+	displayItem->anchorObj = column->anchorObj;
+
+	DisplayLayout(layout, displayItem, state, parcel, d);
+	x += column->width;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + DrawItem --
+ * 	Draw an item (row background, tree label, and cells).
+ * 	at the specified x, y position.
+ */
+static void DrawItem(
+    Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, int depth, int row)
+{
+    Ttk_Layout layout = tv->tree.itemLayout;
+    Ttk_State state = ItemState(tv, item);
+    DisplayItem displayItem;
+    int height = ROWHEIGHT;
+    int x = depth * INDENT;
+    int y = (row - tv->tree.yscroll.first) * ROWHEIGHT;
+
+    if (row % 2) state |= TTK_STATE_ALTERNATE;
+
+    PrepareItem(tv, item, &displayItem);
+
+    /* Draw row background:
+     */
+    {
+	Ttk_Box rowBox = Ttk_MakeBox(b.x, b.y+y, TreeWidth(tv), height);
+	DisplayLayout(tv->tree.rowLayout, &displayItem, state, rowBox, d);
+    }
+
+    /* Draw tree label:
+     */
+    if (tv->tree.showFlags & SHOW_TREE) {
+	int colwidth = tv->tree.column0.width;
+	Ttk_Box parcel = Ttk_MakeBox(b.x + x, b.y + y, colwidth - x, height);
+	DisplayLayout(layout, item, state, parcel, d);
+	x = colwidth;
+    } else {
+	x = 0;
+    }
+
+    /* Draw data cells:
+     */
+    DrawCells(tv, item, &displayItem, d, b, x, y);
+}
+
+/* + DrawSubtree --
+ * 	Draw an item and all of its (viewable) descendants.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	Row number of the last item drawn.
+ */
+
+static int DrawForest(	/* forward */
+    Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, int depth, int row);
+
+static int DrawSubtree(
+    Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, int depth, int row)
+{
+    if (row >= tv->tree.yscroll.first) {
+	DrawItem(tv, item, d, b, depth, row);
+    }
+
+    if (item->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN) {
+	return DrawForest(tv, item->children, d, b, depth + 1, row + 1);
+    } else {
+	return row + 1;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + DrawForest --
+ * 	Draw a sequence of items and their visible descendants.
+ *
+ * Returns:
+ * 	Row number of the last item drawn.
+ */
+static int DrawForest(
+    Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, int depth, int row)
+{
+    while (item && row <= tv->tree.yscroll.last) {
+        row = DrawSubtree(tv, item, d, b, depth, row);
+	item = item->next;
+    }
+    return row;
+}
+
+/* + TreeviewDisplay --
+ * 	Display() widget hook.  Draw the widget contents.
+ */
+static void TreeviewDisplay(void *clientData, Drawable d)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = clientData;
+
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(tv->core.layout, tv->core.state, d);
+    if (tv->tree.showFlags & SHOW_HEADINGS) {
+	DrawHeadings(tv, d, tv->tree.headingArea);
+    }
+    DrawForest(tv, tv->tree.root->children, d, tv->tree.treeArea, 0,0);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Utilities for widget commands
+ */
+
+/* + InsertPosition --
+ * 	Locate the previous sibling for [$tree insert] and [$tree move].
+ *
+ * 	Returns a pointer to the item just before the specified index,
+ * 	or 0 if the item is to be inserted at the beginning.
+ */
+static TreeItem *InsertPosition(TreeItem *parent, int index)
+{
+    TreeItem *sibling = parent->children;
+    if (sibling) {
+	while (index > 0 && sibling->next) {
+	    sibling = sibling->next;
+	    --index;
+	}
+	if (index <= 0) {
+	    sibling = sibling->prev;
+	} /* else -- $index > #children, insert at end. */
+    }
+    return sibling;
+}
+
+/* + EndPosition --
+ * 	Locate the last child of the specified node.
+ */
+static TreeItem *EndPosition(TreeItem *parent)
+{
+    TreeItem *sibling = parent->children;
+    if (sibling) {
+	while (sibling->next) {
+	    sibling = sibling->next;
+	}
+    }
+    return sibling;
+}
+
+/* + AncestryCheck --
+ * 	Verify that specified item is not an ancestor of the specified parent;
+ * 	returns 1 if OK, 0 and leaves an error message in interp otherwise.
+ */
+static int AncestryCheck(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item, TreeItem *parent)
+{
+    TreeItem *p = parent;
+    while (p) {
+	if (p == item) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "Cannot insert ", ItemName(tv, item),
+		    " as a descendant of ", ItemName(tv, parent),
+		    NULL);
+	    return 0;
+	}
+	p = p->parent;
+    }
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/* + DeleteItems --
+ * 	Remove an item and all of its descendants from the hash table
+ * 	and detach them from the tree; returns a linked list (chained
+ * 	along the ->next pointer) of deleted items.
+ */
+static TreeItem *DeleteItems(TreeItem *item, TreeItem *delq)
+{
+    if (item->entryPtr) {
+	DetachItem(item);
+	while (item->children) {
+	    delq = DeleteItems(item->children, delq);
+	}
+	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(item->entryPtr);
+	item->entryPtr = 0;
+	item->next = delq;
+	delq = item;
+    } /* else -- item has already been unlinked */
+    return delq;
+}
+
+/* + RowNumber --
+ * 	Calculate which row the specified item appears on;
+ * 	returns -1 if the item is not viewable.
+ * 	Xref: DrawForest, IdentifyItem.
+ */
+static int RowNumber(Treeview *tv, TreeItem *item)
+{
+    TreeItem *p = tv->tree.root->children;
+    int n = 0;
+
+    while (p) {
+	if (p == item)
+	    return n;
+
+	++n;
+
+	/* Find next viewable item in preorder traversal order
+	 */
+	if (p->children && (p->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN)) {
+	    p = p->children;
+	} else {
+	    while (!p->next && p && p->parent)
+		p = p->parent;
+	    if (p)
+		p = p->next;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/* + ItemDepth -- return the depth of a tree item.
+ * 	The depth of an item is equal to the number of proper ancestors,
+ * 	not counting the root node.
+ */
+static int ItemDepth(TreeItem *item)
+{
+    int depth = 0;
+    while (item->parent) {
+	++depth;
+	item = item->parent;
+    }
+    return depth-1;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- item inquiry.
+ */
+
+/* + $tv children $item ?newchildren? --
+ * 	Return the list of children associated with $item
+ */
+static int TreeviewChildrenCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item ?newchildren?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+	for (item = item->children; item; item = item->next) {
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, ItemID(tv, item));
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    } else {
+	TreeItem **newChildren = GetItemListFromObj(interp, tv, objv[3]);
+	TreeItem *child;
+	int i;
+
+	if (!newChildren)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+
+	/* Sanity-check:
+	 */
+	for (i=0; newChildren[i]; ++i) {
+	    if (!AncestryCheck(interp, tv, newChildren[i], item)) {
+		ckfree((ClientData)newChildren);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/* Detach old children:
+	 */
+	child = item->children;
+	while (child) {
+	    TreeItem *next = child->next;
+	    DetachItem(child);
+	    child = next;
+	}
+
+	/* Detach new children from their current locations:
+	 */
+	for (i=0; newChildren[i]; ++i) {
+	    DetachItem(newChildren[i]);
+	}
+
+	/* Reinsert new children:
+	 * Note: it is not an error for an item to be listed more than once,
+	 * though it probably should be...
+	 */
+	child = 0;
+	for (i=0; newChildren[i]; ++i) {
+	    if (newChildren[i]->parent) {
+		/* This is a duplicate element which has already been
+		 * inserted.  Ignore it.
+		 */
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    InsertItem(item, child, newChildren[i]);
+	    child = newChildren[i];
+	}
+
+	ckfree((ClientData)newChildren);
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv parent $item --
+ * 	Return the item ID of $item's parent.
+ */
+static int TreeviewParentCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (item->parent) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, item->parent));
+    } else {
+	/* This is the root item.  @@@ Return an error? */
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv next $item
+ * 	Return the ID of $item's next sibling.
+ */
+static int TreeviewNextCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (item->next) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, item->next));
+    } /* else -- leave interp-result empty */
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv prev $item
+ * 	Return the ID of $item's previous sibling.
+ */
+static int TreeviewPrevCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (item->prev) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, item->prev));
+    } /* else -- leave interp-result empty */
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv index $item --
+ * 	Return the index of $item within its parent.
+ */
+static int TreeviewIndexCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+    int index = 0;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    while (item->prev) {
+	++index;
+	item = item->prev;
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv exists $itemid --
+ * 	Test if the specified item id is present in the tree.
+ */
+static int TreeviewExistsCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "itemid");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(entryPtr != 0));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv bbox $itemid ?$column? --
+ * 	Return bounding box [x y width height] of specified item.
+ */
+static int TreeviewBBoxCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item = 0;
+    TreeColumn *column = 0;
+    int ypos;
+    Ttk_Box bbox;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "itemid ?column");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+    if (!item) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (objc >=4 && (column = FindColumn(interp,tv,objv[3])) == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Compute bounding box of item:
+     * ALTERNATE: (RowNumber(tv, item) - tv->tree.yscroll.first) * ROWHEIGHT;
+     */
+    ypos = ItemYPosition(tv, item) - (ROWHEIGHT * tv->tree.yscroll.first);
+    if (ypos < 0 || ypos > tv->tree.treeArea.height) {
+	/* not viewable, or off-screen */
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    bbox = tv->tree.treeArea;
+    bbox.y += ypos;
+    bbox.height = ROWHEIGHT;
+
+    /* If column has been specified, compute bounding box of cell
+     */
+    if (column) {
+	int xpos = 0, i = (tv->tree.showFlags & SHOW_TREE) ? 0 : 1;
+	while (i < tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) {
+	    if (tv->tree.displayColumns[i] == column) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	    xpos += tv->tree.displayColumns[i]->width;
+	    ++i;
+	}
+	if (i == tv->tree.nDisplayColumns) { /* specified column unviewable */
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	bbox.x += xpos;
+	bbox.width = column->width;
+
+	/* Special case for tree column -- account for indentation:
+	 * (@@@ NOTE: doesn't account for tree indicator or image;
+	 *  @@@ this may or may not be the right thing.)
+	 */
+	if (column == &tv->tree.column0) {
+	    int indent = INDENT * ItemDepth(item);
+	    bbox.x += indent;
+	    bbox.width -= indent;
+	}
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Ttk_NewBoxObj(bbox));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv identify $x $y -- (obsolescent)
+ * 	Implements the old, horrible, 2-argument form of [$tv identify].
+ *
+ * Returns: one of
+ * 	heading #n
+ * 	cell itemid #n
+ * 	item itemid element
+ * 	row itemid
+ */
+static int TreeviewHorribleIdentify(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], Treeview *tv)
+{
+    const char *what = "nothing", *detail = NULL;
+    TreeItem *item = 0;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+    int dColumnNumber;
+    char dcolbuf[16];
+    int x, y, x1;
+
+    /* ASSERT: objc == 4 */
+
+    if (   Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK
+    ) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    dColumnNumber = IdentifyDisplayColumn(tv, x, &x1);
+    if (dColumnNumber < 0) {
+	goto done;
+    }
+    sprintf(dcolbuf, "#%d", dColumnNumber);
+
+    if (Ttk_BoxContains(tv->tree.headingArea,x,y)) {
+	if (-HALO <= x1 - x  && x1 - x <= HALO) {
+	    what = "separator";
+	} else {
+	    what = "heading";
+	}
+	detail = dcolbuf;
+    } else if (Ttk_BoxContains(tv->tree.treeArea,x,y)) {
+	Ttk_Box itemBox;
+	item = IdentifyItem(tv, y, &itemBox);
+	if (item && dColumnNumber > 0) {
+	    what = "cell";
+	    detail = dcolbuf;
+	} else if (item) {
+	    Ttk_Layout layout = tv->tree.itemLayout;
+	    Ttk_LayoutNode *element;
+	    Ttk_RebindSublayout(layout, item);
+	    Ttk_PlaceLayout(layout, ItemState(tv,item), itemBox);
+	    element = Ttk_LayoutIdentify(layout, x, y);
+
+	    if (element) {
+		what = "item";
+		detail = Ttk_LayoutNodeName(element);
+	    } else {
+		what = "row";
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+done:
+    result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, Tcl_NewStringObj(what, -1));
+    if (item)
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, ItemID(tv, item));
+    if (detail)
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, Tcl_NewStringObj(detail, -1));
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv identify $component $x $y --
+ * 	Identify the component at position x,y.
+ */
+
+static int TreeviewIdentifyCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    static const char *componentStrings[] =
+	{ "row", "column", NULL };
+    enum { I_ROW, I_COLUMN };
+
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    int component, x, y;
+
+    if (objc == 4) {	/* Old form */
+	return TreeviewHorribleIdentify(interp, objc, objv, tv);
+    } else if (objc != 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "component x y");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (   Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2],
+		componentStrings, "component", TCL_EXACT, &component) != TCL_OK
+        || Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &y) != TCL_OK
+    ) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    switch (component)
+    {
+	case I_ROW :
+	{
+	    Ttk_Box itemBox;
+	    TreeItem *item = IdentifyItem(tv, y, &itemBox);
+	    if (item) {
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, item));
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	case I_COLUMN :
+	{
+	    int x1;
+	    int column = IdentifyDisplayColumn(tv, x, &x1);
+
+	    if (column >= 0) {
+		char dcolbuf[16];
+		sprintf(dcolbuf, "#%d", column);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(dcolbuf, -1));
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- item and column configuration.
+ */
+
+/* + $tv item $item ?options ....?
+ * 	Query or configure item options.
+ */
+static int TreeviewItemCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item ?option ?value??...");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	return EnumerateOptions(interp, item, ItemOptionSpecs,
+	    tv->tree.itemOptionTable,  tv->core.tkwin);
+    } else if (objc == 4) {
+	return GetOptionValue(interp, item, objv[3],
+	    tv->tree.itemOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    } else {
+	return ConfigureItem(interp, tv, item, objc-3, objv+3);
+    }
+}
+
+/* + $tv column column ?options ....?
+ * 	Column data accessor
+ */
+static int TreeviewColumnCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeColumn *column;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "column -option value...");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(column = FindColumn(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	return EnumerateOptions(interp, column, ColumnOptionSpecs,
+	    tv->tree.columnOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    } else if (objc == 4) {
+	return GetOptionValue(interp, column, objv[3],
+	    tv->tree.columnOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    } else {
+	return ConfigureColumn(interp, tv, column, objc-3, objv+3);
+    }
+}
+
+/* + $tv heading column ?options ....?
+ * 	Heading data accessor
+ */
+static int TreeviewHeadingCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable = tv->tree.headingOptionTable;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = tv->core.tkwin;
+    TreeColumn *column;
+
+    if (objc < 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "column -option value...");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(column = FindColumn(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	return EnumerateOptions(
+	    interp, column, HeadingOptionSpecs, optionTable, tkwin);
+    } else if (objc == 4) {
+	return GetOptionValue(
+	    interp, column, objv[3], optionTable, tkwin);
+    } else {
+	return ConfigureHeading(interp, tv, column, objc-3,objv+3);
+    }
+}
+
+/* + $tv set $item ?$column ?value??
+ * 	Query or configure cell values
+ */
+static int TreeviewSetCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item;
+    TreeColumn *column;
+    int columnNumber;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item ?column ?value??");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2])))
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    /* Make sure -values exists:
+     */
+    if (!item->valuesObj) {
+	item->valuesObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(item->valuesObj);
+    }
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	/* Return dictionary:
+	 */
+	Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+	Tcl_Obj *value;
+	for (columnNumber=0; columnNumber<tv->tree.nColumns; ++columnNumber) {
+	    Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, item->valuesObj, columnNumber, &value);
+	    if (value) {
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result,
+			tv->tree.columns[columnNumber].idObj);
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, result, value);
+	    }
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* else -- get or set column
+     */
+    if (!(column = FindColumn(interp, tv, objv[3])))
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    if (column == &tv->tree.column0) {
+	/* @@@ Maybe set -text here instead? */
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Display column #0 cannot be set", NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Note: we don't do any error checking in the list operations,
+     * since item->valuesObj is guaranteed to be a list.
+     */
+    columnNumber = column - tv->tree.columns;
+
+    if (objc == 4) {	/* get column */
+	Tcl_Obj *result = 0;
+	Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, item->valuesObj, columnNumber, &result);
+	if (!result) {
+	    result = Tcl_NewStringObj("",0);
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else {		/* set column */
+	int length;
+
+	item->valuesObj = unshare(item->valuesObj);
+
+	/* Make sure -values is fully populated:
+	 */
+	Tcl_ListObjLength(interp, item->valuesObj, &length);
+	while (length < tv->tree.nColumns) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *empty = Tcl_NewStringObj("",0);
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, item->valuesObj, empty);
+	    ++length;
+	}
+
+	/* Set value:
+	 */
+	Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp,item->valuesObj,columnNumber,1,1,objv+4);
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- tree modification.
+ */
+
+/* + $tv insert $parent $index ?-id id? ?-option value...?
+ * 	Insert a new item.
+ */
+static int TreeviewInsertCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *parent, *sibling, *newItem;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    int isNew;
+
+    if (objc < 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "parent index ?-id id? -options...");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Get parent node:
+     */
+    if ((parent = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2])) == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Locate previous sibling based on $index:
+     */
+    if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "end")) {
+	sibling = EndPosition(parent);
+    } else {
+	int index;
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &index) != TCL_OK)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	sibling = InsertPosition(parent, index);
+    }
+
+    /* Get node name:
+     *     If -id supplied and does not already exist, use that;
+     *     Otherwise autogenerate new one.
+     */
+    objc -= 4; objv += 4;
+    if (objc >= 2 && !strcmp("-id", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]))) {
+	const char *itemName = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, itemName, &isNew);
+	if (!isNew) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Item ",itemName," already exists",NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	objc -= 2; objv += 2;
+    } else {
+	char idbuf[16];
+	do {
+	    ++tv->tree.serial;
+	    sprintf(idbuf, "I%03X", tv->tree.serial);
+	    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tv->tree.items, idbuf, &isNew);
+	} while (!isNew);
+    }
+
+    /* Create and configure new item:
+     */
+    newItem = NewItem();
+    Tk_InitOptions(
+	interp, (ClientData)newItem, tv->tree.itemOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    if (ConfigureItem(interp, tv, newItem, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
+    	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entryPtr);
+	FreeItem(newItem);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Store in hash table, link into tree:
+     */
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, newItem);
+    newItem->entryPtr = entryPtr;
+    InsertItem(parent, sibling, newItem);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, newItem));
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv detach $item --
+ * 	Unlink $item from the tree.
+ */
+static int TreeviewDetachCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem **items;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(items = GetItemListFromObj(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Sanity-check */
+    for (i = 0; items[i]; ++i) {
+	if (items[i] == tv->tree.root) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Cannot detach root item", NULL);
+	    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    for (i = 0; items[i]; ++i) {
+	DetachItem(items[i]);
+    }
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv delete $items --
+ * 	Delete each item in $items.
+ *
+ * 	Do this in two passes:
+ * 	First detach the item and all its descendants and remove them
+ * 	from the hash table.  Free the items themselves in a second pass.
+ *
+ * 	It's done this way because an item may appear more than once
+ *	in the list of items to delete (either directly or as a descendant
+ *	of a previously deleted item.)
+ */
+
+static int TreeviewDeleteCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem **items, *delq;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "items");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (!(items = GetItemListFromObj(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Sanity-check:
+     */
+    for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+	if (items[i] == tv->tree.root) {
+	    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Cannot delete root item", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Remove items from hash table.
+     */
+    delq = 0;
+    for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+	delq = DeleteItems(items[i], delq);
+    }
+
+    /* Free items:
+     */
+    while (delq) {
+	TreeItem *next = delq->next;
+	if (tv->tree.focus == delq)
+	    tv->tree.focus = 0;
+	FreeItem(delq);
+	delq = next;
+    }
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv move $item $parent $index
+ * 	Move $item to the specified $index in $parent's child list.
+ */
+static int TreeviewMoveCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item, *parent;
+    TreeItem *sibling;
+
+    if (objc != 5) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item parent index");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (   (item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2])) == 0
+	|| (parent = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[3])) == 0)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Locate previous sibling based on $index:
+     */
+    if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[4]), "end")) {
+	sibling = EndPosition(parent);
+    } else {
+	int index;
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &index) != TCL_OK)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	sibling = InsertPosition(parent, index);
+    }
+
+    /* Check ancestry:
+     */
+    if (!AncestryCheck(interp, tv, item, parent))
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    /* Moving an item after itself is a no-op:
+     */
+    if (item == sibling) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /* Move item:
+     */
+    DetachItem(item);
+    InsertItem(parent, sibling, item);
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- scrolling
+ */
+
+static int TreeviewYViewCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    return ScrollviewCommand(interp, objc, objv, tv->tree.yscrollHandle);
+}
+
+/* $tree see $item --
+ * 	Ensure that $item is visible.
+ */
+static int TreeviewSeeCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    TreeItem *item, *parent;
+    int rowNumber;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "item");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(item = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]))) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Make sure all ancestors are open:
+     */
+    for (parent = item->parent; parent; parent = parent->parent) {
+	if (!(parent->state & TTK_STATE_OPEN)) {
+	    parent->openObj = unshare(parent->openObj);
+	    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(parent->openObj, 1);
+	    parent->state |= TTK_STATE_OPEN;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Make sure item is visible:
+     * @@@ DOUBLE-CHECK THIS:
+     */
+    rowNumber = RowNumber(tv, item);
+    if (rowNumber < tv->tree.yscroll.first) {
+	ScrollTo(tv->tree.yscrollHandle, rowNumber);
+    } else if (rowNumber >= tv->tree.yscroll.last) {
+	ScrollTo(tv->tree.yscrollHandle,
+	    tv->tree.yscroll.first + (1+rowNumber - tv->tree.yscroll.last));
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- focus and selection
+ */
+
+/* + $tree focus ?item?
+ */
+static int TreeviewFocusCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	if (tv->tree.focus) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, ItemID(tv, tv->tree.focus));
+	}
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if (objc == 3) {
+	TreeItem *newFocus = FindItem(interp, tv, objv[2]);
+	if (!newFocus)
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	tv->tree.focus = newFocus;
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?newFocus?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+}
+
+/* + $tree selection ?add|remove|set|toggle $items?
+ */
+static int TreeviewSelectionCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    enum {
+	SELECTION_SET, SELECTION_ADD, SELECTION_REMOVE, SELECTION_TOGGLE
+    };
+    static const char *selopStrings[] = {
+	"set", "add", "remove", "toggle", NULL
+    };
+
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    int selop, i;
+    TreeItem *item, **items;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	Tcl_Obj *result = Tcl_NewListObj(0,0);
+	for (item = tv->tree.root->children; item; item=NextPreorder(item)) {
+	    if (item->state & TTK_STATE_SELECTED)
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, result, ItemID(tv, item));
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+    	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?add|remove|set|toggle items?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], selopStrings,
+	    "selection operation", 0, &selop) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    items = GetItemListFromObj(interp, tv, objv[3]);
+    if (!items) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    switch (selop)
+    {
+	case SELECTION_SET:
+	    for (item=tv->tree.root; item; item=NextPreorder(item)) {
+		item->state &= ~TTK_STATE_SELECTED;
+	    }
+	    /*FALLTHRU*/
+	case SELECTION_ADD:
+	    for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+		items[i]->state |= TTK_STATE_SELECTED;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case SELECTION_REMOVE:
+	    for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+		items[i]->state &= ~TTK_STATE_SELECTED;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case SELECTION_TOGGLE:
+	    for (i=0; items[i]; ++i) {
+		items[i]->state ^= TTK_STATE_SELECTED;
+	    }
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    ckfree((ClientData)items);
+    SendVirtualEvent(tv->core.tkwin, "TreeviewSelect");
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands -- tags and bindings.
+ */
+
+/* + $tv tag bind $tag ?$sequence ?$script??
+ */
+static int TreeviewTagBindCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_Tag tag;
+
+    if (objc < 4 || objc > 6) {
+    	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?sequence? ?script?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tag = Ttk_GetTagFromObj(tv->tree.tagTable, objv[3]);
+    if (!tag) { return TCL_ERROR; }
+
+    if (objc == 4) {		/* $tv tag bind $tag */
+	Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, tv->tree.bindingTable, tag);
+    } else if (objc == 5) { 	/* $tv tag bind $tag $sequence */
+	/* TODO: distinguish "no such binding" (OK) from "bad pattern" (ERROR)
+	 */
+	const char *script = Tk_GetBinding(interp,
+		tv->tree.bindingTable, tag, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
+	if (script != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(script,-1));
+	}
+    } else if (objc == 6) {	/* $tv tag bind $tag $sequence $script */
+	CONST char *sequence = Tcl_GetString(objv[4]);
+	CONST char *script = Tcl_GetString(objv[5]);
+	unsigned long mask = Tk_CreateBinding(interp,
+		tv->tree.bindingTable, tag, sequence, script, 0);
+
+	/* Test mask to make sure event is supported:
+	 */
+	if (mask & (~TreeviewBindEventMask)) {
+	    Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, tv->tree.bindingTable, tag, sequence);
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unsupported event ", sequence,
+		"\nonly key, button, motion, and virtual events supported",
+		NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	return mask ? TCL_OK : TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* + $tv tag configure $tag ?-option ?value -option value...??
+ */
+static int TreeviewTagConfigureCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    Treeview *tv = recordPtr;
+    void *tagRecord;
+    Ttk_Tag tag;
+
+    if (objc < 4) {
+    	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?-option ?value ...??");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tag = Ttk_GetTagFromObj(tv->tree.tagTable, objv[3]);
+    tagRecord = Ttk_TagRecord(tag);
+
+    if (objc == 4) {
+	return EnumerateOptions(interp, tagRecord, TagOptionSpecs,
+		tv->tree.tagOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    } else if (objc == 5) {
+	return GetOptionValue(interp, tagRecord, objv[4],
+		tv->tree.tagOptionTable, tv->core.tkwin);
+    }
+    /* else */
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(&tv->core);
+    return Tk_SetOptions(
+	interp, tagRecord, tv->tree.tagOptionTable,
+	objc - 4, objv + 4, tv->core.tkwin,
+	NULL/*savedOptions*/, NULL/*mask*/);
+}
+
+/* + $tv tag option args...
+ */
+static int TreeviewTagCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    static WidgetCommandSpec TreeviewTagCommands[] = {
+	{ "bind",	TreeviewTagBindCommand },
+	{ "configure",	TreeviewTagConfigureCommand },
+	{0,0}
+    };
+    return WidgetEnsembleCommand(
+	    TreeviewTagCommands, 2, interp, objc, objv, recordPtr);
+}
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget commands record.
+ */
+static WidgetCommandSpec TreeviewCommands[] =
+{
+    { "bbox",  		TreeviewBBoxCommand },
+    { "children",	TreeviewChildrenCommand },
+    { "cget",		WidgetCgetCommand },
+    { "column", 	TreeviewColumnCommand },
+    { "configure",	WidgetConfigureCommand },
+    { "delete", 	TreeviewDeleteCommand },
+    { "detach", 	TreeviewDetachCommand },
+    { "exists", 	TreeviewExistsCommand },
+    { "focus", 		TreeviewFocusCommand },
+    { "heading", 	TreeviewHeadingCommand },
+    { "identify",  	TreeviewIdentifyCommand },
+    { "index",  	TreeviewIndexCommand },
+    { "instate",	WidgetInstateCommand },
+    { "insert", 	TreeviewInsertCommand },
+    { "item", 		TreeviewItemCommand },
+    { "move", 		TreeviewMoveCommand },
+    { "next", 		TreeviewNextCommand },
+    { "parent", 	TreeviewParentCommand },
+    { "prev", 		TreeviewPrevCommand },
+    { "see", 		TreeviewSeeCommand },
+    { "selection" ,	TreeviewSelectionCommand },
+    { "set",  		TreeviewSetCommand },
+    { "state",  	WidgetStateCommand },
+    { "tag",    	TreeviewTagCommand },
+    { "yview",  	TreeviewYViewCommand },
+    { NULL, NULL }
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Widget definition.
+ */
+
+WidgetSpec TreeviewWidgetSpec =
+{
+    "Treeview",			/* className */
+    sizeof(Treeview),   	/* recordSize */
+    TreeviewOptionSpecs,	/* optionSpecs */
+    TreeviewCommands,   	/* subcommands */
+    TreeviewInitialize,   	/* initializeProc */
+    TreeviewCleanup,		/* cleanupProc */
+    TreeviewConfigure,    	/* configureProc */
+    NullPostConfigure,  	/* postConfigureProc */
+    TreeviewGetLayout, 		/* getLayoutProc */
+    TreeviewSize, 		/* sizeProc */
+    TreeviewDoLayout,		/* layoutProc */
+    TreeviewDisplay		/* displayProc */
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Layout specifications.
+ */
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(TreeviewLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Treeview.field", TTK_FILL_BOTH|TTK_BORDER,
+	TTK_GROUP("Treeview.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	    TTK_NODE("Treeview.client", TTK_FILL_BOTH)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(ItemLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Treeitem.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Treeitem.indicator", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	TTK_NODE("Treeitem.image", TTK_PACK_LEFT)
+	TTK_GROUP("Treeitem.focus", TTK_PACK_LEFT,
+	    TTK_NODE("Treeitem.text", TTK_PACK_LEFT)))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(CellLayout)
+    TTK_GROUP("Treedata.padding", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Treeitem.label", TTK_FILL_BOTH))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(HeadingLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Treeheading.cell", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+    TTK_GROUP("Treeheading.border", TTK_FILL_BOTH,
+	TTK_NODE("Treeheading.image", TTK_PACK_RIGHT)
+	TTK_NODE("Treeheading.text", TTK_FILL_X))
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+TTK_BEGIN_LAYOUT(RowLayout)
+    TTK_NODE("Treeitem.row", TTK_FILL_BOTH)
+TTK_END_LAYOUT
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Tree indicator element.
+ */
+
+#if defined(WIN32)
+static const int WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK = 1;
+#else
+static const int WIN32_XDRAWLINE_HACK = 0;
+#endif
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *colorObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *sizeObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *marginsObj;
+} TreeitemIndicator;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec TreeitemIndicatorOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-foreground", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,colorObj), DEFAULT_FOREGROUND },
+    { "-indicatorsize", TK_OPTION_PIXELS,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,sizeObj), "12" },
+    { "-indicatormargins", TK_OPTION_STRING,
+	Tk_Offset(TreeitemIndicator,marginsObj), "2 2 4 2" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void TreeitemIndicatorSize(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Ttk_Padding *paddingPtr)
+{
+    TreeitemIndicator *indicator = elementRecord;
+    int size = 0;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->marginsObj, paddingPtr);
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, tkwin, indicator->sizeObj, &size);
+
+    *widthPtr = *heightPtr = size;
+}
+
+static void TreeitemIndicatorDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    TreeitemIndicator *indicator = elementRecord;
+    ArrowDirection direction =
+	(state & TTK_STATE_OPEN) ? ARROW_DOWN : ARROW_RIGHT;
+    Ttk_Padding margins;
+    XColor *borderColor = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, indicator->colorObj);
+    XGCValues gcvalues; GC gc; unsigned mask;
+
+    if (state & TTK_STATE_LEAF) /* don't draw anything */
+	return;
+
+    Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj(NULL,tkwin,indicator->marginsObj,&margins);
+    b = Ttk_PadBox(b, margins);
+
+    gcvalues.foreground = borderColor->pixel;
+    gcvalues.line_width = 1;
+    mask = GCForeground | GCLineWidth;
+    gc = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, mask, &gcvalues);
+
+    DrawArrow(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc, b, direction);
+
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec TreeitemIndicatorElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(TreeitemIndicator),
+    TreeitemIndicatorOptions,
+    TreeitemIndicatorSize,
+    TreeitemIndicatorDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Row element.
+ */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tcl_Obj *backgroundObj;
+    Tcl_Obj *rowNumberObj;
+} RowElement;
+
+static Ttk_ElementOptionSpec RowElementOptions[] =
+{
+    { "-background", TK_OPTION_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(RowElement,backgroundObj), DEFAULT_BACKGROUND },
+    { "-rownumber", TK_OPTION_INT,
+	Tk_Offset(RowElement,rowNumberObj), "0" },
+    {NULL}
+};
+
+static void RowElementDraw(
+    void *clientData, void *elementRecord, Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Drawable d, Ttk_Box b, Ttk_State state)
+{
+    RowElement *row = elementRecord;
+    XColor *color = Tk_GetColorFromObj(tkwin, row->backgroundObj);
+    GC gc = Tk_GCForColor(color, d);
+    XFillRectangle(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, gc,
+	    b.x, b.y, b.width, b.height);
+}
+
+static Ttk_ElementSpec RowElementSpec =
+{
+    TK_STYLE_VERSION_2,
+    sizeof(RowElement),
+    RowElementOptions,
+    NullElementGeometry,
+    RowElementDraw
+};
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * +++ Initialisation.
+ */
+DLLEXPORT int Treeview_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme theme = Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(interp);
+
+    RegisterWidget(interp, "ttk::treeview", &TreeviewWidgetSpec);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme,
+	    "Treeitem.indicator", &TreeitemIndicatorElementSpec, 0);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Treeitem.row", &RowElementSpec, 0);
+    Ttk_RegisterElement(interp, theme, "Treeheading.cell", &RowElementSpec, 0);
+
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, TreeviewWidgetSpec.className, TreeviewLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "Item", ItemLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "Cell", CellLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "Heading", HeadingLayout);
+    Ttk_RegisterLayout(theme, "Row", RowLayout);
+
+    Tcl_PkgProvide(interp, "ttk::treeview", TTK_VERSION);
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.c b/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f4e56f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.c
@@ -0,0 +1,786 @@
+/* $Id: ttkWidget.c,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Ttk widget implementation, core widget utilities.
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <tk.h>
+#include "ttkTheme.h"
+#include "ttkWidget.h"
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * Helper routines.
+ */
+
+static void UpdateLayout(Tcl_Interp *interp, WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    Ttk_Theme themePtr = Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(interp);
+    Ttk_Layout newLayout = 
+    	corePtr->widgetSpec->getLayoutProc(interp, themePtr,corePtr);
+
+    /* TODO: @@@ Check for errors */
+    if (newLayout) {
+	if (corePtr->layout) {
+	    Ttk_FreeLayout(corePtr->layout);
+	}
+	corePtr->layout = newLayout;
+    }
+}
+
+static void UpdateGeometry(WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    int reqWidth = 1, reqHeight = 1;
+
+    if (corePtr->widgetSpec->sizeProc(corePtr,&reqWidth,&reqHeight)) {
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(corePtr->tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * RedisplayWidget --
+ *	Redraw a widget.  Called as an idle handler.
+ */
+
+static void RedisplayWidget(ClientData recordPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = (WidgetCore *)recordPtr;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = corePtr->tkwin;
+    Drawable d;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    GC gc;
+
+    corePtr->flags &= ~REDISPLAY_PENDING;
+    if (!Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Get a Pixmap for drawing in the background:
+     */
+    d = Tk_GetPixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin),
+	    DefaultDepthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
+
+    /*
+     * Get a GC for blitting the pixmap to the display:
+     */
+    gcValues.function = GXcopy;
+    gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
+    gc = Tk_GetGC(corePtr->tkwin, GCFunction|GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues);
+
+    /*
+     * Recompute layout and draw widget contents:
+     */
+    corePtr->widgetSpec->layoutProc(recordPtr);
+    corePtr->widgetSpec->displayProc(recordPtr, d);
+
+    /*
+     * Copy to the screen.
+     */
+    XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), d, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), gc,
+	    0, 0, (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin),
+	    0, 0);
+
+    /*
+     * Release resources
+     */
+    Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), d);
+    Tk_FreeGC(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc);
+}
+
+/* TtkRedisplayWidget -- 
+ * 	Schedule redisplay as an idle handler.
+ */
+
+void TtkRedisplayWidget(WidgetCore *corePtr) 
+{
+    if (corePtr->flags & WIDGET_DESTROYED) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (!(corePtr->flags & REDISPLAY_PENDING)) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(RedisplayWidget, (ClientData) corePtr);
+	corePtr->flags |= REDISPLAY_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/* TtkResizeWidget --
+ * 	Recompute widget size, schedule geometry propagation and redisplay. 
+ */
+
+void TtkResizeWidget(WidgetCore *corePtr)
+{
+    if (corePtr->flags & WIDGET_DESTROYED) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    UpdateGeometry(corePtr);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+}
+
+/* WidgetEnsembleCommand --
+ * 	Invoke an ensemble defined by a WidgetCommandSpec.
+ */
+int WidgetEnsembleCommand(
+    WidgetCommandSpec *commands,	/* Ensemble definition */
+    int cmdIndex,			/* Index of command word */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* Interpreter to use */
+    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[],	/* Argument vector */
+    void *clientData)			/* User data (widget record pointer) */
+{
+    int index;
+
+    if (objc <= cmdIndex) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, cmdIndex, objv, "option ?arg arg...?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, objv[cmdIndex], commands,
+		sizeof(commands[0]), "command", 0, &index) != TCL_OK)
+    {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return commands[index].command(interp, objc, objv, clientData);
+}
+
+/*
+ * WidgetInstanceObjCmd --
+ *	Widget instance command implementation.
+ */
+static int
+WidgetInstanceObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,		/* Widget record pointer */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,				/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])		/* Argument objects. */
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = (WidgetCore *)clientData;
+    WidgetCommandSpec *commands = corePtr->widgetSpec->commands;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    Tcl_Preserve(clientData);
+    status = WidgetEnsembleCommand(commands, 1, interp, objc, objv, clientData);
+    Tcl_Release(clientData);
+
+    return status;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Command deletion callback for widget instance commands.
+ */
+static void
+WidgetInstanceObjCmdDeleted(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = (WidgetCore *) clientData;
+    corePtr->widgetCmd = NULL;
+    if (corePtr->tkwin != NULL)
+	Tk_DestroyWindow(corePtr->tkwin);
+}
+
+/*
+ * WidgetCleanup --
+ *	 Final cleanup for widget.
+ *
+ * @@@ TODO: check all code paths leading to widget destruction,
+ * @@@ describe here.
+ * @@@ Call widget-specific cleanup routine at an appropriate point.
+ */
+static void
+WidgetCleanup(char *memPtr)
+{
+    ckfree(memPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * CoreEventProc --
+ *	Event handler for basic events.
+ *	Processes Expose, Configure, FocusIn/Out, and Destroy events.
+ *	Also handles <<ThemeChanged>> virtual events.
+ *
+ *	For Expose and Configure, simply schedule the widget for redisplay.
+ *	For Destroy events, handle the cleanup process.
+ *
+ *	For Focus events, set/clear the focus bit in the state field.
+ *	It turns out this is impossible to do correctly in a binding script,
+ *	because Tk filters out focus events with detail == NotifyInferior.
+ *
+ *	For Deactivate/Activate pseudo-events, clear/set the background state flag.
+ *
+ *	<<NOTE-REALIZED>> On the first ConfigureNotify event 
+ *	(which indicates that the window has just been created),
+ *	update the layout.  This is to work around two problems:
+ *	(1) Virtual events aren't delivered to unrealized widgets
+ *	(see bug #835997), so any intervening <<ThemeChanged>> events
+ *	will not have been processed.
+ *
+ *	(2) Geometry calculations in the XP theme don't work
+ *	until the widget is realized.
+ */
+
+static const unsigned CoreEventMask
+    = ExposureMask
+    | StructureNotifyMask
+    | FocusChangeMask
+    | VirtualEventMask
+    | ActivateMask
+    ;
+
+static void CoreEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = (WidgetCore *) clientData;
+
+    switch (eventPtr->type)
+    {
+	case ConfigureNotify :
+	    if (!(corePtr->flags & WIDGET_REALIZED)) {
+		/* See <<NOTE-REALIZED>> */
+		UpdateLayout(corePtr->interp, corePtr);
+		UpdateGeometry(corePtr);
+		corePtr->flags |= WIDGET_REALIZED;
+	    }
+	    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    break;
+	case Expose :
+	    if (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0) {
+		TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case DestroyNotify :
+	    corePtr->flags |= WIDGET_DESTROYED;
+
+	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(corePtr->tkwin,
+		    CoreEventMask,CoreEventProc,clientData);
+
+	    if (corePtr->flags & REDISPLAY_PENDING) {
+		Tcl_CancelIdleCall(RedisplayWidget, clientData);
+	    }
+
+	    corePtr->widgetSpec->cleanupProc(corePtr);
+
+	    Tk_FreeConfigOptions(
+		clientData, corePtr->optionTable, corePtr->tkwin);
+	    corePtr->tkwin = NULL;
+
+	    if (corePtr->layout) {
+		Ttk_FreeLayout(corePtr->layout);
+	    }
+
+	    /* NB: this can reenter the interpreter via a command traces */
+	    if (corePtr->widgetCmd) {
+		Tcl_Command cmd = corePtr->widgetCmd;
+		corePtr->widgetCmd = 0;
+		Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(corePtr->interp, cmd);
+	    }
+	    Tcl_EventuallyFree(clientData, WidgetCleanup);
+	    break;
+
+	case FocusIn:
+	case FocusOut:
+	    /* Don't process "virtual crossing" events */
+	    if (   eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyInferior
+		|| eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyAncestor
+		|| eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyNonlinear)
+	    {
+		if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn)
+		    corePtr->state |= TTK_STATE_FOCUS;
+		else
+		    corePtr->state &= ~TTK_STATE_FOCUS;
+		TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case ActivateNotify:
+	    corePtr->state &= ~TTK_STATE_BACKGROUND;
+	    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    break;
+	case DeactivateNotify:
+	    corePtr->state |= TTK_STATE_BACKGROUND;
+	    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    break;
+	case VirtualEvent:
+	    if (!strcmp("ThemeChanged", ((XVirtualEvent *)(eventPtr))->name)) {
+		UpdateLayout(corePtr->interp, corePtr);
+		UpdateGeometry(corePtr);
+		TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	    }
+	default:
+	    /* can't happen... */
+	    break;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * WidgetWorldChanged --
+ * 	Default Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc() for widgets.
+ * 	Invoked whenever fonts or other system resources are changed;
+ * 	recomputes geometry.
+ */
+static void WidgetWorldChanged(ClientData clientData)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = (WidgetCore*)clientData;
+    UpdateGeometry(corePtr);
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+}
+
+static struct Tk_ClassProcs widgetClassProcs = {
+    sizeof(Tk_ClassProcs),
+    WidgetWorldChanged
+};
+
+/*
+ * WidgetConstructorObjCmd --
+ *	General-purpose widget constructor command implementation.
+ *	ClientData is a WidgetSpec *.
+ */
+int WidgetConstructorObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])
+{
+    WidgetSpec *widgetSpec = (WidgetSpec *)clientData;
+    const char *className = widgetSpec->className;
+    WidgetCore *corePtr;
+    ClientData recordPtr;
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
+    int i;
+
+    if (objc < 2 || objc % 1 == 1) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "pathName ?options?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
+	    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], NULL), (char *) NULL);
+    if (tkwin == NULL)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    /*
+     * Check if a -class resource has been specified:
+     * We have to do this before the InitOptions() call,
+     * since InitOptions() is affected by the widget class.
+     */
+    for (i = 2; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	const char *resourceName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	if (!strcmp(resourceName, "-class")) {
+	    className = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    Tk_SetClass(tkwin, className);
+
+    /*
+     * Set the BackgroundPixmap to ParentRelative here, so
+     * subclasses don't need to worry about setting the background.
+     */
+    Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap(tkwin, ParentRelative);
+
+    optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, widgetSpec->optionSpecs);
+
+    /*
+     * Allocate and initialize the widget record.
+     */
+    recordPtr = ckalloc(widgetSpec->recordSize);
+    memset(recordPtr, 0, widgetSpec->recordSize);
+    corePtr = (WidgetCore *)recordPtr;
+
+    corePtr->tkwin	= tkwin;
+    corePtr->interp 	= interp;
+    corePtr->widgetSpec	= widgetSpec;
+    corePtr->widgetCmd	= Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, Tk_PathName(tkwin),
+	WidgetInstanceObjCmd, recordPtr, WidgetInstanceObjCmdDeleted);
+    corePtr->optionTable = optionTable;
+
+    Tk_SetClassProcs(tkwin, &widgetClassProcs, recordPtr);
+
+    if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin) != TCL_OK)
+    	goto error;
+
+    if (widgetSpec->initializeProc(interp, recordPtr) != TCL_OK)
+	goto error;
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc - 2,
+	    objv + 2, tkwin, NULL/*savePtr*/, (int *)NULL/*maskPtr*/) != TCL_OK)
+	goto error;
+
+    if (widgetSpec->configureProc(interp, recordPtr, ~0) != TCL_OK)
+	goto error;
+
+    if (widgetSpec->postConfigureProc(interp, recordPtr, ~0) != TCL_OK)
+	goto error;
+
+    if (WidgetDestroyed(corePtr))
+	goto error;
+
+    UpdateLayout(interp, corePtr);
+    UpdateGeometry(corePtr);
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, CoreEventMask, CoreEventProc, recordPtr);
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1));
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    if (corePtr->layout) {
+	Ttk_FreeLayout(corePtr->layout);
+	corePtr->layout = 0;
+    }
+    Tk_FreeConfigOptions(recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin);
+    Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
+    corePtr->tkwin = 0;
+    Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(interp, corePtr->widgetCmd);
+    ckfree(recordPtr);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ * WidgetChangeState --
+ * 	Set / clear the specified bits in the 'state' flag,
+ */
+void WidgetChangeState(WidgetCore *corePtr,
+    unsigned int setBits, unsigned int clearBits)
+{
+    Ttk_State oldState = corePtr->state;
+    corePtr->state = (oldState & ~clearBits) | setBits;
+    if (corePtr->state ^ oldState) {
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ * WidgetGetLayout --
+ * 	Default getLayoutProc.
+ *	Looks up the layout based on the -style resource (if specified),
+ *	otherwise use the widget class.
+ */
+Ttk_Layout WidgetGetLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme themePtr, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    const char *styleName = 0;
+
+    if (corePtr->styleObj) 
+    	styleName = Tcl_GetString(corePtr->styleObj);
+
+    if (!styleName || *styleName == '\0')
+    	styleName = corePtr->widgetSpec->className;
+
+    return Ttk_CreateLayout(interp, themePtr, styleName,
+	recordPtr, corePtr->optionTable, corePtr->tkwin);
+}
+
+/*
+ * WidgetGetOrientedLayout --
+ * 	Helper routine.  Same as WidgetGetLayout, but prefixes 
+ * 	"Horizontal." or "Vertical." to the style name, depending 
+ * 	on the value of the 'orient' option.
+ */
+Ttk_Layout WidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_Theme themePtr, void *recordPtr, Tcl_Obj *orientObj)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    const char *baseStyleName = 0;
+    Tcl_DString styleName;
+    int orient = TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL;
+    Ttk_Layout layout;
+
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&styleName);
+
+    /* Prefix: 
+     */
+    Ttk_GetOrientFromObj(NULL, orientObj, &orient);
+    if (orient == TTK_ORIENT_HORIZONTAL)
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&styleName, "Horizontal.", -1);
+    else 
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&styleName, "Vertical.", -1);
+
+
+    /* Add base style name:
+     */
+    if (corePtr->styleObj) 
+    	baseStyleName = Tcl_GetString(corePtr->styleObj);
+    if (!baseStyleName || *baseStyleName == '\0')
+    	baseStyleName = corePtr->widgetSpec->className;
+
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&styleName, baseStyleName, -1);
+
+    /* Create layout:
+     */
+    layout= Ttk_CreateLayout(interp, themePtr, Tcl_DStringValue(&styleName), 
+	recordPtr, corePtr->optionTable, corePtr->tkwin);
+
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&styleName);
+
+    return layout;
+}
+
+/*
+ * NullInitialize --
+ * 	Default widget initializeProc (no-op)
+ */
+int  NullInitialize(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *recordPtr)
+{
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ * NullPostConfigure --
+ * 	Default widget postConfigureProc (no-op)
+ */
+int NullPostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData, int mask)
+{
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* CoreConfigure --
+ * 	Default widget configureProc.
+ */
+int CoreConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, void *clientData, int mask)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    
+    if (mask & STYLE_CHANGED) {
+	Ttk_Theme theme = Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(interp);
+	Ttk_Layout newLayout =
+	    corePtr->widgetSpec->getLayoutProc(interp,theme,corePtr);
+
+	if (!newLayout) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (corePtr->layout) {
+	    Ttk_FreeLayout(corePtr->layout);
+	}
+	corePtr->layout = newLayout;
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ * NullCleanup --
+ * 	Default widget cleanupProc (no-op)
+ */
+void NullCleanup(void *recordPtr)
+{
+    return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * WidgetDoLayout --
+ * 	Default widget layoutProc.
+ */
+void WidgetDoLayout(void *clientData)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = clientData;
+    Ttk_PlaceLayout(corePtr->layout,corePtr->state,Ttk_WinBox(corePtr->tkwin));
+}
+
+/*
+ * WidgetDisplay --
+ * 	Default widget displayProc.
+ */
+void WidgetDisplay(void *recordPtr, Drawable d)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_DrawLayout(corePtr->layout, corePtr->state, d);
+}
+
+/*
+ * WidgetSize --
+ * 	Default widget sizeProc()
+ */
+int WidgetSize(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_LayoutSize(corePtr->layout, corePtr->state, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    return 1;
+
+/* OR: (@@@)
+    return *widthPtr > Tk_Width(corePtr->tkwin) 
+	|| *heightPtr > Tk_Height(corePtr->tkwin);
+*/
+}
+
+
+/* Default implementations for widget subcommands:
+*/
+int WidgetCgetCommand(
+Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    result = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, recordPtr,
+		corePtr->optionTable, objv[2], corePtr->tkwin);
+    if (result == NULL)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+int WidgetConfigureCommand(
+Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Tcl_Obj *result;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	result = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr,
+		corePtr->optionTable, (Tcl_Obj *) NULL, corePtr->tkwin);
+    } else if (objc == 3) {
+	result = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr,
+		corePtr->optionTable, objv[2], corePtr->tkwin);
+    } else {
+	Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
+	int status;
+	int mask = 0;
+
+	status = Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr,
+		corePtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2,
+		corePtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, &mask);
+	if (status != TCL_OK)
+	    return status;
+
+	if (mask & READONLY_OPTION) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+		    "Attempt to change read-only option", TCL_STATIC);
+	    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	status = corePtr->widgetSpec->configureProc(interp, recordPtr, mask);
+	if (status != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+	    return status;
+	}
+	Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+
+	status = corePtr->widgetSpec->postConfigureProc(interp,recordPtr,mask);
+	if (status != TCL_OK) {
+	    return status;
+	}
+
+	if (mask & (STYLE_CHANGED | GEOMETRY_CHANGED)) {
+	    UpdateGeometry(corePtr);
+	}
+
+	TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+	result = Tcl_NewObj();
+    }
+
+    if (result == 0) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/* $w state $stateSpec
+ * $w state
+ *
+ * 	If $stateSpec is specified, modify the widget state accordingly,
+ * 	return a new stateSpec representing the changed bits.
+ *
+ * 	Otherwise, return a statespec matching all the currently-set bits.
+ */
+
+int WidgetStateCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_StateSpec spec;
+    int status;
+    Ttk_State oldState, changed;
+
+    if (objc == 2) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	    Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(corePtr->state, 0ul));
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    if (objc != 3) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "state-spec");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    status = Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, objv[2], &spec);
+    if (status != TCL_OK)
+	return status;
+
+    oldState = corePtr->state;
+    corePtr->state = Ttk_ModifyState(corePtr->state, &spec);
+    changed = corePtr->state ^ oldState;
+
+    TtkRedisplayWidget(corePtr);
+
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	Ttk_NewStateSpecObj(oldState & changed, ~oldState & changed));
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* $w instate $stateSpec ?$script?
+ *
+ * 	Tests if widget state matches $stateSpec.
+ *	If $script is specified, execute script if state matches.
+ *	Otherwise, return true/false
+ */
+
+int WidgetInstateCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_State state = corePtr->state;
+    Ttk_StateSpec spec;
+    int status = TCL_OK;
+
+    if (objc < 3 || objc > 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "state-spec ?script?");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    status = Ttk_GetStateSpecFromObj(interp, objv[2], &spec);
+    if (status != TCL_OK)
+	return status;
+
+    if (objc == 3) {
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	    Tcl_NewBooleanObj(Ttk_StateMatches(state,&spec)));
+    } else if (objc == 4) {
+	if (Ttk_StateMatches(state,&spec)) {
+	    status = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, objv[3], 0);
+	}
+    }
+    return status;
+}
+
+/* $w identify $x $y
+ * 	Returns: name of element at $x, $y
+ */
+int WidgetIdentifyCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], void *recordPtr)
+{
+    WidgetCore *corePtr = recordPtr;
+    Ttk_LayoutNode *node;
+    int x, y;
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK
+	|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+
+    node = Ttk_LayoutIdentify(corePtr->layout, x, y); 
+    if (node) {
+	const char *elementName = Ttk_LayoutNodeName(node);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,Tcl_NewStringObj(elementName,-1));
+    }
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*EOF*/
diff --git a/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.h b/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa749ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/generic/ttk/ttkWidget.h
@@ -0,0 +1,269 @@
+/* $Id: ttkWidget.h,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:26 hobbs Exp $
+ * Copyright (c) 2003, Joe English
+ *
+ * Helper routines for widget implementations.
+ *
+ * Require: ttkTheme.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef WIDGET_H
+#define WIDGET_H 1
+
+/* State flags for 'flags' field.
+ * @@@ todo: distinguish:
+ * need reconfigure, need redisplay, redisplay pending
+ */
+#define WIDGET_DESTROYED	0x0001
+#define REDISPLAY_PENDING 	0x0002	/* scheduled call to RedisplayWidget */
+#define WIDGET_REALIZED		0x0010	/* set at first ConfigureNotify */
+#define CURSOR_ON 		0x0020	/* See BlinkCursor() */
+#define WIDGET_USER_FLAG        0x0100  /* 0x0100 - 0x8000 for user flags */
+
+/*
+ * Bit fields for OptionSpec 'mask' field:
+ */
+#define READONLY_OPTION 	0x1
+#define STYLE_CHANGED   	0x2
+#define GEOMETRY_CHANGED	0x4
+
+/*
+ * Core widget elements
+ */
+typedef struct WidgetSpec_ WidgetSpec;	/* Forward */
+
+typedef struct
+{
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window associated with widget */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with widget. */
+    WidgetSpec *widgetSpec;	/* Widget class hooks */
+    Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for widget command. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Option table */
+    Ttk_Layout layout;  	/* Widget layout */
+
+    /*
+     * Storage for resources:
+     */
+    Tcl_Obj *takeFocusPtr;	/* Storage for -takefocus option */
+    Tcl_Obj *cursorObj;		/* Storage for -cursor option */
+    Tcl_Obj *styleObj;		/* Name of currently-applied style */
+    Tcl_Obj *classObj;		/* Class name (readonly option) */
+
+    Ttk_State state;		/* Current widget state */
+    unsigned int flags;		/* internal flags, see above */
+
+} WidgetCore;
+
+/*
+ * Subcommand specifications:
+ */
+typedef int (*WidgetSubcommandProc)(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr);
+typedef struct {
+    const char *name;
+    WidgetSubcommandProc command;
+} WidgetCommandSpec;
+
+extern int WidgetEnsembleCommand(	/* Run an ensemble command */
+    WidgetCommandSpec *commands, int cmdIndex,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], void *recordPtr);
+
+/*
+ * Widget specifications:
+ */
+struct WidgetSpec_
+{
+    const char 		*className;	/* Widget class name */
+    size_t 		recordSize;	/* #bytes in widget record */
+    Tk_OptionSpec	*optionSpecs;	/* Option specifications */
+    WidgetCommandSpec	*commands;	/* Widget instance subcommands */
+
+    /*
+     * Hooks:
+     */
+    int  	(*initializeProc)(Tcl_Interp *, void *recordPtr);
+    void	(*cleanupProc)(void *recordPtr);
+    int 	(*configureProc)(Tcl_Interp *, void *recordPtr, int flags);
+    int 	(*postConfigureProc)(Tcl_Interp *, void *recordPtr, int flags);
+    Ttk_Layout	(*getLayoutProc)(Tcl_Interp *,Ttk_Theme, void *recordPtr);
+    int 	(*sizeProc)(void *recordPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+    void	(*layoutProc)(void *recordPtr);
+    void	(*displayProc)(void *recordPtr, Drawable d);
+};
+
+/*
+ * Common factors for widget implementations:
+ */
+extern int  NullInitialize(Tcl_Interp *, void *);
+extern int  NullPostConfigure(Tcl_Interp *, void *, int);
+extern void NullCleanup(void *recordPtr);
+extern Ttk_Layout WidgetGetLayout(Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Theme, void *recordPtr);
+extern Ttk_Layout WidgetGetOrientedLayout(
+    Tcl_Interp *, Ttk_Theme, void *recordPtr, Tcl_Obj *orientObj);
+extern int  WidgetSize(void *recordPtr, int *w, int *h);
+extern void WidgetDoLayout(void *recordPtr);
+extern void WidgetDisplay(void *recordPtr, Drawable);
+
+extern int CoreConfigure(Tcl_Interp*, void *, int mask);
+
+/* Commands present in all widgets:
+ */
+extern int WidgetConfigureCommand(Tcl_Interp *, int, Tcl_Obj*const[], void *);
+extern int WidgetCgetCommand(Tcl_Interp *, int, Tcl_Obj*const[], void *);
+extern int WidgetInstateCommand(Tcl_Interp *, int, Tcl_Obj*const[], void *);
+extern int WidgetStateCommand(Tcl_Interp *, int, Tcl_Obj*const[], void *);
+
+/* Common widget commands:
+ */
+extern int WidgetIdentifyCommand(Tcl_Interp *, int, Tcl_Obj*const[], void *);
+
+extern int WidgetConstructorObjCmd(ClientData,Tcl_Interp*,int,Tcl_Obj*CONST[]);
+
+#define RegisterWidget(interp, name, specPtr) \
+    Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, name, \
+	WidgetConstructorObjCmd, (ClientData)specPtr,NULL)
+
+/* WIDGET_TAKES_FOCUS --
+ * Add this to the OptionSpecs table of widgets that
+ * take keyboard focus during traversal to override
+ * CoreOptionSpec's -takefocus default value:
+ */
+#define WIDGET_TAKES_FOCUS \
+    {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus", \
+	"ttk::takefocus", Tk_Offset(WidgetCore, takeFocusPtr), -1, 0,0,0 }
+
+/* WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(baseOptionSpecs) --
+ * Add this at the end of an OptionSpecs table to inherit
+ * the options from 'baseOptionSpecs'.
+ */
+#define WIDGET_INHERIT_OPTIONS(baseOptionSpecs) \
+    {TK_OPTION_END, 0,0,0, NULL, -1,-1, 0, (ClientData)baseOptionSpecs, 0}
+
+/*
+ * Useful routines for use inside widget implementations:
+ */
+extern int WidgetDestroyed(WidgetCore *);
+#define WidgetDestroyed(corePtr) ((corePtr)->flags & WIDGET_DESTROYED)
+
+extern void WidgetChangeState(WidgetCore *,
+	unsigned int setBits, unsigned int clearBits);
+
+extern void TtkRedisplayWidget(WidgetCore *);
+extern void TtkResizeWidget(WidgetCore *);
+
+extern void TrackElementState(WidgetCore *);
+extern void BlinkCursor(WidgetCore *);
+
+/*
+ * -state option values (compatibility)
+ */
+extern void CheckStateOption(WidgetCore *, Tcl_Obj *);
+
+/*
+ * Variable traces:
+ */
+typedef void (*Ttk_TraceProc)(void *recordPtr, const char *value);
+typedef struct TtkTraceHandle_ Ttk_TraceHandle;
+
+extern Ttk_TraceHandle *Ttk_TraceVariable(
+    Tcl_Interp*, Tcl_Obj *varnameObj, Ttk_TraceProc callback, void *clientData);
+extern void Ttk_UntraceVariable(Ttk_TraceHandle *);
+extern int Ttk_FireTrace(Ttk_TraceHandle *);
+
+/*
+ * Utility routines for managing -image option:
+ */
+extern int GetImageList(
+    Tcl_Interp *, WidgetCore *, Tcl_Obj *imageOption, Tk_Image **imageListPtr);
+extern void FreeImageList(Tk_Image *);
+
+/*
+ * Virtual events:
+ */
+extern void SendVirtualEvent(Tk_Window tgtWin, const char *eventName);
+
+/*
+ * Helper routines for data accessor commands:
+ */
+extern int EnumerateOptions(
+    Tcl_Interp *, void *recordPtr, Tk_OptionSpec *, Tk_OptionTable, Tk_Window);
+extern int GetOptionValue(
+    Tcl_Interp *, void *recordPtr, Tcl_Obj *optName, Tk_OptionTable, Tk_Window);
+
+/*
+ * Helper routines for scrolling widgets (see scroll.c).
+ */
+typedef struct {
+    int 	first;		/* First visible item */
+    int 	last;		/* Last visible item */
+    int 	total;		/* Total #items */
+    char 	*scrollCmd;	/* Widget option */
+} Scrollable;
+
+typedef struct ScrollHandleRec *ScrollHandle;
+
+extern ScrollHandle CreateScrollHandle(WidgetCore *, Scrollable *);
+extern void FreeScrollHandle(ScrollHandle);
+
+extern int ScrollviewCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], ScrollHandle);
+
+extern void ScrollTo(ScrollHandle, int newFirst);
+extern void Scrolled(ScrollHandle, int first, int last, int total);
+extern void ScrollbarUpdateRequired(ScrollHandle);
+
+/*
+ * Tag sets (work in progress, half-baked)
+ */
+
+typedef struct TtkTag *Ttk_Tag;
+typedef struct TtkTagTable *Ttk_TagTable;
+
+extern Ttk_TagTable Ttk_CreateTagTable(Tk_OptionTable, int tagRecSize);
+extern void Ttk_DeleteTagTable(Ttk_TagTable);
+
+extern Ttk_Tag Ttk_GetTag(Ttk_TagTable, const char *tagName);
+extern Ttk_Tag Ttk_GetTagFromObj(Ttk_TagTable, Tcl_Obj *);
+
+extern Tcl_Obj **Ttk_TagRecord(Ttk_Tag);
+
+extern int Ttk_GetTagListFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp, Ttk_TagTable, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+    int *nTags_rtn, void **taglist_rtn);
+
+extern void Ttk_FreeTagList(void **taglist);
+
+
+/*
+ * Useful widget base classes:
+ */
+extern Tk_OptionSpec CoreOptionSpecs[];
+
+/*
+ * String tables for widget resource specifications:
+ */
+
+extern const char *TTKOrientStrings[];
+extern const char *TTKCompoundStrings[];
+extern const char *TTKDefaultStrings[];
+
+/*
+ * ... other option types...
+ */
+extern int TtkGetLabelAnchorFromObj(Tcl_Interp*,Tcl_Obj*,Ttk_PositionSpec *);
+
+/*
+ * Package initialiation routines:
+ */
+extern void RegisterElements(Tcl_Interp *);
+
+#if defined(__WIN32__)
+#define Ttk_PlatformInit Ttk_WinPlatformInit
+extern int Ttk_WinPlatformInit(Tcl_Interp *);
+#elif defined(MAC_OSX_TK)
+#define Ttk_PlatformInit Ttk_MacPlatformInit
+extern int Ttk_MacPlatformInit(Tcl_Interp *);
+#else
+#define Ttk_PlatformInit(interp) /* TTK_X11PlatformInit() */
+#endif
+
+#endif /* WIDGET_H */